FSI - Swedish Basic Course - Student Text

Swedish
BASIC COURSE
Hosted for free on livelingua.com

SWEDISH
R)I Swedish Basic Cours e developed from a need to provide a more comprehensive
and up to date curriculum than had been afforded by an earlieI' work, Spoken Swedish.
The latter had been produced during the 1950's by william R. fun Bus kirk and Fritz
frauchiger of the FSI linguistic staff, with the assistance of members of the staff
of the Post Language Program of the American Embassy in Stockholm.
RJI Swedish Basic Cours e is intended primarily for use as the foundation for in-
tensive classroom use with a qualified instructor, but it has also been designed
so that the student who does not have the benefit of an instructor may use the
text and its accompanying tapes with profit.
This book was developed entirely at the ~reign Service Institute in Washington.
Under the general editorship of Allen I. Weinstein, the text was conceived and
executed by the Swedish instructional staff, headed by Ingrid S. Beach and including
Margareta Weyl, Margareta Feller, and Anne-Marie Carnemark. Illustrations were
conceived and drawn by Peter Weyl. Layout for the text and the cover design were
executed by John McClelland of the FSI Audio- Visual Staff. The tape recordings
accompanying this text were voiced by Peter Ling- Vannerus, Niklas Lund, Claes
Rhl, Ingrid Beach, Anne-Marie Carnemark, and Margareta Weyl, and were made at the
FSI studios under the direction of recording engine er Jose Ramirez.
The authors wish to express their gratitude to the Foreign Service Institute students
who used the field-test editions of the book in Washington and who contributed many
helpful ideas and criticisms. A special debt of gratitude is due Marianne L. Adams
who, as FSI Publications Officer, provided the initial stimulus for the creation
of this book and whose encouragement along the way was of great importance.
iii
Preface

SWEDISH iv
To the Student
WeLcome to the worLd of Sweden, Swedes, and Swedish!
You have obtained this book as a way to help you learn the Swedish language, and to
help you prepare for Life and work in Sweden. We hop e that both these experienaes
will be enjoyable for you, but before you begin we would Like you to know some
facts about language study in general, and this book in particular.
The new FSI Swedish Basic Course has been written especially for the future U.S.
diplomat in Sweden. It is meant to serve as a textbook as well as a source of cul-
tural information and it is accompanied by a complete set of tapes.
We all know that the ability to speak a foreign Language and to live in a new cul-
ture is not learned through books and tapes alone. These are only aids in a learn-
ing process which begins in the classroom, where the instructor is the primary source
of information and your main conversation partner, and which later expands to the
whole country of Sweden, where a nation becomes your teacher. However, the book
has taken into account the student who may not have a teacher available. It was
designed in such away that, together with extensive use of the tapes, it may be
used profitably by the self-study student. A self-study course, however, cannot
prov ide sufficient opportunities to practice speaking and understanding Swedish.
The primary goal of language learning is to communicate with the native speakers
in a natural and productive way. A secondary goal is to learn to read and trans late
Swedish, since this is an important skill you will need in your work.
The first twelve ~its consist of dialogs which cover a range of situations relevant
to your Life and work in Sweden. The las t few Uni ts are lJJri tten in a narrative form
and constitute a transition to further reading.
Each ~it includes "Notes on Basic Sentences," which clarify certain grammar points,
cultural ~nformation and idiomatic expressions that we think are particularly im-
portant.
fullowing "Notes on Basic Sentences" is a section called "Points to Practice."
This section deals lJith the grammar, which is first explained as clearLy and
To the Student

SWEDISH
simply as possible~ and then put to use in Practices. Here you can cover up the
correct responses with a piece of heavy paper or cardboard and then slide the paper
down the page to confirm the correctness of your response or correct any error
you may have made. Be sure you do the Practices aloud.
Grammatical explanation should be thought of only as a tool when learning a foreign

language. But it is the key to understanding a structure and a system which might
otherwise seem confusing. Even though Swedish grammar and vocabulary are related
to their English counterparts, a word-by-word translation from either language
into the other does not neoessarily produoe good sense. Beoause of important dif-
ferenoes in ways We have of expressing the same thoughts~ speakers of English and
Swedish see each other as using different patterns of language. It is therefore
invaluable to learn Swedish patterns to the point where the y become a real part
of your speech, so that the difference between English and Swedish becomes natural
to you.
Over many years of teaching Swedish to English speaking students the teachers at
~I have noted oonsistent patterns of difficulty that an English speaker has in
learning Swedish. We have tried to draw on this experienee in explaining the
grammar and in painting out the pitfalls. Our happy Vikings are used to draw
attention to same of the grammar points~ and to make the task of learning Swedish
grammar a little less serious. A dragon appears in places where we discUSB something
that may be unusually tricky.
How to Vse the Tapes

The tapes provide the oorrect pronunoiation of the dialogs, narrative texts and
grammar practices. On the tapes each Unit begins with the diatog "For Listening
Only" to give you the chance to understand as muoh aB possible unaided. Remember
that it is just as important to understand what is being said as to produce your
own sentences. Following" For Listening Only" there is a section called" For
Learning." It contains the same dialog~ but this time each new word is given with
apause, during which you are to repeat the word before the correct pronunoiation
is confirmed. The same pattern is then used for longer utteranees. Try to mimic
the native speakers as elosely as possible, paying elose attention to stress and
intonation. When an utterance is very long it will, be divided inta two or more
sentences~ and then given in its entirety.
To the Student v

SWEDISH vi
The grammar practices have also been taped, in order for you to hear the pronuncia-
tion of the correct response given in the practices. We advise that you keep your
book open when doing the grammar practices with the tape, since you will always
have to read the instructions for each individual practice in order to know
which cue words you are supposed to use. However, you wiLL find that some prac-
tices can be done oraLly using on ly the tape. In those instances, try to reLy on
what you hear on the tape and don't Look at the book.
Studying a Swedish textbook and Listening to the accompanying tapes does not guaran-
tee mastery of the Swedish Language. We hop e that this book wiLL serve as one of
many aids iu your endeavor and that you wiLL find numerous opportunities to prac-
tic e your Swedish. The best way of doing that is to c10se your book and put your
vocabulary and grammar to use in real situations. This is when you have to trans-
fer your book-learning into something productive and meaningful. When you speak,
understand and read outside the cLassroom environment you have truLy Learned to
communicate in your new language.
Good luck in your Swedish enterprisel
To the Student

SWEDISH
Till Lraren
Fljande r ett frslag tl I I hur Swedish Baslc Course kan anvndas svenskundervisningen:
Utta I
Ett utfrligt kapItel med medfljande band inleder boken. Lraren br naturligtvis g
igenom alla vIktiga punkter och hjlpa eleverna att f ett bra uttal frn brjan.
Dialog
a. Genomgng aV ny lxa.
Lraren I ser de nya orden och I ter e I everna upprepa dem I korus. Sedan I ser lraren
en mening i taget och lter varje elev upprepa den. Hr har lraren ett bra t l l l -
Uille att rtta och frklara uttalet. Det r vsentligt att vara mycket noggrann
med uttalet i brjan s att eleverna inte grundlgger dliga vanor. Vi berknar att
tv eller tre sidor per dag r lagom fr hemarbete. I brjan kan det vara frdel-
aktigt tr eleverna att lra sig dIalogen utantill s att de automatiskt tIllgodogr
sig rytmen, ordfljden och sprkmnstret.
b. Frhr av lxa.
Nsta dag kan man brja med att lta eleverna g Igenom dialogen med den svenska
texten vertckt och med den engelska texten som minnesstd. Man kan sedan lta
eleverna erstta en del ord i dialogen med andra ord som de lrt sig tidigare och
va olika former samtidigt som det grammatiska mnstret bIbehlls. Till sist slr
eleverna Igen bckerna och anvnder dialogen i rollspel. Spontant rollspel passar
i nte fr a I I a e lever. Det kan tr en de I vara svrare att h i tta p ngot att sga
n att anvnda det nya sprket korrekt. I sdana ta II r det I mp 11 gt att anvnda
s.k. "directed dialog," d.v.s. lraren talar om tr eleven p svenska (eller mj-
I igtvis p engelska) i indirekt form vad han/hon ska sga. Lraren kan ocks sjlv
stlla frgor tl II eleverna med anvndande av ordfrrdet j texten.
Till Lr<;lren vii

SWEDISH viii
Grammatik
Lraren gr igenom de grammatiska punkter som tas upp I varje kapitel och eleverna arbetar
sjlvstndigt hemma p vningarna med banden t i l l hjlp. Grammatikavsnitten innehller
ett stort antal vningar i frhoppningen att eleven kan lra sig sprkstrukturen genom
att va den och hra den s mycket som mj \ i gt. Fr att vara sker p att vn ingarna
verkligen grs br lraren d och d, utan varning, g igenom dem i klassen.
Efter kapitel 12 har vi frngtt formatet med enbart dialog. Kapitel 13-16 utgr en
vergng ti I I tidningslsning. Svrighetsgraden stegras avsevrt 1 dessa stycken.
Texterna kan med frdel anvndas tl I I lsning, versttning och diskussion. Diskussionen
kan t i l l exempel rra sig om olika seder och bruk, olika sikter, politiska frhllanden,
etc. Den kan ocks gras I ivl igare om lraren eller ngon av eleverna intar en impopulr
stndpunkt. Med hjlp av banden kan eleverna ocks va upp frmgan att lyssna och frst.
Kapitel 6 r avsett som ett prov p vad eleven lrt sig i kapitel 1-5. Vi rekommenderar
a t t e I e ven d e I a r u p p k a p i t e I 6 i mi n s t t v s e k t i o n e r f r a t t n b s t a m j I i g a r e s u I t a t .
Det r lmpligt att d och d under kursen g ti Ilbaka och repetera och att inte ta
fr givet att eleverna har tillgodogjort sig allt som tidigare frekommit i boken eller
diskuterats i klassen.
Detta r endast vrt frslag ti I I hur Swedish Basic Course kan anvndas. Vr frhopp-
ning r att boken kan inspirera och uppmuntra lraren att anvnda sin egen fantasi p
ett stt som bst passar de individuella eleverna i hans/hennes klass, och ven klassens
storlek. Lt fantasi och kreativitet komma ti II nytta. Tnk p mj I igheten att anvnda
"propsll och att stimulera undervisningen genom att freta ngot fysiskt aktivt. ut-
flykter, restaurangbesk, simulerad guidning p svenska, etc., kan erbjuda bra tillfllen
att anvnda svenskan I real istiska situationer.
Lt boken vara en hjlp I undervisningen och lt den inte diktera hur undervisningen
ska g ti I I. Mlet r att lra engelsksprkIga elever att frst och uttrycka sig p
svenska och den metod som nr det resu I tatet r den rtta metoden. Lycka t i II !
T II I LMraren

SWEDISH
TabLe of Contents
Page
Preface iii
To the Student iv
To the Teaehel' vii
Explanation of Cpammatical Terms xiv
A Guide to Endings and Symbols xxiv
A Guide to Swedish Pronunciation l
Unit 1 - Cetting Around 30

Numbers 38
Nates on Basic Sentences 39
Points to Practice 41
Point I - En-Ett 42
Point II - Present Tense 46
Point III - Word Order 47
Point IV - AuxiLiaries (heLping verbs) 53
Unit 2 - Meeting People 56

Nates on Basia Sentences 64
Point I - The Definite Artiale (singular) 69
Point II - Personal Pronouns 76
Point III - Telling Time 80
Unit 3 - Family and Ocaupation 84

Point I - Indefinite Plural Endings 98
Point II - The Relative Pronoun Som 109
Point III - Placement of Adverbs 112
rable of Contents ix

SWEDISH x
Page
~it 4 - Seeing the Sights 116

Notes on Basic Sentences 122
Point I - Adjectives in the Indefinite Form (noun-adjective agreement) 124
Point II - Demonstrative Expressions 128
Point III - Personal Pronouns Den, Det, De 131
Uni t 5 - A Place to Live 138

Point I - Possessives Preceding a Noun 148
Point II - Verbs of the First Conjugation 157
Point III - Word Order 166
Uni t 6 - True and False 171
Uni t 7 - A t the Office 179

Point I - Definite Form Plural 186
Point II - Definite Form of the Noun with AdjectiveB 189
Point III - Det r det 196
Point IV- Ligga-Lgga, Sitta-Stta, etc. 200
Point V - Ordinal Numbers 203
Unit 8 - Shopping for clothes 205

Point I - Interrogative Pronoun Vi Iken (Vi Iket, Vi Ikal 216
Point II - Indefinite Pronouns and Ajdectives 219
Point III - Adverbs of Place Indicating Rest and Motion 233
Point I V - Verbs of the Second Conjugation 241
Point V - Verbs of the Third Conjugation 250
Table of Contents

SWEDISH
Page
unit 9 - Eating in a Restaurant 254

Point I - Comparison of Adjectives 26S
Point II - Formation and Comparison of Adverbs 279
Point III - Adjectives Before Nouns 287
unit 10 - Getting Ready for an Evening Out 297

Points to Practice 30S
Point I - RefZ exive VeY'bs 306
Point II - AuxiZiary (HeZpingJ Verbs 311
Point III - Imperative Form 318
Point IV - D-Sedan, both meaning "then" 322
Point T! - Fre-I nnan, both meaning "before" 324
Unit 11 - Nations, Languages, and NationaZities 327

Point I - The Swedish Pronoun Man 339
Point II - Time Adverbials 341
Point III - Nations, Nationalities, Languages 355
unit 12 - Social Gatherings 361

Part I - An Informal Invitation to Lunch 361
Part II - An Invitation to a Dinner 365
Part III - A Formal Dinner Party 368
Point I - Prepositions of Place 384
Point II - Placement of the Roaming Adverb 396
Point III - Practice on Idiomatic and ~eful Expressions 406
xi
Table of Contents

SWEDISH xii
Page
Vnit 13 - r Vg ti II Landet 410

Glossary 413
Point I - The Fourth Conjugation (Irregular Verbs) 420
List of Irregular Verbs 421
Point 11 - Tycka, Tnka, Tro 441
Point III - Dr-Dit as Relative Adverbs 444
Unit 14 - P n 446
G lossary 449
Point I - Past Participles 455
Point II - Passive Voice 462
Point III - Present Participle 469
Vnit 15 (introduction) 470

Vnit 15 - Helger och Traditioner 471
Midsommar 471
Julen 472
Fastan 474
Psken 475
Valborgsmssoafton 475
Frsta Maj 476
Glossary 477
Point I - Compound Nouns 484
Point II - Compound Verbs 486
Vnit 16 (introduotion) 493

Vnit 16 - Glimtar frn Sverige av Idag 495
Geografi 495
GloBsary 496
Table of Contents

SWEDISH
Page
Unit 16 (oont.)
Nringsliv och Ekonomi 498
GlossaY'Y 499
Statsskick och Politik 503
GlossaY'Y 504
Neutral itet och Frsvar 506
GloBsaY'Y 507
Socialpolitik 509
Glossary 509
Rel igion 511
GloBsary 511
Skolor och Utbildning 513
Glossary 513
Massmedia 515
G lossaY'y 515
Notes on Basio Sentenoes 517
WOY'd Lis t 523
GrammaY' Index 662
BibliogY'aphy 675
Table of Content8 xiii

SWEDISH xiv
A Brief Explanation of English Grammatical Terms Vsed in this Book
Accent as in "accent 1 and 2,: is equivalent to stress or Zoudness.
Active V07:ce See"Voice. "
Adjective a word used to describe or qualify a noun.
Example~: A good cup of coffee.

Roses are r'ed.
Most adjectives can have thr'ee fOr'ms: positive. camparative,
and supel'lative (tall, taller, tallestJ.
Adverb a word used to qunlifY:

a ver'b - Peter spoke so[tly.
an adjective - She is very pr'etty.
another adverb - Tom speaks unusuaZZy slowly.
A:roticle a wOr'd used with a noun to modify or limit ita meaning.
Indefinite article - a dog, an apple

Defini te artic le - the boy, the boy s
Auxiliary verb ver'b used with another' ver'b of ten to fo:rom compound tenses.
Examples: He will come tomor'row.

I have seen that fil~.
G:roammaticaZ Terms

SWEDISH
Cardinal number the basic, or "counting" form of a number - one J two J three,
etc.
Clau8e a group of words containing at least a verb
Example: The baby cried.

ctauses may be main (independent) OY' subordinate (dependent).
A main clause is able to stand alone and constitutes a full

sentence.
Example: Peter was reading the paper.
A subordinate clause acts like a modifier (adjective or adverb),
and is linked to a main clause by a subordinating conjunction.
Example: Peter was reading the paper when the door bell rang.
Comparative See "Adjective."
compound made up of two or more elements.

Compound nouns - a lexical noun phrase (i.e. a noun phrase
which is considered one uni t of meaning).
Examples: aoat hanger J blaakboard, airplane
Compound verbs - a lexical verb phrase (i.e. a verb phrase
whiah is aonsidered one unit of meaning).
Examples: giv e up, find out, give in
Compound tenses - a combination of an auxiliary and a main verb.
See "auxiliary verb."
Grammatical Terms xv

SWEDISH xvi
Conditional clause a cLause expl'essing a condition, usually introduced by "if,"

"i n t h e e v e n t of," II U n Ze s s . "
Examples: If I see him,I'll tell him that you called.
ln the event (that) we must cancel our plans,I'lL
let you know.
UnZes~ it rains,we'Zl go swimming this afternoon.
Conjugation a group of verbs which follow the same inflectional pattern.
Conjunc tio n. an uninflected word used to Zink together words or sentence

parts, such as ~~4, while, becaus~, since, etc.
DecLension a group of nouns with the same plural ending.
Definite articZe See "Article."
Definite (orm form of a Swedish noun or adjective used when the definite
article is prsent.
Demonstrative words such as this, that, the se, those to point out or indicate
specific persons-Gr things.
Determinative adjective or a pronominal word referring to a following phrase.

pronoun
Examples: The Ithose)students who had taken the course during
the summer were excused.
Those who waited patiently in line finally got to
see-the famous movie star.
GrammaticaZ Terms

SWEDISH
Gerund
- -- an English verb with an -ing ending and with the function of
11 noun.
Examples: Swimming is my favorite sport.

I'm tired of running.
Idiomatic e~ression a group of words which has a special connotation not usually
equal to the meanings of the individual words J and which usually
cannot be translated into another language without the special
meaning being lost.
Examples: This is not my cup of tea.
That's the way the cookie crumbles.
Imperative a sentence or a verb form which commands. requires or forbids

an action to be carrie d out.
Examples: Stand up!

Don't cry!
Indefinite adjective a determiner in a noun phrase expressing generality, such as

some J an!!J every. etc.
rnd~finite article See "Article."
rndefinite form form of a Swedish noun or adjective used either when the in-
definite article is present or when no article is present.
Indefinite pronoun a pronoun which does not refer to a definite person or thing,
e.g. aEyQodYJa~t~i~~. som~pody. ~othin~J etc.
~rammatical Terms xvii

SWEDISH xviii
In[initive a verb form not limited by person, number, or tense; the

[orm given in the vocabulary lists. It may stand alone
(] must fIS!.-) 01' it may be preceded by "to" (I want to go).
Interrogative word a word used at the beginning of a clause or sentenee to mark

it as a question.
Intransitive verb a verb which cannot be [ollowed by an object.
Example: The baby slept.
ef. transitive verb.
Irregular noun exhibits certain [orms which do not coincide with a particular
adjective pattern considered to be the norm foY' that particular noun
verb (adjective, verb, adverb).
Iid1ifirb
Examples: child -children
good, better, best
run, ran, run
much, more, most
Non-count noun a noun which does not usually form a plural, aB opposed to
nouns which can be counted, e.g. Bugar, sand, ooffee.
Noun wOl'd denoting or naming a person, thing or concept.
Noun phl'ase a word 01' group of words with a noun or pronoun as its head
and [unctioning as the Bubject, object or "complement" of a
sentence.
Examples: The cat caught the mouse.
He is ~oliceman.
Grammatioal Terms

SWEDISH
Object word or phrase forming the "compLement" of a verb.
Direct object is the person or thing which is affected by

the action of the verb in a sentenee
Example: The man read the newspaper.

Indirect object is the person or thing for whom or on whose
behaZf an action is carried out.
Example: John read the newspaper to his wife.
Objective pronoun a form of a pronoun which is governed by a verb or a prepo-

sition.
ExampZes: Peter saw her.

Peter gave-us the book.
OrdinaZ number a number used as an adjective to indicate order, e.g. first,

second, third, etc.
Participle English has two participial forms: the ~sent particip le

which ends in -ing and the east participZe which ends in -ed,
or same times in -en, -n, etc. These are used in forming
complex verb phrases, such as I am workingj I have worked.
Apart from their use in forming compZex verb phrases, parti-

ciples are alsa used as adjectives.
ExampZes: A cr~ baby.

A cZosed door.
ParticZe a non-inflected word which, used with another word (usually a

verb) changes the meaning of that word, e.g. <2il in "turn it lli"
xix
roammatical Terms

SWEDISH xr
Passive voiee See "Voice."
Past tense a tense form of a verb referring to an action which took place
prior to the time of the utteranee. Cf. "perfeet tense. "
Perfect tense Present perfeet - have (has) + partieiple (I have closed the
door.)
Past perfect - had + participle (I had cZosed the door.)
ppeposition a non-inflected word used before a noun or noun phrase, which

indicates a spatial OP temporal relationship between the noun
and some other reference.
Examples: Arthur is driving into the city.

Fran wOIl't get hereuntil Tuesday.
Reflexive pronoun an object pronoun which refers back to the subject.
Example: You can see for yourself
Reflexive verb a verb used usually with a reflexive pronoun.
Example: John cut himself while shaving.

Some verbs have reflexive connotations without a reflexive
pronoun.
Example: John cut himself while shaving (i.e. himself)
Gpammatieal Tepms

SWEDISH
Relative Adverb an adverb whiah aats as a aonjunation in introduaing a sub-

ordinate alause
Example: This is the place where we met.
Relative clause a subordinate clause introduced by a relative pronoun or adverb.
Examples: This is the boy whom I was supposed to meet.

That was the time when I aot lost.
Relative pronoun a pronoun such as who, whose, whom, which, that whiah refe1'8
back to a previous word-or.-group-of words in-a-sentence.
Stem that which is left of a word when all prefixes and suffixes
have been removed.
grammaticially, that part of a sentenee which constitutes

the reference for the verb; the agent performing the action
expressed by the verb in an active sentence, or the person,
thing OF concept on which the action of a passive sentenee
is performed.
Examples: The aat caught the mouse.

The mouse was caught by the aat.
Subordinate clause See "Clause."
Superlative See "Adjective."
xxi
Grammatical Terms

SWEDISH xxii
Supine the name in Swedish for the verb form used together with forms
of att ha (to have). It corresponds in English to the past
participle form of the verb. However, the supine form is nevel'
declined and cannot be used as an adjective. Thus in Swedish
there is a distinction between the supine form and the past
particip le form. The former is only used with the forms of
the verb att ha. The latter is used and declined as an ad-
jective.
Examples: Supine Part-iciple
Jag har lnat en bli. En lnad bil.

r have borrowed a ear. Aborrowed ear.
Jag har lnat ett bord. Ett lnat bord.

I have borrowed a table. Abol'rowed table.
Jag har lnai tv bcker. Tv I <'i nade bc ker.

I have borrowed two books. Two borrowed books.
Tense grammatical category of the verb expressing the time relation-

ship between the action referred to in the sentenee and the
time of the utterance.
Transitive verb a verb which can have a direct object.
Example: The boy kicked the ball.
Cf. intransitive verb.
Verb expresses an act, occurrence, or mode of being.
Examples: The boy l~~ the room.

I am cold.
Gramrnatical Terms

SWED~H
Voice a verb construction indicating certain reZationships between

the subject and object of a verb.
The active voice occurs in a sentenee where the grammaticaZ

subject of a verb carries out some activity or process, e.g.
The cat caught the mouse.
The ~ssive voice occurs in a sentenee in which the grammaticaZ

subject of the verb is the recipient of the action, e.g.
The mouse Was caught by the cat.
Word order Straight word order places the subject before the verb in
a clause.
Reversed word order pZaces the verb before the subject in
a clause.
~rammatical Terms xxiii

SWEDISH xxiv
A Guide to Endings and Symbols Used in Basia Sentenaes and in Nates on Hasia Sentenaes
In the Hasia Sentenaes, each paragraph will be numbered and preaeded by a list of new voaa-
bulary. Same of the Swedish words will be pY'esented in theiY' diffeY'ent forms as folLows:
1. Nouns
Indefinite form, singulaY'j definite form ending, singularj indefinite form ending, plural.
Example: dag -en -ar day, the day, days
If the plural form is irregulaY' the entiY'e word form is given.

Example: natt -en , ntter night, the night, nights
The word stem to whiah the endings are added is indicated by a slash if the stem is
different from the indefinite form singular.
Example: gat/a -an -or street, the street, streets
-0 This symbol indicates that the indefinite plural form is the same as the indefinite
singulaY' :form.
Example: par -et -0 coupre, the oouple, couples
(/; The same symbol without the dash f-J indicates that the word does not occur in the
plural.
Example: mjl k -n (/; milk, the milk, ~
Guide to Endings and Symbols

SWEDISH
2. Pronouns (Possessive, Demonstrative, Indefinite Pronouns, and the Interrogative

Pronoun y i I ken)
Form referring to ~ words; form referring to ett words; form referring to plural
words.
Example: min, mitt, mina m-z-ne
~. Adj ectives
Basic form (used with en words in the singular); ending uBed with ett words in the
singular; ending used with plural words.
Example: sn I I -t -a kind
If the adjeetive is irregular the whole form will be given.
Example: I i ten, I i tet, sm small
4. comparison of Adjectives and Adverbs

Only the irregular comparative and superlative forms are indicated in addition to
the basic forms. However J these forms will not be given until Unit 9 where the J
comparison of the adjective is introduced.

Basic form (used with ~ words in the singular); ending used with ett words in the
singular); ending used with plural words; comparative form; superlative form.
Example: lng -t -a; lngre, lngst long J longer J longest
Guide to Endings and Symbols xxv

SWEDISH xxvi
5. Verbs
Verbs are always given in the in[initive [orm with the in[initive marker att (ex-
cept [or certain auxiliary verbs which are not used in the in[initive [orm).
The in[initive form with a slash to indicate the stem; present tense ending; past
tense ending; supine ending
Example: att talla -ar -ade -at to speak, speak(s), spake, (have, had) spaken
If the verb is irregular all [orms are written out.
Example: att st, str, stod, sttt to stand, stand(s), stoad, (have, had) stood
Starting with Unit 10 the first three conjugations will be indicated by numbers only.
Example: att tala, to speak

att kra, 2a to drive
att tycka, 2b to think
att tro, 3 to believe
The [ourth conjugation verbs, which are all more or less irregular, will have the
irregular [orms indicated as well as a number 4 to indicate the conjugation.
Exampl.es: att f, fr, fick, ftt, 4 to get, to receive

att hlla med om; hller, hll, hll it, 4 to agree with
6. * This asterisk is [ound in the Basic Sentences. It indicates that there is an

explanatory note on a certain item in that particular paragraph. The nate is listed
by paragraph number in the Notes on Basia Sentences section immediateZy [ollowing
each dialog.
Guide to Endings and Symbol.s

SWEDISH
A Guide to Swedish Pronunaiation
This chapter is intended especially for the student who is learning Swedish on his or
her own. The accompanying tape is an integral part of this Unit, and henae must be
used in aonjunation with the following pages.
We have avoided using phonetic symbols in the book. Instead we feel that the combi-
nation of the tape and the acaompanying brie! desariptions of how the sounds are pro-
duaed will provide an appropriate basis for Swedish pronunaiation.
We also hope that the student who studies with a teaaher will find both ahapter and tape
he2pfut.
We naturally tend to aonaentrate on those sounds that exist in Swedish and not in
English, rather than on Bounds that are common to the two languages. Spending a little
extra time in the beginning to get the Swedish sounds right is better than learning
them inaorrectly and then trying to compensate later.
l
Guide to Swedish Pronunaiation

SWEDISH 2
WELCOME TO SWEDISH
Many sounds in the Swedish language are similar to sounds used in English. A few
sounds used in Swedish do not exiat in English. We will be more oonoerned with sounds
than with spelling, although aometimes the latter has to oome in.
Let'a begin by looking at and listening to the Swedish alphabet, which has 29 letters:
A R C DE F G H I J K L M N O p Q R S T U V WX Y Z A
When we disouss Swedish sounds in this chapter we refer to the sounds in this alphabet.
Remember this order of letters, especially when you are looking up a name in the phone
book or a word in a dictionary: A are last.
Swedish Vowe ls
Let'B be gin by taking a look at and listening to the Swedish vowels. Repeat them after
the tape:
A O U A E y
Learn them in thes8 group8: A O U A E Y
A O U A are oalled hard vowels, E y soft vowels.
These vowels oan be pronounaed long or short. For example~ listen to the different
lengths of the vowel 80und in these Swedish word pairs:
Guide to Swediah Pronunciation

SWEDISH
Long vowels Sho1't vowela

dag (day) dagg (dew)
vilg (road) v8gg (wall)
v i I a (to pest) v I Il a (house)
f r (fo1') frr (before)
Can you hea1' the difference in the vowel length? When Swedish vowels are long they
al'e vel'Y long. No matter how much you think you exaggerate theil' length, they can
not be too long.
There are no diphthongs in Swedish. If one vowel letter follows anothel', each one is
pronounaed aeparately. (This happens in certain English words too, e.g. c~eration,
l'eitel'ate, etc.) All vowel letters are pl'onounaed, there are no silent vowel lettel's.
Let's leal'n and pl'aatiae long-shol't vowel differenaes in Swedish words. The purpose
hel'e is to leal'n to pronounce Swedish, not to learn to spell and not to learn voaabu-
lary. The translation furnished is just fol' your information. Listen to the tape
and read the words. elose your mind to everything around you and pay elose attention
to the way the voiee on the tape pronounees the wOl'ds. Try to imitate the speaker.
If you are studying alone, have a mirror handy. We'll tell you when you need it.
"nard" Vowels A O U A
The long A in Swedish resembles the long A in (Amel'iean) English, e. g. "fathel', "
"hard," "barn," (Boston pl'onuneiation diseouraged). Just make it longer.
Long A
glas (glaBS) stad (oity)
dag (day) vad (what)
mat ( food) ta (to take)
tak (roof, eeiling) lat (lazy)
ska (will) ha r (have, ha8)
3
Guide to Swedi8h Pl'onunaiation

SWEDISH
The short Swedish A is Bomewhat similar to the vowel in the English words Ueot. u Unot. u
Listen oarefully to the pronunoiation of short Swediah A on the tape and repeat after it.
Short A
glass (ieeoream) vatten (water)

dagg (dew) kaffe (ooffee)
matt (weak) han (he)
tack (thank you) kan (can)
hade (had) hall (haLl)
Now we will give you one /Jord with a long A and one with a ahort A. Liaten to the
differenee in the vowel and imitate it.
Long A Short A
glas glass
dag dagg
mat matt
ta k tack
hal (slippery) ha I I
tal (speeeh) ta I I (pine tree)
o
The long O is elose to the English vowel in Utroop" and "tomb." Here are some /Jords
with long O. Try to make them very long.
krona (opown) 501 ( aun)

bo (to live) sto r (vig)
bok (book) fot (foot)
bror (bpothep) god (good)
ro (to pow) mot (againBt)
Guide to Swedish Pronunoiation

SWEDISH
The short Swedish O has the same qualityas the long O hut it is shorter. Listen to
the words with a short O and repeat af ter the tape.
Short O
hon (she) moster (mat. aunt)

ost (cheese) hote II (hotel)
ond ( evir) bomu I I (cotton)
fort ( fas t) bands ( farme1')
tom (empty) kort (aaI'dJ,
Now we will pI'actice a long and a ahoI't O so you can hear and learn the diffeI'ence.
Long O Sh01't O
krona hon
bok osl
bro r to rt
god tom
ro kort
u
The Swedish long U does not exist in English. Now you can get out YOUI' mirI'or and use
it while you do the following. Listen to the English word "yew." Now say it veI'Y
slowly and watch what YOUI' lips do at the end of it. Keep your lips in this position.
Now we'll make a little change. by dropping the "y" and emphasizing the "w":
u U U
Now we'll pI'actice words with a long U.
GUide to Swediah Pronunciation

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _S=-W.:..::...:E:.:D=-I:..:S:..:.H...:.- ~6
Long U
fru (wife) kul (tun)
ut (out) sur ( sour)
nu (now) mus (mouse)
hu r (how) tur (luck)
hus (house) brun (brown)
The short U sound has a different quality. This time you don't need your mirror.
Say the English wOr'd usugar'u af ter the tape.
sugar' sugar sugar
If you say it quickly the uUu will be very alose to the Swedish short U. Now listen
to this Swedish word: uggla (owlJ. Now we 'tt praatiae some other Swedish worods with
shorot U.
Short U
f ruld (fru i t) upp (up)

brunn (wel Z) I unch (lunch)
un de r (under) buss (bus)
luft (air) tunn (thin)
rum (room) mun (mouth)
Now we'll say a word with a long U and one with a short U. Look in the miroror and Bee
what your mouth does.
Lonrr U Short
- - - -U
fru fru kt
brun brunn
ut upp
nu under
hus buss
Guide to Swedish Pronunciation

SWEDISH
Long A is simila't' to the Engl'ish vOIJel sound in "fOU't'3" "SOaI'3" "moI'c J " but much lange!'.
He!'e a!'e 80me WOI'ds IJith a long A.
Long A
r (yea!') mne (moon)
st (to stand) ml ( goal)
g (to go) t rd (thI'ead)
bt (boat) tg (t!'ain)
hl (hale) vt (we t)
The shoI't A is ve't'y similaI' to the VOIJel sound in the English WOI'ds "song 3 " "long 3 "
and "wI'ongJ but shoI'teI'.
"
ShOI't A
gng (time) mtt (measUI'e)
I ng (long) mste (mus t)
sng (Bong) nga (Bteam)
h I I a (to hold) lder ( age)
mnga (many) ngra (to I'egI'et)
NOa) we'll say ona WOI'd with a long A and then one with a shOI't A. Listen and tI'Y to
heaI' the difference in length.
Long A Short A
g?! gng
r s'ng
hl h I I a
mne mnga
bH mtt
Remembe!' that the Swedish name of this lette!' is "A".
Guide to Swedish P!'onunciation 7

SWEDISH 8
The same sounds -- both the Long A and the short A sound -- are sometimes speL Led
with an "O". The Long A sound 8peLLed with an "O" is unuBuaL, but the short A sound
speLLed with an "O" is rather common.
Long A sound spe Hed with an "O"
son (80'11)
kol (eoaL)
telefon (teLephone)
mikrofon (microphane)
Short ft. 80und 8peBed with an "O"

om (if)
som (who J which)
kopp (cup)
komma (to come)
kos-J-a (to oost)
The voweZs you have just praaticed A O U A are the "hard" voweLs.
J
We wiLL now continue
with the other group of voweLs, the "soft" voweZs.
Guide to Swedish Pl'onunciation

SWEDISH
"Soft" VotJeLB E I Y
Long E is a pure DoweL. It is not the Bame aB the DoweL sound in "8ay~" "day," "gray~"
eta. Listen to the tape:
E E E E E
Now we'll praatiae the long E sound in same words. Be 8ure to make it very Long.
Long E
se (to 8ee) ben (bone~ leg)

mer (more) sen (late)
te (tea) ren (elean)
paket (paakage) b rev (letter)
heta (to be aalled) det (it~ the)
The short E sound iB almost the Bame aB the Dowel sound in the English words "rest~"
"best," "rent," n8end~n but shorter. Let's listen to and repeat this short vowel sound
in Borne Swedish words.
Short E
en (a, an) hem (home)

fem (five) men {but}
ett (a, an) hetta (heat)
vem {who} den (it, the)
mes t (mos t) Igen (again)
Now we'lL say one word with a long E and one word with a short E.
Guide to Swedish Pronunciation 9

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _S::...W..:....:.....::E:..:D::....:...:IS:..:H:.....:....- .-:..l0
Long E Short E
det den
mer men
ben en
sen hem
heta hetta
The Swedish I is similar to the vowel sound in the English words "teak," "seed, "
"Zeave," eto. Listen:
I (eeyh) (eeyh) I (eeyh)
For the Zong I be sure to make it very Zong.
Long
I (in) tiga (to be siZent)

vi n (wine) hit (here)
fln (fine) vila (to res t)
vis (wise) dit (there)
bil (car) bIt (piece)
The short Swedish I sound is similar in quality to long I, but much. much shoptep.
Listen to the short I sound in same Swedish words and repeat them.
Short
vinn (winl) hitta (to find)

finn (findt) ( gir Z)
f I Icka
viss ( oertain) min (my, mine)
tigga (to beg) din (your. yours.)
vIlla (house) timme (hour)
Guide to Swedish pponunoiation

SWEDISH
Now let'8 listen to one word with a long I and then one word with a short I.
Long Sho!'t
vin vinn
f In finn
vis viss
tiga tigga
v II a v II I a
The Swedish "Y" is always a vowel. It is most easily produced if you whisper a long
Swedish I (remember, eeyh), push out you!' lips, making a "square" mouth, and use your
voice. Look in the mirror and try it. Exaggerate all you want in the beginning.
Y y y y
Now we'lt practice the long Y in same words.

Long Y
sy (to sew) ny (new)

tyg ( fabric) yta (surface)
f Yra ( four) by (viLLage)
hy r", (to rent) flyta (to float)
byta (to change) f rysa (to freeze)
The short y sound is very similar to the long one except for being much shorter.
11

SWEDISH 12
-------------------------------------
Short Y
synd (pit y) nyss (reaently)

trygg ( secure) flytta (to move)
bytta ( jarl mycket (muah, very)
tycka (to think) syster (sister)
lyssna (to listen) lyfta (to lift)
No~ ~e'll alternate long and short Y sounds.
Long Y Short Y
sy synd
ny nyss
tyg trygg
byta bytta
flyta flytta
The long vo~el "" before "R" is similal' to the vowel sound in the English ~ords "fair,"
"bear, " "hair, " "care," etc. Be Bure io ap en your mouth ~hen you say . Always refer
to this letter as .
If the long is not followed by an "R" it Bounds like the vowel Bound in the English
~ords "well," "bet," "~et," eta. But remember to make it very long.
Listen aarefully to the ~ordB with the long and you ~ill hear how the "" foZlo~ed
by an "R" differs from other situations.
Guide to S~edish Pronunaiation

SWEDISH
Long
h r (here) vg ( T'oad)
dr (there) vl (we 7, 7,)
br (berry) lsa (to read)
j rn (iron) nsa (nose)
I ra (to teach) tvla (to compete)
You can heaT' how much broader and more open the sound is if it is followed by an liR".
Take the word jrnvg (railroad) where you have an example of both types of long .
Say it: jrn-vg, jrn-vg, jrn-vg.
The short is also bT'oad and open before an "R". It is similar to the first vowel
sound in the English words "carryJ" "marorYJ" etc. Before other consonants it sounds
just like the short Swedish E sound (ett, mest, hem). Now listen to the shorot sound
and no te the difference be tween the fo lZowed by an "R" and the fo lZowed by other
consonants.
Short
rr (scar) vgg (wa7, l)
frja (feny) kv I I (evening)
v rre (worse) v n ( friend)
mrka (to notice) bst (bes t)
rm (sleeve) n sta (next)
Now we/Il read the words with long and alternate with words with short . Try to
worok on the long that is not folZowed by an "R"J since you are not used to making this
sound long in English.
Long Short
hr rr
j rn rm
nsa nsta
vg vgg
v I kv I l

SWEDISH
The last Swedish vowel, and also the last letter in the Swedish alphabet, is "".
To pronounae this sound you oan use your mirror again. First whisper a long E. Hold
this for a long time, and then round your lips. When your lips are rounded (you're al-
most ready to kiss someone!) start using your voiae, and you will hear a niae Swedish
, like this:
As was the aase with the "" before "R", the sound is broader and more open before
an "R". It is very similar to the English sound in "fur," "purr," "buron. /I Elsewhere
it is rather tense, very muah like the name of the letter "".
Let's praotioe the long sound in some words.
Long
f r (for) st (sweet)
hra ( to hear) brd (bread)
kra (to drive) nt (nut)
stra (to disturb) ga (eye)
ra (ear) ln (salary)
The short before "R" sounds like the long before "R", only shortel'. When not folloliJ-
ed by "R" it is similar to, but shorter than its long oounterpal't.
Listen to the words with the short sound.

Short
frr (before) lnn (maple tree)

brja (to begin) ntt (worn)
drr (door) mjlk (milk)
str re (bigger) fnster (window)
mrk (dark) hst (fall, autumn)
Now we'll alternate words with long and sho~t .

SWEDISH
Long Short
fr frr
stra strre
nt ntt
ln lnn
ga hst
You may have notioed from all the words listed in the foregoing praatiaeB that vowel
letters are usually pronounoed short when followed by two aonsonant letters. and long
when followed by one aonsonant letter. One-syllable words ending in -m and -n are
of ten exceptions.
Examples: man (man)
han (he)
hon (she)
kan (can)
fem (five)
hem (home)
SOm ( that. which)
To sum up the most important things you need to know about Swedish vowels:
1. Long vowe la are very longj

2. U requires your lips in a "w" positionj
3. Y -- start whispering a long I and make a "square" mouth. and only then use your
voicej
4. -- start whispering a long E, round your lips and only then use your voiae.
15

__________________________________________---::.6
SWEDISH 1
Swedish Consonants
Swedish eonsonants are fairly similar to English ones with a few exaeptions. whieh ~e
will deal with in this seetion.
In Swedish. a eonsonant following a long vowel tends to be short. a aonsonant follo~
ing a short vowel tends to be long. Listen to these examples: In English ~e say
"mama" -- the Swedes say mamma; we say "papa" -- the S~edes say pappa; mamma,
pappa. The distinetion between short and long consonants is usually shown in the
writing system by the doubling of the aonsonant letter. However. you only hear this
distinetion when the eonsonant oeeurs between two vowels like in the following examples:
Short eonsonants Long eonsonants
vgen (the road) v1iggen (the wall)

fIna (fine; deel. form) fInna (to find)
dagen (the day) daggen (the dew)
mata (to feed) matta (rug)
I j I a (purple) \I \I a (little; dea l. form)
The most important thing. however. is to make the long vowels long. otherwise there
aan easily be misunderstandings. Remember: a long vowel aan never be too long.
"J" is the Swedish symbol for a sound similar to "y" at the beginning of an English
word. as in "yes." "yard." It never aorresponds in its pronuneiation to the English
letter "j". It is the aonsonant letter that sometimes gives away the orig in of a
Swede speaking English when he or she says: "Yump for yoy."
Let's listen to some Swedish words with J. Praetiae espeeially the words where J
eomes after another aonsonant.

SWEDtSH
Ja (yes J frja (fe r>r>y J

j uI(Chr>is tmas) brja (to begin)
just (just) nej (no)
jobb (job) s Jj a (to s e ll)
John (John) mjlk (milk)
In some lJor>ds "boror>owed" fI'om Fr>ench "JII is pr>onounced like English SH. Listen:
JournalIst ( j our>na lis t)
jargong (jar>gon)
Jourhavande (on duty)
The letter> "JtI is sometimeB proeaeded by anothero aonsonant in the writing system. In
suah aases the other> letter is always "si7ent."
Examples: GJ gjorde (did)
DJ djur (animal)
HJ hjlp (help)
LJ I j us (light)
The J sound is alBo sometimes spelled with a tiG".
Examples: ge (to give)
grna (gladly)
frg (aolor
berg (mountain)
Tt'e'll discuss this in more detail later> under> "GII.
Guide to SlJedish Pr>onunoiation 17

__________________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-=18
SWEDISH
Listen carefully to the pronunciation of the English word "little." Swedish L is

more like the first "l" than the seaond "l." The seaond "l" sounds very foreign to
Swedes.
Now we'll praetiee the L in some Swedish words:
v l (weZZ) bl I (automohi le)
mjlk (miZk) kalender (ealendar)
lunch (luneh) klar (eLear)
telefon (telephone) hall (hall)
tills (until) klocka (elock)
-NG-
This sound is similal' to English. i.e. "ring." "song." "long." etc . hut no g-sound
is heard at the end. as some English speakers have. This is true in Swedish even
if the -NG is foLlowed by a vowel.
This is the way it sounds in Swedish:
I ng (long) ung (young)

lnga (long; deel. form) unga (young; deel. form)
sng (s ong) r i ng (ring)
sngen (the Bong) ringa (to telephone)
As you notiee there is onLy the -NG sound. Let'a say those words again. No addi-
tional g-sound should be heard.
If you have diffiaulty with this. an eaBy way to eliminate the g-sound is to say the
two syllables separate ly. then s-l-o-w-l-y bring them together, sng -en, sngen.

SWEDISH
Note: The sound -NG is frequently followed by an "N" at the end of a word. This com-
bination is speLLed "-GN".
Examples: lugn (caLm) ugn (oven)

lugna (to calm) ugnen (the oven)
regn (rain) vagn (wagon)
regnet (the rain) vagnen (the wagon)
"GN" and "KN"

If "GN" stands at the beginning of a word both sounds are pronounced as in gnista
(spark), gnida (to rub). The same is true for "KN" in Swedish. The Swedes say
knapp (button), knyta (to tie).
Listen and repeat the Swedish words:
GN KN
gnIsta (spark) knyta Uo tie)
gnIda (to rub) knppa (to button)
gnata (to nag) knappast (hardLy)
gnola (to hum) knut (knot)
gngga (to neigh) kn a c ka (to knock)
The Swedish "R" is sZightZy triZZed. If you can make a Spanish "R", use that but trilL
it less:
r um (room) brd (bread)
bror (brothep) har (have, has)
morgon (morning) krona (crown)
19

SWEDISH 20
In Bome combinatiohB of liR" + another conBonant the two sounds a!l'e "pulled together."
7'he reBult is very simil'ar to what happens in English words like "bar - barn."
"bore - bored. "
Let's praatiae some of these aombinations in Swedish worda:
..,RN J rn (iron)
barn (child)
torn (towe 1')
-RO bo rd (table)
grd (farm)
v rd (aare)
-RT frort (auburb)

svart (black)
fiport (aports)

SWEDISH
RSH
The -RSH sound is produaed lJJhen the letter "S" foZlolJJS an "R", as in the lJJords
orsak (reason), kors (crosu) and Lars. You make the -RSH sound in normal speech
also if one lJJord ends in "RII and the next word starts with "S." Listen to theae
three words: Va e.-..? a tt du? {Where did you ait?J. This is how you will hear it
when a Swede speaks normal ly: Va~(h)att du? If you pronounce the three words
carefully without the SH sound (varI satt/ du?) you will, of course, be under-
stood, but it won't sound like natural Swedish. Let's try some examples:
mors (mother's) vrst (wors t)
orsak f rs k (fresh)
kors norsk (Norwegian)
Lars frsk ( attempt)
SH
The Swedish SH sound is very similar to the English SH sound in "shoe." "sheep."
"shout," ete. There is another variation of the SH sound in Swedish which you
do not need to learn now. but whieh you should be prepared to recognize. The
spelling of the SH sound may vary. but don't let the spelling influenee your
pronuneiation. Here is a list of words eontaining the SH sound. all with dif-
ferent spelling. On the tape you'll hear both versions of the SH sound.
"SJ" sjuk (sick)

" SK" skIda ( skiJ
"SKJ" skjorta ( shirt)
"STJ" stjrna (star)
"SCH" schism ( sehism)
"-slon" vision (vision)
"-tian" station (station) }
"CH" champagne (champagne)
"J" journalist ( journalist) words borrowed from Freneh
"G" geners ( generous)
Nate that "CH" in the word och (and) is pronounced K.

SWEDISH 22
----------------------------------------------:
II Gli "K" IISKlI
We ~ill no~ explain the ~eason fo~ lea~ning the vowels in two g~oups~ the ha~d vowels
A O U A and the soft vo~el8 E I Y . Say them onae mo~e in groups. If you don't
remember them learn them now.
A O U A E I Y
The two consonant lette~s "G" and "K" and the combination "SKlI a~e pl'onounaed
differentZy~ depending on whether the y pl'ecede a hal'd voweZ or a soft vowel.
Befo~e the hard vowels A O U A, "G", "K", and "SK" a~e pl'onounaed as they sound
in the alphabet. Listen to these Swedish wOr'ds:
gata (st~ee t) kan (can) ska (shall)
god ( good) kopp (cup) s ko (shoe)
gul (yeZZow) kultur (cul ture) s ku I I e ( s~ould)
g (to waHl k r (co~ps ) s k I (c Gers)
Let's say them again~ just to practiae the Swedish vo~els as well. Make you~ long
vowels very l-o-n-g.
In fr'ont of the soft vo~els E I Y , "Gli, "K". and "SKlI beaome "soft":
"Gli is pronounced like a Swedish "J" (as the "Y" in English "yes~" "yea~~" eta.).
Listen to these examples:
ge (to give)
gli la (to like)
gymnastik ( gymnas ti cs)
grna (gladly)
gra (to do)
IIG" is also pl'onounced like a Swedish "J" af ter' IIl" and "R II in the same syZZable.
Look at the following wOr'ds~ listen and imitate;
Guide to Swedish P~onunaiation

SWEDISH
lg (moose) berg (mountain)

helg (holiday) frg (eolor)
svalg (pharynx) torg (square)
arg (angry)
"K" is pronounced like a "light" "CH," a sound similar to the sound in English "bipch."
"inch, "etc. Listen to the exampLes:
kedj a (ehain)
kines (Chinese)
kyss (kiss)
krlek (love)
kra (to drive)
The CH sound is also spelled "TJ" and "KJlI in some !Jords, for example:
"TJ" tjugo (twenty)

tjuv (thief)
t j ata (to nag)
t jack (thick)
tjnstgra (to serve)
"KJ" kjol ( skirt)
"SK" befare a soft vowel is pronounced like a SH sound in English (shoe, shine, etc.).
Listen to these examples:
sked ( spoon)
skina (to shine)
skydda (to protect)
sk ra (to eut)
skn (eomfor'tabLe)
Note: There are other spellings of the SH sound whieh we discussed undep the SH sound.
23
Guide to Swedish Pl'onzmciation

____________________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _---=24
SWEDISH
Now let's put "G," "K," and "SK" alternately in front of a hard and a soft vowel. Look
at the words and repeat after the tape.
Helare hard vowe"l Belore 80ft vowel
"G" gata ge
god gli la
gul gymnastik
g grna
gra
II Kli kan kedja
kopp kines
kultur kyss
k r krlek
kra
ilSK" ska sked

s ko skina
sku I I e skydda
5k~1 sk ra
skn
The following oonsonant letters ooour only infrequently in Swedish:

"C" is mostly found in the oombination lICKlI . A"lone it is usually found in foreign
words, in which case it is pronounced like "K" in front of hard vowe"ls. Befolle soft
vowe"ls it is pronounced like "S." Examples:
K cancer ( cancer)
campa (to camp)
cape (cape)
S ce I I ( oell)
citron (lemon)
cy ke I (bicyc"leJ
Guide to Swedish Pronunoiation

SWEDISH
"Q" is found mostly in proper names. Examples: Holmquist, Almquist. "KV" has been
replacing "QU" in modern Swedish, fal' example: Akvavit (aquavit).
"W" is pronounced like a "V" in Swedish. You will only find it in names. Examples:
WTlma, Wlnblad.
"I" is pronounced like "S". You will find it ont y in a very few words of foreign
derivation. Examples: zigenare (gypsy)
zon (zone)
zenit (zenith)
zebra (zebra)
Note: There is no Z sound in Swedish!
Summary of the Pronunciation of Swedish Consonants
1. Consonant sounds tend to be l-o-n-g aftel' short vowels.

2. "J" is pronounced like English "Y" before vowels.
3. "L" is always like the first "l" in the English word "little."
':1. "-NG-" No G is hea!'d befo!'e vowe ls.
5. "GN-" 80th the "G" and the liN" are pronounced at the beginning of a wO!'d.
6. "KN-" 80th the "K" and the "N"are pronounced in this combination at the beginning
of a word.
7. "R" is slightly t!'illed.
8. "RS" is pronounced like -RSH
9. SH - This sound sound is very simi la!' to the English SH sound.
10. "G,K,SK" before soft vowels a!'e p!'onounced like J, CH, and SH.
11. "W" is pronounaed like "V."
12. II Z" is always p!'onounced S; there is no Z sound in Swedish.
25
Guide to Swedish Pl'onunoiation

SWEDISH
-------------------------------------------------26
When individual wo~ds a~e p~onounced in isolation, the sepa~ate sounds tend to stand
out clea~ly. When one talks in ph~ases o~ sentences, howeve~, many of these sounds
be come less distinct, and some of them may change or disappear. You will hear this
on the tapes of the dialogs. Of course this is the way you should learn to Break
Swedish, not word by word. This is one reason it is important for you to memorize
the dialogs.
Some very common wo~ds are pronounoed differently f~om the way they are spelled.
Refer to this list as you Zearn Units 1-4 to make sure you are pronouncing these
words right.
Write Say Write Say
jag JA (I) ngon NJl.N (someone)

det DE (it) ngonting NJl.NTING (something)
dag DA (day) sedan SEN (then)
.... ad 'I" (what) sga SJA (to say)
och A ( and) mig MEJ (me)
de DOM (they) dig DEJ (you)
dem DOM (them) sig SEJ (himself, e te.)
r E (am, are, is) sdan SAN (sueh)
med ME (with) staden STAN (the city)
morgon MORRON (morning)
Guide to Swedish Pronuneiation

SWEDISH
Americans listening to Swedes talking sometimes say the Swedes Using. u They hear the
Swedish intonation which is different from English. They also hear Swedish accent
which is equaZZy different from EngZish. Let/s Zearn about that now.
Swedish has two accents, usuaZZy referred to as Accent 1 and Accent 2.
Accent 1. Words with Aocent 1 have the stress on the first syZZable. This is alBo
most common in EngZish two-syZZabZe words. ExampZes: coming, harness., mother,
fracture, neighbor.
Accent 2 is very aharacteristic of Swedish; it occurs mostly in words of two or
more syZlabZes. In Accent 2 words the second syZZable is almost as loud as the
'first. In EngZish this occurs onZy in phrases where, for exampZe, an ordinary
adjective comes before an ordinary noun. Compare the foZlowing English items as
you say them:
First syllable accent Second syllable accent
bZackboard bZack board

bZueberry bZue berry
White House white house
Zoudspeaker loud speaker
Notice that you pronounce the second syZlabZe in the right-aoZumn items Zouder and
cZearer than the same syZZabZe in the Zeft-column items. Now, imagine that the
foZZowing Swedish words are pro'nounced as though they had two part.9, the second
aZmost as Zoud as the first:

SWEDISH
-------------------------------------------------28
hus-tru
lng-samt
n -go n
smr-gs
These wovds ave wvitten as hustru, lngsamt, ngon, and smrgs, hut pvonounced
(using Accent 2) with the second syllable almost as loud as the fivst. Tvy saying
them one move time to make suve hoth syllahles ave coming out cleavly and loud.
then pvactice the following list of Accent 2 wovds:
gata (stveet) komma (to come)

f I i cka (givl) frga (to ask)
b ta r (boats) svens ka (Swedish)
pojkar (boys) smrgs (sandwich)
krona (cvown) kosta r (eost/s)
kyrka (chuvch) lngsamt (slowly)
ngon ( Bomeone) Ingen (no O-ne)
dotter (daughtev) hustru (wife)
papper (papev) va r J e (evevy)
Let's say them again. Tvy to get the typical Swedish stvess.
We will now giv e you some Accent 2 wovds and contvast them with Accent 1 words.
Listen cavefully to the tape and imitate.
Accent 2 Accent 1
komma (to come) kommer (come/s)

ringar (vings) ringer (ring/s)
svenska (Swedish) enkel (sinple)
smrgs (sandwich) gsen (the goose)
kostar (eost/s) typisk (typical)
lngsamt (slowly) lngre (longev)
ingen (no one) finger (fingev)
poJ ken (the boy) boken (the book)
va r J e (evevy) vargen (the wo lf)
klockan (the clock) rocken (the coat)

SWEDISH
When you listen to the tapes, t~y f~om the beginning co pick up Accent 1 and Accent 2,
as ~ell as the typiaal S~ediBh intonation. As a ~esult the dialogs that you memorize
~ill sound much more S~edish.
, I I
"'/CJ:\"
-..~-
" l \ ...
Guide to S~edish Pronunciation 29

SWEDISH
____________________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-::30
UNIT 1
GETTING AROUND
Basic Sentences
Useful Words and Phrases
good god, gott, goda

day dag -en -ar
1. Hello (how do you do?). Goddag.
Hi. Hej. *
morning morgon -en, mor(g)nar

2. Good morning. God morgon.
night natt -en, ntter

3. Good nigh t. God natt.
4. Good-bye. Adj.
Mr'. Herr
gentleman herr/e -en -ar
5. Mr. Berg. Herr Berg.
Mrs., wife fru -n -ar

6. Mrs. Stromback. Fru Strmbck.
Unit 1

SWEDISH
Miss (also to waitreBs or frken, frken, frknar

salesgirl)
'l. Miss Hansson. Frken Hansson.
how hur
to stand att st - r, stod, sttt
stand(s) st r
it det
to t i I I
8. How are you? Hur str det tl II? It
thank you tac k

fine> well b ra
to fee l att m -r, mdde, mtt
feel(s) m r
you (sing.) du
self sj I v
Tack, bra. Hur mr du sjlv? It
9. Thanks, fine. How are you?
to speak att talla -ar -ade -at

speak(s) talar
Swedish (the language) svenska -n 0
10. Do you speak Swedish? Talar du svenska?
yes ja
li ttle I i te
bit g ra n n
11. Yes, a little bit. Ja, I ite grann.
31
Unit 1

SWEDISH 32
no n ej
not inte
at all aI Is
12. No, not at alL Nej, inte alls.
to understand att frst -r, frstod, frsttt

understand(s) frstr
me mig
13. Do you understand me? Frstr du mig?
I jag
you (obj. form) dig
14. No, I don't understand you. Nej, jag frstr dig inte.
to be aTt vara, r, var, varit

be (imperative) va r
kind, good snll -t -a
please var snll
and och
speak (imperative) tala
slowly lngsamt
15. Please speak slowly. Va r sn I I och ta I a lngsamt.
noW nu
16. Thanks, I understand now. Tack, jag frstr nu.
17. Excuse (me). Urskta.
Unit 1

SWEDISH
whe1'e va r
to be found, exist att finnas, finns, fanns, funnits
is {found} f i nns
the1'e is (<.11'e) det finns
a, an en, ett
te1-ephone telefon -en -er
18. Where is there a telephone? Var finns det en telefon?
restaurant? en restaurang -en -er
ho te 1-7 ett hote I I -et -0
restroom? en toalett -en -er
room ett rum -met -0
bus buss -en -ar

stop hllplats -en -er
he re hr
in i
in the vicinity, nearby i nrheten
subuJay tunnelban/a -an -or
station station -en -er
19. Is the1'e a bus stop nearby~ Fl nns det en bussh I I p I ats hr i nrheten?
a subway station? en tunnelbanestation?
a train station? en jrnvgsstation?
the re dr
away borta
20. Yes, over theX'e. Ja, dr borta.
right hger
21. To the Y'ight. Ti II hger.
left vnster
22. To the left. TI II vnster.
33
Unit 1

SWEDISH 34
--------------------------------------------
straight ra k t
ahead, forward f ram
23. Straight ahead. Rakt fram.
to be able to att kunna, kan, kunde, kunnat

can kan
to help att hjlp/a -er -te -t
24. Can I help you? Kan jag hjlpa dig?
to say, to te'l'l att sg/a -er, sade, sagt

one, you man
to walk, to go att g -r, gick, gtt
walk(s) gr
to t i II
the American Embassy amerikanska ambassaden
25. Can you tell me how you get to Kan du sga mig hur man gr tl I I
the American Embassy? amerikanska ambassaden?
walk (imperative) g
jus t, on ly bara
to see att se -r, sg, sett
see(s) se r
26. Just walk straight ahead. You'll G bara rakt fram. Du ser ambas-
see the Embassy on your left. saden t i l l vnster.
so, very s
much mycket
27. Thank you very much. Tack s mycket.
Unit l

SWEDISH
no ingen, inget, inga

cause, reason orsak -en -er
28. Don't mention it. Ingen orsak.
(You've weZoome.)
to be aZZowed (to); to veoeive att f -r, fick, ftt

may f r
to buy att kp/a -er -te -t
some, a few, any ngon, ngot, ngra
postcard vykort -et -0
Il
29. I wouZd Like (to buy) Bome Kan jag f kpa ngra vykort?
pOBtca1'ds.
many mnga
to want att vilja, vill, ville, velat
want(s) ~ II I
you (poLite form, and pLu1'.) ni
to have att ha -r, hade, haft
30. How many do you want? Hur mnga vi II ni ha? Il
what vad
to cos t att kost/a -ar -ade -at
cost(s) kostar
31. How much does it oost? Vad kostar det?
c1'own k ro n / a - a n - o r
fifty femtio
O1'e re -t -n
32. One C1'own and 50 are. En krona och femtio re (en och
femtio). Il
Unit l 35

SWEDISH
---------------------------------------------------36
to give att ge -r, gav, gett
give (imperative) ge
day dag -en -ar
news nyhet -en -er
too, also oc ks
33. Please give me a Dagens Nyheter. Var snll och ge mig en Dagens
too. Nyheter ocks. *
34. Here you aY'e. (Be so good.) Var s god.
to become. to be att bli -r, blev, bI i vit

become(s). will be bI i r
35. How much will it be? Hur mycket blir det?
fouY' fyra
36. It will be fouY' crowns. please. Det bl i r fyra kronor, tack.
Eating and Drinking ~n a Restaurant
to eat att t/a -er, t, tit

eat(s) ter
lunch lunch -en -er
dinneT' middag -en -ar
bT'eakfast frukost -en -ar
3? We are having lunch. Vi ter lunch.
dinneT'. middag.
bT'eakfast. frukost.
to look. to see att se -r, sg, sett

at. on p
menu matsede I -n, matsed I ar
:5 8. May I look at the menu? Kan jag f se p matsedeln?
Unit 1

SWEDISH
a couple, pair ett par -et -0

cheese ost -en -ar
sandwich (open faced) smrgs -en -ar
39. May I have a couple of cheese Kan jag f ett pa r ostsmrgsar? *
sandwiches?
wai tress servitris -en -er

to drink att drick/a -er, drack, druckit
coffee kaffe -t 0
40. Waitress: What would you like to Servitrisen: Vad vill ni ha att
drink? dricka?
Coffee? Ka ffe?
glass glas -et -0

milk mjl k -en QJ
41. May I have a glass of milk, please. Kan jag f ett glas mjl k?
water vatt/en -net 0
beer I -et 0
wine vin -et -er
cup kopp -en -ar

tea te -et 0
42. A cup of coffee, pleaae. En kopp kaffe, tack.
tea te
some, a little I i te
butter smr -et 0
bread brd -et 0
43. Some bread and butter. Lite smr och brd.
Un i t 1 37

SWEDISH 38
Numbers
o no I I 20 tjugo
1 en, ett 21 tjugoen, tjugoett
2 tv 22 tjugotv
3 t re 23 tjugotre
4 f Yra 24 tjugofyra
5 fem 25 tjugofem
6 sex 26 tjugosex
7 sj u 27 tjugosju
8 Ha 28 tjugotta
9 nio 29 tjugonio
10 tio 30 trettio
11 elva 31 trettioen, trettioett
12 tolv 32 trettiotv
13 tretton 40 fyrtio
14 fjorton 41 fyrtioen, fyrtioett
15 femton 50 femtio
16 sexion 60 sextio
17 sjutton 70 sjuttio
18 arton 80 ttio
19 nitton 90 ni tt i o
100 (ettlhundra
200 tvhundra
1,000 (ettltusen
2,000 tvtusen
100,000 (ettlhundra tusen
200,000 tvhundra tusen
1,000,000 en mi Ijon
2,000,000 tv mi Ijorlsr
1,000,000,000 en miljard
2,000,000,000 tv mi I jarder
one tri llion en biljon
Unit 1

SWEDISH
UNIT 1
Notes on Basic Sentences
At this point we'd like to call your attention to same of the things you've been learning to
say in the Basic Sentences. Sometimes it will be important for you to practice grammatical
patterns from the Sentences; for this purpose we are including a Points to Practice section,
where you will find explanations as well. However, there are some other points which you
should understand now, even though you don't need to work with them intensively yet. Read
through this section carefully, and then go back over the Basic Sentenoes onoe more to be
sure you are fullyaware of what we are pointing out.
The numbers preceding the items below refer to the Basic Sentenoe numbers.
1. Goddag, Hej. While in English "Good day" is an expression used upon taking leave
of someone, Goddag is used by Swedes as agreeting approximately corresponding to
"Hello." The informal Hej is mor e widely used but it implies also the use of the
informal du. See Nate 9.
8. & 9. st ti II, m. St t i l l is more formal than m. Hur str det t i l l is therefore

more appropriately asked of a person whom one does not call du. See the follow-
ing Note.
9. Du. "You" can be translated with du (sing.) or ni (formal sing. and plural of
du/ni) in Swedish. The use of the informal du is rapidly growing in Sweden and
will most likely soon be the only form of addressing o person. Most young people
nowadays call everyone du (however, eyebrows were raised when a young journalist
interviewing the king called His Majesty du) and du is used between all employees
and management in many factories and offices. However, with conservative and older
Swedes it is wise for a newcomer to be cautious and let the Swede indicate how he
or she prefers to be addressed.
Unit 1 :59

SWEDISH 40
18. Var finns det .,. Det finns is the Swedish equivalent of English "there is" and
"there are". The reveraed word order used here is a resuLt of the question pattern
(compare English "Where is/are there ... ?").
29. Kan jag f ... corresponds to the English "may I have". Example: Kan jag f en kopp
kaffe? (May I have a cup of coffee?). Another infinitive may be added to kan jag
f. In that case f loses its meaning of "have". The second infinitive becomes the
key word and kan jag f takes on the meaning of "may I". Examples: Kan jag f
kpa ... (May I buy ... ); Kan jag f se (May I look ... ). This is one of a
number of Swedish equivalents of English "please". Another way of saying "please" is
var sn II och ... See sentence 15.
JO. V i I I. In Swedish v i I I "want" and should never be confused with "will" in English.
J2. Krona, re. The krona is the Swedish currency unit; there are 100 re per krona.
33. Dagens Nyheter is one of the two Stockholm morning newspapers.
34. Var s god has two different uses: 1. meaning "here you are" (a bit of gracious-
ness) when handing over something; 2. Meaning "you are welcome" in anBwer to
"thank you".
35. Hur mycket b II r det? Note that the present tense of the verb att b I i (b I i r) is
used with the Bame meaning as the English "will be". Be sure to learn this ex-
pression now; a grammatical explanation will come later.
39. Ett par ostsmrgsar. In English we express quantity with ~he preposition "of",
for example "a glass Qf. milk, a cup l2i. coffee". In Swedish the quantifier aimply
precedes the noun directly, and no preposition is used.
Examples: ett par ostsmrgsar, ett glas mjlk, en kopp kaffe.
Unit 1

SWEDISH
UNIT 1
Pointa to PracticB
Po(nt I. Indefinite article (singul.al'J
Point II. Present tense
Point III. Word O!'de l' -- atraight and qUBations
Point IV. Auxi liaries (he lping verbs)
Unit 1 41

SWEDISH 42
UNIT 1
Points to Practice
Grammar means different things in different contexts. In this book we use the word
to describe the mechanics of the Swedish ~anguage. Praatiaa~ know~edge of the gram-
mar provides the method for bui~ding sentenaes. By using reaL sentenaes repeatedLy
you will be come familiar with the grammar rules.
In each of the Units there will be some Points to Practice. In working on these
you will also acquire vocabulary and learn usefuL Swedish idioms.
Point I. EN ETT
Swedish nouns come in two varieties those for which the indefinite article (EngLish
J
"a" or "an") is EN and those for which it is ETT. Most of the time there is no way
of telling the difference. You'll just have to learn which nouns go with which
artiale. The exercises below will help you learn the EN and ETT nouns we've
already used.
Unit 1

SWEDISH
Practice A. This is a substitution practice where you substitute a series of similar words
or phrases in a single sentence, producing a variety of meanings. We'll give
you the sentenee to start out with, showing you the item to be substituted by
underlining it. At the extreme RIGHT of the page you'll see the word or phrase
you're supposed to Bubstitute. If you use a blank sheet of paper or a card to
cover the line below the one you're reading, you can check your answers as you
go along by moving the paper down one line at a time. At first we'll give you
help with translations, but as these be come more and more obvious we'll gradually
take them away and let you speak Swedish on your own.
eVE
Det fInns en restaurang h r. There' s a restaurant here. en b us s
Det f (n ns en buss h r. The re' s a bus here. en krona
Det finns en krona hr. There 's a crown here. en telefon
Det f l nn s en telefon hr. There' s a te l ephone here. en smrgs
Det f i n n s en sm rg s h r. There 's a sandwich here. en hllplats
Det f l n n s en h I I p lats hr. There 's a (bus) stop here.
EN
Vnit 1 43

SWEDISH 44
Pl'actice B. Now that you've ~eal'ned some EN wOl'ds, let's tl'Y some ETT wOl'ds.
CVE ETT
Det finns ett v y ko rt d r. Thel'e's a postcal'd thel'e. ett glas
Det finns ett glas d r. There ' s a g~ass thel'e. ett par
Det finns ett pa r d r. The re ' s a coup~e there. ett hote I I
Det finns ett hote I I d r. The l'e ' s a hote ~ there.
Pl'actice C. Time to see how wel~ you l'emembel'. We'l'e going to mix up OUl' no uns now, doing
the same kind of pl'aatiae. Rut not only ~l'e we going to give you EN and ETT
wOl'ds togethel', we'l'e not going to tel~ you which is whiah unti~ you see the
answel's.
CVE
Det finns en telefon h r. Thel'e 's a te~ephone hel'e. glas

ett glas a glass hote I I
ett hote I I a ho te ~ krona
en krona a Cl'own telefon
en telefon a telephone par
ett pa r a co up ~e smrgs
en smrgs a sandwich kopp
en kopp a cup buss
en buss a bus
Unit 1

SWEDISH
P~actice D. Let's t~y the same thing as a qUBstion:
eVE
Finns det en telefon hr? Is the~e a terephone he~e? glas
hote II
e ta.
P~actice the phrase Finns det ... ? with all the wo~ds in P~actice C and othe~s that you know.
Then answer the questions: Ja, det finns .. or Nej, det finns inte ..
Notice that inte comes after the verb.
Now ret's use itf
T~y asking your teacher and fellow students

about the availability of objects and places
in you~ area. Have some Swedish conversation.
Unit 1 45

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ SWEDISH
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _---:.46
Point II. Present tense. When do we 8

The infinitive (basic form of the vel'b) and the present tense do not have the
same fOl'm in Swedish.
Infinitive: att tala to speak
Present tense: du talar you speak

you are speaking
All Swedish verbs in the infinitive end in -a 01' in another vowel.
Most Swedish vel'bs in the present tense end in E3.

jag tala~ svenska
Herr Berg frst~ mig
en kopp kaffe kostar en krona
Present tense is used to express an action that a) is hap~ening now (Jag ter nu
- I'm eating now); b) happens repeatedly (jag ter smrgasar till lunch -
I eat sandwiches for lunch); and, c) sometimes, an action in the future (han
kommer imorgon - he's coming tomorrow).
Notice that Swedish does not have the equivalent of the English continuous
verb form (to be + verb + -ing). ExampZe: I am speaking is simply jag talar.
Examples:
Jag talar svenska. 1. I speak Swedish.

2. I'm speaking Swedish.
Greta gr ti II ambassaden. 1. Greta walks to the Embassy.
~~
2. Greta is walking to the Embassy.
Unit 1

SWEDISH
There are a few verbs that do not take -r in the present tense~ among them
most auxiliaries (helping verbs):
du ska tala svensKa you wi II speak Swedish

are going to
du ka n frst svenska you can understand Swedish

are able to
Point III. Word Order. Declarative sentences and questions.
Simple Swedish sentences usually begin with the subject~ followed by the con-
jugated verb.
Examp les:
Du talar svenska. 1. You speak Swedish.

2. You are speaking Swedish
Greta gr till ambassaden. 1. Gre ta walks to the Embassy.

2. Greta is walking to the Embassy.
En kopp kaffe kostar en krona. A cup of coffee costs one crown.
Det finns ett hotel I hr. There is a hotel here.
In Swedish you make questions by just reversing the order of subject and verb.
Examples:
Tal ar ni svensKa? 1. Do you speak Swedish?

2. Are you speaking Swedish?
Unit 1 47

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _- - - - - - -SWEDISH
------- ~48
Gr Greta ti II ambassaden? 1. Does Greta wa"lk to the Embassy?

2. Is Greta walking to the Embassy?
Kostar en kopp kaffe en krona? Does a cup of coffee cost one crown?
Finns det ett hotel I hr? Is there a hotel here?
Notice how simple Swedish is! Don't ever try to translate Ndo, does, did N
when formulating a question in Swedish. Reversing the subject and verb is all
you have to do.
Practice E. This is a practice using the present tense in normal word order. Again, place
a blank sheet of paper over the line helow the one you're reading, and use the
word(s) given at the extreme right in place of the underlined ones. Be sure
to repeat the "new N sentence ALOUD hefore moving the paper to check i f you
were right.
eUE
Herr Berg hjlper ~. Mr. Berg is hetping you. Frken Hansson
Herr Berg hjlper Frken Hansson. mig
Unit 1

SWEDISH
eUE
Herr Berg hjlper ~. mig I ite grann
mig lite grann. i n te a I I s
mig inte alls. mycket
mig mycket.
Du frstr svenska. Herr Berg

Du frstr Herr Berg. Frken Hansson
Frken Hansson. mig
!!!J...9. svenska
svenska.
NI r i Sverige. p restaurangen
p restaurangen. p stationen
p stationen. hr
h r. i nrheten
i nrheten.
You've probably noticed that we/ve Btarted to leave out the English translations except in
the examples. Hopefully you don't need them any more. If this is true, you're not only
speaking Swedish, you're THINKING it.
Unit 1 49

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ SWEDISH
________________________ 5
~ O
Pl'ac ti ce F. Now let's pl'actice wOl'd ol'del' in questions. This time~ howevel'~ we'l'e going
to give you TWO items at a time to substitute. Vse the same familial' fOl'mat
to check as you go along.
eVE
Hjlper du frken Hansson? Al'e you helping Miss Hansson? Talar . svenska
Talar du svenska? Frstr .. mig
Frstr du !!!J...9.? r ... I Stockholm
r du i Stockholm? Gr ... till ambassaden
Gr du ti I I ambassaden?
Pl'actice G. This is a l'esponse pl'actice whel'e you simply answel' the questions we ask. The
cue on the l'ight will indicate whethel' to answel' the question in the affil'mative
01' the negative. If you use yoUI' sheet of papel' again you'll find that you can
check YOUI' answel'S as bejol'e. You may have to ch ange the pl'onoun in YOUI' l'esponse
to fit the question.
eVE
Hjlper ni frken Hansson? ja
Ja, jag hjlper frken Hansson.
Frstr du svenska? ja
Ja, jag frstr svenska.
Gr herr Berg tl I I ambassaden? ja

J a, herr Berg g r t i I I ambassaden.
Unit 1

SWEDISH
eVE
Frstr du frken Hansson? ja
Ja, jag frstr frken Hansson.
r du i Stockholm? ja
Ja, jag r i Stockholm.
Talar du svenska? ja
Ja, jag talar svenska.
Practice H. Now le t' s do the same thing in the ne gative.
eVE
Hjlper du frken Hansson? nej
Nej, jag hjlper inte frken Hansson.
Talar du svenska? nej
Nej, jag talar inte svenska.
Frstr du svenska? nej
Nej, jag frstr inte svenska.
r du i Stockholm? nej
Nej, jag r inte i Stockholm.
Vnit 1 51

SWEDISH 52
eVE
Gr du ti I I ambassaden? nej
Ne j I j ag g r i n t e t i I I a mb a s s a d e n
LAT OSS TALA SVENSKA

(Let's Talk Swedish)
Vse all of the preceding questions and answers

with your teacher and fellow students to get the
"feel" of your new language.
Unit 1

SWEDISH
Point IV. Auxiliaries (helping verbs).
Auxiliaries or helping verbs go together with one or more infinitives. Only the
helping verb is conjugated.
du ska tala svenska you are going to speak Swedish futul'e
du vi I I hj~lpa mig you want to help me desil'e
du kan frst svenska you can understand Swedish abitity
Notice the use of ska and vi II in Swedish. Ska in front of an infinitive indi-
cate s future time; --v i I I indicate s a wish or desire.
Practice I. This is a transformation practice, which is new for you. In it you change sen-
tences from one form to another by adding, subtracting, or real'raning. The
sentences, or "cues" that you start with are given on the right, and the answers,
or "transforms". are given one line beZow on the Zeft. In this way you can still
use your sheet of paper to check your answers.
In this practice we/re going to add ska to the cue sentences. As you do this,
notice how you/re changing the meaning of the sentences.
eVE
I help you. Jag hjlper dig.
I/m helping you.
Jag ska hjlpa dig. I will he Zp you. Herr Berg talar svenska.
Herr Berg ska tala svenska. Fru Strmbck ter lunch hr.
Fru Strmb~ck ska ta lunch hr. Du gr ti I I ambassaden.
Du ska g ti II ambassaden. Jag sger det.
Unit 1 53

SWEDISH 54
eVE
Jag ska sga det. Jag ser p matsedeln.
Jag ska se p matsedeln. Jag ger dig en kopp kaffe.
Jag ska ge dig en kopp kaffe.
Now let's do the same thing with Ylll.

1 ' m coming to the hotel. Jag kommer ti II hotellet.
J ag v i I I komma t i I I hote I I et. l want to come (get) to the Jag ger dig en kopp kaffe.
hote L
Jag vi I I ge dig en kopp kaffe. Herr Berg gr ti II stationen.
Herr Berg vi II g ti II statlonen. Frken Hansson hjlper mig.
Frken Hansson vi I I hjlpa mig. Jag ser p matsedeln.
Jag vi II se p matsedeln. Jag ter lunch.
Jag vi II ta lunch.
And now with the helping verb kan.

eVE
You help me. Du hjlper mig.
You are helping me.
Du kan hjlpa mig. You can he lp me. Herr Berg kommer ti II hotellet.
Herr Berg kan komma till hotellet. Jag gr ti I I ambassaden.
Vnit 1

SWEDISH
CUE
Jag kan g t i I I ambassaden. Jag talar lngsamt.
Jag ka n tala lngsamt. Du frstr mig.
Du ka n frst mig. Du dter middag hdr.
Du ka n ta middag h r.
Fractice J. Let's practice the expressian kan jag f as explained in Nate 29. SubBtitute
the cue phrase for the words that are underlined.
CUE
Kan jag f en kopp kaffe? May I have a cup of coffee? ett glas mjlk
Kan jag f ett glas mjlk? en smrgs
en smrgs? I i te te
I i te te? I ite kaffe

I i te kaffe? I i te sm r
I i te smr? se p matsedeln
se p matsedeln? kpa I i te brd
kpa I ite brd? ett glas l
ett glas l?
Unit 1 55

SWEDISH 58
UNIT 2
MEETING PEOPLE
Basia Sentenaes
An American~ George Brown.

arrives at Arlanda (Stoakholm's
international airportJ and is
met by Bo and Maja Dalgren.
welaome vl kom/men -met -na

Sweden Sverige
Bo: 1. Hello George~ and welaome to Hej George, och v I kommen till
Sweden. Sverige. *
how~ so s
kind~ niae~ friendly vnl ig -t -a
of av
to come att komma, komme r, kom, komm I t
to meet att mt/a -er -te -t
George: 2. Hello Bo. How kind of you to Goddag Bo. s vnligt av dig att
come and meet me. komma och mta mig.
to introduae att presenter/a -ar -ade -at

my min, mitt, mina
friend vn -nen -ner
wife hustru -n -r
Bo: 3. May I introduae you my Fr jag presentera: min vn George
friend George Brown my Brown, mIn hustru Maja. *
wife Maja.
Unit 2

SWEDISH
pardon frlt
to be att vara, r, var, varit
name namn -et -0
George: 4. Pardon (me), what was the Frl t, hur var namnet?
(your) name?
to be named att heta, heter, hette, hetat

(my) name is heter
tl'ip res/a -an -or
Maja: 5. Hi, my name is Maja. How was Hej, jag heter Maja. Hur var
the (your) trip? resan?
dil'ect d I re kt -0 -a
flight, plane f I yg -et -0
from f rn
George: 6. Very good. It was a dil'ect Mycket bra. Det var ett direkt
flight from New York to flyg frn New York ti 11 Stockholm.
Stockholm.
your d I tt, d i na
d i n,
still, l'ema~n~ng kva r
America Amerika
Maja: 7. Is your wife still in America? r din fru kvar Amerika?
hut men
she hon
in, within om
month mnad -en -er
George: 8. Yes, but she's coming in a Ja, men hon kommer om ett par
couple of months. mnader. II
Unit 2 57

SWEDISH 58
OUl' vr -t -a
gil'l f I i ck/a -an -or
shall~ should; will~ would ska(II); skulle
to finish~ to end slut/a -ar -ade -at
Behoo l skol/a -an -or
June juni
George: 9. Dur gil'l will finish school in Vr flicka ska sluta skolan l junI.
June.
oh jas
sueh (a) en (ett) sdan(t), sdana
big (gl'own-up) stor -t -a
daughtel' dotter -n, dttrar
Maja: 10. Oh. do you have sueh a gl'own- Jas, har ni en sdan stor dotter?
up daughtel'?
oel'tainly. of OOUl'Be javisst

to fit l att f yl l/a -er -de -t
yeal' r -et -0
to beoome oldel' in years att f yl l/a r; -er -de -t
will be (yeal's old) fyller r
fall. autumn hst -en -ar
this faU i hst
George: 11. Cel'tainly. she will be seven- JaVisst, hon fyller sjutton r
teen this fall. hst. >I
hel'e hit
boat bt -en -ar
12. They al'e coming (hel'e) by De kommer hit med bt. >I
boat.
Unit 2

SWEDISH
niae, pleasant trevl l g -t -a

to like, to enjoy att tyck/a om; -er -te -t
like(s) tycker om
to trave l att res/a -er -te -t
Maja: 13. How niae! I like to travel by s trevl igt! Jag tycker ocks om
boat too. att resa med bt.
if om
weather vder, vdret, Ql
Bo: 14. If the weather is good. Om vdret r bra.
to agree att hlla med om; hller, hll, hll it

agree(s) hller med om
to take att ta, tar, tog, tagit
take (8) ta r
time tid -en -er
George: 15. I agree (with that). But it Det hller jag med om. Men det
takes time. tar tid. >I
when n r
to expect; to wait att vntia -ar -ade -at
expeat(s); wait(s) vnta r
Bo: 16. When do you expeat Bill? Nr vntar du Bi II?
who vem
Maja: 17. Who is that? Vem r det?
Unit 2 59

SWEDISH 60
brother bror, brodern, brder

to know att kn/na -ner -de -t
know(s) knner
him honom
Bo: 18. It's George's brother. I Det r Georges bror. Jag knner
know him from Washington. honom trn Washington.
he han
other annan, annat, andra
time, occasion gng -en -er
to s tay, to remain att stann/a -ar -ade -at
longer lngre
George: 19. He's coming another time when Han kommer en annan gng nr han
he can stay longer. kan stanna lngre. '*
Long lnge
city, town stad -en, stder
this; these den hr, det hr; de hr
Maja: 20. How long are you staying in Hur lnge stannar Ju i stan den hr
town this time? gngen?
unfortunateLy tyvrr
day dag -en -ar
George: 21. UnfortunateLy onLy five days. Tyvrr bara fem dagar.
pitY synd
that (conj.J att
to Leave; to go, to travel att fara, fa r, fo r, ta r i t
Leave(s) fa r
soon snart
Maja: 22. What a pit Y that you are Leav- S sy nd att du ta r s s na rt.
ing BO Boon.
Unit 2

SWEDISH
back tillbaka
GeOl'ge: 23. I'tt be back in June. Jag kommer tl I Ibaka I juni.
to Ol'del', to l'eBel'Ve att best I l/a -er -de -t

01'del'(BJ bestller
fol' t
Bo: 24. Now I'tt go and get (ol'del'J Nu g r j ag och best I I er ett rum
a 1'00m fol' you. I'tt be back t dig. Jag r snart tillbaka.
Boon.
to wait att vnt/a -ar -ade -at

wait (sJ vntar
hel'e hr
suitaase vs k/a -an -or
Geol'ge: 25. Thank you. I'tl wait hel'e with Tack ska du ha. Jag vntar hr med
the (my) suitcase. vskan. *
to get, to obtain att skaff/a -ar -ade -at

get(sJ, obtain(s) skaffar
taxi taxi -n -0
that, which, who som
to took like, to 8eem att se ut; ser, sg, sett
look(s) like, seem(sJ ser ut
fY'ee, avaitabte ledig -t -a
Maja: 26. I' II get a taxi. TheY'e is one Jag skaffar en taxi. Dr dr en som
that seems to be fY'ee. ser ut att vara ledig.
(Bo Y'etuY'nsJ (Bo kommer ti \Ibaka)
Unit 2 61

SWEDISH 62
we vi
to follow att flj/a -er -de -t
with, along med
to go (come) along att flj/a med; -er -de - j
goe(s), come(a) along fljer med
there dit
ear, taxi bi I -en -ar
Bo: 27. You have a nice room at the Du ha r ett b ra rum p stora Hote I I et.
Stora Hotellet. We' II go Vi fljer med dit i bilen. "
along in the taxi.
to hope att hopp/as -as -ades -ats

hope (s) hoppas
will, to be going to att komma att; kommer, kom, kommit
is going to kommer att
to be happy, comfortable att triv/as -s -des -ts
Maja: 28. I hope that you'll be comfort- Jag hoppas ait du kommer att trivas
able at the hotel. p hote I I et. .t
to do, to make att gra, gr, gjorde, gjort

do, does gr
aertainly, surely skert
George: 29. I'm sure I will. (I'll aer- Ja, det gr jag skert.
tainly do that.)
(At the hotet) (P hote I I et)
to like, to feel like att ha I ust att; har, hade, haft

like(s) har I ust att
us oss
evening kvll -en -at
this evening, tonight t kv I I
Maja: 30. Would you like to come (to U8) Har du I ust att komma till oss p
for dinner tonight? middag ikvll? '*
Unit 2

SWEDISH
g~ad~y J with p~easure grna

at what time hur dags
George: 3l. With p~easure. How nice. At Tack grna. s trevl igt. Hur
What time? dags?
clock klock/a -an -or

to sui t J to be convenient att pass/a -ar -ade -at
suit(s) passar
Maja: 32. Seven o 'c~ockJ i f that is Klockan sju, om det passar.
convenient (for you) .
George: 33. That suits (me) fine. What Det passar (mig) bra. Vad r
time is it now? klockan nu?
Bo: 34. It's three o'clock. Klockan r tre.
to ~ive to reside att bo -r -dde -tt

live (s) bor
George: 35. Are you stil ~ ~iving at Oxen- Bor ni kvar p Oxenstiernsgatan?
stiernsgatan.
address adress -en -er

to get. to pick up att hmt/a -ar -ade -at
get(s). pick(s) up hmtar
Bo: 36. Yes. the address is Oxen- Ja, adressen r Oxenstiernsgatan 3.
stiernsgatan 3. But I'll Men jag hmtar dig.
pick you up.
then d
Maja: 37. So long. see you tonight. Hej d, och vlkommen ikvll.
Unit 2 63

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _SWEDISH
_________________________ ~64
VNIT 2
1. Vdikommen (plur. vlkomna) is used very often in Sweden. You use it, as here,
when you greet a person on arrival (in your country, in your city, or in your
home, etc.). You also use it (as in paragraph 37 of this Unit) in connection
with an invitation or referring to an upcoming visit.
Note that vlkommen is never used in the English sense of "you are welcome."
This phrase has to be expressed in different ways, for example: Ingen orsak
(no reason, don't mention itY, tack sjlv (thanks yourself).
:3 M i n,d i n, v r, er used with en words.

Mitt, ditt, v rt, ert - used with ett words.
Mina, d i na, v ra, era - used with plural nouns.
(My, your, ou!', you!')
More on the possessive adjectives and p!'onouns later.
8. Om ett par mnader (In a aoupZe of months). The preposition om is used in ex-
pressions of time for the future in answer to the question nr (when).
Unit 2

SWEDISH
11. Fyl ler. In Swedish the present tense is often UBed to indicate future.
12. Hr - here: indicates Location at a place.

Hit - here: indicates motion to a place.
Examples: Han r hr. Be is here.

Han kommer hit. He is coming here.
There are several other Swedish adverbs which change forms according to location
or motion. We'll discuss them more in detail later.
15. Det hl ler jag med om. Note that the verb comes before the subject. This word
order is very common in Swedish. The verb always comes before the subject in a
main clause when the clause starts with a direct or indirect object~ an adverb,
or i f it is preceded by a subordinate clause. We 'll practice this word order in
Unit 5.
Jag (subject = S) hl ler Det hller (verb = V)

(verb = V) med om det. jag (subject = S) med om.
19. Stanna. Nate that stanna usually means "stay" in the sense of "remain."
Examples: VI ska stanna i tre veckor. (We'll stay for three weeks) but
Vi ska bo p Grand Hotel. (We'lL ~ at the Grand Hote~
Unit 2 65

______________________SWEDISH
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~66
2.3. Kommer ... See Note 11.
24. Nu gr jag och best I I er ... See Note 15.
25. Tack ska ni/du ha -- one of many idiomatic expressions of thanks in Swedish.
27. Dr - there: indicates looation at a place.

Dit - there: indicates motion to a place.
Examples: Han bor dr. Be lives there.

Han reser dit ikvll. He's going there tonight.
See Note 12.
28a. Hoppas (to hope). Verbs ending in -s in the infinitive don't take the -r
ending in the present tense. The -s ending is used in all tenses and all
persons.
Infinitive: att hoppas, att trivas

Present tense: hoppas, trIvs
28b. Du kommer att trivas. In Unit 1 you learned that future time is expressed with
the auxiliary verb ska. However, kommer att + the infinitive form of the main
verb is a very common way of expressing future time. There is a subtle differenoe
between the two future expressions and they may at times be interchangeable, but
in oertain oontexts only one of them is correct. Ska implies intention and the
involvement of someone's will. Kommer att is strictly a prognosis without any
intention or will invoLved.
Unit 2

SWEDISH
Examples: Jag ska resa ti II Amerl ka i hst.

I'm going to Amepiea in the fall.
Du kommer att tycka om min vn.
You'll like my fpiend.
29. Det gr jag skert. See Note 15.
JO. Att ha lust att must be followed by an infinitive.

Examples: Har du lust att komma?
Jag har lust att resa ti II Uppsala.

I feel like going~UPP8ala.
Unit 2 67

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _SWEDISH
______________________ ~68
UNIT 2
Points to Praatiae
Point I. Definite article (singular)
Point II. Personal pronouns
Point III. Te lling time
Unit 2

SWEDISH
VNIT 2
Points to ppactiae
Point r. The Definite Artiale (singular)
~
a city en stad staden the city
a year ett r ret the year
As the illustration shows, Swedes form the definite article by taking the in-
definite article and attaching it to the end of the noun. In the case of ett.
one t is dropped. There are, of course. two definite articles in the singular:
-~, -et.
Praatice A. Here is a list of nouns you have learned with their indefinite
articles. Put them in their definite form. and practice until
you can io it automatically.
eVE
a restaurant en restaurang
Hr r restaurang~. Here is the restaurant. en buss
bussen en gato
gatan ett namn
namnet en stad
staden en bi l
Unit 2 69

SWEDISH 'lO
eVE
Hr r b i I en. ett rum
rummet en f r u ko st
frukosten ett flyg
flyget en telefon
telefonen ett par
paret en station
stationen en smrgs
smrgsen en kopp
koppen ett hote I I
hotellet en f I i cka
fl ickan en taxi
taxin en klocka
klockan en adress
adressen en matsedel
matsedeln en vska
vas ka n
Vnit 2

SWEDISH
Practiae B. We'll aontinue with more nouns from Vnits 1 and 2 to help you feel
thoroughly at ease with this usage. Add the definite articles
to the aue words.
eVE
lunch
Tycker du om lunchen? Do you like the lunah? vin
vinet kaffe
kaffet l
let rum
rummet smrgs
smrgsen mjlk
mjl ken hote I I
hote I I et bt
bten namn
namnet f I i cka
fl ickan stad
staden vska
vskan
Unit 2
?l

SWEDISH 12
Practice C. In this practice you'~~ have to use the nouns both with the indefinite
and the definite articles.
eVE
hota I I
Hotellet d r r ett b ra hote II. The hotet there is a good hote l. bi I
B 1 I en en bj I bt
Bten en bt restaurang
Restaurangen en restaurang Klocka
Klockan en klocka vin
VInet ett vin adress
Adressen en adress rum
Rummet ett rum
Unit 2

SWEDISH
Pl'actice D. In this pl'actice one student asks the question and another student
gives the answer. Take turns. A self-study student can play both
roles. Follow the same sentence pattern as in the first example.
eVE
telefon
Urskta, var finns det en telefon? Pardon meJ where is there a telephone?
Telefonen r ti I I vnster. The telephone is to the left. toalett
Urskta, var finns det en toalett?

Toa I etten r t i I I vnster. taxi
Urskta, var finns det en taxi?
Taxin r ti II vnster. restaurang
Urskta, var fInns det en restaurang?

Restaurangen r ti I I vnster. station
Urskta, var finns det en station?
Stationen r tl I I vnster. hotell

Urskta, var finns det ett hotell?
Hotellet r till vnster. busshllplats

Urskta, var finns det en busshl Iplats?
Busshll platsen r tl II vnster.
Unit 2

SWEDISH '14
Practice E. Continue with the questions beLow and give affirmative answers.
CUE
vin
Bestller han ett vin? Is he ordering a wine?
Ja, han bestller vinet. Yes, he is ordering the wine. hote I I rum
Bestller han ett hotell rum?
Ja, han bestller hotellrummet. smrgs
Best I I er han en smrgs?
Ja, han bestller smrgsen. middag
Bestller han en middag?
Ja, han bestller middagen. f ru kost
Best II er han en frukost?
Ja, han bestller frukosten. ka f fe
Best I I er han kaf fe?
Ja, han bestller kaffet. taxi
Best I I er han en tax r?
Ja, han bestller taxin.
Did you notiae en taxi, taxin; ett kaffe, kaffet? The e in the definite
artiale -~, -e~is dropped when-the noun enda In a voweL.
Unit 2

SWEDISH

elose your books and get information from each
other using this material. You can also ask
your teacher for names of objects in the class-
room and outside the window.
Exccmple: F i nns det en sto I I rummet?

(Is there a chair in the room?)
Ja, stolen r dr.

(Yes. the chair is there. )
Unit 2

SWEDISH
Point II. Personal Pronouns
Subjeative Form Objeative Form

jag I mig me
du you dig you
han he honom him
hon she henne her
den it, for en lJords den it, for en lJords
det it, for ett lJords det it, for ett lJords
vi lJe oss us
ni you, plural and formal sing. er you, plural and formal sing.
de they dem them
Unit 2

SWEDISH
ppaatiae F. Let's ppaatice the Swedish pepsonal pponouns, stapting with the
subjective forms. Substitute the subject pponoun fop the name
or names in the column on the right.
eUE
Maja tycker om Karin. Maja likes Karin. Maja
Hon tycker om KarIn. She likes Kapin. Bo
Han tycker om Karin. Bo och jag
Vi tycker om Kar i n. Maja och Lena
De tycker om Karin. Maja och du
Ni tycker om Karin. George
Han tycker om Karin.
Practice G. Now let's practice the objective forms of the pponouns. this time
in questions. He~e you substitute the ppopep objective pponoun
for the name. names op subjective pponouns in the pight column.
eUE
Knner Maja Bo? Does Maja know Bo? Bo
Knner Maja honom? Does Maja know him? Karin
K n n e r Maja henne? Karin och jag
Knner Maja oss? Bo och Karin
Knner Maja dem? du och Karin
Unit 2

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ SWEDISH
________________________ ~ 8
eVE
K n ne r Maja e r? du
Knner Maja dig? jag
K nne r Maja mig? han
Knner Maja honom?
Practice H. Now we'll make it a little bit harder and use two pronouns in
the answp.ps, one as the subject, one as the object. Substitute
pronouns for the names when you answer the questions in the affirm-
ative. Be sure to read the questions aZoud.
K~nner Bo George? Does Bo know George?

Ja, han knner honom. Yes, he knows him.
Frstr Karin Maja?
Ja, hon frstr henne.
Presenterar Bo David?
Ja, han presenterar honom.
Vntar herr Dalgren Karin?
Ja, han vntar henne.
Best II er du ett rum t ~?
Ja, jag bestller ett rum t dig.

Unit 2

SWEDISH
eVE
H~mtar Bo kaffe t dIg och mig? Ja
Ja, han hmtar kaffe t oss.
Mter Karin George p stationen? Ja
Ja, hon mter honom pa statIonen.

Fljer ~ med Maja I taxin? Ja
Ja, jag fljer med henne taxin.

Let's be very personaL Tell, about your family~
or make up a fictitious one. Ask the others
about their friends and family members. Put
the personal, pronouns to use.
Unit 2 '19

SWEDISH 80
Point III. Te lling time

Vad r
Klockan r elva. Klockan r fem. Klockan r tolv.
Klockan r halv Klockan r kvart Klockan r kvart

ett. i sj u. ver fyra.
This is how the Swedes answer the question Vad r klockan? (What time is
it?) Be sure to notice the expression for half hours.
Klockan r fem Klockan r fem Klockan r tjugo

(minuter> I halv (mInuter> ver (minuter> ver tv.
ett. halv tolv.
Unit 2

SWEDISH
This is how you ask "at what time?": Hur dags?
This is how you answep "(at) seven o'clock": Klockan sju.
ppactice I. Ask the question and answep it. Op in class~ ask each othep.
eVE
Vad r klockan? Klockan r tre. What time is it? It's thpee o'cZ.ock. 5
Vad r klockan? Klockan r fem. 8
tta. 10
tio. 12
tolv.
ett. I I
elva. 4
fyra. 2
tv. 3
tre. 9
n lo. 6
sex. 7
sj u. 8:30
halv nio. 3:30
Unit 2 81

SWEDISH 82
eVE
Vad r klockan? Klockan r halv fy ra. 5:30
halv sex. 12:30
halv ett. 6: 30
halv sj u. 2:30
halv tre. I I : 30
halv tolv. I : 30
halv tv. 4:45
kvart fem. 8:45
kvart nio. 7:25
fem halv tta. 3:35
fem ver halv fyra. 2:20
t j ugo ver tv. 3:40
tjugo i fyra. 3: 15
kvart ver tre. 12: 15
kvart ver tolv. 3:45
kvart I fyra. 5:30
halv sex. 3:25
fem I halv fyra.
Unit 2

SWEDISH
Practice J. Answer the questions with the time given in the cue.
eUE
Hur dags ska han komma? At what time is he coming? 8
Han ska komma klockan tta. He's coming at eight o'clock.
Hur dags reser han? At what time is he leaving? II
Han reser klockan elva.

Hur dags r hon ledig? At what time will she be f~ee? 4
Hon r ledig klockan fyra.
Hur dags kan de mta bten? At what time can they meet the boat? 2:30
De kan mta bten klockan halv tre.
Hur dags ska vi skaffa en taxi? At what time shall we get a taxi? 9:30
Vi ska skaffa en taxI klockan halv tio.
Hur dags vntar han oss? At what time is he expecting us? 5: 4 5
Han vntar oss klockan kvart sex.
Hur dags tar han flyget? At what time will he get his flight? 6: 15
Han tar flyget klockan kvart ver sex.
Hur dags kommer han? At what time is he coming? 8:25
Han kommer klockan fem halv nio.
Unit 2 83

SWEDISH 84
UNIT J
FAMILY AND OCCUPATION
Basic Sentences
George Brown meets an old

friend, Captain Lars Holm,
after 15 years.
to go att g, gr, gick, gtt

went gick
Norra Latin High School Norra Latin
ago fr ... sedan
George: He llo. weren' t you in Norra Goddag. Gick du inte p Norra Latin
Latin (high school) 15 years fr femton r sedan? r det Inte
ago? Aren't you Lars Holm? Lars Holm? *
yes (in answer to a negative jo

question)
to remember a t t mi nna s, mi nns, mi nde s, mi nt s
remember(s) minns
true sann, sant, sanna
isn't that so inte sant
Lars: 2. Yes, I am. I remember you too. Jo, det r det. Jag minns dig ocks.
You are George Brown, aren't Du r George Brown, I nte sant? *
you?
yes, indeed javisst

long time since lnge sedan (sen)
last time sist
George: 3. Yes, indeed. It's been a long Javisst. Det var lnge sen sist.
time since (we saw each other)
last time.
Unit 3

SWEDISH
to aome att komma, kommer, kom, kommit

aame kom
Lars: 4. When did you come back to Nr kom du ti II baka ti II Sveri ge?
Sweden?
several f I era
week veckla -an -or
time tid -en -er
now J these days nu fr tiden
Geol'ge: 5. Sevel'al weeks ago. What al'e Fr flera veckor sedan. Vad gr du
you doing these days? nu fr tiden?
sailol' sjman -nen, sjmn

to lie (lay J lain) att ligga, ligger, lg, legat
lie (s) I i gger
harbor hamn -en -ar
just now just nu
Lars: 6. I' m a sailor. My ship is here Jag r sjman. Min bt ligger hr
in the Gothenburg harbol' just I Gteborgs hamn Just nu. *
now.
ever ngonsin
George: 7. Were you ever in the U.S.? Var du ngonsin I Amerika?
yes indeed jad

to usually (do something)J att brukla -ar -ade -at
to be in the habit of
used to brukade
to go J to trave Z. att fara, far, for, farit
between me I I an
Lars: 8. Yes indeed many times.
J We Jad, mnga gnger. Vi brukade fara
used to go between Gothenburg mellan Gteborg och New Orleans. "
and New Orleans.
Unit 3 85

SWEDISH 88
to serve, to be on duty att tjnst/gra -gr -gjorde -gjort

served tjnstgjorde
American amerikansk -t -a
ship fartyg -et -0
George: 9. Did you also serve on American Tjnstgjorde du ocks p amerikanska
ships? fartyg? >\
never aldrig
Swedish (adj. ) svensk -t -a
aboard ombord
Lar8: 10. No, never. Only on Swedish Nej, aldrig. Bara p svenska fartyg.
ships. Do you want to come Vi II du komma ombord?
aboard?
time tid -en -er

George: 11. Yes, I'd love to. Do you hav~ Ja, grna. Har du tid?
time?
They go to Captain Holm'g

cabin on the ship.
cigar' cigarr -en -er

Lars: 12. Do you want a cigar? Vill du ha en cigarr?
cigarette cigarrett -en -er

George: 13. No thanks. I Like Swedish Nej tack. Jag tycker om svenska
cigarettes. cigarretter.
Unit J

SWEDISH
to smoke att rk/a -er -te -t

smoke(s) rker
often of t",
really, actually egentl igen
best bst
to pre fel' att tyck/a bst ami -er -te -t
prefer(s) tycker bst om
pipe pip/a -an -or
Lars: 14. I often smoke cigars, but I Jag rker ofta cigarrer. men jag tycker
really prefel' a p~pe. And what egent I i gen bst om p i pa. Och vad gr
are you doing these days? du nu fr ti den?
journalist journalist -en -er

to work att arbet/a -ar -ade -at
work(s) arbetar
newspaper tidning -en -ar
George: 15. I'm a journalist. I work for Jag r journal ist. Jag arbetar p en
a big American newspaper. stor amerikansk tidning. *
to think, to plan att rnk/a -er -te -t

think (s), plan(s) tnker
whole, all hel -t -a
winter vinter -n, vintrar
Lars: 16. How long are you planning to Hur lnge tnker du stanna hr? Hela
Btay here? All winter (long)? vintern? *
about, app~oximately ungefr

George: 17. I'm staying in Sweden about Jag stannar i Sverige ungefr fem
five monthB. mnader.
U'l1J1it 3 87

SWEDISH 88
to z,rl'i te att skriva, skriver, skrev, skrivit

book bok -en, bcker
about om
Lars: 18. Are you going to write a book Ska du skriva en bok om Sverige?
about Sweden?
already redan
George: 19. Yes, I'm already working on Ja, jag arbetar redan p en bok om
a book about Swedish cities. svenska stder.
interesting intressant -0 -a
Lars: 20. How interesting. Det var intressant. *
to tell att berttla -ar -ade -at

tell (imperative) bertta
family fami I j -en -er
father far, fadern, fder
to live att lev/a -er -de -t
livers) lever
sti ll, yet n
George: 21. But tell (me) about your family. Men Dertta om din fami tj. Vad gr din
What is your fat her doing? Is far? Lever han n? *
he still living?
Lars Holm takes out a photo

album.
to see att se, ser, sg, sett

photo fotografi -et -er
Lars: 22. Sure, would you like to see Jad, viii du se ngra fotografier av
Bome photos of the family? familjen?
Unit 3

SWEDISH
sti II fortfarande
engineer ingenjr -en -er
ale ar, obvious klar -t -a
of aOUl'se det r klart
to begin att brj!a -ar -ade -at
begin(s) brjar
to beaome, to be att bli, blir, blev, blivit
old gammal -t, gamla
to get old att b I l gamma I; b Il r, b I ev, b I l v i t
Lars: 23. Here is Dad. He is still an Hr r far. Han r fortfarande ingen-
engineel'. Of course he is jr. Det r klart att han brjar bli
beginning to get old. gamma f. Jt
sis tel' syster -n, systrar

nurBe sjuksktersk!a -an -or
George: 24. Don't you have a sister ~ho Har du inte en syster, som r sjuk-
is a nUl'Be? skterska?
brothers and Bisters, syskon -et -~

sib Ungs
Lars: 85. Yes, I have. Here she is. Do Jo, det har Jag. Hr r hon. Har du
you have any brothers and ngra syskon?
sisters?
physician, doator lkare -n -0

lalJJyel' advokat -en -er
Geol'ge: 86. Yes, I have tlJJO brothers, one Ja, Jag har tv brder, en som r lkare
lJJho is a doctol' and one ~ho och en som r advokat.
i s a l alJJ y e l'.
Unit 3 89

SWEDISH 90
sec1'eta1'Y sekreterare -n -0
office1' (only milita1'yJ officer -n -are
onLy (adjectiveJ enda
La1'B: 27. I also have a Bister who is a Jag har ocks en syster som r
secreta1'Y. He1'e she is with sekreterare. Hr r hon med min
my onLy b1'othe1'. He is an enda bror. Han r officer.
office1'.
uncle (pate1'nalJ farbror, -n, farbrder

aunt (pate1'naLJ faster -n, fastrar
dentist tandlkare -n -0
Ge01'ge: 28. I see. My uncle is also an Jas, min farbror r ocks officer,
office1', and my aunt is a och min faster r tandlkare . . .
dentist.
uncle (mate1'nalJ morbror -n, morbrder

farm grd -en -ar
nea1' n ra
La1'B: 29. Here you see my uncle. He w01'ks Hr ser du min morbror. Han arbetar
on a big fa1'm near Skovde. p en stor grd nra Skvde.
Ge01'ge: 30. Was he in Stockholm 15 yea1's Var han I Stockholm fr femton r

ago? sedan?
to think, to be lieve att tro -r -dde -tt

think(s) tror
I think so. J ag tror d et.
Unit 3

SWEDISH
to roemembero att komm/a Ihg; -er, kom, kommit

re me mb e ro ( s) kommer Ihg
aunt (materonaL) mo s t e r - n, mo s t r a r
teachero (woman) lrarinn/a -an -or
to meet (each othero) att trff/as -as -ades -ats
met (each other) trffades
Georoge: 32. I roemembero youro aunt who was Jag kommer ihg din moster, som var
a teachero. We met many times. lrarinna. Vi trffades mnga gnger."
son son -en, sner

Lars: ;);) . Heroe is my son who is twe1-ve Hr r min son som r tolv r (gammal)
years (oZd). His name is Han heter Gran.
Goran.
lJhat (a, an) v i I ke n, v i I ke t, v I I ka

good-Zooking, handsome stilig - t - a
boy pojk/e -en -ar
Georoge: 34. What a handsome boy! VII ken sti I ig pojke!
must, have (has) to mste, mste, 0

company sllskap -et-0
very, awfully vldigt
nice, pleasant, fun roi ig -t -a
again i gen
35. I have to run. Enjoyed your Nej, nu mste jag g. Tack fr sll-
company. It was awfully nice skapet. Det var vldigt roligt att
to see you again. se dig igenl
always a l It i d
fun kul -0-0
to see, to meet att trff/a -ar -ad e -at
36. It's always fun to see oLd Det r alltid kul att trffa gamla
friends . vnner. "
Unit :3 91

SWEDISH 92
to have dinner att ta middag; ter, t, tit

togetheI' t i Ilsammans
tomorrow imorgon
or e I I er
Lal's: 37. Shall we have dinner together Ska vi ta middag tillsammans Imorgon
eller p tisdag? >I
~omorI'OW or Tuesday?
to carl (on the phone) att ringla -er -de -t

eall(s) ringer
George: 38. Love to. Tomorrow is fine. J a, g rna. Imorgon pa s sa r bra. Jag
I' II eaU you. So long. r i nge r dig. Hej s lnge.
Lars: 39. Bye. Hej d.
Unit 3

SWEDISH
UNIT 3
Notes on Basia Sentencea
1. gick - past tense of att g. In this unit we introduae some verbs in the past
tense. Most Swedish verbs form the past tense aaaording to aertain patterna
aalled aonjugations. A few very aommon verbs are irregular as in English.
Examples: att g, g r, gl c k, gtt to go~ to walk

att vara, r, va r, va r i t to be
att komma, komme r, kom, kommit to aome
att ta ra, ta r, tor, farit to go (by vehiale)
att gra, gr. gjorde, gjo rt to do~ to make
2. Det r det. In Swedish several short sentenaes following "yes" or "no" begin
with det and end with det or another personal pronoun (+ inte when it's negative).
This format aOl'responds to the English "yes, it is"~ ja, det r det; "yes, he aan"~
ja, det kan han; "no~ he doesn't", nej, det gr han inte. We will praatiae this
in a later Unit.
Sa. Jag r sJoman. Before professions and oaaupations the indefinite artiale is
usually omitted in Swedish.
6b. Gteborgs hamn. For the possessive form of a noun or a name -s is added to the
noun or the name without an apostrophe. If the word already ends in s nothing
is added.
Unit 3 93

SWEDISH 94
8. mnga gnger. Swedes make a distinction between "time" as

a. duration tid
b. occasion gng
Examples:
a. Tid och rum. = Time and space.
Har du tid fr mig? = Do you have time for me?
Tiden gICk. = Time pased.
De~ar svra tider. = Those were difficuZt times.
b. en ~ = one time, once

tv ganger = two times, twice
tre gnger = three times
mnga gnger = many times
nsta g~ng = next time
frra gngen = last time
Han for ti I I Amerika en gng. = Be went to the United States once.
y Wa:r>riing!
~
We had a good time Vi hade trevl igt
Don't succumb to the temptation of transZating English idiomatic expressions

into Swedish. Learn what the Swedes say in a simiZar situation.
9. amerikanska fartyg. NationaZities and Zanguages are not capitalized in Swedish.
15. Jag r journal ist. See Note 6a.
16. Tnker is uBed aB a helping vepb hezoe, meaning "pLan to".
Unit J

SWEDISH
20. Det var intressant. When Swedes exclaim about something~ they a~e apt to put it
in the past tense even though it is right in the present situation. Examples:
Det var dyrt. (That is expensive.); A, vad det var vackert! (Oh~ how beautifullJ
while they a~e looking at the view.
21. Lever. Att I eva (to Zive~ to be aZive) is diBtinguished from att bo (to live~
to reside.
Examples: Hon lever, men hon r mycket sjuk. (She is alive but she/s very sick.)
Hon bor I Stockholm. (She lives in Stockholm.)
23. Det r klart. This idiomatic expressian for "of course" is veY'Y common ly used.
28. Farbror, faster. The Swedes have a way of differentiating between maternal and
pate~nal relatives.
Mor (mother) Far (father)
mormor grandmother farmor

mo r f a r grandfather farfar
morbror uncle farbror
moster aunt faster
frldrar (parents)
Unit 3 95

SWEDISH 96
32. trffades. To express a reciprocal action an s can be added to certain verbs.

The reciprocal action can also be expressed by the active form of the verb +
varandra (each other).
Examples: att trffa - active form, "to meet"

att trffas - reciprocal form, "to meet each other"
Vi trffas p mndag. {We'll see each other on Monday.J
Vi trffar varandra p mndag. {We/Il see each other on Monday.J
36a. kul (fun) - common ly used, but a bit slangy.
36b. att trffa - to meet. Nate that att mta is to meet someone who is arriving at
a train station, airport, bus stoPJ etc.
37. p tisdag. The days of the week are: mndag, tisdag, onsdag, torsdag, fredag,
lrdag, sndag.
Nate a.: They are not capitalized.
Nate b.: English sometimes omits the preposition "on" before the names of the
days of the week. In Swedish. however. the preposition p may not be
omitted.
Example: (On) Monday I/m going to the dentist.

p mndag ska jag g tl I I tandlkaren.
Unit 3

SWEDISH
UNIT :5
Points to Praotioe
Point I. Indefinite plural endings
Point II. The relative pronoun SOM
Point III. Plaoement of adverbs
Unit :5 97

SWEDISH 98
Point I. Indefinite Plural Endings
B G G BG or
ell
e.r
n
The time has come to take a look at how the Swedes put their no uns in the
plural. There are five ways of indicating plural. They are called declensions~
and they are numbered 1 through 5~ like this:
1. en vecka tv vec8 EN wor-ds only
2. en middag tv mI ddag~ EN words only (except ett finger - a finger)
J. en gng tv gnsE] 80th EN and ETT WOI'ds
4. ett pple
(an apple)
tv pp l 8 ETT words only
5. ett glas tv glasD 80th EN and ETT WOI'ds~ pI'edominantly ETT
There are also a few nouns with iI'I'egular pluI'als~ some of which we have aZI'eady
seen: b ror - brder, stad - st::lder, bok - bcker, dotter - dttrar.
Unit 3

SWEDISH
Firat Declension, ~
All EN nouns ending in -a belong to the first declension and end in -or in the
pluraL
Practice A. Let's go to work with the nouns we already know in this group.
Answer the questions on the lett negativelY3 putting the underlined noun into
the plural and substituting personal pronouns for names.
eVE
Har KarIn en krona? Does Karin have one crown? 10
Nej, hon har tio kronor. No, she has ten crowns.
Har Karin en klocka? 8
Nej, hon har tta klockor.
Har George en ~? 2
Nej, han har tv pipor.
Har Karin en -
vecka?
-- 5
Nej, hon har fem veckor.
Har Karin ~n flicka? 3

Nej, hon har tre flickor.
Har Karin en sjukskterska? 2
Nej, hon har tv sjukskterskor.
Vnit 3 99

SWEDISH
Second Declension, ~
The nouns of the second declension have various singular endings, but they are
all EN words. The only exception is ett finger - tv fingrar.
Practiee B. Answer the questiona negative ly ehanging the underlined nouns into
the plural form and Bubstituting personal pronouns for names.
eUE
Har David en ~~? Does David have One cup? 2
Nej, han har tv koppar. No, he has two cups.

Har Lars en tidning? 3
Nej, han har tre tidningar.
Har Karin en smrgs? 4
Nej, hon har fyra smrgsar.
Har frken Strmbck en grd? 2
Nej, hon har tv grdar.
Har Sverige en hamn? 10
Nej, det har tio hamnar.
Har en vecka en ~? 7
Nej, den har sju dagar.
Unit 3

SWEDISH
Third Declension, ~
There are both EN and ETT words in this declension with many different endings
in the singular.
Practice C. Answer the questions negatively ahanging the underlined nouns into
the plural form and substituting personal pronouns for names.
CVE
Talar David om en restaurang? Is David talking about one restaurant? 2
Nej, han talar om tv restauranger.
Talar Karin om en station? 3
Nej hon talar om tre stationer.
Talar David om ett vin? mnga
Nej, han talar om mnga viner.
Talar herr Dalgren om en advokat? 2
Nej han talar om tv advokater.
Talar John om en ingenjr? 4
Nej han talar om fyra ingenjrer.
Talar Maja om en cigarrett? mnga

Nej, hon talar om mnga cigarretter.
Talar David och George om en ~!? mnga
Nej, de talar om mnga nyheter.
Vnit :5 101

SWEDISH 102
Fourth Deotension, B
Most ETT words that end in a vo~et belong to the fourth dectension. So far
~e have not had any examples of nouns from this declension, ~here the plural.
form is -n. Just a fe~ nouns betong to the fourth declension, hut some are
quite common. At this point ~e ~ilt ont y give you an example:
Hon ter ett p~. She is eating an appte.

Hon ter tv~ pplen. She is eating t~o apptes.
Fifth DeclenBion, ~
This deolension contains both ETT ~ords and EN ~ords. The ETT ~ord8 of the
fifth dectenBion al~ays end in a consonant. The EN ~ords end in -are, -er
(denoting nationatity or profession), -ande or -ende (present participte re-
ferring ont y to people).
Examptes: Eltt hote I I - tv hote I I
Eln lkare - tv lkare
Eln belgier - tv belgier (a Belgian)
en musiker - tv musiker (a musician)
en ordfrande - tv ordfrande (a chairmanJ
en gende - tv gende (a pedestrianJ
Unit 3

SWEDISH
Praatiae D. In this practiae we are using no uns familiar to you from the text J
all from the fifth dealension. We are varying the verbs. Again J answer the
questions negatively putting the underlined nouns in the plural form and sub-
stituting personal pronouns for the names.
eVE
Stannar George ett r? Is George staying for one year? 3
Nej. han stannar tre r.
Reser Dal grens t i l l ett hotell? mnga
Nej, de reser t i l l mnga hotell.
Bestller Ingrid ett rum? 2
Nej, hon best II er tv rum.
Kper Bo ett ~? 4
Nej, han kper fyra par.
Har Bo en sekreterare? 2
Nej, ha n ha r tv sekreterare.
Ser Karin ett fartyg? mnga
Nej, hon ser mnga fartyg.
Gr Bo ti II en lkare? 2
Nej, han gr ti II tv lkare.
Unit 3 103

___________________SWEDISH l
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~04
Irregular Nourts
sjman - sjmn
b ro r - b r de r
bok - bcker
son - sner
stad - stder
dotter - dttrar
In same of our hasia sentenaes there have been words with irregular plural
forms. The stems of these no uns change in the plural. They are 2nd. Jrd
and 5th declensian words. but it is easier to learn them as a separate group.
Practiae E. Let's praatice the irregular nouns following the Bame pattern as
in the previous praatices in this Unit.
eUE
Har ni en bok Do you have one book? mnga
Nej, v i har mnga bcker.
Har Ingrid en bror? 3
Nej, hon har tre brder.
Har fru Strmbck en morbror? 2
Nej, hon har tv morbrder.
Har Karin och Lisa en farbror? 3
Nej, de har tre farbrder.
FInns det en stad I Sverige? mnga

Nej, det finns mnga stder I Sverige.
Unit J

SWEDISH
eVE
Finns det en sjman p bten? 12
Nej, det finns tolv sjmn p bten.
Har Lars en dotter? 3
Nej, han har tre dttrar.
Har George en ~ 2
Nej, han har tv sner.
Ppaetiee F. In this ppaetiee we ape using nouns fPom all five deelensions.
Read the question on the left aloud and answep it negative ly, putting the
undeplined noun into the plupal. Find out how mueh you've leapned.
eVE
Finns det en klocka I rummet? Is there one cloek in the room? 2
Nej, det finns tv klockor rummet.
Finns det en ~ rummet? 2
Nej, det finns tv koppar i rummet.

Har Dalgrens en flicka? 2
Nej, de har tv flickor.

Finns det en advokat I stan? 8
Nej, det finns tta advokater i stan.
Unit :5 105

SWEDISH 106
eVE
Har bten en sjman? 12
Nej, den har tolv sjmn.
Finns det en hamn i Sverige? mnga
Nej, det finns mnga hamnar I Sverige.
Finns det ett vykort p hotellet? mnga
Nej, det finns mnga vykort p hotellet.
Har George en morbror? 3
Nej, han har tre morbrder.
Finns det en lkare nrheten? 3
Nej, det finns tre lkare 1 nrheten.
Finns det en grd dr borta? 2
Nej, det finns tv grdar dr borta.
Practice G. In the chart on the next page write the nouns on the teft in each
cotumn with the proper endings. All combinations won't work~ of course. In
such a case mark the box with an X. There is an answer sheet fottowing~ but
don't look at it untit you have finished the chart.
Vnit 3

SWEDISH
Noun mnQa IO(tiol nQra en, ett f I e ra I l te ett Dar
rum
pple
k Ioc ka
bII
gng
mnad
namn
vin
kopp
I kara
b rd
kv I I
b ro r
vecka
f I i eka
ost
tidning
dotter
Unit 3 107

SWEDISH 108
Noun manga 10 (t lo) nag ra en, ett flera I ite ett pa r
rum rum rum rum rum rum X rum

pple Fin"IA" Finnlpn FinniAn nnlA dnnlpn y nnlAn
k locka klnrknr klnrknr klnrkor klocka-- kloc:knr X klnrknr
bi I h i I" r h i I '" r hi I '" r hi I hi I '" r X h i I ",r
g ng ,,!'.n"Ar "!In,,p .. ,,!'.n"Ar "!'.n,, ,,!'. n" A- y "gn"" ..
m na d mnader mnader mnader mnad mnader X mnader __
namn namn namn namn namn namn X namn
vin viner viner viner vin viner vin viner
kap p koppar koppar koppar ko pp koppar X ko p pa r
I ka r e I ka re I ka re I ej ka re I ka re lkare X I ka re
brd X X X X X b rd X
kv I I kvllar kvllar kvllar kv I I kvllar X kvllar
bror brder brder brder b ro r brder X b rde r
vecka vec kor veckor veckor vec ka veckor X veckor

f I I c ka f I i c ko r flickor f I i c ko r f I i cka flickor X flickor
ost ostar ostar ostar ost ostar ost ostar
tidning tldninqar tidninaar tidninqar tidninq tidninaar X tldninoar
dotter dttrar dttrar dttrar dotter dttrar X dttrar
Unit 3

SWEDISH
Point II. The Relative Pronoun SOM
The pronoun SOM in S~edish is a relative pronoun. It comes in the beginning of

a clause referring to a noun that has just been mentioned. In the phrases: "the
girl ~ho ... ," "the book ~hich .. ," "the newspaper that ... " WHO, WHOM, WHICH,
and THAT can all be translated with SOM in Swedish. Since there is only this one
word you will soon find yourself using it [luently and easily. This will help
you form longel' sentences in your conversation.
Practice H. To introduce SOM in this practice we simply ask you to read the
aentencea aloud adding SOM.
Restaurangen, som du tycker om, ligger 1 The restaurant which you like is in Gamla
Gamla Stan. Stan.
Tidningen, han arbetar fr, r The ne~spaper that he works for is
Dagens Nyheter. Dagens Nyheter.
Sjmannen, vi trffade, r trevlig. The sailor whom ~e met is nice.
Stan, I I gger dr borta, r The city that is over there is
Skvde. Skovde.
F I I c ka n, fyller 17 r, r min The girl who is going to be 17
syster. years old is my
sister.
Rummet, vi bestllde, var Inte The room that we reserved Was not
ledigt. available.
Han, kommer dr borta, r min He (the man) ~ho is Goming over there
morb ro r. is my uncle.
Unit J 109

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _SWEDISH
__________________________ ~11 o
Warning: Do not confuse the relative pronoun SOM

with the conjunction ATT. Both are
translated as "that" in English.
Examples: Fl iekan, som arbetar hr,

r ledig idag.
The girl that (who) works

here is off today.
Han sger, att han kommer.
Be says that he is coming.

Han tror att rummet, som
vi bestlTdEi, r ledigt.
Be thinks that the room

that (which) we reserved
is available.
Praotioe I. In this practice you make one sentenee out of the two sentences
given, using SOM.
Fl iekan str dr. Hon r vr dotter.
The girl is standing there. She is our
daughter.
Fl iekan, som str dr, r vr dotter.
The girl (who/s) standing there is our
daughter.
Bten I igger i hamnen. Bten r gammal.
Bten, som ligger I hamnen, r gammal. Stan I igger dr borta. Stan r Skvde.
Unit 3

SWEDISH
Stan, som I igger dr borta, r Skvde. Mnga klockor kostar 10 kronor. De r b ra.
Mnga klockor, som kostar 10 kronor, r bra. L ka ren tjnstgr p blen. Han r min b ror.
Lkaren, som ljnstgr p bten, r min bror. Ka r i n s b c ke r I i gger d r. De r b ra.
Karins bcker, som I igger dr, r bra. '1 i n sekreterare r gamma I . Hon r b ra.
Min sekreterare, som r gammal, r bra. Jag har tv pipor. De r bra.
Jag har tv pipor, som r bra. Det hr r vr son. Han heter Erik.
Det hr r vr son, som heter Erik.
See how many questions you can ask and answer

using noun plurals and SOM.
Unit :5 111

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ SWEDISH
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-=..:112
Point III. Plaaement of Adverbs
Swedes plaae the adverbs after the first verb in independent alauses with
straight word order.
Examples: Lars dricker alltid vin. Lars always drinks wine.
Bi II viii aldrig dricka vin. Bill never wants to drink wine.
Praatiae J. Here we give you a short sentence and provide an adverb to be

inserted correctly. Check your answers as uBual.
CUE
David rker pIpa. David smokes a pipe. ofta
David rker ofta pipa. David often smokes a pips.
Karin dricker mjlk. ba ra
Karin dricker bara mjlk.
George r i Amerika. fortfarande
George r fortfarande I Amerika.
Bo r l Gteborg. tyvrr
Bo r tyvrr I Gteborg.
Han dri cker l. grna

Han dricker grna l.
Unit 3

SWEDISH
eVE
Dahlgrens tnker fara ti I I Amerika. inte
Dahlgrens tnker inte fara ti I I Amerika.
Frken Berg bestller kaffe. a I It Id
Frken Berg bestller alltid kaffe.
Sven reser med bt. ofta
Sven reser ofta med bt.
Stockholm ligger i Amerika. inte
Stockholm ligger inte i Amerika.
Lars vi II komma. ocks
Lars vi I I ocks komma.
Bo, som r Karins son, ter lunch. a Idr i g
Bo, som r Karins son, ter aldrig lunch.
Hotellet har en bra restaurang. ocks
Hotellet har ocks en bra restaurang.
Unit :5 113

SWEDISH 114
--------------------------------------------
In a question the noun and verb change places as you know from Unit I> Point III.
The adverb remains where it was.
Examples: Ka r I n talar a Iltid svenska.
Ta I ar Kar 1n a I I t i d svenska?
Arne dricker a I I t i d I .
Dricker Arne alltid l?
Practice K. Now we'll practice the use of adverbs in questionB. We'H give
you a short question and an adverb to be inserted correctly.
eVE
Talar Bo lngsamt? Does Bo speak slowly? a I It ld
Talar Bo alltid lngsamt? Does Bo aZways speak sZowZy?
Kostar cigarretter nio kronor? ngonsin
Kostar cigarretter ngonsin nio kronor?
Finns det en ledig taxi? a I dr i g
Finns det aldrig en ledig taxi?

SWEDISH
eVE
r Karin i Gteborg? fortfarande
r Karin fortfarande I Gteborg?
Har Gunnar en bt? ocks
Har Gunnar ocks en bt?

Stannar Ulla i Amerika? lnge
Stannar UI la lnge i Amerika?
Let's be very personal. Tell about your rela-

tives and their occupations or make up ficti-
tious ones. Ask your feZZow students about
their friends and famiZy members. Let the
teacher suppZy words for more famiZy memberB.
Vnit :5

SWEDISH 116
UNIT 4
SEEING THE SIGHTS
Basic Sentences
Jack and Tom go sightseeing.
first frst
Jack: 1. I have to go to the station Jag mste g tl I I stationen frst,
first J
then J later J afterwards sedan (sen)

bank bank -en -er
(in order) to fr att
to change att vxl/a -ar -ade -at
money pengar (plural)
2. and then to the bank to ch ange och sedan ti I I banken fr att vxla
some money. pengar.
to know (to have knowledge att veta, vet, visste, vetat

about)
know(s) vet
to lie J to be located att ligga, ligger, lg, legat
lie (s), is located I i gger
Tom: 3. Do you know where the station Vet du var stationen I igger? >I
is?
Jack: 4. NO J
I don't (know). Nej, det vet jag inte.
Unit 4

SWEDISH
to ask att frg/a -ar -ade -at

askes) frgar
hoteZ cZerk (at reception portier -n, portieer
desk)
Tom: 5. We'll ask the clerk. Vi frgar portlern.
6. Pardon me~ where's the Frlt, var I igger stationen?

station?
stree t gat/a -an -or

CZerk: 7. It is on Vasa street. Den I igger p Vasagatan.
far~ long lng -t -a

from here hrifrn
Tom: 8. Is it far from here? r det lngt hrifrn?
quite~ rather ganska

CZerk: 9. Yes~ it is quite far. Ja, det r ganska lngt.
either ... or antingen ... eller

10. You can either take a bus or NI kan antingen ta (en) buss eller
the subway. tunneJbana(n).
way down~ stairs~ entrance nedgng -en -ar

(the) other andra
side sid/a -an -or
11. The entrance to the subway is Nedgngen t i l l tunnelbanan ligger p
on the other side of the andra sidan gatan,
stree t~
Unit 4 117

SWEDISH 118
co rne r hrn -et -0

12. and the bus stop is over there och busshllplatsen r dr borta
at the corner. p hrnet.
map kart/a -an -or

of. over ver
13. Would you like (to have) a Vi II ni ha en karta ver staden?
map of the city?
Tom: 14. Yes. please. Ja tack, grna.
Clerk: 15. Here you are! Var s god!
walk promenad -en -er

through genom
Tom: 16. Shall we tak e a walk through Ska vi ta en promenad genom staden?
town?
sight. point of interest sevrdhet -en -er

Jack: 17. What's there to see here? Vad finns det fr sevrdheter hr? *
palace slott -et -(/)

museum museum, museet, museer
famous berm/d -t -da
Tom: 18. Well. the Palace and the Vasa Ja, slottet och Vasamuseet r mycket
Museum are very famous. bermda,
Unit 4

SWEDISH
to find att hltt/a -ar -~de -at

19. but I can't find them on this men jag kan Inte hitta dem p den hMr
map. kartan.
that; those den dr, det dri de dr

poLiceman pol is -en -er
Jack: 20. We'LL ask that poLiceman. Ex- Vi frgar den dr polisen. Urskta,
cuse me, where is the PaLace? var I I g ge r s lott e t?
beautiful vacker -t, vackra

church kyrk/a -an -or
to the right of till hger om
Police: 21. The PaLace is over there; and Slottet I igger dr borta, och det
therp, is abeautiful church I igger en vacker kyrka tl II hger
to the right of the PaLace. om slottet.
to look att tlttla -ar -ade -at

to look at att tittla p; -ar -ade -at
Tom: 22. Oh, we'lL Look at that. Jas, den ska vi titta p. *
train tg -et -'/J

tomorl'OW imorgon
Jack: 23. Tomorl'ow we can taks the Imorgon kan vi ta tget tll I Uppsala. *
tl'ain to Uppsala.
university universitet -et -'/J

cathedraL domkyrkla -an -or
24. Thel'e the university is near DMr ligger universitetet nra dom-
the cathedl'al. kyrkan.
Unit 4 119

SWEDISH 120
librar'Y b i b I lotek -et -0

is said to, is supposed to lr, lrde, lrt
Tom: 25. Yes, and the libr'ar'Y is BUp- Ja, och biblioteket lr vara mycket
pose d to be very famous. bermt.
fine fin -t -a
hungry hungrig -t -a
Jack: 26. Fine, but now I'm hungr'Y. Fint, men nu r jag hungrig.
par'k pa rk -en -er

27. Ther'e's a good restaurant on Det finns en bra restaurang p andra
the other side of the park. sidan parken.
Tom: 28. We can have lunch there and Vi kan ta lunch dr och sedan kan
then go to the Vasa Museum. vi g p Vasamuseet . Det l I gger
It's near here. hr i nrheten.
excellent, gr'eat utmrkt -0 -a

then, at that time d
maybe, perhaps kanske
concert konsert -en -er
afternoon eftermiddag -en -ar
this afternoon i eftermiddag
Jack: 29. Gr'eat. Then we can also go Utmrkt. D kan vi ocks g p
to Skansen. Maybe there is a Skansen. Det r kanske en konsert
concert there this afternoon. dr I eftermIddag. >I
to think (to have an att tyck/a -er -te -t

opinion)
think(s) tycke r
fe rr'Y frj/a -an -or
Tom: JO. Afterwards I think we ought to Sedan tycker jag vI tar frjan till
take the ferry to SluBsen. Slussen.
Unit 4

SWEDISH
one, you, they man

vie w utsikt -en -er
from f r n
elevator hiss -en -ar
Jack: 31. You have abeautiful view Man har en vacker utsikt frn
from the Katarina elevator. Katarina-hissen. *
to walk, to stroll att promener/a -ar -ade -at

The Old City Gamla Stan
Tom: 32. Then we aan walk around in Sedan kan vi promenera i Gamla Stan
Gamla Stan and have dinner och ta mi ddag p en restaurang dr.
at a restaurant there.
aharming charmig -t -a
part del -en -ar
Jack: 33. Good. It's a aharming part Bra. Det r en charmig del av Stock-
of Stockholm. I have a holm. Jag har en vn som bor dr.
friend who lives there.
Unit 4 121

SWEDISH 122
UNIT 4
3. I igger (lie/s) is often used in the sense of "is"~ "is located" when talking
about geographical concepts and buildings.
17. Vad f inns det fr ... ? is an idiomatic expression, meaning "what kind of ...
is there?"
22. Den ska vi titta p. See Unit 2, Note 15.
23. Imorgon kan vi If the aentence starts with an adve~b (Imorgon, tyvrr,
sedan, frst dr borta, etc.) ~emember that the ve~b comes in second place
(ef. unit 2, Note 15).
29. Skansen is a big open-air museum in Stockholm.
31. Man har '" The impersonal pronoun man is used to exp~ess the idea of people in
general, somewhat like the English use of "they" in "they say that ... " or "you"
in "you can have good meal there, " or "one" in "one is never satisfied."
Unit 4

SWEDISH
UNIT 4
Points to Praatiae
Point I: Adjeatives in the indefinite form (noun-adjeative agreement):
en stor baki ett stort rum; tv stora btar
Point II: Demonstrative Expressions:
Det r en bok.
Det hr r en bok.
Det dr r en bok.
Point III: Personal Pronouns: dan, det, de
Unit 4 123

SWEDISH 124
Point I: Adjeatives in the indefinite form (noun-adjeative agreement)
There has to be agreement between adjeatives and

nouns.
Adjeatives modifying en words in the singular in-
definite form take no-ending (basia form).
Example: ~ stor bi I
Adjeatives modifying ett words in the singular
indefinite form take the ending -t (added to the
hasia form). Example: ett stort glas
Adjectives modifying plural nouns (both en and
ett words) take the ending -a (added to the
basia form). Examples: tv stora b i I ar
tv stora glas
Below is a list of adjeatives whiah have somewhat irregular endings:

Adjeatives Adjeatives Plural fOT'm Translation
modifying modifying
en words ett words
bl bI tt bla blue
gr! g rtt gra gray
ny nytt nya new
god gott goda good

bred brett b reda wide
rd rtt rda red
vit v l tt vita white
rund runt runda ro und

Unit 4

SWEDISH
Adjectives Adjectives Pl u:r'a l [o :r'm T:r'anslation

modi[ying modi[ying
en wOl'ds ett wOl'ds
kort kort korta shol't

svart svart svarta black
utmrkt utmrkt utmrkta excetlent
gammal gammalt gamla otd

vacke r vackert vllckra beauti[ut
I i ten I i tet sm smaH~ litHe
b ra b ra b ra good
Pl'actice A. Let's practice using the indefinite [orm of the adjective~ making
sure it agrees with the noun it modi[ies.
eVE
god, smrgs
en god smrgs god, vin
ett gott vin mnga, god, pple
mnga goda pplen roi ig, bok
en rolig bok I iten, barn
ett I itet barn tre, trevl ig, pol is

tre trevliga poliser bermd, museum
Vnit 4 125

SWEDISH 126
eVE
ett bermt museum tv, vacker, kyrka
tv vackra kyrkor mnga, fin, slott
mnga fi na slott lng, tg
ett I ngt tg
Adjectives coming after the verbs att vara and att bl i also agree with their
subject nouns.
Examples: Bilen r stor. Dagen b I i r J..~ng.

Rummet r stort. Tget b I i r I angt.
Mnga-bi tar r-stora. tvlnga dagar b I ir I nga.
Mnga rum~r stora. Mnga tg-blir lng~-:-
Practice B. Now practice using the adjective after the verb r. Put the cue
noun in the definite form followed by r and the adjective~ making sure the ad-
jective agrees with the noun.
eVE
taxi, ledig
Taxin r ledig. rum, stor
Rummet r stort. dotter, snll
Do t t e r n r s n I I . namn, kort
Namnet r kort. barn, I i ten
Unit 4

SWEDISH
eVE
Barnet r I l tet. pple, god
pplet r gott. vin, god
Vinet r gott. bok, bra
Boken r b ra. hotell, trevlig
Hote I I et r trevl igt.
Ppactice C. Let's continue doing the same thing, using plupal nouns in
the indefinite form.
eVE
mnga, po I i s, trevlig
Mnga po I l s e r r trevliga. m ng a, bo k, b ra
Mnga bcker r b ra. mnga, ba rn, I i ten
Mnga ba rn r sm. mnga, smrgs, god
Mnga smrgsar r goda. mnga, ky r ka , vacker
Mnga k y r ko r r vackra. mnga, b i I, svart
Mnga b i I a r r svartel. mnga, gata, bred
Mnga gator r breda. mnga, tg, lng
Mnga tg r lnga.
Unit 4 127

SWEDISH 128
Point II: Demonstrative Expressions

det r it is, the!} are
det hr r this is, these are
det dr r that is, those are
The demonstrative expressions det r, det hr r, det dr r are used to focus

on noun phrases. They have only one form regardless of whether the nouns are
en or ett words or plurals.
Examptes: Det r en bok. Jt is a book.

Det hr r en bok. This is a book.
Det dr r tv btar. Those are two boats.
You already know another demonstrative expression: det finns (there i8~ the re
are) .
Practice D. Let's build up fluency on this point~ using the familiar technique.
All you have to do is repeat aloud the demonstrative expression det r and add
the proper indefinite articles or modifiers + the noun.
eUE
po I i s
Det r en po I I s. museum
Det r ett museum. tv, ka rta
Det r tv kartor. mnga, slott
Det r mnga slott. tre, hllplats
Unit 4

SWEDISH
eVE
Det r tre hllplatser. tg
Det r ett tg. stor, buss
Det r en stor buss. tv, tidning
Det r tv tidningar. I i ten, hrn
Det r ett I i tet hrn. snll, pojke
Det r en s n I I pojke.
Practice E. Now we'll uae the expression det hr r using the definite form
of the noun.
eVE
bt
Det hr r bten. ky rka
Det hr r kyrkan. tg
Det hr r tget. po I i s
Det hr r polisen. slott
Det hr r slottet. b i b I i otek
Det hr r bibi ioteket. ga ta
Det hr r gatan. brd
Det hr r brdet. busshllplats
Unit 4 129

SWEDISH 130
eVE
Det hr r busshllplatsen. bok
Det hr r boken. tidning
Det hr r tidningen. rum
Det hr r rummet.
Praetiee P. Now we'll praetiee the expression det dr r with nouns in the
plura l.
This lengthy repetition may seem a bit boring, but it is a good idea to get
these expressionB firmly in mind before proeeeding to the next point. Be-
sides, you are alBo praetieing your plural noun endings.
eVE
tre, bt
Det dr r tre btar. tv, poj ke
Det dr r tv pojkar. fy ra, lng, tg

Det dr r fyra lnga tg. tv, vacker, ky rka
Det dr r tv vackra kyrkor. fem, smrgs
Det dr r fem smrgsar. tv, f i n, sevrdhet

Det dr r tv fina sevrdheter. m ng a, rd, buss
Det d r r mnga rda bussar. t re, utmrkt, karta
Det dr r t re utmrkta kartor. tv, god, vin
Unit 4

SWEDISH
eVE
Det dr r tv goda vIner. t re, trevlIg, po II s
Det dr r tre trevl iga polIser. tv, gammal, vyko rt
Det d r r tv gamla vykort. tv, svensk, sjman
Det dr r tv svenska sjmn. tre, amerikansk, bok
Det d r r tre amerikanska bcker.
Point III: Personal Pronouns DEN, DET, DE
Den refers to ~ words~ det to ett words and de to pturats.
Examples: Var r boken? - Den r hr.

Var r vykortet?----Det r hr..
Var r Pellestidningar? De r hr.
Det is also used in other cases~ for instance in the demonstrative expressions
Jet r, det hr r, det dr r, which you have just Zearned. It is also used
in impersonaZ expressions without any specific reference (unlike den which
always refers to a noun).
Examples: Det regnar.. It's raining.

Det r mndag idag. Today is Monday.
Det r sent. It's late.
Vnit 4 131

SWEDISH 132
Only det ean be used in elauses where the verb is some form of att vara or
att b-I-j-followed by a noun (predieate noun).
Examples: Det r en b i I . It is a ear.

Det r ett tg. It is a train.
Det r tv pojkar. They are (lit.: it is) two boys.
If there is no noun but only a predieate adjeetive following the form of

att vara or att bl i, den, det or de has to be used depending on what kind
of noun the predieate adjeetive modifies.
Examples: r PellesffiI] stor? - Ja, Idetlr stor. - Det r en stor bil.

Is Pelle's ear big? - Yes, ~ is big. It's a big ear.
l
r P e I I e s r umI s t o r t ? - J a, Id e II ~ r s t o r t. - De t r e t t s t o rt r u ffi
Is Pelle's room big? _ Yes, ~ ~s big. - It's a big room.
r Pel les Ibtad stora? Ja, ~ r stora. - Det r stora btar.

Are Pelle's boats big? - Yes, they are big. - They are big boats.
To s ummari ;;e :
Det must be used as the subject when any form of att vara or att bl i is followed
by a noun (predieate noun). This noun mayor may not have modifying adjectives.
Examples: De t r e n b 1 I Det r en stor bi I.
Det r ettr=um. Det r ett stor~um.
Det r tv bKtar. Det r tv stora bKtar.
This is the same as the demonstrative expression det r,

whieh you have just learned, and should not be confused
with the personal pronouns den, det, de.
Unit 4

SWEDISH
When the form oj" att va ra or att b I i is fo llowed by an adjective but no noun
(predicate a dj e c t i ve) J the personal pronoun
den has to be used if the pronoun re j'ers to an en word;
det has to be used i f the pronoun refers to an ett word;

de has to be used if the pronoun refers to plurals.
Practice G. In this practice you'll make two sentences based on the sentenee
given in the left column using the adjective in the Cue column.
J In the first
sentenee you use the personal prono~n den, det or de + r + the adjective in
the right form. In the second sentenee you use the demonstrative expression
det r + indefinite article + adjective + noun.
CVE
Det r en b I I stor
Den r stor.
Det r en stor b i I
Det r ett slott. vacker
Det r vackert.
Det r ett vackert 510tt.

Det r ett rum. I I ten
Det r I i tet.
Det r ett I i tet rum.
Unit 4 13J

SWEDISH 134
eVE
Det r en bt. vit
Den r vit.
Det r en vit bt.
Det r ett museum. b e rmd
Det r bermt.
Det r ett bermt museum.
Det r en taxi. ledig
Den r ledig.
Det r en ledig taxi.
Det r en kyrka. gammal

Den r gamma I .
Det r en gammal ky rka.
Det hr r tv pplen. god
De r goda.
Det hr r tv goda pplen.
Det dr r tv poliser. vn II g
De r vnliga.
Det dr r tv vnl tga pol i ser.
Unit 4

SWEDISH
eVE
Det d r r ett hotell. ny
Det r nytt .
Det d r r ett nytt hotell.
Det dr r tv ostar. god
De r goda.
Det dr r tv goda ostar.
Ppactice H. Now we/tt ask some questions using VAD (what), VEM (who), and
VAR (whepe). You can ppovide the answeps us~ng two sentences. Remembep to
use han and hon fop peopte, det fop countpies and cities, which ape con-
sideped to be ett wopds.
eVE
Vad r det dr? sm@rgs, god
Det r en smrgs. Den r god.
Vem r det? flicka, vacker

Det r en f I i cka. Hon r vacker.
Va d r det d r? g rd, gamma I
Det r en g rd. Den r gamma I.
Vem r det d r? tand I kare, bra
Unit 4 135

SWEDISH 136
eVE
Det r en tandlkare. Han (hon) r bra.
Vem kommer dr borta? frken Berg, trevlig
Det r f rken Berg. Hon r trev I Ig.
Vad r det dr? telefon, svart
Det r en telefon. Den r svart.
Vad r det hr? gata, kort

Det r en gata. Den r kort.
Vad r det h"a r.? vykort, vacker

Det r ett vykort. Det r vackert.
Verr> r det som kommer d r? palls, vnlig

Det r en po I I s. Han (hon) r vn II g.
Var ligger restaurangen? dr borta

Den I I gge r dr bo rta .
Va r I i gge r Vasamuseet? nra Skansen

Det I i gge r n ra Skansen.
Va r r din dotter? Amerika

Hon r i Amerika.
Va r I I gger Skvde1 I Sverige
Unit 4

SWEDISH
eVE
Det I i gger i Sverige.
Var I l gge r Stockholm? Sverige
Det I i gger i Sverige.
Va r I i gge r busshllplatsen? dr borta
De n I i gger dr borta.
LAT OSS TALA SVENSKA!

Letts have a general oonversation using the
material you have aoquired by now.
Unit 4 137

SWEDISH 138
UNIT 5
A PLACE TO LIVE
Basic Sentences
Gorodon Browning has seen

an ad about an apartment
and calls the manager.
Gorodon: 1. May I speak to Mrs. Stenmark? Kan jag f tala med fru Stenmark?
moment gonbl lek -et -0

Voice: 2. Just a moment. Ett gonbl lek.
he lto hall (only used on the phone)

Mro8. S.: 3. Hello. Inga Stenmarok 8peaking. Ha I I D e t il r I n g a S t e nma r k
this moroning l mo rse

to see att se, ser, sg, sett
saw sg
your er, ert, era
adveroti8ement annons -en -er
apartment vnIng -en -ar
to l'en t att hyra, hyr, hyrde, hyrt
Gorodon: 4. Hello. My name is Gordon Goddag. Mitt namn r Gordon Browning.
Browning. This morning I I morse sg jag er annons i Svenska
saw YOUl' ad in Svenska Dag- Dagbladet om en vning att hyra. *
bladet about an apartment
for rent.
yes Jaha
Mr8. S.: 5. Yes~ it i8 available. Jaha, den ilr ledig.
Unit 5

SWEDISH
ahild ba rn -et -(Il

Gordon: 6. How large is it? We have two Hur stor r den? Vi har tv barn.
ahildren. Dur boy is five Vr pojke r tern r och v r t I i cka
years old and our girl is r tta.
eight.
kitahen kk -et -(Il

hall hall -en -ar
bathroom badrum -me t -(I)
so s
probably nog
Mrs. S.: 7. It has five ~ooms and a kit- Den r p tern rum och kk och hal I
ahen, hall, and two baths, och har tv badrum, s den passar
so it would probably suit nog.
you.
whiah, what vilken, vilket, vilka

Gordon: 8. In what part of the aity is I vi I ken del av stan I igger den?
it? I work at the Ameriaan Jag arbetar p amerikanska ambassa-
Embassy and would like to den och vi II grna bo i nrheten.
live a lose by.
stairs, flight of stairs trapp/a -an -or

up upp
Mrs. S.: 9. The address is Karlavagen 10. Adressen r Karlavgen 10, 3 trappor
fourth floor. That is in upp. Det r p stermalm, inte alls
Ostermalm, and not at all lngt frn ambassaden. *
fal' from the Embassy.
to desaribe att beskriv/a -er, beskrev, beskrivit

Gordon: 10. Could you desaribe the apart- Kan ni beskriva vningen?
ment?
Unit 5 139

SWEDISH 140
again8t, toward mot

to face att ligga mot; ligger, lg, legat
face(s) ligger mot
south sder
ligh t, brigh t ljus -t -a
Bunny sollg-t-a
Mros. S.: 11 . It faces south. so it is Den I igger mot sder, s den r I jus
light and sunny. och solig. *
spacious ryml ig -t -a
high hg -t -a
ceiling. ro of tak -et -0
Mros. S.: 12. It is an old. spacious apart- Det r en gammal, rymlig vanlng, och
ment with high ceilings in det r hgt i taket l alla rum. Il
all the room8.
to moderniBe att moderniser/a -ar -ade -at

moderniBed modernlser/ad -at -ade
Gorodon: 13. I hop e it is moderonized. Jag hoppas den r modernIserad.
Mrs. S.: 14. Of course. Javisst.
rent hyr/a -an -or

Gordon: 15. How mueh is the rent? Hur stor r hyran?
Mrs. s.: 16. The apartment eosts 2.000 Vningen kostar tv tusen kronor I
el'owns a month. mnaden.
expensive dyr -t -a
Gorodon: 1 7. That is expensive! Det var dyrt!
Unit 5

SWEDISH
ga8 (not gasoline) gas -en -er

eleatI'iaity elektricitet -en 0
to be inaluded att Ing, Ingr, ingick, Ingtt
is inaLuded Ingr
besides dessutom
paI'tially delvis
to furnish att mbler/a -ar -ade -at
fUI'nished mbler/ad -at -ade
MI'S . S.: 1 8. Ye8, but it i8 a veI'Y fine Ja, men det r en vldigt fln vning,
apartment, and gas and elea- och gas och elektricitet ingr. Dess-
triaity are inaluded. Be- utom r den delvis mblerad.
8ide8, it is paI'tiaLly fur-
nished.
bed sng -en -ar

for fr
per80n, people person -en -er
GOI'don: 19. Good! Are theI'e beds foI' S bra! Finns det sngar fr fyra
four people? personer?
Living room vardagsrum -met -0

sofa sof fia -an -or
comfortable bekvm -t -a
armchaiI' ftlj -en -er
lamp lamp/a -an -or
PeI'sian persisk -t -a
rug, caI'pe t mattia -an -or
flooI' golv -et -0
MI's. S.: 2 O Yes, there are. And the Ja, det finns det. Och vardags-
living room has a Bofa and rummet har en soffa, tv bekvma
two aomfortable armahair8, ftljer, tv lampor och en stor
two lamps and a large Pel'- persisk matta p golvet. *
sian I'ug On the floor.
Unit 5 141

SWEDISH 142
to bring att ta med; tar, tog, tagit

table bord -et -~
chail' stol -en -ar
dining room matsal -en -ar
Gordon: 21. Is the dining room fUl'nished J r matsalen mblerad, eller ska vi
01' should we bring our table ta med vrt bord och vra stolar?
and our chairs?
breakfast nook matvr -n -r

bench bnk -en -ar
Mrs. S.: 22. NO J it isn't. But there is Nej, det r den inte. Men det finns
a breakfast nook in the kit- en matvr i kket med bord och
chen with table and benehes. bnkar. *
closet garde/-ob -en -er

especially s rs k i I t
to need att behv/a -er -de -t
need(s) behver
space J room J place plats -en -er
all all, allt, alla
his her their (reflexive)
J J sin, sitt, sina
toy leksak -en -er
Gordon: 23. What about closets? My boy Hur r det med garderober? Srskil t
especially needs a lot of min pojke behver mycket plats fr
space for all his toys. alla sina leksaker. *
every var j e
bedl'oom sovrum -met -~
linen close t I inneskp -et -0
pan try serveringsrum -met -0
Mrs. S.: 24. There is a big closet in Det finns en stor garderob i varje
every bedroom and a good sovrum och ett bra I inneskp I
linen closet in the pantry. serveringsrummet.
Unit 5

SWEDISH
refrigerator kylskp -et -I/;

Gordon: 25. Is there a refrigerator? Finns det kylskp?
freezer f rys box -en -a r

completely alldeles
dishwasher diskmaskin -en -er
Mrs. S.: 26. Certainly, and a small freez- Jad, och en I iten frysbox ocks
er as well and a completely och en alldeles ny diskmaskin.
new dishwasher.
laundry room tv~ttstug/a -an -or

basement kllare -en -I/;
washing machine tvttmaskin -en -er
drying cabinet torkskp -et -Qj
27. The Laundry room is in the Tvttstugan r i k II aren med tv
basement with two washing tvttmaskiner och ett torkskp. *
machines and a drying cabinet.
to sound att lta, lter, lt, ltit

Boundfs) 1 ter
Gordon: 28. It sounds very good, and we'd Det lter vldigt bra, och vi vill grna
love to come and look at the komma och titta p vningen.
apartment.
to move att fly tt/a -ar -ade -at

in in
into in i
Mrs. S.: 29. When would you like to move Nr skulle nI vilja flytta in I
into the apartment? vningen?
Unit 5
143

SWEDISH 144
the fiY'st den frsta

OctobeY' oktober
fUY'nituY'e mbel -n, mbler
Gordon: 30. If we take it we could move Om vi tar den kunde vI flytta In den
in on OctobeY' 1st. OUY' furni- frsta oktober. Vra mbler r hr
tUY'e will be heY'e then. d. *
tenant hyresgst -en -er

out ut
thing sak -en -er
yesteY'day Igr
to buy att kp/a -er -te -t
have (has) bought har kpt
house hus -et -0
Mrs. S.: 31. That suits (me) fine. OUY' Det passar utmrkt. Vr andra hyres-
otheY' tenant moved out yesteY'- gst flyttade ut Igr med al la sina
day with all his things. Be saker. Han har kpt ett hus I Djurs-
has bought a house in Djurs- holm.
holm.
at home hemma
today Idag
houY' t l mm/ e - e n - a r
32. I will be at home today. Jag r hemma Idag. VI I I ni komma
Would you like to oome in om en timme1
an houY'?
GOY'don: 33. Does 4 o'clock suit (you)? Passar det klockan fyra1 D kommer
Then I'll come with the jag med hela familjen.
whole family.
MY's. s.: 34. I'm looking fOY'waY'd to see- Vlkomna d! *

ing you then.
Unit 5

SWEDISH
UNIT 5
Notes on Hasia Sentencea
4a. I morse, "this morning," indiaates past time. It is therefore used only with a
verb in the past tenae.
4b. Svenska Dagbladet is a daily newspaper in Sweden.
9. Tre trappor upp or p tredje vningen means 4th floor. First fLoor is botten-
vningen (b.v.> or nedre botten (n.b.>.
11. Sder. Other aompass points are norr (north)J ster (east)J vster (west).
12. Hgt taket is an idiomatia expression for "high aeiUng{sJ."
17. Det var dyrt. The Swedes often put exalamatory expr88sions like this in the
past tense. (af. Unit J Nate 20.)
20. Ja, det finns det. See Unit 3 J Nate 2.
22. Nej, det r den inte. See Unit 3 J Nate 2.
23. Sina leksaker. See Points to Practice I c.
Unit 5
145

SWEDISH 146
25. Finns det kylskp? Swedes do not normally use an artiale with a noun when it
refers to a alass of nouns ~n general, rather than to a partiaular one.
Examples: Han kper b i I. He's buying a aar (beaause he needs transportationJ.
Han kper en ny bi I. He's buying a new aar (one aar in partiaularJ.
27. Torkskp.(a heated aabinet) is more aommon in Sweden than a dryer (torktumlare -n -0).
30. oktober. The names of the months in Swedish are: januarI, februari, mars, apri l,
maj, juni, juli, augusti, september, oktober, november, december. Note that,
like the week days, they are not aapitalized.
34. Vlkomna d. Note that the plural form of vlkommen is used to indiaate a
welaome to all the family members. (af. unit 2, BaBia Sentenae Note 1)
Unit 5

SWEDISH
UNIT 5
Points to Practice
Point I. Possessives
a. preceding a noun
b. as pronoun
c. Possessive reflexives sin. s I tt. s I na
Point II. Verbs of the [irst conjugation
Point III. Word order
Unit 5 247

SWEDISH 148
Point I. a. Possessives preceding a noun
EN ETT Plural
(j ag) mi n bi I mitt namn mina bi Ia r

( d u) din bi I ditt namn dina bi Ia r
(ha n) hans bi I hans namn hans bi Ia r
(hon) henne~ bi I hennes namn hennes bi Ia r
(v i) v r bi I v rt namn v ra bi Ia r
(n I ) er bi I ert namn era bi Ia r
(de) deras bi I deras namn deras bi lar
Here are the possessives in Swedish. As you see~ most of them conform
to the EN, ETT or plural form of the noun just as the adjectives do.
Names or nouns just add an -s at the end to indicate possessive form.
Example8: Karins bok. Karin's book.
Pojkens namn. The boy's name (the name ~ the boy).
Bi lens-frg. The color ~ the ear.
Unit 5

SWEDISH
Praotioe A. Form a sentenee with a possessive, using present tense of the

ve1'b att vara.
eUE
Jag, namn, George Brown
Mitt namn r George Brown. v i, barn (plU1'.J, sn I I
Vra barn r snlla. vi , va rdags rum, I jus
Vrt vardagsrum r ljust. hon, sng, ny
Hennes sng r ny. han, paj ke, USA
Hans pojke r i USA. d u, dotter, vacker

Din dotter r vacker. n i , vning, stor
Er vning r stor. de, adress, KarJavgen 10

Deras adress r Karlavgen 10. n i, kylskp, hg
Ert kylskp r hgt. han, ftlj, bekvm
Hans ftlj r bekvm. de, kk, rym I i g
Deras kk r ryml igt. pojke, far, ingenjr

Pojkens far r ingenjr. hus, kk, ljus
Husets kk r ljust. Bo, mor, journalist
Bos mor r journalist. jag, syskon (plu1'. J hemma
Mina syskon r hemma.
Unit :; 149

SWEDISH 150
P~actice B. Answe~ the questions, using the p~ope~ possessive fo~ms.
eVE
Ligger Karins vning i Stockholm? Ja
Ja, hennes vning I igger i Stockholm.
r mi tt hotel I rum tv trappor upp? Ja
Ja, ditt hotellrum r tv trappor upp.
r vra bcker i vardagsrummet? Ja
Ja, era bcker r l vardagsrummet.
Flyttar ni in i ert hus snart? Ja, p mndag

Ja, vi flyttar in I vrt hus p mndag.
Sg George fru Stenmarks annons i tidningen? Ja

Ja, han sg hennes annons i tidningen.
r Stenmarks sngar bekvma? Nej
Nej, deras sngar r inte bekvma.
Behver du di n bi I idag? Nej

Nej, jag behver inte mIn bil Idag.
Hittade du Pell es klocka? Ja
Ja, jag hittade hans klocka.
Unit 5

SWEDISH
Point I. b. Possessive pronouns
MIN - MY~ MINE
Det r min b i I I t is my ear. Bilen r min. The ear is m,ine.
Det r ditt bord. It is your table. Bordet r ditt. The table is yours.
Det r v ra stolar. They are our chairs. Stolarna r vra. The chairs are ours.
As you can see in the ehart~ the Swedes make no distinction between possess-
ive adjectives and possessive pronouns. We'll have a short practice on this.
Praatice C. Answer the questions~ using the ownership indicated by the cue.
eVE
r det Bos bli? Nej. jag
Nej, det r min.

r det din frysbox? Nej. hon
Nej. det r hennes.
Vnit 5 lSl

SWEDISH 152
eVE
r det h r herr och fru Stenmarks hus? J a, de
J a, det r deras.
r det hr din diskmaskin? Ja, jag
J a, det r mi n.
r det hr Pe I les klocka? Ja, han
Ja, det r hans.

r det hr era bcker? J a, vi
Ja det r vra.
r det hr Karlns smrgs? Nej, d u
Nej, det r din.
r det hr Lenas glas? Nej, d u
Nej, det r ditt.
Point I. e. Reflexi~e possessives, SIN, SITT, SINA
These reflexive possessives are used instead of hans, hennes, deras i f they
aj occur in the same clause as the subject;
bJ modify the objeet in the ~lause; and
ej refer to the subject in the clause.
Sin (sitt, sina) is never used to modify the subject in the clause.
Unit 5

SWEDISH
Examples:
Han tycker om sin hund.

He likes his (own) dog.
Han tycker om hans hund.
He 2ikes his (someone el8e's) dog.
Hans bt! 19ger 1 hamnen.

: - -- =
His boat is in the harbor.
Karin beskriver sitt rum.
Karin describes her room. (The room belongs to Karin.)
Karin beskriver hennes rum.
Karin describea her room. (The room belonga to someone else.)
Lars och Lena talar om sina barn.
Lars and Lena are talking about their children (their own).
Lars och Lena talar om deras barn.
Lars and Lena are talking about their children (another family/s),
Unit 5 155

SWEDISH 154
P1'aatiae D. Look at the list of possessions below. Describe (using the

ve1'b att tycka om) how Maja likes he1' things, Erik likes his, and they
both like their joint belongings. Go through the three lists beginning
with Maja/s. The answers will be found on the next page.
Majas saker Erlks saker Deras saker
I inneskp ftlj frysbox

soffa lampa sngar
bord matta kylskp
stal ga rde rob tvttmaskIn
vning badrum hus
matta tidning mbler
torkskp bI I ba rn (plu1'al)
kllare bcker kk
diskmaskin klocka va rdags rum
sovrum pengar bt
Model: Maja tycker om sitt linneskp.
Erik tycker om sin ftlj.
De tycker om sin frysbox.
De tycker om sin teve (TV).
Unit 5

SWEDISH
Answers to Practice D.
Maja tycker om: Erik tycker om: De tycker om:
sitt linneskp sin ftlj sin frysbox

sin soffa sin lampa sina sngar
sitt borrJ sin matta sitt kylskp
sin stol s i n ga rderob sin tvttmaskin
srn vning sitt badrum sitt hus
stn matta sin tidning sina mbler
sitt torkskp si n b i I sina barn
sin kllare sina bcker sitt kk
sin diskmaskin sin klocka srtt vardagsrum
sitt sovrum sina pengar sin bt
Practice E. In this practice we will use all the third person possessives.
You fill in the right one in the blank space. Use your cardboard sheet
as usual to cover the correct answer below each sentence.
George och hans fru tittade p vning.
si n
George beskrev vningen fr hustru.
si n
Bo och Kari n flyttade in mbler.
sina
Karln och barn tittade p en ny soffa.
hennes
Unit 5 155

156
SWE!DISH
Stenmarks och son bor Djursholm.
dera s
Stenmarks bor med son huset.
sin
Stenmarks hyr (Pelles) vning.
hans
Lars r p bten med b ror.

sin
Lars tittar p ( Ka r i n s) bt .
hennes
Bo och Ingrid och far kom ti II bten.
d e ras
Bo och I ngr i d mtte far yrd bten.
sin
I eftermiddag flyttar Lars mb I er.
sina
(Lars) diskmaskin r alldeles ny.
Hans
Unit fj

SWEDISH
Point II. Verbs of the first conjugation

Swedish verbs come in four conjugations. Three of these conjugations follow
definite patterns. The fourth conjugation contains all irregular verbs.
The same form is used for all persons in each tense.
1. More than half of the verbs in Swedish belong to the first conjugation.
All of the verbs in this conjugation end in -a in the infinitive form.
All new verbs that come into Swedish from other languages belong to this
conju.gation.
Examples: att mblera, att modernisera, att organisera (to organizeJ, att
jogga (to jog), att missa (to miss, to failJ.
Examples of this include all verbs with the French derived suffix -era.
Letts take a look at the verbs of the first conjugation that have occurred
in some of our units. Below is a chart showing how the first conjugation
operates.
First Conjugation
att baka (to bake)
PY'esent tense: jag, etc. ba ka r bake(sJ, am (aY'e, isJ baking

Past tense: Jag, etc. bakade baked, was (were) baki ng
Supine: jag, etc. h a r, hade bakat have, had baked, have, had
been baking
Past paY'ticiple: den, det, de r, bI i r bakad
bakat
bakade
Unit 5 157

SWEDISH 158
Note: The supine is a form of the verb used tagether with har, hade. It
aZways ends in -t. Examples: Jag har bakat brdet. Jag hade bakat brdet.
These phrases are called respectively the present and past perf~ In
Swedish the supine form is different from the parti~iple which is used and
declined as an adjective.
Examples: Kakan r bakad. The cake is baked.

Brdet r bakat. The bread is baked.
Kakorna r bakade. The cakes (cookies) are baked.
We will deal with the particip le in a later unit.
In Unit I We made a comparison between Swedish and English with regard to

the lack of the continuouB form of the verb in Swedish. Here is a more
extensive chart:
Swedish English
Present tenae: Han arbetar. 1. lie works.
2. lie is working.
Past tense: Han arbetade. 1. He worked.
2. He was wOI'king.
Present perfect Han har arbetat. 1. He has worked.
(h a r + supinej: 2. He has been working.
Past perfect Ha n hade arbetat. L He had worked.

(hade + supinej: 2. lie had been working.
From the chart it looks like English has two forms for each tense, ~hereaB
Swedish has only one. This is true, and it is very important for you to
understand, be cause it means that the Swedish verb form arbetar, for exampZe,
is uSBd where an English speaker would say "works" ~ "is working". The
Unit 5

SWEDISH
English rules about !Jhen one says "works" and when one says "is working"
are complex~ but Swedish has no such difficulty. Arbetar simply expresses
the idea of a person or persons working in present time, and that's all
there is to it. If you try to work forms of att vara inta other Swedish
verb forms just because English uses forms of "to be" in this way, you will
be successfut in confusing the Swede to whom you are talking.
So that you get a good start at tearning this right~ we have made an ex-
panded chart of Swedish verb forms with English equivalents. Study this
chart thoroughly~ and then try to trans late the English forms on the right
to the Swedish forms on the left without looking at the Swedish. Do this
until you are completely comfortable with it, and then make up some simple
English sentences of your own and try to trans late them into good Swedish.
Present tense:
David speaks Swedish.

svenska. { David is speaking Swedish.
~avid talarlofta. David speaks often.
i kv I I. David is speaking tonight.
Past tense:
{ David
~D_a_v_~~'d~_s~p_o_k~e~ Swedish.
,..- svenska. was speaking Swedish.
IDavid taladeimed oss tre gnger. :;,D:",a:...:v--,~i-'d::;,-:::.s. cp.. ::o:.. ;.k.:. :e::.. t o
U s t h re e t i me s .
p telefon nr Mary kom in. David was speaking on the phone when Mary came in.
Unit 5 159

SWEDISH 160
Present perfeet
(har + supine):
pavid has spoken to Mary.
_______~_ med Ma ry. { David has been speaking to Mary.
\Davld har talatimed oss tre gnger. ;;"D~a...:.v--;i.-'d.;.-,h;--a,,-,-s-;-s.....p-'o_k_e_n_ t o u s t h r e e t i me s .
i tre timmar. David has been speaking for three hours.
Past perfeet
(hade + supine):
David had spoken Swedish.

,...- ---, s ven s k a { David had been speaking Swedish.
IDavid hade talatimed Mary, men det hjlpte David had epoken to Mary, but it didn't help.
inte.
om Mary, nr hon kom In. David had been speaking about Mary, when she
came in.
Unit S

SWEDISH
Practice F. Complete the following sentences in three different tenses:

present, past, present perfeet (har + supinej.
CVE
Maj i Sverige. arbeta
Maj arbetar l Sverige. Maj worka in Sweden.

{ Maj is working in Sweden.
Maj arbetade i Sverige. Maj worked in Sweden.
{ Maj Was working in Sweden.
Maj har arbetat i Sverige. Maj has worked in Sweden.
{ Maj has been working in Sweden.
Bo sin vn. trffa

Bo trffar sin vn.
Bo trffade sin vn.
Bo har trffat sin vn.
John sin fru. presentera
John presenterar sin fru.

John presenterade sin fru.
John har presenterat sin fru.
Dah Ig rens i augusti. flytta

Dahlgrens flyttar i augusti.
Dahlgrens ,flyttade i augusti.
Dah I grens har f I yttat l augusti.
Kaffet mycket. kosta
Kaffet kostar mycket.
Kaffet kostade mycket.
Kaffet har kostat mycket.
Unit 5 161

SWEDISH 162
eVE
Ingrid p sin lunch. vnta
Ingrid vntar p sin lunch.

Ingrid vntade p si~ lunch.
Ingrid har vntat p sin lunch.
Astrid om sitt barn. bertta
Astrid berttar om sitt barn.

Astrid berttade om sitt barn.
Astrid har berttat om sitt barn.
Erik om hyran. f rga
Erik frgar om hyran.
Erik frgade om hyran.
Erik har frgat om hyran.
David med advokaten. tala
David talar med advokaten.
David talade med advokaten.
David har talat med advokaten.
Unit S

SWEDISH
Practice G. In the following story, put the verbs that oacur in the present
tense into the past tense. The new version follows on the next page.
George flyttar till Sverige med sin familj och arbetar p en stor ameri-
kansk tidning. En dag, nr han vntar p bussen, trffar han en gammal
vn frn Norra Latin, Lars Holm, och hans far. Lars presenterar George
fr sin far och frgar, om George har tid att titta p en vning, som hans
far vntar p. Han flyttar in den frsta oktober och mblerar den med
sina gamla mbler. Lars berttar, att hans far moderniserar den delvis.
George frgar hur mycket vningen kostar och var man hittar en s fin
vnIng.
Unit 5 163

SWEDISH 164
Answer to Praatiae G.
George flyttade ti II Sverige med sin fami Ij och arbetade p en stor ameri-
kansk tidning. En dag, nr han vntade p bussen, trffade han en gammal
vn frn Norra Latin, Lars Holm, och hans far. Lars presenterade George
fr sin far och frgade, om George hade tid att titta p en vning, som
hans far vntade p. Han flyttade in den frsta oktober och mblerade den
med sina gamla mbler. Lars berttade, att hans far moderniserade den del-
vis. George frgade, hur mycket vningen kostade och var man hittade en
s fin vning.
Practice H. In this practiae, put the verb given in the aue inta the present
perfeat form (har + supine).
eVE
Bo sin vning. modernisera
Bo har moderniserat sin vning.
La rs Maj. trffa
Lars har trffat Maj.
Unit 5

SWEDISH
eUE
Bo tillbaka till USA. flytta
Bo ha r f IYt t a t t i I I ba ka t i I I USA.
Karin p tidningen i tre r. a rb eta
Karin har arbetat p tidningen i tre r.

Maj vningen. mblera
Maj har mblerat vningen.

Erik boken. hi tta
Erik har hittat boken.
David Inte sin far. frga

David har inte frgat sIn far.
Stenmarks inte in i sin vning. f lytta
Stenmarks har inte f.yttat in i sin vning.
_____ du dina pengar p banken? vxla

Har du vxlat dina pengar p banken?
du lunge? vnta
Har du vntat lnge?
Lars med mig mnga gnger. tala
Lars har talat med mig mnga gnger.
Unit 5
165

SWEDISH 166
Point III. Word Order
If you/re getting a feel for Swedish already, you

will have noticed in these last praetiees that the
verb always eomes in seeond place in the sentence.
As was explained in the Basic Sentence Note #16
in Unit 2, the verb always eomes before the sub-
jeet in a main clause when the clause starts with
a direet or indirect object, an adverb, or i f it
is preceded by a subordinate clause.
This is erueial, beeause it is fun-

damental in Swedish word order.
Example8: Det vet jag inte. (direet object)
Igr trffade David sin farbror. (adverb)
Nr Maj flyttade ti II Stoc~holm, trffade hon Erik. (subordinate

clause)
Det hMr mste man komma Ihg!
Unit 5

SWEDISH
Practice I. Now we'll practice word order. Restate the sentenae on the lett
using the cue at the beginning of the sentence.
eVE
Vi flyttar in i vr vning. idag
Idag flyttar vi in i vr vning.
David hittade sin bok. igr
Igr hittade David sin bok.

Karin tittade p Peters bt. morse
I morse tittade Karin p Peters bt.
Lars talar med sin vn frn Amerika. nu
Nu talar Lars med sin vn frn Amerika.

Jag talade med Peter. fr tre veckor sedan
Fr tre veckor sedan talade jag med Peter.
VI trffas i parken. varje dag
Varje dag trffas vi i parken.
Erik vntar lnge p bussen. varje morgon

Varje morgon vntar Erik lnge p bussen.
George hade en vning p Karlavgen. nr vi var I stockholm
Nr vi var i Stockholm, hade George en vning
p Karlavgen.
Unit 5
167

SWEDISH 168
eUE
Sven arbetar p amerikanska ambassaden. nu
Nu arbetar Sven p amerikanska ambassaden.
Maja vxlade sina pengar p banken. igr
Igr vxlade Maja sina pengar p banken.
VI hittade en klocka. nr vi var p Skansen
Nr vi var p Skansen hittade vi en klocka.
Praactice J. We arae including a floara plan of the aparatment at Karalavagen 10.

Discuss the raooms in raelation to each other and describe the furniture you
know the words for in each room. If you want to complete the furnish-
ings ask your teacher for morae vocabulary. Ask each other' the following
questions about the apartment:
Var ter man frukost i vningen?

I vilket rum kan man ta middag?
Var str kylskpet?
Ligger vningen mot norr?
Har vningen ett badrum?
r kket till hger om hall en?
Hur r vardagsrummet mblerat?
Finns det mbler I matsalen?
Var I igger tvttstugan?
I vilken tidning sg Gordon annonsen?
Nr kan Brownings flytta in?
Var kan pojken ha sina leksaker?
Unit 5

SWEDISH
Karlavgen 10 Sder
Matsal Vardagsrum
.e ~
.a
1!
Sovrum
S
Garderob
ster Serveringsrum t----oI Hall liten Badrum Vster

Toalett Hall
Kk Sovrum Badrum Sovrum
Norr
Unit 5 169

SWEDISH 170
LAT OSS TALA SVENSKA!

No~ you can describe your o~n houBe or apartment
and the home you hope to find in S~eden.
Unit 5

SWEDISH
UNIT 6
TRUE AND FALSE
Unit 6 is a aomprehension quiz. Turn on the tape or listen to your teaaher read the
true or false questions. Using the numbered blanks below, mark T (true) or F (false)
after eaeh sentenee. All of the voeabulary used in the quiz is from Units 1-5. We
suggest that you divide up the quiz and aomplete only part of the questions at a time.
You will find the answers an pages 172 - 178. Good Luakl
1. 21. 41. 61.

2. 22. 42. 62.
3. 23. 43. 63.
4. 24. 44. 64.
5. 25. 45. 65.
6. 26. 46. 66.
7. 27. 47. 67.
8. 28. 48. 68.
9. 29. 49. 69.
10. 30. 50. 70.
11. 31. 51. 71.
12. 32. 52. 72.
13. 33. 53. 73.
14. 34. 54. 74.
15. 35. 55. 75.
16. 36. 56. 76.
17. 37. 57. 77.
18. 38. 58. 78.
19. 39. 59. 79.
20. 40. 60. 80.
Unit 6 1? 1

SWEDISH 172
Appendix A. Answers to the unit 6 quiz.
I. Fyra och sju r elva. T
2. Flickor i Amerika talar alltid svenska. F
3. En sjukskterska arbetar p en restaurang. F
4. Gteborg r en stad i Sverige. T
5. En sjman tjnstgr p en bt. T
6. Jrnvgsstationen I igger i domkyrkan. F
7. Det finns mnga hotell en stor stad. T
8. Man kan inte vxl a pengar i en kyrka. T
9. Det r aldrig vackert vder i New York. F
10. Bo tycker om att ta l. F
II. Mnga hus i Amerika r vackra. T
12. Amerikaner dricker inte kaffe. F
13. I Amerika finns det mnga parker. T
14. Lars kan inte dricka brd. T
15. Man kan ta mi ddag p en restaurang. T
16. Nu fr tiden r Stockholm en tandlkare Amerika. F
17. Ni vet hur mycket tta och tv r. T
Unit 6

SWEDISH
18. Man kan antingen ta buss eller tunnelbana Washington. T
19. Ett r har tio mnader. F
20. Min fars bror ~r min moster. F
21. Det finns inga bIlar i Chicago. F
22. Pol iser ger barn garderober. F
23. En I iten garderob ~r mycket rymlig. F
24. Inga btar gr till Gteborg. F
25. En vecka har sju dagar. T
26. Man kan skriva bcker om Sverige. T
27 MIn far och min mosTer ~r mina fr~ldrar. F
28. Bussen stannar vid hllplatsen. T
29. Man ~ter middag p morgonen. F
30. Ingen Ingenjr vet hur mycket tolv och tretton r. F
31. Det r bra att ha bekvma sngar. T
32. I Amerika kostar en kopp kaffe fem re. F
33. Herr Hanssons namn ~r Herr Dalgren. F
34. Det f l nns i nga barn i Skvde. F
35. Man kan dricka vin till middagen. T
36. En sekreterare talar aldrIg p telefon. F
Unit 6 173

SWEDISH 174
37. Matsa I en I i gger i kket. F
38. I Amerika tycker man om att resa med bi I. T
39. Lars Holm tjnstgr p~ en bAt i GTeborgs hamn. T

40. Mnga pojkar heter Peter. T
41 Bibliotek r en stad i Sverige. F
42. Man gr tl II banken fr att vxl a pengar. T
43. Frken Strmbck r herr Hanssons syster. F
44. Vi kan hyra rum p tunnelbanan. F
45. Han gick t i l l Sverige frn New York l morse. F
46. Det finns inte ngon kyrka i Philadelphia. F
47. Alla vningar har fem vardagsrum. F
48. Lars Holm kommer ihg sin vn George Brown. T

49. Man behver mnga stolar p universitetet. T
50. Polisen vet var stationen ligger. T
51 Stora barn r vldigt sm. F
52. Busshllplatser i Amerika r alltid vackra. F
53. Det f i nns mnga rum i ett hote I I. T
54. George Brown ska skriva en bok om svenska stder. T

55. Journalister brukar skriva I tidningar. T
Unit 6

SWEDISH
56. Sjukskterskor och lkare arbetar ti Ilsammans. T
57. Gamla Stan lr vara en charmIg del av Stockholm. T
58. Det tar fem veckor att resa med flyg frn New York t i l l Stockholm. F
59. Det finns mnga bilar i Amerika. T
60. Alla hller med om att qet r bra att ha ett kylskp. T
61. Svenska Dagbladet r ett bermt museum. F
62. De reste tt Il Sverige i Bn ftlj. F
63. Fl yget gr ti II parken. F
64. En bror knner sin syster. T
65. Om man r hungrig vi II man ::lta. T
66. Bussen gr p gatan. T
67. Mattan I igger i taket. F
68. Soffan str i vardagsrummet. T

69. Svenskar tycker mycket om goda smrgsar. T
70. Man behver inte frga om man redan vet ngot. T
71. Halv tolv r 11:30. T
72. Nr man trffas, sger man god dag. T
73. Alla tycker om att resa med lastbt. F
74. Man gr ti l! garderoben fr att hyra en vning. F
Unit 6 175

SWEDISH 176
75. Det finns bara en restaurang I San Francisco. F
76. Det r ro I I gt att hitta ett trevligt hus att bo I. T
77 . Portlern kan ge oss en karta. T
78. Det finns Inga sevrdheter i Stockholm. F
79. Eri k Dalgren r en annonS. F
80. Bo Dalgren presenterar sin fru tr George. T
If you are in doubt about the meaning of a sentence you can check the tran8lation
below.
1. Four and 8eVen are eleven. T

2. Girls in America always speak Swedish. F
S. A nur8e works in a restaurant. F
4. Gothenburg is a city in Sweden. T
5. A sailor work8 on a boat. T
6. The railroad station i8 located in the cathedral. F
7. There are many hotels in a big city. T
8. You can't change money in a church. T
9. The weather is never beautiful in New York. F
10. Bo likes to eat beer. F
11. Many houses in America are beautiful. T
12. Americans don't drink coffee. F
13. There are many parks in America. T
14. Lars can't drink bread. T
15. You can have dinner in a restaurant. T
16. Nowadays stockholm is a dentist in America. F
17. You know how much eight and two are. T
18. One can either take the bus or the subway in Washington. T
19. A year has ten months. F
Unit 6

SWEDISH
20. My father's brother is my aunt. F

21. There are no cars in Chicago. F
22. PoLicemen give chiLdren cLosets. F
23. A smalL cLoset is very roomy. F
24. No boats go to Gothenburg. F
25. A week has seven days. T
26. One can write books about Sweden. T
27. My father and my (maternal) aunt are my parents. F
28. The bus stops at the bus stop. T
29. One eats dinner in the morning. F
30. No engineer knows how much tweLve and thirteen are. F
31. It's good to have comfortable beds. T
32. In America a cup of coffee costs 5 are. F
33. Mr. Hansson's name is Mr. Dalgren. F
34. There are no chiLdren in Skovde. F
35. You can drink wine with your dinner. T
36. A secretary never talks on the phone. F
37. The dining room is in the kitchen. F
38. In America people Like to traveL by ear. T
39. Lars Holm serves (works) on a boat in the Gothenburg harbor. T
40. Many boys are named Peter. T
4lo Library is a city in Sweden. F
42. You go to the bank to change money. T
43. Miss Stromback is Mr. Hansson's sister. F
44. We can rent a room in the subway. F
45. He walked to Sweden from New York this morning. F
46. There is no church in PhiladeLphia. F
47. All apartments have five livingrooms F
48. Lars Holm remembers his friend George Brown. T
49. They need many chairs at the university. T
50. The police know where the station is. T
51. Big children are very small. F
52. Bus stops in America are always beautifuL. F
53. There are many rooms in ahoteL. T
54. George Brown is going to write a book about Swedish citieB. T
55. Journalists usuaLLy write for newspapers. T
56. Nurses and doctors work together. T
57. Gamla Stan is supposed to be a charming part of StockhoLm. T
Unit 6 177

SWEDISH 178
58. It takes five weeks to go by plane from New York to Stockholm. F

59. There are many cars in America. T
60. All agree that it is good to have a refrigerator. T
61. Svenska Dagbladet is a famous museum. F
62. They traveled to Sweden in an easy chair. F
6:3 The flight goea to the park. F
64. A brother knows his sister. T
65. If you're hungry you want to eat. T
66. The bus goes on the street. T
67. The rug is in the ceiling. F
68. Xhe sofa is in the livingroom. T
69. Swedes like good sandwiches very much. T
70. You don't have to ask i f you already know it. T
71. Half past eleven is 11:30. T
72. When people meet they say "hello". T
73. Everybody likes to travel by freighter. F
74. You go to the closet to rent an apartment. F
75. There is only one restaurant in San Francisco. F
76. It's fun to find a nice house to live in. T
77. The hotel clerk oan give us a map. T
78. There are no interesting sights in Stockholm. F
79. Erik Dalgren is an advertisement. F
80. Bo Dalgren introduces his wife to George. T
Unit 6

SWEDISH
UNIT 7
AT THE OFFICE
Basic Sentences
Bill Smith arrives at his new

office in the afternoon.
receptionist receptionist -en -er

service, favor tjnst -en -er
Rec. : 1. Hello. What can I do for you? Go d d a g . Va d k a n j a g s t t I I I t j n s t
(May I help you?) med? ..
successor eftertrdare -n -0
offi-ce kontor -et -0
Bill: 2. I' m Bill Smith, successor to Jag r Bill Smith, eftertrdare tl I I
Peter White. Can you tell me Peter White. Kan ni sga mig var mitt
where my office is (located)? kontor I i gger?
take (imperative) ta
elevator' hiss -en -ar
second a nd ra
floor vning -en -ar
Rec. : 3. Yes, of course. Take the Javisst. Ta hissen till andra
elevator to the third floar. vningen. ..
hall, corridor korridor -en -er
third tredje
door drr -en -ar
4. Go down the hall straight G korridoren rakt fram. Det r
ahead. It's the third door tredje drren till hger.
on the right.
U'YJit 7 179

SWEDISH 180
Secr'e-
tar'Y: 5. Welcome to Stockholm, Mr. Vlkommen tl II Stockholm, Herr Smith.
Smith.
Bill: 6. I'm really going to like it Ja, hr kommer jag skert att trivas.
here. What a nice office! Vi Iket trevl igt kontor!
to pre fe!' att fre/Jra(ga) -drar, -drog, -dragit

pr'efe!'r'ed fredrog
desk skrivbord -et ~~
by vid
wall vgg -en -ar
under', below under
window fnster, fnstret,-~
Seco : 7. Peter' pr'efe!'!'ed to have the Peter fredrog att ha skrivbordet
desk by the wall below the vid vggen under fnstret.
window.
natur'ally naturl igtvis

closer nrmare
bookcase bokhy I Ila -an -or
8. But naturally we can move it Men vi kan naturligtvis flytta det
closer' to the big bookcase. nrmare den stora bokhyllan.
to s tand att st, str, stod, sttt

stand (s) s t r
to place, to put (upr'ightJ att stiiia -er -de -t
put(s) stller
Bill: 9. No, it's fine where it ~8. Nej, det str bra dr det str. Men
But I think I'll put the jag tror jag st II er I ampan hr.
lamp he!'e.
Unit 7

SWEDISH
typewriter skrivmaskin -en -er

Bill: 10. And also~ I need a typewriter. Och s behver jag en skrivmaskin.
wastebasket papperskorg -en -ar

ashtl'ay askfat -et -0
See. : 11. Yes~ and a wastebasket. Do Ja, och en papperskorg. 'Rker ni?
you smoke? Shall I put in Ska jag stlla in ett askfat?
(get) an ashtray?
ugh usch
Bil.l.: 12. No, ugh. Do you smoke? Nej, usch. Rker nI ?
good~ effective~
competent duktig -t -a
to to stop
finish~ att slut/a -ar -ade -at
to usually (do something), att bruk/a -ar -ade -at
to be in the habit of
used to brukade
pack~ package paket -et -0
a day om dagen
See. : 13. No, I have been good and have Nej, Jag har varit duktIg och har
stopped smoking. I used to slutat rka. Jag brukade rka ett
smoke a pack a day. paket om dagen.
reception mottagning -en -ar

at~ with hos
ambassadol' a~bassadr -en -er
Bill: 14. At what time is the reception Hur dags r mottagningen IkvMI I
tonight at the Ambassador's? hos ambassadren?
Unit 7 181

SWEDISH 182
residenee residens -et -er

Sec. : 15. At 6 o'clock in the new resi- KIockan sex i det nya res idenset .
dence.
informal dress vardagskldsel -n 0

Bill : 16. Is it informal? r det vardagskldsel?
gentleman, man man -nen, mn

the Foreign Office Utrikesdepartementet (UD>
to caLL, to phone at1 ri ng/a -er -de -t
has phoned har ringt
to lay, to put att lgg/a -er, laCde), lagt
put (past tense) laCde)
little, small I i II a (definite form sing.)
message meddelande -t -n
Seco : 17. Yes, i t is. And a gentleman Ja, det r det. Och en man frn UD
from the Foreign Office has har ri ngt. Jag I ade det I i II a med-
phoned. I put the little delandet p skrivbordet. *
message on your desk.
meeting sammantrde -t -n
early (in the ~orning) bitti
date datum -et -0
what vad ... fr
Bi ll: 18. Oh, i t was Olle Lindah r. We Jas, det var Olle Lindahl. Vi ska
are going to have a meeting ha ett sammantrde med honom imorgon
with him early tomorrow morn- bitti. Vad r det fr datum idag? *
ing. What date is i t today?
Bixth sjtte
Seco : 19. It's the Bixth of November. Det r den sjtte november.
Unit 7

SWEDISH
dark mrk -t -a
to turn on. to light att tnd/a -er, tnde, tnt
light, aandle ljus -et -0
Bill: 20. It is already beginning to Det brjar redan bli mrkt. Ska
get dark. ShaZl we turn on vi tnda ljuset?
the Zight?
early tidig -t -a
at this time of year s hr rs
See. : 21. Yes, it gets dark early at Ja, det bl ir mrkt tidIgt s hr
this time of year. Do you rs. VI II ni ha en kopp kaffe? ,.
want a cup of eoffee?
Unit 7 183

SWEDISH 184
UNl 'j' 7
Nates on Basic Sentences
1. Vad kan jag st ti II tjnst med? Jdiomatic expY'ession.
3. Andra vni ngen .. See Unit 5, Basic Sentenee Note 9.
17a. Det r det. See Points to Practice III.
17b. Man. Nate that the noun man is iY'Y'egulaY' and does not quite follow any of
the five declensian patteY'ns explained in Points to PY'actice I; man, mannen,
mn, mnnen.
18. Vad ... fr? Instead of the inteY'rogative vi Iken (vi Iket, vi I kal Swedish of ten
usel; vad ... fr in the spoken language.
Examples: Vad r det fr datum i dag? = V i I ket datum r det i dag?

(What date is it today?)
Vad r det fr dag idag? Vilken dag r det idag?

(What day is it today?)
Vad behver du fr bcker?= Vi I ka bcker behver du?

(What books do you need?)
21. s hr rs - idiomatic expY'ession.
Unit '1

SWEDISH
UNIT 7
Points to Practice
Point I. Definite form plural
Point II. Definite form of the noun with adjeatives
Point III. Det r det.

Point IV. ligga, lgga, sitta stta, ete.
Point V. Ordinal numbers
Unit ? 185

186
SWEDISH
Point I. Definite fopm plural

I l
Declension 1. -or; lampa, lampor, lampor~
2. -ar; hiss, hissar, hissar~
3. -er; korridor, korridorer, korridorer~
4. -n; rr.eddelande, meddelanden, meddelandena
5. -0; ljus, ljus, ljusen

lkare, lkare, T1lkarna
a. Most Swedish nouns form the definite plural by simply adding -na to the
indefinite plural form.
Examples: fl ickor~, middag~, ambassadr~ruil.
b. In the fourth declension the indefinite form plural already enda in -n,
so all you add is -a in the definite form.
Examples: meddelande~, sammantrde~.
c. ETT words in the fifth declension~ which have the same form in the in-
definite singular and the indefinite plural take -en as an ending in
the definite form plural.
Examples: kontor@, askfat~, ljusB.
d. EN words in the fifth declension (no uns that end in -are, -er, -ande)
add -na in the definite form plural. Note~ however~ that the final -e in
the -are wopds is dropped before the -na ending is added.
Examples: lkare - lkarna; sekreterare - sekreterarna, but
ordfrande - ordfrandena (ch~irman) ---
Unit 7

SWEDISH
Praetioe A. Ch ange the unde~lined nouns f~om the indefinite fo~m plu~al into
the definite form plural.
Erik stller lampor p bordet.
Erik stller lamporna p bordet.
Bo kper ostar.
ostarna
George tittade p kontor p ambassaden.
kontoren
Bo lgger cigarretter I papperskorgen.
cigarretterna
Ambassadren beskriver sammantrden.
sammantrdena
Eva lade meddelanden p skrivbordet.

meddelandena
Sjukskterskor hjlper ~kare.
Sjukskterskorna lkarna
Kontor behver sekreterare.
Kontoren sek rete ra rna
Unit 7 187

SWEDISH 188
Ppactice B. Now we eontinue with the definite pLupaL fopm in the same way, but
hepe the undeplined. noun is given in the singulap. FoLLow the exampLe. Remem-
bep to adjust the adjectives to the pLuraL nouns.
Example: La rs best I I de rummet p hote I I et. Lars pesepved the poom at the hotel.
Lars bestllde rummen p hotellet. Lars reserved the rooms at the hotel.
Hsten i Sverige r kort.
Hstarna i Sverige r korta.
Aret gick lngsamt fr flickan.
Aren gick lngsamt fr flickan.
Klockan, som kostade mycket, var bra.
Klockorna, som kostade mycket, var bra.
Journa I i sten, som arbetar p Dagens Nyheter, skri ver utmrkt svenska.
Journalisterna, som arbetar p Dagens Nyheter, skriver utmrkt svenska.
Mannen p gatan vntade p bussen.
Mnnen p gatan vntade p bussarna.
Flickan i receptionen var trevlig.
F I i ckorna recept i onen va r trev I i ga.
Lkaren och ingenjren hade varit i Amerika.
Lkarna och ingenjrerna hade varit I Amerika.
Vggen rummet r bl.
Unit 7

SWEDISH
Vggarna I rummet r bla.
Slottet Sverige lr vara bermt.
Slotten Sverige lr vara bermda.

Brodern var tandlkare i Skvde.
Brderna var tandlkare i Skvde.
Point II. Definite form of the noun with ad,iectives
the door is high drren r hg den hga drren the high door
the table is big bordet r sto rt det s to ra bordet the big table
the doors are high drrarna r hga de hga drrarna the high doors
the tables a!'e big borden r stora de stora bo rde n the big tables
~
"~ Look carefully at the chart above. Observe what happens to the definite
, ' " form of a Swedish noun when it is preceded by an adjective.
a. The noun gets an additional definite article placed in front of the

adjective, ~ for EN words, ~ for ETT words, ~for plurals.
~
'
~~
" "'- b. The definite article at the end of the noun remains.
,
c. The adjective gets the ending B fOl' all forms.
~
Unit l' 189

SWEDISH 190
Practice C. Using the cue word(s), put the subject noun ~n its proper definite
form when preceded by an adjective.
eUE
Boken I igger p bordet. s to r
Den stora boken I igger p bordet.
Klockan I igger p bordet. gammal
Den gamla klockan I igger p bordet.
Cigarretterna I igger p bordet. kort
De korta cigarretterna I igger p bordet.
Brdet ligger p bordet. god
Det goda brdet I igger p bordet.
Smrgsen I igger p bordet. f i n
Den fina smrgsen I igger p bordet.
Tid..!:Llllgen. ligger p bordet. svensk
Den svenska tidningen I igger p bordet.
Mannen str vid hrnet. trevlig
Den trevliga mannen str vid hrnet.
Lkaren str vid hrnet. v n I i g

Den vnj iga lkaren str vid hrnet.
Unit 7

SWEDISH
eUE
Hotell et I igger vid hrnet. ny
Det nya hotellet ligger vid hrnet.
Taxin str vid hrnet. ledig
Den lediga taxin str vid hrnet.
Paketen str vid hrnet. stor
De stora paketen str vid hrnet.

Bilarna kostar mycket pengar. amerikansk
De amerikanska bi larna kostar mycket pengar.

Vinerna kostar mycket pengar. fin
De fina vinerna kostar mycket pengar.
~et kostar mycket pengar. dyr
Det dyra let kostar mycket pengar.
Vykortet kostar mycket pengar. intressant, gammal
Det intressanta, gamla vykortet kostar mycket pengar.
Unit ? 191

SWEDISH 192
PY'actice D. Many mOY'e examples to lJoY'k on. InseY't the cue adjective(s} 1-1l
fY'ont of the wOY'ds that aY'e undeY'lined.
eVE
P promenaden i Gamla Stan sg vi flera gamla kyrkor. ko rt
P den korta promenaden 1 Gamla Stan sg vi flera gamla kyrkor.
George och hans fru tycker om vdret i Stockholm. vacker
George och hans fru tycker om det vackra vdret Stockholm.
George behver advokaten, som du talade om. duktig, svensk
George behver den duktiga, svenska advokaten, som du talade om.
Flera bussar stannade vid hamnen. gammal
Flera bussar stannade vid den gamla hamnen.
Kyrkorna i stan I igger nra slottet. intressant

De intressanta kyrkorna i stan I igger nra slottet.
Mannen i kket var Lars farfar. charmig, gammal

Den charmiga, gamla mannen l kket var Lars farfar.
Skrivmaskinen str p bokhyllan vid fnstret. ny

Den nya skrivmaskinen str p bokhyllan vid fnstret.
Mannen tittade p smrgsarna och let. hungrig

Den hungriga mannen tittade p smrgsarna och let.
Unit ?

SWEDISH
eUE
Imorgon tar Er i k tunnelbanan t i I I pa rken i ngby. stor
Imorgon ta r Erik tunnelbanan tl I I den stora parken i ngby.
Arbetar La rs fortfarande p restaurangen i Gamla stan? trevl ig
Arbetar La rs fortfarande p den trevliga restaurangen i Gamla Stan?
Har du varit p residenset? gammal
Har du varit p det gamla residenset?
Flickorna tog Katarinahissen fr att se utsikten. amerikansk
De amerikanska fl iekorna tog Katarinahissen fr att se utsikten.
Sekreteraren lade meddelandena papperskorgen. hg
Sekreteraren lade meddelandena den hga papperskorgen.
Morbrderna kom p middag igr. s n I I
De snlla morbrderna kom p middag igr.
LITEN, LITET, LILLA, SM)\. (little small)
Swedes use the adjective "little" quite often because it's also used as an endear-
ment. Examples: I i II a gumman, I III a gubben (sweetie, dear. Gumm/a -an -or
actually means "old lady" and gubb/e -en -ar "old man".)
Also remember LITE (a little bit, 8ome) from the vocabulary list in Unit 1.
ExampZe: Vill du ha lite brd, lite mjlk?
Unit 7 193

SWEDISH 194
This common Swedish adjective is irregular, as you can see from the char t
below. LILLA is only used in the definite form singular, SMA for all plural
forms.
a little gi~l en liten flicka den l i l l a flickan the little girl
a little child ett I i tet barn det I i I I a barnet the little chi ld
little girls sm flickor de sm flickorna the little girls
little chi ldren sm barn de sm barnen the little children
Practice E. Change the follo~ing sentences so that the underlined part is

in the definite form.
Bibi ioteket I igger nra en liten restaurang.
Bibi ioteket I igger nra den I i Ila restaurangen.
Marie kper ett litet glas.
det lilla glaset.
Sekreteraren tnder ett I itet ljus.
det lilla ljuset.
Vad kostar en I i ten k locka?
den lilla klockan?
Sm barn dricker grna mjlk.
De sm barnen
Unit ?

SWEDISH
Sm b t a r r t r ev I i g a at t ha .
De sm bta rna
Berti I vi Ile ta sm smrgsar.
de sm smrgsarna.
Nu ska Ingrid skrIva ett I Itst brev.
det I i I la brevet.
Herr Pettersson var journal ist p en liten svensk tidning.
den I I I la svenska tidningen.
Vi bor en trevlig I iten stad.
den trevl iga I i II a staden.
De bor trevl iga sm stder.
de trev I I ga sm stderna.
Unit 7 195

SWEDISH 196
Point III. Det r det.
To answer questions with the equivalent of: Yes, it is; no, it isn't; yes, he
does; no, he doesn't, etc. the Swedes have a format which you must learn. The
cue is Ja, det . ; nej, det . i jo, det . Jo is used to ansUJer a nega-
tive question-in the affirmative.
Question Answer
r det hr Stockholm? Ja, det r det.

r det hr en skrivmaskin? Nej, det r det inte.
Kommer Karin snart? J a, d et g r h o n .
Stannar David lnge? Nej, det gr han inte.
Ska du inte ta lunch? Jo, det ska jag.
Ska ni Inte ta lunch? Nej, det ska vi inte.
Vi I I Peter trffa henne? Ja, det vi II han.
Unit 7

SWEDISH
When the question contains an auxiliary verb J the main verb is not repeated
in the anslJer.
Examples: Ska du ta lunch? - Ja, det ska jag.
Har du talat med Peter? - Ja, det har jag.
Vi II du komma? - Ja, det vi II jag.
If the question has ett vara, att bl i, or att ha as the main verb J this verb
is repeated in the answer.
Examples: r det hr en skrivmaskin? - Ja, det r det.
Blir det mrkt klockan fyra? - Ja, det blir det.
Har du pengar? - Ja, det har jag.
If the question does not contain an auxiliary verb J the anslJer substitutes
gr (gjorde) for the verb.
Examples: Talar du ~venska? - Ja, det ~r jag.
Talade du svenska? - Ja, det gjorde Jag.
Practice F. Using t~a cue lJords anSlJer the questions lJith ja, det ~r han;
nej, det kan hon inte; jo, det gr vi, etc.
eUE
r Lars svensk? ja
Ja, det r han.
Unit 7 197

SWEDISH 198
eVE
Kan Karin stanna lnge i Amerika? nej
Nej, det kan hon inte.
Tjnstgr Lars Holm fortfarande p bten? nej
Nej, det gr han inte.
Kan tandlkare skriva bcker? ja
Ja, det kan de.
r d~t inte Lars Holm? jo
Jo, det r det.
Fr Peter rka 1 kket? nej
Nej, det fr han inte.
Kan inte en advokat titta p det? jo
Jo, det kan han.
Tittar de tv fl lekarna Inte p domkyrkan? jo
Jo, det gr de.
Var det inte vackert? jo
Jo, det var det.
r du hungrig? ja
Ja, det r jag.
Unit 7

SWEDISH
eUE
Vl I I ni komma med i b i I en? nej tack
Nej tack, det vi II vi inte.
Ska George stanna i Sverige? nej
Nej, det ska han inte.
Vi I I du i nte ha en kopp ka He? nej tack
Nej tack, det vi II jag inte.
VIII ni komma ombord? ja grna
J a, det v i I I vi grna.
Ska Bos fru mblera vningen? ja
J a, det ska hon.
r d et hr din syster? ja
Ja, det r det.
r det inte din morbror, som kommer dr borta? jo
Jo, det r det.
Unit 7 199

SWEDISH 200
Point IV. LIGGA, LGGA, SITTA, STTA, etc.
Transitive Intransitive
lay lgga I i gga He
place st I I a - st stand
ITO PUTI ITO BEl
set stta sitta sit
hang hnga hnga hang
In describing the location of objects and the placement of them, Swedes use
very specific words. In English we are usually satisfied with the verbs
"to be" and "to put". As we pointed out in Unit 4, Basic Sentence Note 3,
att I i gga is used in the sense of "is", "is located" in reference to geo-
graphical concepts, buildings, etc.
Examples: Var I igger stationen? Where is the station?
Bten I igger i Gteborgs hamn. The ship is in the Gothenburg harbor.
Stockholm I igger i Sverige. Stockholm is in Sweden.
Unit 7

SWEDISH
Att sitta, att I igga, att st, att hnga are used to describe the where-
abouts of all sorts of things in a place.
Examples: Klockan sitter p vggen. The clock is on the wall.

Lampan hnger ver soffan. The lamp is(hanging) over the sofa.
Boken I igger p bordet. The book is on the table.
There is more logic in this usage than one might think at first. Things
with legs usually str, flat objects I igger, and so do buildings and places.
Practice G. BeZow are some intransitive and transitive verbs that we are
going to practice. Choose the appropriate verb from either column and
complete the sentences. Your choice consists of:
Intransitive Transitive
l i gger lgger
st r stller
sitter stter
hnger hnger
Note: att st I I a and att stta are often interchangeabl-e.
David lampan ver soffan.
David hnger I ampa n ver soffan.
Be rt i I lampan p bordet.
stller (stter)
Gu n vo r bckerna bokhyllan.
stller (stter) __--w- _
Unit 7 201

SWEDISH 202
Lena bckerna p bordet.
lgger
Sjukskterskan vid nedgngen til I tunnelbanan.
st r
T~get p stationen.
st r
Jag kopparna p matsalsbordet.
stller <stter)
Museet i nrheten av parken.
I i gger
Mi n mo rb ror I soffan.
sitter
Bos farbror p sngen.
I i gger
Lampan taket.
hnger
Mamma middagen p bordet.
stter <stller)
Unit 7

SWEDISH
Point V. Ordinal Numbers
1 frsta 11 e I f te 21 tjugofrsta
2 andra 12 to I f te 22 tjugoandra
3 tredje 13 trettonde 23 tjugotredje
4 fjrde 14 fjortonde 24 tjugofjrde
5 femte 15 femtonde 25 tjugofemte
6 sjtte 16 sextonde 26 tjugosjtte
7 sjunde 17 sjuttonde 27 tjugosjunde
8 ttonde 18 artonde 28 tjugottonde
9 nionde 19 nittonde 29 tjugonionde
10 tionde 20 tjugonde 30 trettionde
31 trettiofrsta
-de -nde "'irreguLar"
13 trettonde 7 sjunde 1 frsta

14 fjortonde 9 nionde 2 andra
15 femtonde 10 tionde 3 tredje
16 sextonde 20 tjugonde 4 fjrde
17 sjuttonde 30 trettionde 5 femte
18 artonde 40 fyrtionde 6 sjtte
19 nlttonde 50 femtionde 8 ttonde
100 hundrade 60 sextionde 11 e I f te
1000 tusende 70 sjuttionde 12 to I f te
80 ttionde
90 nittionde
Nate: a. The article den is always used with dates.
b. There is no preposition between the ordinal number and the month.
Example: Det r den fjrde jul I. It's the fourth ~ July.
Unit 7

SWEDISH 204
VI TALAR SVENSKA
Now your Swedish has expanded considerably and
is becoming more sophiBticated. Let's use it
in questions and answers, talking about things
in the room and outside . Example: L i gger den
stora boken p bordet? Ja, det gr den.
You oan also ask eaoh other questions which

involve dates. , ,,
....,. . @)"
.!; ...-
""
Unit ?

SWEDISH
UNIT 8
SHOPPING FOR CLOTHES
Basio Sentenoes
where (where to) vart
to shop att handl/a -ar -ada -at
man's suit kostym -en -er
dress klnning -en -ar
don't you?, isn't it?, etc. el I er hur?
John: 1. Where are we going shopping? Vart ska vi g och handla? Jag be-
I need a suit and you want to hver en kostym och du vi I I titta p
look at a dress, don't you? en klnning, eller hur? >I
department store varuhus -et -0

Mary: 2. Let'8 go to one of the depart- VI gr till ett av varuhusen i stan.
ment stores in town.
probably vl
ready frdig -t -a
to Bew att sy -r -dde -tt
BeWn sydd, sytt, sydda
ready made frdig/sydd -sytt -sydda
3. You are buying a ready made Ou tnker v I kpa en frd i gsydd
Buit, arBn't you? kostym? >I
to pay att betal/a -ar -ade -at

morB mer
than n
more than mer n
John: 4. Yes, I don't want to pay morB Ja, Jag vi I I tnte betala mer n
than 800 crowns. tta hundra kronor.
Unit 8 205

SWEDISH 206
to afford att ha rd med; har, ha de, haft

can afford har rd med
Mary: 5. We can prohably afford that. Det har vi nog rd med.
busy upptag/en -et -na

John: 6. Hello, are you busy? I need Goddag, r ni upptagen? Jag behver en
a suit, and my wife wants to kostym och mi n fru vi II se p en kln-
look at a dress. ning.
lady dam -en -er

clothes, wear klder (plural)
Clerk: 'l. Ladies' wear is on the next Damklder finns en trappa upp.
floar.
up, upstairs uppe

clerk, salesperson expedit -en -er
to show att vis/a -ar -ade -at
8. The clerk up there can show Expediten dr uppe kan visa klnning-
the dresses. a rna.
color frg -en -er

to have in mind, to imagine att tnk/a sig; -er -te -t
had in mind hade tnkt
good-looking sny 99 -t -a
gray gr -tt -a
9. What color did you have in Vi Iken frg hade ni tnkt er? Hl:lr har vi
mind? Here is a very good- en mycket snygg gr kostym. *
looking gray suit.
Unit p

SWEDISH
navy blue marinbl -tt -a

John: 10. No~ I think I proefel' something Nej, jag tror jag fredrar ngot
in navy blue. There is a nice marinbltt. Det hnger en snygg
suit (hanging) avel' thel'e. kostym dr borta. *
to try on att prov/a -ar -ade -at

both bda
to sit, to fit att sitt/a -er, satt, suttit
fi t (s) sitter
11. I'll try on both, and then I'll Jag provar bda, och s tar jag den som
take the one that fits the best. sitter bst.
tailor skrddare -n -0
to alter, to change att ndr/a -ar -ade -at
length I ngd -en -er
pants byxor (plural)
Clel'k: 12. Our tailor can alter the length Vr skrddare kan ndra lngden p
of the pants. byxorna.
John: 13. Fine. When wi II they be ready? Utmrkt. Nr blir de frdiga?
to open att ppn/a -ar -ade -at

Clerk: 14. You can pick them up on Tuesday. Ni kan hmta dem p tisdag. VI ppnar
We open at nine o'clock. klockan nio.
shirt skjort/a -an -or

John: 15. Thank you. I need a couple of Tack. Jag behver ett par skjortor
shirts too. ocks.
Unit 8 207

SWEDISH 208
to dress att kl sig; -r -dde -tt

dress(es) klr sig
spring vr -en -ar
to use att anvnd/a -er, anvnde, anvnt
sleeve rm -en -ar
John: 16. How do you dress here in the Hur klr man sig hr p vren? Kan man
spring? Can you use short- anvnda skjortor med kort rm?
sleeved shirts?
aoZd ka I I -t -a
summer sommar, -en, somrar
warm varm -t -a
sometimes ibland
size storlek -en -ar
Clerk: 17. No, you aan't. It's too aold. Nej, det kan man inte. Det r fr kallt.
But in the summer it gets warm Men p sommaren blir det varmt ibland.
sometimes . What size do you Vilken storlek har ni?
take?
beaause, [01' fr
number, size nummer, numret -0
the same densamma, detsamma, desamma
aB, like som
same as samma som
John: 18. I don't know, beaause the sizes Jag vet I nte, fr numren r v I
are pl'obably not the same here
as in the U.S.
inte desamma hr som i Amerika. "
measul'e mtt -et -0

to meaSUl'e att ta mtt p; tar, tog, tagit
Clel'k: 19. I can measure you. Jag kan ta mtt p er.
Unit 8

SWEDISH
pure, clean ren -t -a

ca tton bomu I I -e n 0
very mycket
quaZity kval ite -n -er
absolutely absolut
to iron att stryk/a -er, strk, struk l t
free fri -tt -a
non-iron strykfri -tt -a
Clerk: 20. Here we have an excellent ahirt, Hr har vi en utmrkt skjorta l ren
pure cotton. Ve1"Y good quaUty bomu I I. Mycket b ra kva I i te och abso I ut
and absolutely non-iron. strykfri.
"light blue ljusbl -tt -a

John: 21. If you have it in light blue Om den finns i ljusbltt s tar jag
I'l"l tak e it. den.
something, anything ngonti ng

else annan, annat, andra
tie si ips -en -ar
underwear underklder (plural)
sock, stocking strump/a -an -or
glove hands k/e -en -ar
hat hatt -en -ar
Clerk: 22. Do you need anything else? Per- Behver ni ngonting annat? Kanske ngon
haps a tie? Underwear~ socks~ 51 ips? Ngra underklder, strumpor,
gloves, 01" a hat? handskar eli er en hatt?
shoe sko -n -r
John: 23. Yes, I would like to look at Ja, jag vi II grna se p ett par skor.
a pai1" of shoes.
Unit 8 ;,f O9

SWEDISH 210
de par tmen t avdelning -en -ar

shoe department skoavdelning -en -ar
escalator ru I I trapp/a -an -or
Clerk: 24. The shoe department is to the Skoavdelningen ligger t i l l hger p
right on the fourth floor. You tredje vningen. Ni kan ta rull-
can take the escalator over trappan dr borta.
there.
to have time att hinn/a -er, hann, hunnit

have (has) time hInner
John: 25. I don't think I have time to- Jag tror inte jag hinner idag. Jag
day. I have to go and see what mste g och se vad min fru gr.
my wife is doing.
well. I'LL be ... nej, men

evening gown aftonklnning -en -ar
26. Welt. I'll be .... you bought Nej, men har du kpt en aftonklnning!
an evening gown!
pretty. cute. sweet st, stt, sta

darling lskling -en -ar
favori te co lol' lsklingsfrg -en -er
Mary: 2? Yes. can you imagine? I've Ja, kan du tnka dig, jag har hittat en
found a very pretty red dress, vldIgt st rd klnning, min lsklings-
my favorite coLol'. f rg.
to hear att hra, hr, hrde, hrt

hear (imperative). listen hr
suede mocka - n 0
jacket jack/a -an -or
28. Listen. should we Look at a Hr du, ska vi titta p en mockajacka
suede jacket too? ocks?
Unit 8

SWEDISH
to shop att shopp/a -ar -ade -at

enough tillrckligt
John: 29. Don't you think that we have Tycker du Inte att vi har shoppat 1'111-
shopped enough foro one day? r:kl igt fr en das?
to read att ls/a -er -te -t

read (past tense) lste
sale, priae reduation rea (real isation -en -er)
furaoat pls -en -ar
store, shop affr -en -er
furrier plsaffr -en -er
square, market plaae torg -et -\1l
Maroy: 30. Maybe, but I read in the paper Kanske det, men jag lste l tidningen
this morning that theroe is a J morse att det r rea i p I sa ffren
sale at the furrier's on the vid torget.
square.
as you know, of course Ju

center of town, downtown centrum -et, centra
John: 31. OK, let's take the bus down- OK, vi kan ju ta bussen ti II centrum.
town.
Unit 8
211

SWEDISH 212
UNIT B
Nates on Hasic Sentences
l. el ler hur? (always at the end of a sentenceJ is an expressian corresponding to

a great variety of English "tag questions": don't you, haven't you, isn't it,
hasn't he, aren't they, etc. It is similar to the German "nieht wahr?" and
the Freneh "n'est-ce pas?"
J. vl is sometimes added in a Swedish sentence in order to express a wish for

eonfirmatian. English speakers frequently do this by stressing the first
verb and adding a "tag question" sueh as "isn't it?"
5. nog (see Nate 3) is used similarly in Swedish and has no exaet English equivalent,
although "probably" eomes elose. Nog indieates a slight reluetance in stating
some thing. In this case "I guess we can afford that".
9a. vi Iken frg. Here are the most common colors in Swedish:
gr, grtt, gra gray
svart, svart, svarta black
vit, vitt, vita white
g u I, g u I t, g u I a ye II ow
b I , b I t t, b I a b l ue
grn, grnt, grna green
rd, rtt, rda red
brun, brunt, bruna brown
beige, beiget, beigea beige
skr, skrt, skre pink
rosa, rosa, rosa pink, rose-colored
I i I a , I i I a, I i I a p u rp l e
ljusgrn, ljusgrnt, ljusgrna light greEn
mrkbl, mrkbl~tt, mrkbla dark blue
The ett-form of the adjective is used to make the adiective a noun.
Unit B

SWEDISH
9b. hade ni tnkt er. The reflexive att tnka sig is here used in the sense of "to
have in mind". It sometimes means "to imagine" as in Basic Sentence 27.
10. det hnger ... You are familiar with the expression det finns (there is/are). In
Swedish a similar construction is used with many other intransitive verbs.
Examples: Det h ng e r en kostym d r. There is a suit (hanging) there.
Det sitter en man p trappan. There is a man (sitting) on the

steps.
Det I i gger ett meddelande p bordet. There's a message (lying) on the
table.
Kommer det ng ra journal ister i kv I l? Are the re any journalists coming
tonight.
Str det ngon kopp i kket? Is there any cup (standing) in
the kitchen.
In these expressions, det finns, det str, det kommer, etc., det has only one
form, regardless of whether the no uns are en or ett words or plural. See Unit 4,
Points to Practice II.
18a. desamma. Note that the pronoun is declined in Swedish according to the noun i t
refers to.
Examples: Boken r densamma. The book is the same.
Huset r detsamma. The house is the same.
Bckerna r desamma. The books are the same.
18b. fr numren ... The direct translation of "because" is drfr att or emedan. The
latter is hardly ever used in the spoken language. Drfr att-rs of ten replaced
by fr which means "for." It will be useful for you to remember that fr intro-
~uces a main cZause, whereas drfr att and emedan, aB well as the English "because, "
~ntroduce Bubordinate cZauBeB.
Unit 8

SWEDISH 214
26. Nej, men .. - an expression you often hear in Swedish. It expresses surprise
01'a mild protest. It corresponds to "How about that?". "Well. I'll be ... ".
"I declare ... ". "My gosh!".
31. ju - (see Note 3). Another Little fill.er word! Ju impZ-ies that the Z-istener
is already aware of the information given and that the speaker is confirming
it.
The wards vl, nog and ju are difficult to transl.ate since the English transla-
tion is usually much stronger. It is sometimes better not to try to trans late
these words at all.
Unit 8

SWEDISH
UNIT 8
Points to ppactice
Point I: Inteppogative pponoun VILKEN (VILKET, VILKA)
Point II: Indefinite pl'onouns and adjectives

NAGON (NAGOT, NAGRA)
INGEN (INGET, INGA)
Point III: Adverbs indicating rest and motion
Point IV: Second eonjugation vepbs
Point V: Third conjugation vepbs
Unit 8 815

SWEDISH 216
Point I. Interrogative Pronoun VILKEN (VILKET, VILKA) - which, whi~h one(s)
You are already familiar with two interpogative pro-

nouns, VEM (who) and VlID (what). These are nevel"
declined. Now we/ll introduce the interrogative
pronoun and adjective VILKEN. This pl"onoun and
adjective is declined according to the en, ett 01'
plural wOl"d it l"epl"esents as a pronoun or the noun
it modifies as an adjective.
&:;amples: Vilken klnning kpte fru Johnson?

Which dress did Mrs. Johnson buy?
V i I ken kpte hon?
Which one did she buy?
Vilket varuhus gick de till?

Which department store did they go to?
Vilket gick de till?

Which one did they go to?
V II ka skjortor ti ttade herr Johnson p?

Which shirts did MI'. Johnson look at?
Vilka tittade han p?

Which ones did he look at?
Unit 8

SWEDISH
Praatiae A. Restate the following sentences in question form, using

the aorreat form of vi Ike~ with the underlined noun.
En slips ligger p stolen. A tie is on the chair.
Vilken slips ligger p stolen? Which tie is on the chair?
En kos~ kostar 800 kronor.
Vi Iken kostym kostar 800 kronor?
Han dricker ett vin.

Vi Iket vin dricker han?
Peter kper tv skjortor.
Vi Ika skjortor kper Peter?
Plsaffren ligger p Norrmalmstorg.
Vilken plsaffr ligger p Norrmalmstorg?
Expediten visade klnni ngarna.
Vilka klnningar visade expediten?
Han kan anvnda badrummet.
Vi Iket badrum kan han anvnda?
Fru Stenmark hmtade barnet.
Vilket barn hmtade fru Stenmark?
Unit 8

SWEDISH 218
Ppactice B. In this ppactice you pead the sentenee and ask a question about
it using v i I ken, v i I ket, v i I ka as inteppogative pponouns (op vem, vad i f they
ape apppoppiate) instead of the undeplined wopd.
Lena kpte en hatt. Lena bought a hat.
vr I ken kpte hon? Which one did she buy?
Bo ringde frn affren.
Vem ringde frn affren?
Herr Stenmark talade om Amerika.

Vad talade herr Stenmark om?
De kpte en ~.
Vi I ken kpte de?
Bjrn tycker om kaffe.
Vad tycker Bjrn om?
Ingemar talade om Lena.
Vem talade Ingemar om?
Fru Berg hmtade en av bilarna.
Vi lken hmtade hon?
Unit 8

SWEDISH
Point II. Indefinite Pronouns and Adjectives
NAGON, NAGOT, NAGRA INGEN, INGET, INGA
NGONTING INGENTING
--
Ngon and ingen are used both as pronouns and as adjectives and are dec~ined
according to the en, ett or plura~ words they represent or modify.
Ngontjn~ and ingenting are used only as pronouns and are never declined.
Pronouns
ngon someone, somebody, ingen no one, nobody

anyone, anybody
ngot Bomething, anything inget nothing
ngra some, any inga none
ngonting something, anything ingenting nothing
Unit 8 219

SWEDISH 220
Adjectives
ngon (fl icka) some, any, a (girl) ingen (fl icka) no ( gi r l)
ngot (hus) some, any, a (house) inget (h us ) no (house)
ng ra (bcker) some, any (books) inga (bcker) no (books)
A. As Subje cts:
All forms of the indefinite pronouns and adjectives listed above can be
used as subjects or as adjectives modifying subjects in independent and
dependent clauses.
Pronouns
Har ngon en tidning? Ingen sg mig.

Does anyone have apaper? No one saW me.
Ngot lg p bordet. I nget kom i gr.

Something was on the table. Nothing came yesterday.
Ngra av dem rker fr mycket. tnga av pojkarna kommer idag.

Some of them smoke too much. None of the boys are coming today.
Ngonti ng mste ha kommit. Ingenting har kommit.

Something must have come. Nothing has come.
Unit 8

SWEDISH
Adjectives
Har ngon fl icka varit hr? Ingen jacka r snygg.

Has a (any) girl been here? No jaaket is good-looking.
Finns det ngot rum med bad? Inget hus hade hiss.
Is there a (any) room with bath? No house had an elevator.
Ngra kk har diskmaskin. Inga skor var bruna.

Some kitchens have dishwashers. No shoes were brown.
Note: Ingen as Bubject or aB an adjective modifying a subject poses no

problem whatsoever.
Unit 8 221

SWEDISH 222
Inte ngon, Inte ngot, inte ng roa, inte ngont i ng must be used instead
of i ngen, i nget, inga, ingenting in:
a. main cLauses with compound verb forms (auxiLiary + ma~n verb);
ExampLes: Bob ska inte kpa ngon ny b i I.

Bob is not going to buV a (any) new ear.
Peter v i I I inte gra ngonti ng.

Peter doesn't want to do anything ..
Bo har inte trf fat ngra f I i ekor.
Bo has not met a;Y-girLs.
Lena kan inte hitta ngra snygga skor.
Lena can't find any good-Looking shoes.
b. main eLauses with verb + ~articLe or preposition;
ExampLes: Lars kommer inte ~ ngonting.

Lars doesn't remember anything.
Ingrid tycker inte om ngon av jackorna.

Ingrid doesn't Like-any of the jackets.
Per talade inte med ngon.

Per spoke to no one.
Bo s e r i n t e E! n g n a n n a n n U 1 I a
Bo doesn't Look at anyone eLse but ULLa.
Unit 8

SWEDISH
o. all dependent elauses.
Examples: Han sa att det inte fanns ngra snygj@~ortor.

Re said that there were no good-looking shirts.
Bi II gick nr han inte hade ngon bi I.

Bill walked when he didn't have a ear.
Nr Per inte har ngot kaffe, dricker han te.

When Per has no eoffee he drinks tea.
Ingen (inget, inga) and ingenting in the objeet position may only be
used in main clauses with simple verb forms.
Examples: Han ser ingen.

Re sees no one.
Lars hittade ingen bra bok.

Lars didn't find any good book.
Stenmarks har inget hus.

The stenmarks have no house.
Bjrn kpte inga skjortor.

Bjorn bought no shirts.
Peter hr ingenting.
Peter hears nothing.
However, inte ngon, inte ngot, Inte ngra, inte ngonting can always
substitute ingen, inget, inga, ingenting in the object position.
Examples: Han ser ingen.; Han ser inte ngon.
Lars hittade ingen bra bok. = Lars hittade inte ngon bra bok.
Unit 8 223

SWEDISH 224
Stenmarks har inget hus. = Stenmarks har inte ngot hus.
Peter hr ingenting. = Peter hr inte ngonting.
Note: Swedes sometimes substitute ngon, ngot for the indefinite

artiele en, ett in questions and negative statements.
Examples: Har Eva ngon rd klnning?

Does Eva have a red dress?
Eva har inte ~~ rd klnning.

Eva doesn't have a red dress.
Har inte Eva ngon rd klnning?

Doesn't Eva have a red dress?
(ef. Eva har en rd klnning.

Eva has a-red dress.)
Unit 8

SWEDISH
P~actice C. He~e is a p~actice on the use of ngon both as p~onoun and

as adjective. Insert the prope~ly declined fo~m of ngon in the open space.
John kpte skjortor affren. John bought some shirts in the store.
John kpte,ngra skjortor affren.
Kpte de - - - - _ ?
ngonting (ngot)
Fick Holms rum (plu~.) p hotellet?

ng ra
Nej, vi har ingen bil, har du - - - _ ?
ngon
Kostade det att ringa?

ngot
Kpte Mary klnning p varuhuset?
ngon
Och strumporna? Kpte du ?

--.---
n~gra
Finns det varuhus i Stockhol m?

ngot
(p l-u~.) kom och (pl-ur.) g i ck.

Ng ra n g ra
Unit 8 225

SWEDISH 226
(sing.) vntar p dig p kontoret.
Ngon
vningar r ljusa.
Ngra
kk (plur.) hade inte diskmaskin.
Ngra
(sing.) flyttade In en trappa upp.
Ngon
Sa han - - - - ?
ngot (ngonting)
vn brukar alltid mta henne vid flyget.

Ngon
pojkar och flickor rkte l korridoren.

Ngra
Unit 8

SWEDISH
Practice D. Now we'll practice some examples of ingen in its adjective

form. Here ingen modifies the object noun in main clauses with simple
verb forms HO you may use both ingen and inte ngon. Do this practice
twiae~using Ingen the first time and Inte ngon the seaond time. Insert
the proper form in the blank space and repeat the complete sentence.
De ha r barn (plur.). They have no children.
De har Inga (inte ngra) barn.
Holms har vning.

ingen (inte ngon)
Lars vxlade pengar p stationen.
inga (inte ngra)
Fru Stenmark kpte klnning igr.

ingen (inte ngon)
Hon hade vningar att visa.
inga (inte ngra)
Kontoret har fnster (sing.) mot sder.
inget (i nte ngot)
Det fanns kostym som passade.

ingen (inte ngon)
Gran kpte bcker.

inga (inte ngra)
Unit 8 227

SWEDISH 228
Praetiee E. We 'tZ eontinue vith examptes of ~ both as adjective and

pronoun. Substitute the proper form of ingen for the underlined vord, or
insert it into the blank spaoe. Ingen appears both as subjeat and objeat
in main clauses vith simple verb forms.
Lars har varit hr.. Lars has been here.
Ingen har varit hr. No one has been here.
Stenmarks kom, nr Lena fyllde tio r.
Inga
Bo hrde mycket om Stockholm.
inget (ingenting)
Hans syster har mnga barn.
Inga
Ska du komma med?
ingen
Greta var hemma, nr vi kom.
Ingen
Hon hade lust att g ut.
ingen
Unit 8

SWEDISH
rum lg mot sder.
Inget (Inga)
Erik behver pengar man han fr

inga
Berti I har tre sner, men ser ut som sin far.
i nge n
kommer att tycka om det hr kket.
Ingen
Practice F. In this practice ingen is in the objeot position. Restate

the ~entences using the cues.
CllE
Ulla hade ingen tid. Ulla had no time. har haft
Ulla har inte haft ngon tid. Ulla has had no time.
De sg ingen polis. har sett
De har inte sett ngon polis.
Lena skriver ingen bok om svenska stder. ska skriva

Lena ska inte skriva ngon bok om svenska stder.
Unit 8 229

SWEDISH 230
eVE
Bob trffade inga svenskar. har trffat
Bob har inte traffat ngra svenskar.
De hr ingenting. kan hra
De kan inte hra ngonting.
De minns ingenting. De sger att minns
De sger att de inte minns ngonting.

Bill sg ingen flicka i rummet. sg p
B i I I sg i nte p ngon f I l cka rummet.
Birgitta frgade ingenting. frgade om
Birgitta frgade Inte om ngonting.
Unit 8

SWEDISH
Practice G. UBB forms of V I LKEN, VEM, VAD in the blank spaces in the
questions on the lett and proper forms of I NGEN, INTE NAGON in the
answerB on the right.
Questions: Answers:
pojkar tog bussen tIll museet? pojkar tog bussen.
V i I ka Inga
har tnt ljuset p kontoret? har tnt ljuset.
Vem Ingen
soffa kpte sten? Han kpte soffa.
Vi I ken ingen (inte ngon)
- - - - har ni talat om idag? Vi ha r talat om
VBd (vem) inte ngonting (ngon)
vnner ska Bo fara ti II? Bo ska f a ra ti I I vnner.
Vi I ka inte ngra
sg honom? sg honom.
Vem Ingen
talade Lars med? Han talade med
Vem inte ngon.
pls tycker Mary om? Hon tycker om pls.
Vi I ken Inte ngon
Unit 8 231

SWEDISH 232
Questions: Answers:
skriver Eva ti I l? Hon skriv~r t i I I
Vem Hon skriver inte t i l l ngon.
tnker han gra? Han tnker gra
Vad Han tnker inte gra ngonting.
LT OSS TALA SVENSKA!

Use your imagination and give a reason for the
responses on the right in Practice G.
Example: I nga pojkar tog bussen, tr de hade I nte ngra pengar;

tr de vi II e l nte se museet, etc.
--
~-~-
--- - -- - -
Unit 8

SWEDISH
Point III: Adverbs of Place Indicating Rest and Motion
In this Unit you meet a group of adverbs denoting place which have two
distinct forms in Swedish. One form, Group A, is used with verbs of rest
(indicating a stationary situation). The other, Group B, is used with
verbs of motion (indicating movement to or from a place).
Rest at a Place (A) Motion to or from a Place (B)
VAR? VART?
Inne in in
ute out ut
framme there f ram
uppe up up p
nere down ner
h'r here hit
dr there dit
borta away bort
hemma at home hame hem
Nate: It is important to remember that the single

word hemma means at home.
The most common verbs of The most common verbs of motion

reat are: to or from a place are:
att vara att g
st komma
I i gga fa ra
sitta resa
stanna ka (to go, to travet)
finnas f lytta
bo springa (to run)
trivas kra (to drive)
flyga (to fZy)
Unit 8
233

SWEDISH 234
Examp~es: A. Margareta r hr. Margareta is here.

B. Margareta kommer hit. Margareta is coming here.
A. Mamma stannar hemma. Mother is Btaying (at) home.

B. Mamma gr hem. Mother is going home.
Practiae H. Let's praotiae adverbs from Group A. eomp~ete the sentenae,

ahoosing the aorreat adverb given in the cue.
eUE
Ka r i n r Karin is at home. hem, hemma
Karin r hemma.
Ro I f r bort, borta
borta
Sven r hr, hit
hr
Maria r I huset. in, inne
inne
Sov rummet I i gger p andra vningen. upp, uppe
uppe
Din mormor sitter i kket. ut, ute
ute
Unit 8

SWEDISH
eUE
Bten ligger J hamnen. ner, nere
ne re
Nr r vi f r a m, f r a mm e
---- ?
framme
Expediten str dr, dit
dr
Hur lnge stannar du - - - -? hr, hit
hr
bra men bst. Swedish proverb: There's bort, borta; hem, hemma
no plaoe like home.
Borta hemma
Unit 8 235

SWEDISH 238
Practice I. Now we'tt practice adverbs from Group B.
eVE
Sven gr Sven is going out. ut, ute
ut
Lena kom hem, hemma
hem
Hissen g r upp, uppe
upp
Fa r han med '1 d r, dit
dit
Han g r t i I I hamnen. ne r, nere
ner
Nr kom Bergs ? f ram, framme
fram
Hur dags kom Lars i g r? hem, hemma
hem
Unit 8

SWEDISH
Praatice J. In this practice. exchange the underlined verb in the sentence

for the cue verb keeping the same tense as in the original sentence. Use the
correct adverb with the aue verb.
eUE
Fru Andersson sitter hr. Mrs. A. is sitting here. komma
Fru Andersson kommer hit. Mrs. A. is coming here.
Bo gr upp p a nd ra vningen. va ra
Bo r uppe p a nd ra vningen.
Herr Borg var framme klockan 4. komma
Herr Borg kom f ram klockan 4.
Lenas bror sitter Inne 1 vardagsrummet. g
Lenas bror g r i n i va rdags rummet.

Kar i n krde hem. va ra
Karin var hemma.
Vi r uppe p andra vningen. ta hissen tll I

Vi tar hi ssen upp tl II andra vningen.
lars .s..!.r.: ut parken. sitta

La rs sitter ute i pa rken.
Margareta r hemma idag. komma
Margareta kommer hem Idag.
Unit 8 237

SWEDISH 238
eVE
Herr Johnson r hr och kper en kostym fara
Herr Johnson far hit och kper en kostym.
Fru Berg tar en taxi dit och kper ett par skor. va ra
Fru Berg r dr och kper ett par skor.
KatarIna kommer hit. stanna
Katarina stannar hr.
Vi r borta ikvll. g
Vi gr bort ikvll.
Fru Blomkvist gr hem tidigt. va ra
Fru Blomkvist r hemma tidigt.
Bilen str dr. kra
Bi len kr dit.
Unit 8

SWEDISH
Let's give some special attention to the question words VAR, VART, where J
where to.
VAR (where) is used with verbs indicating rest.
VART (where to) is used with verbs indicating motion to or from a place.
Examples: Var r du? Where are you?
Vart gr du? Where are you going (to)?
Practice K. Add the proper adverb VAR, VART in the space. Keep the answer8
coveredl
ker Bo? Where is Bo going?
Vart ker Bo?
I igger slottet?
Var
Unit 8
239

SWEDISH 240
gick Anna?
Va rt
str lampan?
Va r
vill du fara?
Va rt
har du hrt det?
Va r
sitter han?
Va r
bor din morbror?
Var
ska ni flytta I oktober?
Vart
ska vi ta middag lkvl l?
Var
ligger Skansen 1 Stockholm?
Va r
Unit 8

SWEDISH
Point IV. Ve~bs of the Second Conjugation
2a 2b
att ringla to eaU att kpa to buy

ring/er call(s) kp/er buy (s)
ring/de called kp/te bought
h a r, hade rlng/t have, had caHed har, hade kp/t have, had bought
P!'esent tense
Ve!'bs of the Second Conjugation add -er to the stem to fo~m the present tense.
Examples: att ringa - ring~; att kpa - kp~
Note: If the stem al~eady ends in -r the uBual present tense ending -er is
left out.
Example8: att hra - hr

att fara - far
att kra - kr
Past tense
In the past tense the ve!'bs of the Second Conjugation have t~o different forms,
-de (2a) and -te (2b).
Unit 8 241

SWEDISH 242
2a. The stems of the verbs in 2a end in a voiced consonant~ such as -I, -m, -n,
-ng, -r, -v. The past tense is formed by adding -de.
Examples: att stlla - stll de

att knna - knde (Second m or n ~s dropped before d and t.)
att ringa - ringde
att hra - hrde
att behva - behvde
2b. The stems of the verbs in 2b end in voiceless consonants~ such as -k, -p,
-s, -t. Here the past tense is formed by adding -te.
Examples: att tycka - tyckte

att kpa - kpte
att resa - reste
att mta - mtte
Supine
Verbs from both 2a and 2b form the supine by adding -t to the stem.
Examples: att ringa - har (hade) ringt

att kpa - har (hade) kpt
Unit 8

SWEDISH
Pr>actice L. This is a pr>actice on 2a ver>bs (past tense: -de). Change the

pr>esent tense to the past tense. Be sur>e to sound the ending ~oud and c~ear>.
Remember> that Swedish has no 1/8i~ent e" WOT'd ending (see Guide to Swedish Pro-
nunciation).
Karin f yl ler koppen med kaffe. Kar>in fills the cup with coffee.
Kari n fy II de koppen med kaffe. Kar>in fi~~ed the cup with coffee.
Lasse stl ler stolen i hrnet.
stllde
Marianne fyller sjutton r hst.
fy I I de
Journalisten tnder sin pipa.
tnde
Mamma behver en ny klnning.
behvde
Pappa ringer alltid hem frn kontoret.
ringde
Fru Borg knner Pe I I es morbror.
knde
David bestller alltid l.
bestllde
Unit 8
243

SWEDISH 244
Vi behver inte fara hem.
behvde
Eva hr Peter komma.
hrde
Sekreteraren ri nger till UD.
ringde
011 e kr ofta mell an Stockhol m och Gteborg.
krde
Practice M. In this practice change the underlined verb from the present tense
to the present perfeet tense (har + supinej.
Karin knner Lars. Karin knows Lars.
Karin har knt Lars. Karin has known Lars.
Bo s t I I e r b o k e n D b o k h Y I I a n
har stllt
Mamma tnder I ampan l matsa I en.
har tnt
Han behver inga pengar.
Han har inte behvt ngra pengar.
Unit 8

SWEDISH
Gsta ringer hem.
har ringt
George ~ en vning I Stockholm.
har hyrt
Stenmarks knner Lars Holm.
har knt
Anne-Marie fyller vinglaset.
har fyllt
Gustav bestller middagen.
har best I I t
Erik hr Ingenting.
Erik har inte hrt ngonting.
Practice N. This is a practice on 2b v6rbs (past tense: -te). Change the

underlined verb to the past tense.
Lisa lser sin bok. Lisa ~s reading hel' book.

Lisa lste sin bok. Lisa read (was reading) hel' book.
Viktor tnker p sin far.
tnkte
Unit 8
245

SWEDISH 246
Damen kper en bl klnning.
kpte
Advokaten rker alltid sin pIpa.
rkte
George Brown tycker om att tala svenska.
tyckte om
Praotiae O. Change the undertined verb from the present tense to the present
perfeet tense (har + supine).
Lisa lser om Sverige. Lisa is reading about Sweden
Lisa har lst om Sverige. Lisa has read (has been reading) about Sweden.
George tnker skrIva hem.
har tnkt
Pe I I e kper en f I n ny kostym.
ha r kpt
Vilken klnnIng tnker du ta?
har du tnkt ta
Vi I ken f I i cka tycker du bst om?
har du tyckt bst om
Unit 8

SWEDISH
Bo tycker bst om att lsa.
har tyckt bst om
Sven rker aldrig cigarretter.
har aldrig rkt
Practice P. In this practice there are verbs from both 2a and 2b. Change
them from the present tense to the past tense.
Fru Johnson behve r en ny klnning. Mrs. Johnson needs a new dress.
Fru Johnson behvde en ny klnning. Mrs. Johnson needed a new dress.
La rs kper en frdigsydd kostym.
kpte
Herr Berg knner Stenmarks.
knde
Tycker fru Alm om sina nya skor?
Tyckte
Lars och Bo bestiiller vin till middagen.

best I I de
George rker inte cigarrer.

rkte
Unit 8 247

SWEDISH 248
Vi lser matsedeln och bestller middagen.
lste bestllde
Dahlgrens ~ en vning, som de tycker om.
hyrde tyckte om
Viktor fyller koppen med kaffe och stller den p bordet.
f Y I I de stllde
Telefonen ringer, men Erik hr den inte.
ringde hrde
Bergs kr t i l l Arlande och mter Peter.
krde mtte
Praetiee Q. Let's vary the praetiee a bit. Fill in the empty spaces with
either the present perfeet or past perfeet form of the eue verb (har or hade
+ supine).
eVE
Vilken vning Lars Whieh apartment has/had
----? hy ra
Lars rented?
Vilken vning har/hade Lars hyrt?
Karin sina klder p varuhuset. kpa
Har/hade kpt
Min sekreterare Inte telefonen. hra
Vnit 8

SWEDISH
eVE
Min sekreterare har/hade inte hrt telefonen.
Johan inte Svenska Dagbladet. lsa
har/hade lst
Fl ickan till Gteborg. resa
har/hade rest
Advokaten 1 nte sitt kontor. rInga
har/hade ringt
Lasse Dah I grens I Ameri ka. knna

har/hade knt
Gran en ny Volvo. bestlla

har/hade best I I t
Unit 8
249

SWEDISH 250
Point v. Verbs of the Third Conjugation
att tro to believe

trolr believe(s)
tro/dde believed
har, hade t roi tt have. had believed
The verbs in this conjugation have no infinitive -a ending. They are usually
one-syllable words. The stem is identical with the infinitive form. The
present tense ending is -r, the past tense ending is -dde, and the supine
form ending is -tt. - --
There are very few verbs in this conjugation. We will only practice the
ones you know already.
Practice R. Change the tense of the underlined verb from the present to the
past tense. Remember the word order.
Mati Ida ~ sin jacka. Matilda is sewing her jacket.
Matiida sydde sin jacka. Matilda sewed her jacket.
Sven tror att Maj tycker om honom.
trodde tyckte om
Unit 8

SWEDISH
lars bor i GBteborg.
bodde
Lkaren sa att Maja mr bra.

mdde
Vi tror att Eva r hemma.

trodde var
Fami Ijen Karlstrm bor Ume.
bodde
Practice S. Let's practice the supine form. Change the verbs in the sentences
below from the past tense to the past perfeet tense (hade + supine).
Min mor sydde en klnning t mig. My mother sewed a dress for me.
Min mor hade sytt en klnning t mig. My mother had sewn a dress for me.
George trodde att han knde sin vn.
hade trott
Eva frgade hur Lars mdde nr han var borta.
hade mtt
Karin bodde i Uppsala.
hade bott
Unit 8 251

SWEDISH 252
Eva sydde sin jacka sjlv.
hade sytt
Sjmannen bodde p bten.
hade bott
Praetiee T. Complete the following story, filling in the blanks with the
appropriate forms of the verbs given in parenthesis. The verbs are from
both the second and third conjugations. You'll find the correet version
on the following page.
Nr Eva (fylla) 14 r och (bo) Stockholm hade hon redan
(sy) flera klnningar t sig sjlv. Hon (tycka om) att sy.
Hon (m) bra, nr hon satt vid symaskinen (the sewing maehine) och
(sy). Hon (tnka) p trevliga vnner som hon (knna).
Naturl igtvis (lsa) hon inte s mnga bcker nu fr tiden, och hennes
mamma (tycka) inte, att hon (behva) s mnga klnningar. Men
flera av flickorna, som hade (bo) lnge samma hus, och som hon
(knna) vl, (ringa) p telefonen och (bestlla) klnningar
hos Eva. De (tnka) lnge p hur klnningarna skulle se ut, och s
(sy) Eva fina klnningar t dem. Ibland (tro) hon nstan

{almost}, att hon var Frken Dior sjlv.
Unit 8

SWEDISH
Co~~ect ve~8ion of P~actice T.
Nr Eva f yl Ide 14 r och bodde Stockholm hade hon redan sytt flera klnningar
t sig sjlv. Hon tyckte om att sy. Hon mdde bra, nr hon satt vid sy-
maskinen och sydde. Hon tnkte p trevliga vnner som hon knde. Naturligt-
vis lste hon inte s mnga bcker nu fr tiden, och hennes mamma tyckte inte,
att hon behvde s mnga klnningar. Men flera av flickorna, som hade bott
lnge j samma hus, och som hon knde vl, ringde p~ telefonen och bestllde
kl!3nningar hos Eva. De tnkte lnge p hur klnningarna skulle se ut, och s
sydde Eva fina kl!3nningar t dem. Ibland trodde hon nstan att hon var Frken
Dior sjlv.
Unit 8 253

SWEDISH 254
UNI']' 9
EATING IN A RESTAURANT
Hasic Sentences
Bill Jones, ne~ly arr'ived in

S~edenJ has lunch ~ith Erik
Dalgren.
lectUr'e fredrag -et -0

real-ly rIktigt
Erik: 1. That ~as a long lectur'B. It's Det var ett lngt fredrag. Klockan
already a quarter past one, r redan en kvart ver ett, och jag
and I' m really hungry. r riktigt hungrig.
2. What do you say about having Vad sger du om att g och ta

lunch togethel'? lunch tillsammans? *
to taste att smak/a -ar -ade -at

Bi U: 3. Yes, that ~il-l be fine (that Ja, det skulle smaka bra. Vart
~ould taste fine). Where shall ska vi g?
~e go?
good, better, best b ra, bttre, bst

food mat -en 0
Erik: 4. The Stadshotell, of course, Ja, Stadshotell et har ju den bsta
has the best food (here) in maten hr i stan.
to~n.
Unit 9

SWEDISH
elose (near), eloser, elosest nra, nrmare, nrmast

Erik: 5. Besides, it eouldn't be eloser. Dessutom kunde det i nte I i gga nrmare.
to le ave, to go att g -r, gick, gtt

not until inte frrn
Bill: 6. Fine. My train does not leave Fint. Mitt tg gr inte frrn
until foul' o'eloek. klockan fyra. *
really verkl igen

rush, hU1'ry brdska -n (Il
opposite, aeross from m'ltt emot
Erik: 7. Yes, there's really no rush. Ja, vi har verkl igen ingen brdska.
The station is aeross from Stationen I igger mitt emot hotellet.
the hote 'l.
inc'l'edib ly otroligt
fast (adverb) fo rt
Bi'l'l : 8. Are we the'l'e already? That r vi redan framme? Det gick otrol igt
went incredibly fast. fort. *
outerwear (overcoats, etc.) ytterklder (plur.)

to leave att lmn/a -ar -ade -at
checkroom, closet garderob -en -er
head waiter hovmstare -n -0
Erik: 9. We can leave our hats and coats Vi ka n j u I mna ytterk lderna
in the check room. garderoben.
There is the head waiter. Dr r hovmstaren. *
Unit 9 255

SWEDISH 256
Read
waiter: 10. A table for two? Ska det vara ett bord fr tv?
far, farther, farthest lng -t - a j lngre, lngst

entranae ingng -en -ar
Erik: 11. Yes, please. Closer to the Ja tack. Nrmare fnstret, om det
window, if it's possible, and gr, och lite lngre bort frn in-
a little farther away from the gngen. *
entl'anae.
to ask, to requBst att be -r, bad, bett

list I i stia -an -or
right away genast
12. May I have the menu and the Fr jag be om matsedeln och vlnl istan?
wine list? We'd better (it is Det r bst vi bestller genast.
best) order right away.
what (kind of) vad fr

main course varmrtt -en -er
Bill: 13. What main courses do you have Vad har ni fr varmrijtter Idag? *
today?
to recommend att rekommender/a -ar -ade -at

unusually ovanligt
fish fisk -en -ar
filet flle -n -er
potato potatis -en -ar
mashed potatoes potatismos -et 0
Read salad, lettuce sallad -en -er
wai ter: 14. We can reaommend an unusually Vi kan rekommendera en ovanligt god
good fish filet with mashed po- fiskflle med potatismos och sallad.
tatoes and salad.
Unit 9

SWEDISH
fried stekt -~ -a
veal, ealf kalv -en -ar
chop kotlett -en -er
boi Zed kokt -0 -Cj
Head vegetable grnsak -en -er
waiter: 15. The (pan-Jfried veal chops with De stekta kalvkotletterna med kokt
boiled potatoes and vegetables potatis och grns?ker r ocks mycket
are also very good. b ra. >I
usual vanlig-t-a
meat ktt -et 0
bun bull/e -en -ar
meat ball kttbull/e -en -ar
bean bn/a -an -or
baked beans bruna bnor
lingonberry I i ngon -et -0
jam, preserves sylt -en -er
16. Then we have, as usual, meat S har.vi, som vanligt, kttbullar
balls with baked beans and med bruna bnor och lingonsylt.
lingonberry jam.
Erik: 17. shaZZ we take the fish filet Ska vi ta fiskfilen d?

then?
fresh frsk - t -a
Bill: 18, It is fresh, isn't it? Den r vl frsk?
Head to guarantee att garanter/a -ar -ade -at

waiter: 19. Oh yes, I can guarantee that. Ja, det kan jag garantera.
Erik: 20, Maybe we shouZd have a glass Vi skulle kanske ha ett glas vitt
of white wine with the fish. vin t i l l fisken.
Unit 9 257

SWEDISH 258
gladly, rather, preferably grna, hell re, helst

BiLL: 21. For my part, I would rather Fr min del skulle jag hellre vilja
have a glass of beer. ha ett glas l.
smorgasbord smrgsbord -et -0

Erik: 22. Shall we start with the smor- Vi brjar vl med smrgsbordet?
gasbord?
drink of aquavit snaps -en -ar

23. What do you say about a drink Vad sger du om en snaps ti II smr-
of aquavit with the smorgas- gsbo rd et?
bord?
Bill: 24. No thanks, not for me. Nej tack, i nte fr mig.
speOich tal -et -0

to hold, to give att hll/a -er, hll, hllit
he ld, gave h I I
to give a spee ch att h I I a ta I
Erik: 25. That was an interesting speech Det var ett intressant tal som Lindahl
that Lindahl gave, wasn't it? hll, eller hur?
sure(ly) vIsst
inte lligen t i ntell igent -0 -a
to think, to be of the att anse -r, ansg. ansett
opinion
suggestion, proposition frslag -et -0
ehance chans -en -er
to sucoeed att lyck/as -as -ades -ats
Bi ll.: 26. Yes, sure he's intelligent. Ja, vi sst r han i ntell i gent. Men
But do you really think that anser du verkligen att hans frslag
his proposition has a chance har en chans att lyckas?
to sucaeed?
Unit 9

SWEDISH
chee1's!, he1'e I s to you! s k I !

E1'ik: 27. No, I' m af1'aid not. Re1'e ' s Nej, tyvrr Inte. Hr kommer maten.
the food. Chee1's, Bill! Skl, Bill!
Oppo1'tunity tillflle -t-n

like this, this way s h r
Bin: 28. Cheers! I hope we/ll have Ja, sk l! Jag hoppas att vi fr
man y opportunities to meet mnga ti II fllen att trffas s
like this. hr. ,.
next nsta
dessert efterrtt -en -er
E1'ik: 29. Next time we/ll take our wivlZs Nsta gng ska vi ta med vra fruar.
a long.
Do you want dessert? VI I I du ha efterrtt?
Bill: ;50. No thanks, just coffee. Nej tack, bara kaffe.
waiter vaktmstare -n -0
check (in 1'estau1'antJ not/a -an -or
same samma
Erik: 31. Waiter, may we have two coffees Vaktmstaren, kan vi f tv kaffe och
and the check at the same time. s notan p samma gng? ,.
hand hand -en, hnder

to take care of att ta hand om; tar, tog, tagit
Bill: 32. I'd like to take care of the Notan ska jag be att f ta hand om.
check.
Unit 9 259

SWEDISH 260
queBtion frgla -an -or

gueBt gst -en -er
Erik: 33. That is out of the question. Kommer aldrig p frgan. Du r min
You are my gueBt. gst.
to thank att tackla -ar -ade -at

Bill: 34. In that aase, thank you very D fr Jag tacka s mycket.
muah.
To the waiter:
tip dricks -en Ql

Erik: 35. Is that with the tip? r det med dricks?
per aent (%) procent -en -0 (%>

waiter: 36. Yes, that's with fifteen per- Ja, det r med femton procent.
aent.
even jmn -t -a
Erik: 37. Thank you very muah. Keep the Tack s mycket. Det r j mnt s. *
ahange (it is even).
~~
~- ~m ...... . ...
~
i.......t.~
"ni..
c."
$<t.......04
_~
- ... ,. _.el'
Unit 9

SWEDISH
UNIT 9
2a. om att g ... Swedish uses the infinitive where English uses the -ing form of the
verb afte~ a preposition.
2b. g och ta The constI'uction using two verbs joined by och is very common in
Swedish.
ExampZes: att sitta och p rata to sit and chat
att st och vanta to (stand and) wait
att g ut och g to JO for a walk
6. Mitt tg gr ... Nate th~t "to leave" has several equivalents in Swedish.
Tget gr klockan sju. The train leaves at seven.

Vi gr nu.
VI ker nu.
Vi far nu.
VI reser nu.
l We are leaving now.
We are leaving noW (by same means of t~an8porta

tion).
Du kan lmna j lekan hr. You can leave your jacket here.
Vi lmnade Sver-ige igr. We left Sweden yesterday.
Att lmna really means "~o leave behind".
8. o t 1"0 I i g t f o r t . Same adJactives take on the opposite me aning when the prefix 0-
is added.
Examples: t ro I 19 - ot ro I I g credible - incredible
vnlig - ovnlig friendly - unfriendly
trevl i9 - otrevl ig nice - unpleasant
mj I l g - omj I i g possible - impossible
Unit 9 261

SWEDISH 262
9. ytterklderna. Swedes use the definite article instead of a possessive when de-
scribing parts of the body or clothing.
Example: Peter borstar tnderna varje kvl I. Peter brushes his teeth every night.
11. om det gAr.- idiomati~ expression meaning "if it is possible". Another example is:
Det gAr inte. It's not possible; it doesn't work.
Det gick inte. It wasn't possible; it didn't work.
13. Vad har ni fr ... See Unit 7, Basic Sentence Note 18.
The expression vad fr slags has the meaning "what kind of".
Example: Vad fr slags te tycker du om? What kind of tea do you tike?
15. potati s - can be used as a non-eount noun in Swedish, like "coffee", "fruit", eta.
28. s hr - here meaning "like this". In the beginning of a sentence sA hr is trans-

lated "this is how", "this is the way".
31a. Vaktmstaren ... This is usually the word used to address a waiter. Another trans-
lation for "waiter" is kypare -n -0, but this word is never used in addressing him.
31b. p samma gAng. Nate that English uses the definite article "the" with the word
"same". The Swedish word samma is always without the definite artiele when samma
modifies a nOUr!. The noun is always in the indefinite form.
Examp1.es: Jag vi I l betala p samma gng. I want to pay at the Bame time.
Det r samma sak. It's the same thing.
Vi bor i samma hus som ni bodde I. We live in the same house as you lived
in.
(ef. Unit 8, Basic Sentenee Note 18)
Unit 9

SWEDISH
37. Det r jmnt s. If a service charge of 12~% or 15% has been added to the bill
it is customary to round out the amount to the nearest crown (or even five crowns
i f it is a sizeable amountJ.
Unit 9 863

SWEDISH 264
UNIT 9
Points to Praotiae
Point I. Comparison of adjectives
Point II. Formation and oomparison of adverbs
Point III. Possessives and certain other words hetore

adjective + noun
unit 9

SWEDISH
Point r. Comparison of Adjectives
positive Comparative Superlative
ka I I {eo ld} kallare {colder} kallast {eotdest}
Most Swedish adjeetives are compared like kal I. They add -are in the eomparative
form and -ast in the superlative form.
Examples: Vintern r kall i Stockholm, The winter is cold in Stoekholm~

den r kallare 1 Lappland, it is eolder in Lappland~ and
och den r kallast i Sibirien. i t is the eoldest in Siberia.
Maj r vnl ig, Ulla r vn- Maj is friendly, Ulla is friend-

J tg~, och Tom r vnt igast. lier~ and Tom is the friendliest.
Note that Swedish superlatives usually do not take the definite article and
form unIess followed by a noun.
Examples: Ulla r vnligast. Ulla is (the) friendliest.

Ulla r den vnligaste flickan. Ulla is the friendliest girl.
Unit 9 265

SWEDISH 266
The regular comparative has only one form, ~ . whether it is used with en or
ett words, in the singular or plural, and in the indefinite or definite form.
Indefinite form Definite form
en kallare vinter den kallare vintern

ett kallare rum det ka I I a re rummet
kallare vintrar de kallare vintrarna
kallare rum de ka I I are rummen
The regular superlative has two forms. In the indefinite form the superlative
ends in m:!j. In the definite form the superlative ends in lastel.
Vintern r kallast i Lappland. Den ka I I aste v i ntern r Lappland.
Det r dyrast a~flyga. Det dyraste flyget.
Nate: When the adjective ends in unstressed -el, -en, or -er the e is left
out as you add the -are for the comparative and the -ast in the super-
lative.
Examples: vacker, vackrare, vackrast
enkel, enklare, enklast (simple)
A very small group of adjp.ctives takes just -re in the comparative and -st in
the superlative. These adjectives (except hg) also change vowels in the com-
parative and superZative forms.
Examples: stor, st~rre, strst big
tung, tyng~, tyngst heavy
ung, yngre, yng~ young
lg, lgre, lgst low
lng, lngre,-Ingst long
hg, hgre-,-hgst- high
Unit 9

SWEDISH
A few adjectives in this group are completely irregular, i.e. the aomparative
and superlative forms are related to each other but bear no resemblance to
the positive form.
Examples: gammal ldre ldst old

11 ten mindre minst small
mnga fleda) flest many
mycket mer(a) mest much
d I l g smre smst bad, less good, least good
d I i g v rre v rst bad, worse, worst
god bttre bst good
b ra bttre bst good
Nate: The comparative and superlative forms of god are often godare. godast.
when they refer to food (onlyJ.
The camparatives of this group of adjectives have also only one form whether
they precede en-words, ett-words, or plurals in the definite or indefinite
form.
en mindre vning den mindre vningen

ett mindre rum det mindre rummet
mindre vningar de mindre vningarna
mindre rUm de mindre rummen
The irregular adjectives have two superlative forms just like the regular
adjective8. The indefinite form ends in -st. The definite form ends in -sta.
Indefinite form De fini te form

Den hr boken r bst. Den bsta boken.
Det hr hotell et r smst.
--- Det ~ a hotel I et.
De hr bckerna r bst. De bsta bckerna.
De hr hotell en r S1lmst. De sms ta hote I I en.
Unit9 267

SWEDISH 268
These irregular adjectives are extremely common~ so memorize them right away.
You know some of the m already.
Nate: All ra added to a superlative gives the sense of very + superlative.

Example: den all ra bsta boken (the very best book)
Practice A. Complete the sentences by filling ~n the blank with the com-
parative form of the adjective given as cue.
CVE
Bo r n Ka r i n Bo ~s kinder than Karin. s n I I
snllare
Mblerna var p NK. dyr
dy ra re
Fisken r p fredagarna n p mndagarna. f rs k
frskare
Peter var n sin syster. hungrig
h u ng r i g a re
Bo tyckte att det var att ta i kket. roi i g
roi igare
Maj kunde inte vara vn I i g
vnl igare
unit 9

SWEDISH
eVE
Det r att flyga. enkel
enklare
Maten r p Operakl laren. f i n
f i na re
Det r Afrika n Alaska. varm
varmare
Britta r n Stina. st
stare
Smr och brd ti II frukost r n bruna bnor. van I I g
vanl igare
Det I i I I a rummet r n va rdags rummet. I J us
ljusare
Allt har blivit nu fr tiden. dy r
dyrare
Den stora ftljen r _ n soffan. bekvm
bekvmare
Ha I I en r _ p morgonen. so I l g
sol igare
269
Unit 9

SWEDISH 270
Practice B. Now we'll use some adjectives with irregular comparative forms.
eVE
ta r vgen ver Sdertlje. More (people) take mnga

the road via Soder-
F I e r (a) talje.
En Volvo r och n en Volkswagen. sto r, tung
strre ty ng re
Vinet var 1973. d I j g
smre
Kalvkotletterna r n kttbullarna. b ra
bttre
Den dotte rn va r n den gammal, vacker, ung
I d re vack ra re
Lars hyrde den vningen. I i to en
mindre
Stadshuset r n Kaknstornet. lg
lgre
Den pojken var n systern. ung, lng
yngre lngre
Unit 9

SWEDISH
eVE
Varmrtterna r p den hr restaurangen. b ra
bttre
Man fr mat p den restaurangen. mycket, liten
mer mindre
Practice C. Now Let's practice the superLative form of the adjective. Put
the aue adjective in the indefinite superLative form. First the reguLar
superLatives with the ending -ast.
eVE
Peter va r i klassen. Peter was the most inte Higent i nte I I i gent
in the aLass.
intell igentast
Det r att flyga frsta klass. dy r

dyrast
Stadshote I I et r f i n
finast
Vintern r i decembe r. mrk

mrkast
Det r hos Ulla. trevlig
trevl igast
Unit 9 271

SWEDISH 272
eVE
Vr pojke r _ p morgonen. hungrig
hungrigast
Barn tycker att efterrtter r god
godast
Practice D. Now we'll practiae the regular superlative form in the definite
form. Remember -aste.
eVE
Den eleven talade bra svenska. The smartest student duktig

spake good Swedish.
duktigaste
Mrta hade den klnningen. kort
kortaste
Ake kpte den jackan. ryml i g
rym I i gaste
Man fr det v i net p Grand Hote I I f in
finaste
Vnit 9

SWEDISH
CUE
Det J r vara det all ra hst. ny
nyaste
I Smland bor de flickorna. st
staste
Familjen Svensson har alltid den maten. god
godaste
Fractice E. Let's praatice some irregular superlatives, firat in the indefinite

form. All are from the group that ends in -st.
CUE
Peter r och gammal, lng

ldst lngst
Han tyckte att fiskfi len var p mndagarna. d I i g
smst
Han hyrde huset som var stor
strst
Lena r och klassen. ung, liten
yngst mi nst
unit 9 273

SWEDISH 274
eVE
Smrgsbordet r p Gyllene Freden. b ra
bst
Karin har gjort fr att hjlpa familjen. mycket
mest
Ppactice F. Now fop same ippegulap superlatives ~n the definite fopm. -sta.
eVE
Kaknstornet r den byggnaden Stockholm. The Kaknas Tower is the hg
tallest building ~n
hgsta stockholm.
Johan r den e I eve n klassen. I i ten
minsta
Man har den utsikten frn Kaknstornet. b ra
bsta
Det bordet r ocks det lng, gammal
lngsta ldsta
Staffan har den vgen ti l I arbetet. lng

lngsta
Unit 9

SWEDISH
eVE
r det verkl igen den stolen? lg
lgsta
De restaurangerna har goda efterrtter. mnga
flesta
Han visste det om Stockholm. mycket
mesta
eomparison of the adjeotive with mer (more) and mest (most).
All adjeotives ending in ~form the oomparative by plaoing ~ before the

adjeotive. They form the superlative by plaoing mest before the adjeative.
(Note the similarity with the aompal'ison with "more" and "most" in English.)
Examples: fantastisk me r fantastisk mest fantastisk fantastia

typisk mer typisk mest typisk typioal
energisk mer energisk mest energisk energetio
sympatisk mer sympatisk mest sympatisk likeab le
Exaeption: frisk -a re -ast (healthy~ freshJ
Mer and mest are also used with the aomparative and superlative forms of
past partioiples used as adjeatives.
Example: Den mest bermda boken (the most famous book).

The past partioiple will be disoussed in Vnit 14.
Unit 9 875

SWEDISH 276
Practice G. Let's practice comparatives of adjectives ending in -isk. Put

the adjective given in the cue in the comparative form.
eUE
En amerikan finns Inte. A more typicaL American is typisk
not to be found.
mer typisk
Eva r n UI I a. energisk
mer energisk
Bo och hans vnner r n ke. sympatisk
mer sympatiska
En bok kan man inte tnka sig. fantastisk

mer fantastIsk
Sverige r det att ta kttbullar n att ta pizza. typisk
mer typiskt
Practice H. And now to the superLatives. Put the cue adjective in the
superLative form.
eUE
Eva r p morgonen energisk
mest energisk
Unit 9

SWEDISH
CUE
Hennes systrar ~r p eftermiddagen. energisk
mest energiska
Den ~Idsta sonen r familjen. sympatisk
mest sympatisk
Det var den bo ken pe bokhy I I an. fantastisk
mest fantastiska
Practice I. We'll now have a mixed praatiae on all the adjeatives, regular,
irregular, adjectives ending in - i sk, etc. Change the adjective (s) in the
cue to the comparative or superlative form as indicated.
CUE
sa var den sekreteraren p konsulatet. Asa Was the most energisk (superl.)
energetic secretary
mest energiska at the consulate.
Det var den vintern som ngon kunde minnds. ka I I (supel'L.)

kallaste
Soffan var av alla mblerna. tung (superl.)
tyngst
Huset p h~rnet r n stenmarks hus. gammal (comp.)

ldre
Unit 9 277

SWEDISH 278
eVE
Maten r nu fl)r tiden. dyr (comp.)
dyrare
rjan hade aldrig lst en bok. dlig (comp.)
vrre (smre)
Pojkarna tyckte att det var att ka tg. ro I i g (comp.)
ro I Ig a re
B i I I s s Y s t e r var de n f I i c ka n I r umme t . st (superl.)
staste
De amerikaner har bi I. mnga (super'l..)

flesta
Det r det ma n kan g l) r a . I i ten (super1,.)
minsta
Det huset lg p den gatan. lg, lng (super'l..)
lgsta lngsta
Det huset var siar, bra (supert.J
strsta bst
Den bilen var inte

- - - - n en Saab. d Y r, I n g (comp.)
dy ra re lngre
Unit 9

SWEDISH
Point II. Formation and Comparison of Adverbs
Adverbs are words that modify verbs, adjectives~ other adverbs o~ clauses --
never nouns. Many are not depived from other wopds (e.g. here~ now~ very~
etc. ).
1. Some adveI'bs are formed by adding [JJto the basic form of the adjeative.
(Campare the usage of adding -ly to form an adverb from an adjective in
English. )
Example: Tala lngsam:!:.! (Speak slowlyl)
2. A few adjectives that end in -I ig form adverbs by adding:

a. ~ to the basia form of the adjective
Examples: van I i g usual vanl igen usually

tyd I i g obvious tydligen obviously
verklig real verk I i gen really
tro I i g probab le trol igen probab ly
mj I i g possible mj I i gen possibly
s Iut I i g final slutligen finally
Unit 9 279

SWEDISH 280
b. G to the ett-form of the adjective
Examples: I Y ck I i g happy Iyckl igtvis fortunately

tro I i g probable troligtvis probably
naturlig natural naturligtvis naturally
mj I i g possible mjligtvis possibly
van I i g usual vanligtvIs usually
As you can see from the examples, with some words both forms are acceptable.
(troligen - troligtvis; mjligen - mjligtvis; vanligen - vanligtvis)
Practice J. Here is a practice on the formation and use of adverbs. Make

a new sentence from the one given, using the verb in the cue. The adjective
in the given sentence will then become an adverb.
eVE
Eva r vacker. Eva is beautiful. g
Eva gr vackert. Eva walks beautifully.

Hotellet bl ir fint. 11 gga
Hote I I et I i gger f i nt.
Mannen r vnl ig. tala
Mannen talar vnligt.
Maten r dlig. smaka
Maten smakar d I i gt.
Vnit 9

SWEDISH
eVE
Karin r dlig. bo
Karin bor dligt.
Lars r duktig. arbeta
Lars arbetar duktigt.
Practice K. As you noted. in all the above examples the adverbs modified
verbs. Now we'll give you some examples of adverbs that modify adjectives.
Make an adverb of the aue adjective.
eVE
George r duktig. George is incredibly aapable. otrolig
otroligt
Peter r s n I I vldig
vldigt
Bi I I va r hungrig. riktig
riktigt
Fiskfilen var god. ovanlig
ovanligt
UI f r st i I i g. fantastisk
fantastiskt
Unit 9 281

SWEDISH 282
eVE
De r i nte I I 1genta. otrol19
ot ro I i gt
Det r svenskt. typisk
typiskt
Practice 0. Finallyashort practice on the adverbs that are formed by adding

-en or -tvis to the adjective. Form an adverb from the cue adjective.
CVE
Kan Fredrik komma i kv I l? Can Fredrik possibly mj I i 9

come tonight?
mjligen (mjligtvis)
Maj r v n I I g. verkl19
verk I i gen
Erik kommer Inte. ty d I i g
tydl igen
var han inte hemma. naturlig
Naturl igtvis
Britta far till Gteborg. tro l i 9
troligen (troligtvis)
Unit 9

SWEDISH
eVE
Kan du hjlpa mig? mj I i g
mjligen (mjligtvis)
ter vi fisk p fredagarna. va n I 19
Vanligtvis (vanligen)
kom de i tid. I yck I i 9
Lyckl igtvis
Maten hr r god. verkl19
verkl igen
The eomparison of the Adverb
Adverbs that have been formed by adding -t to an adjeative have the same
aomparative and superlative forms as the adjective. Note that the -t is
droppe d before the aomparative and superlative endings.
Examples: Han sjunger vackert. (He sings beautifuUy.)

Hon sjunger vackrare n John.
De sjunger vackrast p kvllen.
Two adverbs not derived from adjeatives alBo take the -are and -ast endings:
fort, fortare, fortast fast, faster, fastest
ofta, oftare, oftast often, more of ten, most often
Vnit 9 283

SWEDISH 284
Like the adjectives a few adverbs have irregular comparative and superlative
forms. They are very frequent and you already know several of them.
The following adverbs are irregular:
bra, bttre, bst weZZ, better, best

grna, hellre, helst gladly, rather, preferably
mycket, mer(a), mest much, more, most; very, more, most
nra, nrmare, nrmast close, closer, closest
dl igt, smre, smst badly, less well, least well
dligt, vrre, vrst badly, worse J worst
lnge, lngre, lngst (time) long (time)J longer J longest
lngt, I~ngre, lngst (space) far, farther J farthest
Note that adverbs that end in -en and -tvis have no comparative or superlative
forms.
Practice M. Here is a practice using the comparative form of some common

adverbs.
eVE
Det gick att g n att ta taxi. It was faster to walk fort

than to take a taxi.
fortare
Stadshote l I et I i gger n ra
nrmare
Det r till Malm n till Gteborg. lngt
lngre
Vnit 9

SWEDISH
CUE
Det tog n tre tImmar att ka dit. mycket
me r
Maten smakar alltid nr man Mr hungrig. b ra
bttre
VI vill sitta ingngen, om det gr. n ra
n rma re
Han drack te n kaffe. g rna
h e II re
Vi stannade n vi hade tnkt. lnge

I ng re
Practice N. This is a practice on the superlative form of the adverb. There

are examples of both regular and irregular forms.
CUE
Viveka sitter utgngen. Viveka is (sitting) the n ra
clasest to the exit.
n rmast
Jag kan komma klockan tolv. tidigt
tidigast
Unit 9 285

SWEDISH 286
eVE
Det gr om man gr det lngsamt. b ra
bst
Johan kr p de stora vgarna. fort
fortast
Lisa tnker p pojkar. mycket
mest
Bo v i I l e g hem. grna
helst
Peter tar t get t i I I Gteborg. ofta

oftast
Vad tr slags grnsaker tycker du om? I i te
minst
Unit 9

SWEDISH
Point III: Adjectives before Nouns
If an adjective comes before a noun in Swedish, the word preceding and modi-
fying the adjective wiLL influenee the form of both the adjective and the noun.
There are three different patterns, depending on whether the modifying word is:
1. an indefinite artiele or pronoun;
2. the definite article or demonstratives; or
3. a possessive, or eertain pronouns and adjectives.
Unit 9 287

SWEDISH 288
l. Indefinite form of the adjective and indefinite form of the noun
En "'ords Ett "'ords Plural

en ett tv
ingen inget inga
na gan ngot ng ra
en annan If i n b i II ett annat Ifint husl a nd ra Ifina bilarl
en sadan ett s dant sdana
vilken (I) vilket (l) vilka (I) Ifina husl
va r j e varje aIIa
mnga
f l e ra
f (few)
2. Definite form of the adjective and definite form of the noun
En "'ords Ett words Plural

den det de lf i na
den hr
den dr
} l f i na b i I enl det hr
det dr
} lf i na husetl de hr
de dr
}
bilarnai
If i na husen l
J. Definite form of the adjective and indefinite form of the noun
En words Ett words Plural

mi n mitt mina
din ditt dina
hans, sin hans, sitt hans, sina
hennes, sin hennes, sitt hennes, sina
v r v rt v ra
er ert era
deras, sin Iflna bIl! deras, sitt !fina husl deras, sina 'fina bilar!
Lenas Lenas Lenas
denna detta dessa 'fina husl
samma samma samma
nsta nsta ns ta
fljande fljande fljande
vilken (?) vilket (?) vilka (?)
mnga
Unit 9

SWEDISH
Note: Den hr (det hr, de hr) and denna (detta, dessa) both mean "this"
("these~oenna (detta, dessa) is used more in the written language.
Den hr (det hr, de hr) is followed by the noun in the definite form while
denna (detta, dessa) is foZZowed by the noun in the indefinite form. If
an--Qdjective precedes the noun, the adjective takes the definite form in
both cases.
Examples:
Den hr nya boken. Denna nya bok.
This new book. This new book.
Det hr nya bordet Detta nya bord.
This new table. -- This new table.
De hr nya bckerna. Dessa nya bcker.
These new books-.--- These new book~
Unit 9 289

SWEDISH 290
PY'actice O. We wi ~ ~ begin with a pY'actice on GY'oup 1. Fi~~ in the spaces

with the cOY'Y'ect fOY'm of vacke~.
en dag
vacker
ett hus
vackert
ett ta I
vackert
en ingng
vacker
V i I ken utsikt!
vacker
ett sdant ba rn
vackert
ingen pojke
vacker
aJIa flickor
vackra
en annan sevrdhet
vacker
Unit 9

SWEDISH
Practice P. This time we'tt practice adjectives + nouns in the definite form
from Group 2. Use the adjective ~.
eUE
den, b i I
den nya b l I en den h r, s I l ps
den hr nya slipsen det d r, universitet
det dr nya unTversitetet den d r, klocka
den d r nya klockan det h r, hote I I

det h r nya hotellet den, park
den nya parken de h r, vin

de hr nya vinerna d e, rum
de nya rummen
Note: Exceptionatty in Group 2 (definite form of the adjective + definite

form of the noun)~ the first definite articte~ den, det, de~ is
omitted:
1. i f the adjective + noun is considered to be a ptace name.

Examptes: Gamla Stan, Amerikanska ambassaden, Vita Huset;
2. before ordinal numbers.
Examples: frsta, andra, tredje gngen;
J. before he I {whole} and halv {half}.
Examples: hela dagen {all day}~ halva natten (half the night).
Unit 9 291

SWEDISH 292
PY'actice Q. Let's now look at Group 3. This is a pT'actice on the use of the
possessives followed by an adjective and a noun. Vsing the wOY'ds given in the
cue co lumn, make a phrase with the aPPY'opriate possessive and the correct
fOT'm of the adjective and noun.
eVE
v i, b r u n, s ko r
vra bruna skor de, ny, bi I
deras nya b i I hon, fin, middag
hennes fina middag jag, yngst, dotter
min yngsta dotter du, liten, pojke
din I i Ila pojke han, god, fiskfile
hans goda fiskfile ni, strst, hotell
ert strsta hote I I han, gammal, far
hans gamla far hotell, duktig, vaktmstare
hotell ets dukti ga vaktmstare ni, god, svensk, brd
ert goda svenska brd vi, bst, bord
vrt bsta bord Lindahl, bra, fredrag
Lindahls bra fredrag Erik, rd, skjorta
Eriks rda skjorta Eva, svart, jacka
Evas svarta jacka
Unit 9

SWEDISH
Practice R. Now for a really challenging mixed practice with the three groups
together so that you get used to their differences. Put the cue adjective and
the cue noun in their eorrect forms in the blank spaees in all three groups~
reading aeross the page. Work on this practice until you can do it automa-
ticaHy.
Group 1. Group 2. Group J. eVE
en den min f I n, bi I
--- ---
f i n bi I f i na b i I en fina b i I
det mitt ---

fint hus f i na huset f i na hus
de hr v ra
vackra flickor vackra flickorna vackra f I i ckor

en den Karins god, fiskflle
----
god fiskfile goda fiskfilen go da fiskfile
mnga de dr deras hungrig, pojke

hungriga pojkar hungriga pojkarna hungriga pojkar
ett det hans lng, fredrag

lngt fredrag lnga fredraget lnga fredrag
flera de slottets stor, rum
stora rum stora rummen stora rum
Vnit 9 293

SWEDISH 294
Group 1. Group 2. Group 3. eVE
tv de hr e ra I i ten, garderob
sm garderober sm garderoberna sm garderober
en den dr dessa kokt, potatis
kokt potatis kokta potatisen kokta potatisar
(plural) de sina brun, bna

------
bruna bnor bruna bnorna bruna bnor
va r j e den hr fljande kort, annons
kort annons I,orta annonsen korta annons
ett sdant de samma gamma I. bo rd

--- ---
gammalt bo rd gamla borden gamla bord
al I a de d r v ra duktig, man
---
duktiga m n duktiga mnnen duktiga mn
ingen den nsta mrk, kvll

--- ---
mrk kv I I mrka kvllen mrka k v I I
Unit 9

SWEDISH
Practice s. No~ a mixed practice ~ith many examples from all three groups.
Where there is a personal pronoun or a name~ ohange it into a possessive.
eUE
jag, ny, skola
mIn nya skola den, bi II igast, bil
den billigaste bilen du, trevlig, man
din trevliga man det, sol ig, rum
det so I i ga rummet vi, yngst, son
vr yngsta son ett, i ten, barn
ett I i tet barn det, iten, barn
det I i I la barnet ni, snll, pojke
er sn II a pojke samma, mrk, hrn
samma mrka hrn den hr, gammal, klnning
den hr gamla klnningen denna, ny, bok
denna nya bok det, dyrast. rum
det dyraste rummet vi. amerikansk. universitet
vrt amerikanska universitet ni, svensk, kyrkor
era svenska kyrkor Erik, gammal, moster
Erlks gamla moster h a n, s I s t, s o mm a r
hans sista sommar den, bst, bok
Unit 9 295

SWEDISH 296
CUE
den bsta boken de hr, liten, barn
de hr sm barnen nsta, intressant, resa
nsta intressanta resa det, strst, hus
det strsta huset va r j e, i nte I I i gent, person
varje intelligent person alla, snll, barn
alla snlla barn Erik, gr, kostym
Eriks gra Kostym tv, rd, stol
tv rda stolar ett, gamma I, kk
ett gammalt kk de hr, snygg, lampa
de hr snygga lamporna dessa, utmrkt, frslag
dessa utmrkta frslag
Unit 9

SWEDISH
UNIT 10
GETTING READY FOR AN EVENING OUT
Basic Sentences
Johan and Margit Larsson are

di8cus8ing plans for the evening.
to Zook forward tO Jbe hap- att gldja sig t, 4; glder,

gladde,
py abou t glatt
Margit: 1. I'm really looking forward to Jag riktigt glder mig t att g p Dra-
going to Dramaten tonight. maten ikvll. *
Johan: 2. So am I. what is it we're Ja, det gr jag ocks. Vad r det vi

going to see exactly? ska se egentl igen?
Margi t: 3. But Johan! "Miss Julie" is Nej men Johan! De ger ju "Frken Jul ie".
being given. Don't you remem- Kommer du inte ihg det? *
ber that?
memory minne -t -n
Zately p sista tiden
Johan: 4. Of course. My memory has been Javisst ja. Mitt minne har varit lite
a bit poor Zate"Ly. dligt p sista tiden.
Unit 10 297

SWEDISH 298
ought to, shou~d br, borde, bort; 4

play pjs -en -er
instead of istllet fr
TV teve -n, teveapparater
Mal'git: 5. You should have read the play Ou borde ha lst pjsen igr kvll
last night instead of sitting istllet fr att sitta och titta p
and looking at TV. teve.
to remind att pmi nna, 2a

before fre
by the way aprop det
Johan: 6. I would have (done itY if you Det skulle jag ha gjort, om du hade
had reminded me before dinner. pmi nt mi g fre mi ddagen. Aprop
By the way, where ar'e we going det, var ska vi trffa Browns?
to meet the Browns?
head huvud -et, huvuden

mai n entrance huvudingng -en -ar
after efter
performance, show frestllning -en -ar
somewhere ngonstans
Mal'gi t: 7. At the mai n entrance, at seven Vid huvudingngen klockan halv tta.
thirty. Af ter' the show we/re Efter frestllningen ska vi ju g
going out to eat somewhel'e ut och ta ngonstans.
(remember?) .
to receive, to get, to have att f, fr, fick, ftt; 4

received, had fick
sma~l herring (from the strmming -en -ar
Bal tic)
the day before yesterday I frrgr
Johan: 8. What (wouZd you say) about Vad skur le du sga om "KB"? Jag fick
"KB"? I had very good herring vldigt fin strmming dr i frrgr.
there the day before yeBterday.
Unit 10

SWEDISH
to forge t a tt g I mma, 2 a
forget (imperative) glm
before innan
late sen -t -a
Margit: 9. Yes~ that is close and con- Ja, det I igger ju nra och bra. Glm
venien t. Don't forge t to inte att ringa och bestlla bord innan
caZZ and reserve a table be- det bl ir fr sent.
fore it's too late.
comfortable skn -t -a
work arbete -t -n
Johan: 10. No~ I'lZ do that. How nice Nej, det ska jag gra. Vad sknt att
that tomorrow is Saturday det r lrdag imorgon och att jag inte
and that Idon't have to go behver g ti II arbetet. J\
to work.
to not have to att slippa, slipper, slapp, sluppit; 4

ticket b i I jett -en -er
row (of seats) ~ bench bnk -en -ar
orchestra (section) parkett -en -er
Margit: 11. No~ you don I t have to do that. Nej, det slipper du. Tnk s bra att
Imagine how lucky that I was jag lyckades f bi Ijetter p tredje
able to get ticke ts in the bnk p parketten.
third row in the orchestra.
wonderful underbar -t -a
re ady klar -t -a
Johan: 12. Yes~ darZing. You are wonder- Ja, lskl ing, du r underbar. r
ful. Is the coffee ready? kaffet klart?
Unit 10 299

SWEDISH 300
aome (imperative) kom

to sit down att stta sig, 4; stter, satte, satt
sit (imperative) stt
Margit: 13. Everything is on the kitahen All t str p kksbordet. Kom och
tabLe. Just aome and sit down. stt dig bara.
on the way home p hemvgen

to aheak, to find out att ta reda p, 4; tar; tog, tagit
Laundry tvtt -en -ar
dry aLeaning, dry aLeaner's kemtvtt
re ady frdig -t -a
14. Johan, on your way home tonight, Johan, p hemvgen i kl,t I I, kan du ta
oouLd you aheak i f the dry reda p om kemtvtten r frdig?
aLeaning is ready?
hair hr -et Ql
beauty parLor (hair dresser) hrfrisrsk/a -an -or
15. I don't have time. I must go J a g h a r i nt e t i d J a g m s t e g t i I I
to the beauty parLor before hrfrisrskan fre teatern.
the theater.
past frbi
to aLose att stnga, 2a
to hurry att skynda sig, I
Johan: 16. Yes, I'U drive by. I hope Ja, jag ska kra frbi. Jag hoppas ~tt de
they don't aLose before Bix inte stnger fre klockan sex. Nu mste
o'aLoak. Now I've got to jag skynda mig. *
hurry.
Uni t 10

SWEDISH
to troy att frska, 2b

to change (cLothing) att kl om sig, 3
to shave att raka sig, I
Margi t : 17. Can you troy to get home a Kan du frska komma hem lite t:digare
LittLe earLier today so that idag s att du hinner kl om dig och
you'LL have time to change raka dig? >I
and shave?
annoying~ boring, Bad trkig -t -a

to roush att jkta, I
punctuaL punktlig -t -a
18. It'8 80 annoying to rush Det r s trkigt att jkta, och
and we should be punctual. vi br vara punktliga.
to proomise att lova, I

kiss kyss -en -ar
Johan: 19. I promise to do my best. I Jag lovar att gra mitt bsta.
have to run now. Do I get a Nej, nu mste jag springa. Fr
kiss before ILeave? jag en kyss i nnan jag gr?
caLl (imperative) ring

more, else mer(a)
Margi t: 20. Bye, bye. CaU me if the re' s Hej d. Ring mig om det r ngot
something else. mer.
Johan leaves and Marogit calls

the beauty partor.
Unit 10 301

SWEDISH 302
heLLo (only on the phone) ha I I

shampoo tvttning -en -ar
set lggning -en -ar
Margit: 21. Hello, this is Mrs. Larsson. Hall. Goddag, det r fru Larsson.
Could I make an appointment Skulle jag kunna f bestlla tid ti II
for a shampoo and set at foul' en tvttning och lggning klockan fyra
o'clock this afternoon? i eftermiddag. *
Hair
dresser: 22. Who takes care of you, usuaLly? Vem brukar ta hand om fru Larsson?
Margi t: 2:3. Mrs. OLsson. Is she free then? Fru Olsson. r hon ledig d?
Hair to check, to see att se efter, 4; ser, sg, sett

dresser: 24. Just aminute. I'll check. Ett gonbl lek. Jag ska se efter.
Yes, that 's fine. We' II see Ja, det gr utmrkt. Vlkommen d
you then, Mrs. Larsson. fru Larsson.
Uni t 10

SWEDISH
UNIT 10
la. From now on we will indicate which conjugation each new verb belongs to by placing
a number after the verb instead of giving the endings.
First aonjugation: I
Second aonjugation with -de ending: 2a
Seaond aonjugation with -te ending: 2b
Third conjugation: 3
Fourth aonjugation: 4
However, we will aontinue to aonjugate the irregular verbs of the fourth oon-
jugation.
lb. Dramaten refers to Kungliga Dramatiska Teatern, The Royal Dramatio Theater.
3a. Frken Jul ie is a play by August Strindberg.
3b. De ger "Frken Julie". Att ge (to give) is often used in the sense "to show"
with regard to films, plays and other performanaes.
Example: De ger en bra f i Im p teve ikvll.
They are showing a good movie on TV tonight.
8. KB <Konstnrsbaren> is a medium-priaed restaurant a five-minute walk from Dramaten.
10a. Vad sknt. When vad is followed by an adjeative it is used as an exclamation,

like the English "how".
Examples: Vad trevl igt! How niae!
Vad vackert! How beautiful!
Vad bra! Good!
Unit 10 303

SWEDISH 304
lOb. ... att man inte behver. In a subo~dinate clause same adve~bs p~ecede the ve~b .
The most common ones a~e: Inte, alltid, aldrig, kanske. We will p~actice this
usage late~ on.
16. ... att de inte stnger. See Nate lOb .
17. kl om. When om is a ve~b pa~ticle and is st~essed the verb takes on the meaning
of changing or ~epeating.
Examples: att tnka om to think again

att mblera om to ~ea~~ange the fu~nitu~e
att lsa om to ~ead again
att gra om to ~epeat. to do again
21. tvttning. Shampoo used fo~ washing you~ hai~ is called schampo.
22. fru Larsson. The haird~esser addresses her custome~ in the third person. This
used to be a standard fo~m of add~ess in Sweden until a few years ago. You still
hea~ it. especially in impersonal ~elation8hip8.
Unit 10

SWEDISH
UNIT 10
Points to Praatiae
Point I. Reflexive verbs
Point II. Auxi liary verbs
Point III. Imperative

Point IV. D, sedan
Point V. Fre, innan
Unit 10 305

SWEDISH 306
Point I. Reflexive Ver>bs
We call a veT'b reflexive when the subject and the

object are the same peT'son. You can T'ecognize
this fOT'm in English with veT'bs that are followed
by "myself", "youT'self", etc.
Example: Bill see s himself in the mirT'or.
Hd-('\
Swedish, howeveT', uses this form differ>ently fr>om So \"n m C,. r

English, and much more frequently. In Swedish a
reflexive ver>b is followed by the objective form
S:.3 .
of the personal pronoun in the first and second
persons (singular and plural) and by the reflexive
form SIG in the third peT'son (singular and plural)
and in the infinitive.
Examples:
att stta sig to sit down (to sea t oneself)
jag stter mig I sit down (seat myself)
du stter dig you sit down (seat yourself)
han/hon stter sig he/she sits down (seats himself/herself)
Erik/Ingrid stter sig Erik/Ingrid sits down (seats himself/herself)

vi stter oss we sit down (seat ourselves)
ni stter er you sit down (seat yourselves)

de stter sig they sit down (seat themselves)
Larsans stter sig the Larsons sit down (seat themselves)
Uni t 10

SWEDISH
Here is a list of some of the most common Swedish verbs that are often reflexive.
As you notice, same of them occur in our Basic Sentences.
att tvtta sig, to wash

att kamma sig, to comb (onets hair)
att raka sig, I to shave
att kl (p) sig, 3 to dress
att kl av sig, 3 to undress
att kl om sig, 3 to change (clothes)
att ta p sig, 4 to put on
att ta av sig, 4 to take off
att stta sig, 4 to sit down
att lgga sig, 4 to lie down, to go to bed
att bry sig om, 3 to care about
att knna sig, 2a to fee l
att skynda sig, I to hurry
att lra sig, 2a to learn
att frlova sig (med), I to get engaged (to)
att gifta sig (med), 2b to marry
att gldja sig t, 4 to be happy aba ut, to look forward to
att ngra sig, I to regret, to change onets mind
att gmma s i g, 2a to hide
Practice A. Insert the correct form of the reflexive verb given in the cue.
Vse the past tense.
eVE
J ag innan jag tvtta sig, kl sig
tvttade mig kldde mig
Eva d I I g. knna sig
knde sig
Vnit 10 307

SWEDISH 308
eVE
Vi I en kyrka Smland. g i fta s I g
gifte oss
Flickorna I bilen och krde hem. stta sig
satte sig
Peter och Olof att skynda sig, kl om sig
skyndade sig kl om sig
Nr du var p F.S. I. svenska. lra sig
lrde du dig (Note wopd opdep. By now you ape

familiap with the vepb in the 2nd
place pule, pealizing that only two
wopds pevepse. In this case aftep
a subopdinate clause.)
Om du il:1te honom skulle det vara trkigt. bry sig om
brydde dig om
S ung du var nr du frlova sig
frlovade dig
Johan innan han gick p teatern. raka sig
rakade sig
Larssons t att se Frken Jul ie. gldja sig

gladde sig
Vnit 10

SWEDISH
eVE
Hunden J ga rde rob en. gmma sig
gmde sig
Pappa p soffan. lgga sig
lade sig
Barnen t i I I skolan. skynda sig
skyndade sig
Fru Persson p trappan. stta sig
satte sig
Practice B. This is a translation practice. Cover the leJt part of the page
and check your answers as you go. Think of the verb tenses.
eVE
Alan is getting married tomorrow.
Alan gifter sig imorgon. They got engaged in May.
De frlovade sig i maj. I don't care about that.
Jag bryr mig inte om det. We change beJore dinner.
Vi klr om oss fre middagen. Be puts on a tie.
Han tar p sig en slips. Erik hurried home.
Erik skyndade sig hem. They sat down on the soJa.

Unit 10 309

SWEDISH 310
eVE
De satte sig p soffan. Be fe l t sick.
Han knde sig sjuk. You are learning Swedish.
Du lr dig svenska. You (plur.) go to bed early.
Ni lgger er tidigt. You (sing.) comb your hair often.
Du kammar dig ofta. They got married yesterday.
De gifte sig igr. Be took off his hat.
Han tog av sig hatten.
vnit 10

SWEDISH
Point II. Auxiliary (HelpingJ Verbs
You have already learned about and practiced some auxiliary (helping) verbs
in the previous Units. In this unit we are expanding the list of helping
verbs. These verbs are followed by an infinitive without att. The auxiliary
verb is conjugated, the infinitive remains the same.
att kunna kan kunde kunnat

to be able to
br borde bo rt
ought to
(att skola) ska s ku I I e
wi 2.l
att v i I j a vi I I v i II e velat
to want to
att f f r f i ck f tt + Tnfinitive of verb
to have to, may without att
to be able to
att lta I te r lt ltit

to let
mste mste (mst)

must
lr
is sa1:d to
Uni t 10 311

SWEDISH 312
Nate that the helping vepb mste is not conjugated. It is uH~d only in the
ppesent and past tenses and pemains the same. The supine fopm mst is papely
used. lr is used only in the ppesent tense.
In this Unit we ape also intpoducing sevepal fpequently used vepbs that behave
like helping vepbs without peally being tpue auxiliapies. They also ppecede
an infinitive without att. Repe is a list of some of these vepbs:
att b ruka b ruka r brukade brukat

to usually (do something)
att br j a brjar brjade brjat

to be gin to
att behva behver behvde behvt

to need to
att tnka tnker tnkte tnkt
to plan to
att hinna hinner hann hunnit + Infinitive of vepb
to have time to without att
att orka orka r orkade orkat

to have the strength to
att s I i Ppa slipper slapp sluppit

to not have to
att vga vgar vgade vgat

to dape~ to have the courage to
att frska frsker frskta frskt

to try to
Unit 10

SWEDISH
We want to pemind you that, as a rule, an infinitive preaeded by another

verb (not a helping verb) always has att in front of it.
Examples: Eva tycker om att lsa. Eva likes to read.
VI fredrar att ta tget. We prefer to take the train.
Att komma att + infinitive is a way of expressing future time. See Unit 2,
paragraph 2? This expression always takes att in front of the infinitive.
Practice C. Now we'll practice the use of the auxiliary verbs and verbs that
hehave similarly. Put the verbs given in the aue in the rast tense. Remember
that all verbs following the helping verb are in the infinitive form. Be sure
to read aloud so that you beaome aaaustomed to the way it sounds.
CUE
Johan kl sig smoking. Johan used to dress ~n b ruka

a tuxedo.
brukade
Margit kl om sig Innan hon gick ut. vi Ij a
vi t le
Vi kpa biljetter tillIIFrken Julie". mste

mste
Browns vnta p Larssons en hel timme. f
fick
Unit 10 313

SWEDISH
eVE
Man kunna best II a bord p "KB". br
borde
Karin visste inte att Bo komma s snart. ska
s ku I I e
De ta klockan elva. br j a
brjade
Per och Anna komma ti d. frska
frskte
Larssons inte stanna ute s sent. bruka
brukade
Pjsen brja klockan tta, s vi skynda oss. ska, mste
s ku I I e mste
Hon lra sig att tala svenska. s I i ppa
slapp
Margit Inte tvtta hret innan hon gick ut. hinna
hann
Johan kra frbi kemtvtten p hemvgen. tnka
tnkte
Unit 10

SWEDISH
Remember that adverbs in a main clause come af ter the verb. In the case of a
helping verb plus a main verb J the adverb comes right after the helping verb J
that is bet~een the helping verb and the main verb. This is not an exception:
the pule is that the adverb comes after the conjugated verb.
Practice D. This is a mixed practice using auxiliary verbs J verbs that be have
similarlyJ and ordinary verbs ~hich keep att in front of the infinitive. Fill
in the spaces with the cue verbs in the proper form. Vse the present tense.
eVE
Johan ti" Lund imorgon. tnka, kra
tnker kra
Ha n 1nte smoking ikv~:ill. vi IJa, ta p sig
vi I I ta p sig
Vi inte behva, skynda sig
behver skynda oss
Eva tv bcker varje mnad. frska, lsa
frsker lsa
Johan nr det r varmt. 51 ippa, jogga

s I i P per j agga
Hon p Dramaten I kv I I gldja sig t, g

glder sig t atT g
Uni t 10 315

SWEDISH 316
eVE
Pojken en leksak. b e, f
ber att f
Han kaffe. tycka om, dricka
tycker om att dricka
Bo aldrig h en ne behva, pminna
behver pminna
De ti I I Sverige I hst. komma att, flytta
kommer att flytta

Hrfri srskan innan hon gr hem. tycka om, kl om sig
tycker om att kl om sig
Vi bord p restaurangen. bruka, bestlla
brukar best I I a
Man inte fr fort. br, ta
br ta
Vi inte I ng re. orka, g

orkar g
UI f inte biljetter. hinna, kpa
hinner kpa
unit 10

SWEDISH
CUE
Margit p teatern. tycka om, g
tycker om att g
Det b ra. k o mm a a t t, b I I
kommer att b I l
Bo och Mrta Inte vi IJa, frlova sig

vill frlova sig
Pe I I e inte vga, flyga
vgar flyga
Man inte bi I stockholm. behva, kunna, kra
behver kunna kra
Unit 10 31 ?

SWEDISH 318
Point III. Imperative Form
Iniinitive Impel'ative Examples
First oonjugation: att tal/a tala Tala svenska!
Seoond oonjugation (a): att kr/a kr Kr lngsamt!

(b): att ls/a ls Ls din bok!
Third aonjugation: att t ro tro Tro inte p allt!
Fourth conjugation: att g .9! G hem nu!

att sltt/a s i tt Sitt hr!
As you see in the ohart, the imperative form of the verbs of the firat conju-
gation is identiaal to the infinitive.
In all the other oonjugations (2a and 2b, 3rd and 4th) the stem is used for the
imperative fOl'm.
Unit 10

SWEDISH
Nate: In the third conjugation and also in the case of some of the fourth
conjugation verbs, the stem and the infinitive form are identical.
Practice E. This praotioe deals with the imperative forms of all four conju-
gations. Put the cue verbs in the imperative form.
eVE
p mi g! Wait for me! vnta
Vnta
med en lkare! tala
Tala
s god och vara, sItta
Va r sitt
bckerna frn bIblioteket! hmta
Hmta
frst innan du brjar! f rg a
Frga
hos oss nr ni kommer ti I I Stockholm! bo
Bo
din klnning sjlv! sy
Sy
Unit 10 319

SWEDISH 320
eVE
mi g ! AI I t k o mm e r a t t b I i b r a . tro
Tro
inte n! g
G
snll och svenska! vara, tala
Va r tala
mig eftermiddag! ringa
Ring
mig boken! ge
Ge
inte det! glmma
Glm
p mig och som Jag sger! hra, gra

Hr gr
fnstret, r du snll! stnga
Stng
bordet hr! stlla

St I I
Unit 10

SWEDISH
eUE
inte den dr hatten! kpa
Kp
i nte s mycket! rka
Rk
p det! tnka
Tnk
med oss ti I I Mysinge! fa ra
Fa r
hit' ett gonblick! komma
Kom
hr! stta sig
Stt dig
plats innan tget gr! ta<gaJ
Ta<gJ
ti II henne att Erik kommer snart. sga

Sg
mig att ringa! pminna
Pminn
Unit 10 321

SWEDISH 322
Point IV: D - Sedan (sen) I both meaning "then."
English speaking students sometimes confuse d and sedan be cause both of these
words transl-ate into the Engl-ish "then." What you must remember is that seda~
means "afterwards," "after that."
Example: Frst tvttade han sig och sen rakade han sig.
~
~l .
First he washed and then he-shaved. ~"
,I -o
, ,
D means "at that time, /I "in that case." 1'f~ .
Exampl-es: Vi trffades fr tv r sen. D bodde han i Rom.
We met two years ago. Then hewaB l-iving in Rome.
r klockan redan sex? D mste vi g.
Is it six o'clock al-ready? Then we 'Il have to go.
Practice F. This is a practice on d - sedan. Fill in the blanks ehoosing

the correct word, either d or sedan. You wil-l find the correct answers
on the fol-l-owing page.
Johan och Margit satt och t frukost kket. ringde det p telefonen.
Det var Browns, som bodde i Sverige De tv paren sku I I e g p teatern
p kvllen. skulle de g ut och ta ngonstans. De hade trffats
Washington ngra r tidigare. arbetade Johan p svenska ambassaden.
flyttade han och Margit ti J I New York och for de ti Ilbaka ti II
Sverige.
Unit 10

SWEDISH
Answer to Fractice F.
Johan och Margit satt och t frukost i kket. D ringde det p telefonen.
Det var Browns, som bodde i Sverige d. De tv paren skulle g p teatern
p kvllen. Sedan skulle de g ut och ta ngonstans. De hade trffats
i Washington ngra r tidigare. D arbetade Johan p svenska ambassaden.
Sedan flyttade han och Margit ti II New York och sedan for de ti Ilbaka tl II
Sverige.
Unit 10 323

SWEDISH 384
Point V: Fre -I nnan, both meaning "before."

Fre and innan are easily confused by English speaking students since these
two words both translate into the English "betore. "
Fre is a preposition and can therefore modify only a noun or a pronoun.
Example: Fre teatern t vi mi ddag p en restaurang.

Before the theater we had dinner in a restaurant.
Innan is a conjunction which introduces a dependent clause.
Example: Innan vi gick p teatern, t vi middag p en restaurang.

Before we went to the theater we had dinner in a restaurant.
Beloware examples to illustrate the usage of fre and innan. Be sure to

read them aloud.
Fre I n na n
Hon kpte en ny klnning fre resan. Hon kpte en ny klnning innan hon reste.
She bought a new dress before the trip. She bought a new dress before she left.
Det var nstan mrkt fre regnet. Det var nstan mrkt innan dei brjade regna.
It was almost dark before the rain. It was almost dark before it started to rain.
Pressattachen hade lst om Sverige fre sin Pressattachen hade lst om Sverige innan han
resa ti II Stockholm. for ti II Stockholm.
The press attache had read about Sweden before The press attache had read about Sweden before
his trip to Stockholm. he left for Stockholm.
VI mste kl om oss fre middagen. Vi mste kl om oss innan vi gr ut och ter.

We'll have to change before dinner. We 'll have to change before we go out and eat.
Han gick ut med hunden fre frukost. Han gick ut med hunden innan han t frukost.
He took the dog out before breakfast. He took the dog out before he had breakfast.
Unit 10

SWEDISH
Practice G. This is a mixed praatice on fre and innan. Insert the coprect
word in the blank spaces.
Johan best I I de bord de gick p KB.
innan
Eva ringde sammantrdet.
fre
ni gr mste ni skriva era namn I boken.
Innan
De trffades en halvtimme frestllningen.
fre
Han tnkte I nge han sade ngot.
innan
Hon kpte bi Ijetter tv mnader resan.
fre
Fru Berg stngde fnstren det brjade regna.
i nna n
K p e n t i d n i n g r d u s n I I , de stnger.
innan
Huset mste bl frdigt den frsta jul j.
fre
Unit 10 325

SWEDISH 326
Du mste tala med Bo du far.
innan
Hon gladde sig alltid en resa.
fre
Gsterna drack sherry I vardagsrummet lunchen.
fre
Uni t 10

SWEDISH
UNIT 11
NATIONS, LANGUAGES, AND NATIONALITIES
Basic Sentences
Two friends are having a con-

versation.
Bengt: 1. Hi. Thanks for an exception- Hej p dig. Tack fr sist. Det
ally nice evening last Monday. var en ovanl igt trevl ig kvll
mndags. *
succes8 fu l Iycka/d -t -de
nervous ne rvs -t -a
each other, one another varandra ~varann)
Fred: 2. Yes, it turned out all right. Ja, det blev ganska lyckat. Man
You are always a little ner- r ju alltid lite nervs nr gsterna
VOU8 when the guests don't inte knner varann.
know each other.
conversation samta I -et -0

Afri ca Afrika
Bengt: 3. I had 8uch an interesting con- Jag hade ett s intressant samtal
versation with the Bennetts. med 8ennetts. Var de verkl igen
Were they really in Africa i Afrika i sex r?
for six years?
vacation, leave semester -n, semestrar

Fred: 4. Sure, but the y went home on Ja, men de for hem p semester en
leave once a year, gng om ret,
Uni t 11 327

SWEDISH 328
to greet att h~lsa (p>,

to visit att hlsa p, I
Christmas jul -en -ar
5. and the chitdren coutd go and och barnen kunde resa och hlsa p
visit them at Chri8tma8. dem p jularna. *
English (tanguageJ engelska -n 0

born fdd, ftt, fdda
France Frankrike
6. Don't you think Louise Bennett Tycker du inte att LouIse Bennett
speaks English well? She was talar bra engelska? Hon r Ju fdd
born in France, you know. i frankrike. *
Frenchwoman fransysk/a -an -or

Swede (female ) svensk/a -an -or
Swedish (languageJ svenska -n 0
perfect perfekt -0 -a
Bengt: 7. OhJ Is she French? I thought Jas, r hon fransyska? Jag trodde
she was Swedish because her hon var svenska, fr hennes svenska
Swedish is perfeet too. r ocks perfekt. *
language sprk -et -0

gifted begv/ad -at -ade
to have a gift for languages att vara sprkbegvad
to s tudy att studera, I
German (languageJ tyska -n 0
Arabic (tanguageJ arabiska -n 0
Fred: 8. Welt, the whole family has a Ja, hela familjen r sprkbegvad.
gift for languages. They have De har ocks studerat tyska och
alBo studied German and Arabic. arabiska.
Uni t 11

SWEDISH
India I n d Ie n
united fren/ad -at -ade
nation nation -en -er
united Nations (U. N.) Frenta Nationerna (F.N.)
9. Now they are going to India in Nu ska de fara ti II I ndi en om ett
a coup le of months. Bill is par mnader. B i II ska arbeta fr
going to work for the United Frenta Nationerna (F.N.). *
Nations (U. N.).
to gra8p, to undel'stand att fatta, I

to tolel'ate, to put up with att st ut (med ngonting); str, stod,
(something) sttt, 4
heat hetta -n 0
Bengt: 10. Itts hal'd to understand how Det r svrt att fatta hur de str
they can stand the heat for ut med hettan s lnge.
so long.
degree grad -en -er

centigrade Celsius
according to en I i gt
11. It's fort y degrees centigrade Det r ju fyrtio grader varmt i flera
for several months (of the mnader, enligt Louise Bennett. *
year), according to Louise
Bennett.
climate klimat -et -0

even i f ven om
Fl'ed: 12. Yes, then the climate is Pl'O- Ja, d r nog kl imatet bttre l
bably bettel' in Sweden, even Sverige, ven om det blir kallt p
i f it's aold in the wintel' and vintern och regnar p sommaren.
rainB in the BUmmel'.
Unit 11 329

SWEDISH 330
to no tice att mrka, 2b

accent brytning -en -ar
German (male) tysk -en -ar
Bengt: 13. Did you notice that Mr. Lund Mrkte du att herr Lund ocks talade
also spoke with an accent? med brytning? Han r tysk. *
Re is German.
apparently tydligen
foreigner utlnning -en -ar
Fred: 14. Yes, I noticed that. There Ja, jag mrkte det. Det finns tyd-
are apparently many foreign- ligen mnga utlnningar hr I SverIge.
ers here in Sweden.
population befolkning -en -ar

immigrant invandrare -n -0
Bengt: 15. Yes, ten per cent of the popu- Ja, tio procent av befolkningen r
lation are immigrants. invandrare.
country, Qountryside land -et, lnder

Fred: 16. what countries do they come Vilka lnder kommer de Ifrn?
from?
Uni t 11

SWEDISH
all possible, all kinds of all -t -a mjlig -t -a

nationality national itet -en -er
Finn (male) finlndare -n -0
Greek (male) grek -en -er
Pole (male) polack -en -er
Italian (male) i ta I i enare -n -0
Frenohman fransman -nen, fransmn
Yugoslav (male) jugoslav -en -er
Bengt: 17. There are all kinds of natio- Hr finns alla mJI iga national iteter,
nalities here, Finns, Greeks, finlndare, greker, polacker, italienare,
Poles, Italians, Frenohmen, fransmn och jugoslaver.
and Yugoslavs. .
Fred: 18. How oan you find work i f you Hur kan man f arbete om man r ut-
are a foreigner and don't lnning och inte kan sprket? *
know the language?
course kurs -en -er

free of charge g rat i s -0 -0
Bengt: 19. The oourseB in Swedish are Kurserna i svenska r gratis tr
free for the immigrants. invandrarna.
minority minoritet -en -er

Fred: 20. You also have another minority, Ni har ju en mi nori tet till,
don't you? Inte sant? *
to mean, to refer to att mena, I

Lapp lapp -en -ar
Lapp samle -en -er
Bengt: 21. You mean the Lapps. Du menar lapparna el ler samerna.
Unit 11 331

SWEDISH 332
Scandinavia Skandinavien
thousands tusentals
Bengt: 22. WeLL, they have Lived in Scan- Ja, men de har bott I Skandinavien
dinavia for thousands of years. i tusentals r.
Fred: 23. How many Lapps are there in Hur mnga lappar finns det I
Swe den? Sverige?
about, approximateZy omkring

yet, nevertheZess nd
to keep att behll/a -er, behll, behllit, 4
own egen, eget, egna
Lappish (Language) lapska -n 0
Bengt: 24. About 17,000. And yet they Omkring sjutton tusen. Och nd har
have kept their own Language, de behllit sitt eget sprk, lapska. >I
LappiBh.
Fred: 25. Can you Bay Bomething in Kan du sga ngot p lapska?
LappiBh?
difficult svr -t -a
Bengt: 26. No, it's a very difficuLt NeJ, det r ett mycket svrt sprk.
language.
village by -n -ar
Lapp vi Zlage lappby -n -ar
Fred: 2? I'd like to see a Lapp Jag skulle grna vilja se en lappby
village 80me time. ngon gng.
Uni t 11

SWEDISH
northern part of Sweden Norrland

Bengt: 28. Then you have to go to Norr- D mste du fara ti II Norrland.
land.
while medan
29. Listen, are you going to Hr du, tnker du resa mycket medan
travel a lot while you are du r hr?
here.
both ... and bde .. och

res t, remainder rest -en -er
Europe Eu ropa
Fred: :W. Yes, both in Sweden and in the Ja, bde i SverIge och I resten
rest of Europe. av Europa.
to se l l att slj/a -er, slde, slt, 4

lot, mass mass/a -an -or
inexpensive, cheap b i I I i g -t -a
charter charter
trip, journey. tour res/a -an -or
abroad utlandet
Bengt: 31. Nowadays they sell lots of Nu fr tiden sljer de en massa bra
good and cheap charter tours och b i II i ga charterresor t II I ut landet.
to other countries.
anywhere var(tl som helst

32. You can [ly almost anywhere. Man kan flyga nstan vart som helst.
Uni t 11 333

SWEDISH 334
people folk -et -0

even, not only that but ti II och med (t.o.m.)
pleasure nje -t -n
Siberia Sibirien
33. People even go on pleaBure Fo I k fa r t l I I och med p nj as resa
trips to Siberia. tl II Sibi rien.
to wonder att undra, I

Fred: 34. I'm beginning to wonder when Jag brjar undra nr jag ska f tid
I'll have time to work here. att arbeta hr.
Unit 11

SWEDISH
VNIT 11
Nates on Hasia Sentences
la. Hej p dig! Idiomatic informal greeting.
1b. Tack fr sist (also: tack fr senast). S~edes have a number of special phrases
to expreBS gratitude.
Example s: Tack fr maten (af ter a meal).
Tack fr ikv\ I (af ter a nice evening).
Tack fr igr (for yeBterdaY'B party).
Tack fr hjlpen (for the aBBiBtanae).
Tack detsamma (thank you~ the same to you).
5. Hlsa p. Nate the differenae in meaning:

When .P! is stressed in att hlsa p, it means "to visit";
when hlsa is stressed in att h Isa p, it means "to greet (somebody) ", "to Bay
he llo-.-,,--
6. Hon r fdd. Notice that S~ediBh useB present tenBe where English uses past tense
(she was born). As long as a person is still living you have to say r fdd.
7. Hon r fransyska. Swedes refer to nationalities as nouns.
Examples: Han r fransman (he is Frenah).

Han r engelsman (he is English). Se e No te 1 8a.
9. Frenta Nationerna. In some names containing the word frenade. the ending
-ade has been contraated to -ta.
Example: Frenta Staterna {the United Statesj.
Uni t 11 JJ5

SWEDISH 336
11. Fyrtio grader varmt. Only the oentigrade scale is used in Sweden. When talking
about the temperature outside the words varmt or kallt are used to indicate
whether the temperature is above zero or below zero Celsius or centigrade.
Examples: Det r tv grader varmt. (It's two degreea above zero.)
Det r tio grader kallt. (It's ten degrees below zero.)
Here is the conversion formula from Fahrenheit to Celsius: 5 CF - 32)= C.

9
The opposite conversion is: ~ + 32 = F.
5
13. Brytning is a person's foreign accent. (The Swedish word accent mean8 8tre88 or
stress marker.) Note that the indefinite article is left out.
18a. UtlnnIng. The indefinite article is dropped before nouns denoting profe8sions~
occupations. nationalities J religious and philosophical affiliations. Utlnning
(foreigner) is included in this rule. Gf. Unit 3 J Note 6a.
l8b. Kan sprket. Att kunna ett sprk means to know a language. Att kunna + a noun
means "to know"J "to have learned" .
Examptes: Kan du lxan? (Do you know your homework?)
Kan du multipl ikationstabellen? (Do you know your multiplication tables?)
Jag kan reglerna. (I know the rules.)
Unit 11

SWEDISH
20. En mi nori tet ti II. Ti I I following a noun has the meaning of "another," "more, "
"addi tiona L "
Examples: Han kan lsa en bok tl I I. Be can read one more book.
Behver du en dollar till? Do you need another dollar?
Vi II du ha en kopp kaffe ti II? Would you like another cup of coffee?
Note: En annan (ett annat, andra) means "a different .. "
Example: Vi I I du ha en annan kopp? Do you want a different cup?
24. Sitt eget sprk. The adjective egen, eget, egna is an exception to the rule
of using the definite form of the adjective af ter a possessive adjective. Egen
(eget, egna) is used in the indefinite form after a possessive adjective.
Examples: Min ~ bok (my OWn book).

Mi tt eget rum (my own room); but mi n rda b i I (my red ear).
25. P lapska. In Swedish the preposition p is used before a language name where
English uses the preposition "in"
Examples: .2.i svenska (in Swedish)

.2.i engelska (in English)
32. Vart som helst. Som helst added to certain words has the meaning "any" ("it doesn't
matter") .
Examples: Var Som helst (anywhere)

Vad som helst (anything)
Vem som helst (anyone)
Vi Iket sprk som helst (any language)
Nr Som helst (any time)
Unit 11 337

SWEDISH 338
UNIT 11
Points to Practice
Point I: Man
Point II: Time adverbials
Point III: Nations, languages, and nationalities
Unit 11

SWEDISH
Point I. The Swedish Pronoun MAN.
Swedish uses the indefinite pronoun man very frequently where English uses
a personal pronoun or a noun, such as "you, we, they, people, one."
Example: Man fr inte rka var som helst. (You may not smoke just anywhere.J
Try to get into the habit of using man by doing the folZowing translation
practice.
Practice A. Translation.
1. We eat too much in the U. S.
Man ter fr mycket l U.S.A.
2. They say that he won't come back to Sweden.
Man sger att han inte kommer ti J Ibaka ti J I Sverige.
3. One shouldn't believe everything that is in the newspaper.
Man ska inte tro allt som str i tidningen.
4. You don't understand what he means.
Man frstr inte vad han menar.

5. You hear it often.
Man hr det ofta.
6. You never know.
Man vet aldrig.
Uni t 11 339

SWEDISH 340
7. People drink a lot of coffee in Sweden.
Man dricker mycket kaffe I Sverige.
8. You do what you can.
Man gr vad man kan.
Man has an objective form~ en, as well as two possessive forms~ ens, sin
(sitt, sina). The same rule applies in this case as in the use of~ns----sin,
hennes - sin, deras - sin. (See Unit 5, Point Ic.)
We will only give you a few examples of en, ens, sin (sitt, sina)~ since
the objective and possessive forms of man are not used very often.
Examples: UD skickar en hit och dit.

The Foreign Ministry sends you here and there.
Man vi I I grna hjlpa om ngon ber en.

Yuu like to help i f someone asks you to.
Nr lraren frgar en ngot blir man ofta nervs.

When the teacher asks you something~ you often get nervous.
Ens I iv r ens eget.

Your Life is your own.
Man gr sitt bsta.

You do your best.
Man mste betala sina rkningar.

You have to pay your bills.
Unit 11

SWEDISH
Point II: Time Adverbials
The adverbial time expressions in Swedish need some extra attention. Let's
first look at some expressions which you are already familiar with:
j frrgr the day before yesterday

19 r yesterday
Idag today
i kv I I tonight
imorgon tomorrow
i vermorgon the day af ter tomorrow
In all these examples the preposition ( is used. However, the re are other
expressions where you use the preposit7on~. To make i t easier for you to
sort out these different uses we are giving you a table of time expressions.
The expressions in the table all answer the question Nr? (when?).
When you look at the table you will notice that the names of the seasons,
the holidays. the days of the week and the months are not capitalized in
Swedish.
WHEN?
1. The choice of preposition depends on whether the time expressed is a

8pecific occasion in the past, present, future, Or implies habit.
Unit 11 341

SWEDISH 342
WHEN?
Past time Pl'esent time Future time Habitual-
Aret (the year) fr ra ret i r nsta r

ifjol, ifjor
Arstider (seasons)
vinter (winter) vintras vinter vinter p vintern
p vintrarna
vr (spring) v ras v r v r p v ren

p v ra rna
sommar (summel') I somras I sommar sommar p sommaren

p somrarna
hst (fall) hstas hst hst p hsten
p hstarna
Helger (hoLidays)
jul (Christmas) julas jul j ul p j uI e n

psk (Easter) pskas psk p s k p psken
pingst (Pentecost) pingstas pingst p I n 9S t p pingsten
midsommar (Midsummer) mi dsomras midsommar midsommar p mI dsomma ren
Unit 11

SWEDISH
WHEN?
Past time Present time Future time Habitual
Dagen (the day) i frrg r idag Imorgon p dagen

i g r i vermorgon p dagarna
morgon (morning) i morse Imorgon bItti p morgonen

p mornarna
frmiddag (10-12 a.m.) frmiddags imorgon frmiddag p frmiddagen

p frmiddagarna
eftermiddag i eftermiddags eftermiddag eftermiddag p eftermiddagen

{afternoon} p eftermiddagarna
kv I I i (gr) kvll i k v I I i k v I I p kvllen

(evening, night) p kvllarna
nat-r i (gr) natt natt natt p natten

(12 midnight - 5 a.m.) p ntterna
sndag (Sunday) sndags p sndag p sndagarna

mndag (Monday) mndags p mndag p mndagarna
tisdag (Tuesday) tisdags p tisdag p tisdagarna
onsdag (Wednesday) onsdags p onsdag p onsdagarna
torsdag (Thursday) torsdags p torsdag p torsdagarna
fredag (Friday ) fredags p fredag p fr-edagarna
lrdag (Saturday) lrdags p lrdag p lrdagarna
Unit 11 343

SWEDISH 344
Fo~ months you simply use the p~eposition l.

Fast time F~esen t time Futul'e time Habitual
Mnader (months)
januari januari januari januari I januari

februari
mars
apr i I
maj
juni
j uI i
augusti
september
oktober
november
december
o o o IJ o
unit 11

SWEDISH
Practice B. Dur first practice will cover only time expressions dealing with
the seasons and the holidays. Remember that your choice of expressian depends
on whether you are speaking about the past, the present, the future, or some-
thing habitual. Use the proper form of the aue word and fill in the blank.
eVE
for vi ti II en lappby. Last winter we went to vinter
a Lapp vi Llage.
I vintras
Yi ska resa ti II New York sommar
sommar
Yl bodde alltid Norrland sommar
p sommaren (p somrarna)
r det mrkt och kallt. hst
p hsten (p hstarna)
hlsade vi p moster Anna. psk
pskas
AmerIka arbetar man pIngst
p pingsten
for vi till Dalarna. j uI
I julas
Marge kommer alltid hem frn college j uI
p julen
UnU 11 345

SWEDISH 346
Practice e. This practice will deal with expressions concerning the days of
the week. Vse the proper form of the cue words and fill in the blanks.
eVE
var vl p Operan. Last Wednesday we were at onsdag

the Opera.
I onsdags
Man gr i kyrkan sndag
p sndagarna
Eriks mamma kommer hem lrdag

p lrdag
Ake var hemma fredag

I fredags
Lars brjar arbeta tisdag

p tisdag
Mnga ter fisk fredag

p fredagarna
kom Browns hit p middag. lrdag

lrdags
Jag ska g p Operan torsdag

p torsdag
Unit 11

SWEDISH
Ohi
2. When the time expression. in answel' to the question "when?". specifies

a number of years. months. weeks. days, houl's. etc . the folZowing
prepositions are used. depending on the tense of the verb:
Om (in) future and present tense
Fr se(da}n (ago) pas t tense
ExampZes: Vi reser om en vecka. We 're leaving in a week.
Vi ska f lytta om en mnad. We 're moving in one month.
Paketet kom fr en timme sedan. The package arrived one hour ago.
Bi II bodde dr fr f I era r sedan. BiZl Zived there sevel'al years

ago.
Practice D. This is a practice on Q0 and fr ... sedan. Note the verb tense
and choose the right preposition.
eVE
Han gick Re lejt an hour ago. en timme
tr en timme sedan
Unit 11 34 ?

SWEDISH 348
eVE
Bergs bodde hr mn.tla r
tr mnga r sedan
Han kommer ti Ilbaka tv dagar
om tv dagar
Bob kom hem en vecka
fr en vecka sedan
Vi ska tara hem en halvtimme
om en halvtimme
Han ska brja arbeta ett par dagar
om ett par dagar
Dah I grens tnker resa ti II J nd I en en mnad

om en mnad
Nate: In time expressions the preposition etter is used when EngLish uses
the preposition Hafter, H that is to indicate eLapsed time.
ExampLes: Filmen var dlig, s vi gick etter en halvtimme.

The movie Was bad, so we left after haLf an hour.
Han var hr, men han gick etter tem minuter.

He was here, but he Le[t alter live minuteB.
Unit 11

SWEDISH
HOW OFTEN?
3. All the time expressions we have dealt with 80 fa~ answe~ the question
"when?" Now we will look at the time exp~essions used in answel' to the
question "How often?" In anSWe~ to "how often?" the p~epositions l and
om are used.
With the following wOl'ds is used:
sekunden
l
minuten
timmen
veckan
m~naden
----
Example8: ett ord i sekunden one word aseeond
sextio ord i minuten sixty words aminute
ttio ki lometer l timmen eighty kilometers an hour
en g ng i veckan onee a week
tv gnger i m~naden twiee a month
With the following wo~dB om is used:
om
{ ~t
~ ret
Uni t 11 349

SWEDISH 350
Examples: en tidning om dagen one newspaper a day

fyra tabletter om dygnet four tablets every 24 hours
tio frestllningar om i:1ret ten performances a year
Note the definite article in the Swedish.
Fractice E. This is a practice with mixed time expressions using i and om.
Fill in the blank with the correct preposition and the right form of the-Cue
word.
eUE
Patienten tog medicinen fyra gnger The patient took the dag
medicine four times
om dagen a day.
Hon studerade svenska tv dagar vecka
veckan
Anna rkte flera cigarretter timme
i timmen
Pojken var hemma frn skolan flera gnger m nad
mnaden
Vi tar semester tv gnger r
om ret
Flickan ringde flera gnger vecka

i veckan
Unit 11

SWEDISH
eUE
Ulf rakade sig tv gnger dag
om dagen
Margit mblerade om flera gnger r
om ret
Eva kammade sig en gng minut
minuten
HOW LONG?
4. We have talked about time exppessions answeping the questions "when?" and
"how o[ten?" Now let's look at time exppessions answeping the question
"how long?" In English the time ppeposition in this case is "[op." In
Swedish I is used in an a[[ipmative statement. ~ top a negative one.
Exa mp l e s : Vi ha r var i t i St o c k h o I m I f e m da g a r
We have been in Stockholm-for five days.
Jag har inte sett henne ~ tre r.
I have not seen hep fop thpee yeaps.
Uni t 11 351

SWEDISH 352
Praatiae F. This is a praatiae dealing with the uses of ~ and E! in time

expressions answering the question uhow long?U Fill in the blank with the
aorreat preposition.
Bo tnkte p saken en hel vecka. Bo thought about it for a whole week.
Vi ska stanna l USA tre r.
De reste omkrl ng I Afrika tv mnader.
VI bodde Skvde t i o r.
Han hade arbetat p boken tta mnader.
Han har I nte I st en bok flera r.
UJ I a och Maj har vari t p ett fredrag tv timmar.
Lisa har Inte kt tg flera r.
Unit 11

SWEDISH
HOW FAST?
5. When the time expression answers the question "how fast (can something be
done)?" Swedish uses the preposition ~.
Examples: Han krde frn Stockholm ti l I Malm ~ tio timmar.

He drove from Stockholm to Malmo ~n ten hours.
Han skrev boken ~ en mnad.

He wrote the book in one month.
Han gick ti II stationen E! tio minuter.

He walked to the station ~n ten minutes.
Here is a list of o~her prepositions used in time expressions:
Fre {before}: Han kom hem fre tta.

He came home before eight.
Me I I an (between) : Mellan jul och nyr.

Between Christmas and New Year.
Ti II (till, until): Vi ska stanna i New York t i l l den frsta oktober.

We/re going to stay in New York until the first of October.
Unit 11 353

SWEDISH 354
Under (during): Jag r hemma under dagen.

I' m home during the day.
ver (over, dUY'ing,

for the dura- Vi ska fara bort ver psken.
tion of): We/re going away for Easter.
Uni t 11

SWEDISH
Point III. Nations, Nationalities, Languages
Here is a table of some of the nations, nationalities and languages of the

world. There are a few points to nate:
1. Names of languages and nationalities are not capitalized in Swedish.
2. There are different words for females and males.
J. The word for the female is often the same as for the language.
4. The nationality nouns and adjectives are declined according to the rules
that are applicable to other nouns and adjectives.
Examples: (nouns) fransysk/a -an -or; svensk -en -ar; fransman -neo, fransmn
(adjs.) fransk -t -a; svensk -t -a
5. Remember that the indefinite article is not used in sentence structures

like r + nationality.
Examples: Erik r svensk. Erik is a Swede.
John r amerikan. John is an American.
See Basic Sentence Note 18a in this Unit.
Unit 11 355

SWEDISH 358
Landet Adjektivet Mannen Kvinnan ~ket

Coun try Adjeetive Man Woman Language
Sverige svensk -t -a en svensk -~, en svensk/a -or svenska

da ns k dansk danska danska
Daomark
Tyskland
(,t-, y"t-)
Ryssland
(Sovjetunionen)
}
l tysk
ry s k
tysk
~
tyska
rys ka
tyska
rys ka
Japan Japansk: -t -a en j a pa n -er en japansk/a -or japanska

Grekland grekisk g re k grekiska grekiska
Kina kinesisk kines kInesiska kinesiska
Polen polsk polack polska po I ska
Amerika amerikansk amerikan ameri kanska engelska
(Frenta Staterna) (amerikanare -0) }
I ta I i en ital iensk -t -a en Italienare -~ en Italiensk/a -or ital ienska

Holland hollndsk hollndare hollndska hol I ndska
Schweiz schweizisk schweizare schweiziska
Finland finsk finlndare finlndska finska
(finska)
England engelsk -t -a en engels/man -mn en engelsk/a -or engelska

Norge norsk norrman no rs ka norska
Frankrike fransk fransman fransyska franska
Spanien spansk -t -a en spanjor -e r en spanjorsk/a -or spanska
If you study this ehart earefully you will notiee that eertain patterns emerge.
Note: The plural of the maseuline noun is used for people in general of that partieular
nationality .
Examples: Svenskarna dricker mycket kaffe. The Swedes drink a lot of eoffee.
Engelsmnnen kr p vnster sida. The English drive on the left.
Unit 11

SWEDISH
Practice G. This is a practice on languages and nationalities . The cue gives

the country and you have to fill in the nationality 01' language as the verb
indicates.
eUE
I Polen bor det Poles live in Poland. Polen
polacker
Lars talar I ta Il en
i tal i enska
Louise r Frankrike
fransyska
Hon talar bra Sverige
svenska
Det var tio p bussen. u. S. A.

amerrkaner <amerikanare)
Mnga r vackra. Spanien {female}
spanjorskor
Vi trffade en trevlig Norge
no rrman
Det r inte svrt att lsa Danmark
danska
Uni t 11 3ti7

SWEDISH 358
eVE
Tv av kunde tala England (mate). Tyskland
engelsmnnen tyska
Mnga ta I a r Finland. Sverige
finlndare svenska
Det r inte s svrt fr en att tala _____ . Spanien (male), Italien
spanjor italienska
Practice H. This is a practice on adjectives denoting nationalities. They

are declined just ~ike all other adjectives. Form adjectives from the cue
words.
eVE
Sverige, importerar viner. Sweden imports Frenah wines. Frankrike
franska
Danmark exporterar ost. Danmark

da ns k
Vinet var Tyskland

tys kt
Han krde en bi I I ta I I en
italiensk
Unit 11

SWEDISH
eVE
De hade gamla mbler. England
engelska
Andy kunde inte ett ord. No rge
no rs k t
Den presidenten talade p TV. U. S. A.
amerikanska
En pojke satt ti I I hger om henne. Spanien
spansk
Practice r. The cue in this practice gives you the nationa~ity. You have to
give the appropriate country (sometimes in the possessive form).
eVE
Kpenhamn r huvudstad. eopenhagen is the capital da ns k
of Denmal'k.
Danmarks
exporterar mycket vin ti I I U.S.A. italienare

I ta I i en
Mnga svenskar far ti II p semester. g re k
Grekland
Unit 11 359

SWEDISH 360
CUE
export var strre r. amerikan
Frenta Staternas (Amerikas)
Mnga goda ostar kommer frn fransman
Frankrike
huvudstad heter Oslo. norrman
No rg es
I igger sder om tysk, dansk

Tyskland Danmark
Det gr en frja mellan och ho I lndare, enge I 5man

Holland England
LT OSS TALA SVENSKA
Now you can talk about all the trips you have
taken and plan to take and all the interesting
people you have met.
Uni t 11

SWEDISH
UNIT 12
SOCIAL GATHERINGS
Basic Sentences
This three-part Unit is an introduction to Swedish social etiquette.

It contains useful expressions encountered in social situations.
These expressions will be underlined in order to make you more
aware of them. At the end of the Unit we will have a practice
on these expressions. To obtain maximum benefit from this mate-
rial, extensive role-playing should supplement it.
Part I. An informal invitation to lunch
Jane: 1. He Uo! Ha" !
Asa: 2. Is that you, Jane? r det Jane?
Jane: 3. Yes, speaking. Hi Asa. How Ja, det r det. Hej Asa. Hur har
are things with you? (plur.J n i d et?
first frst
foremost frmst
first of aH frst och fr~mst
to thank att tacka,
late sen -t -a
latest senast
Asa: 4. Fine, thanks. First of all I Tack bra. Frst och fr~mst vi I I jag
want to thank you for the tacka dig fr senast.
(very) enjoyable) evening at
your house.
Unit 12 361

SWEDISH 362
Jane: 5. It was so nice to have you Tack sjlv. Det var s trevligt att
here. ha er hr. *
to be ashamed, embarras sed att skm/mas -s -des -ts, 2a

Asa: 6. I'm ashamed that I haven't Jag skms att jag inte har ringt
called you Boaner. tidigare.
Buper, great jttetrevl i g -t -a

sole sjtung/a -an -or
filet of Bale sjtungsfil e -n -er
7. It waB Buch a great evening at Det var s jttetrevl igt hos er i
your house las t Friday . The fredags. Sjtungsf i I en var underbar. Jt
filet of sole was wonderful.
afraid rdd 11 -a
too fr
to get (Bomeone) to leave att f Ivag; fr, fick, ftt, 4
8. I' m afraid we stayed too langs Jag r rdd att vi stannade fr lnge,
but I couldn't get Johan to men jag kunde inte f ivg Johan.
leave.
fun roi ig -t -a
to enjoy att tycka att ngot r roi 19t; 2b
to discUSB Jto have a dis- att d i skutera , I
cussion
9. Be enjoys having a discuBsion Han tycker att det r s roi Igt att
with Mike. diskutera med Mike. *
Uni t 12

SWEDISH
to find att finna, finner, fann, funnit, 4

to hit it off (togetherJ att finna varandra; 4
Bong visla -an -or
to sing att sjunga, sjunger, sjng, sjungit; 4
Jane: 10. Yes, they have really hit it Ja, de har verkligen funnit varandra.
off together. What a lot of Vad mnga-trevl iga visor Johan sjng!
nice songs Johan sang.
to arrange att ordna, I

Asa: 11. Listen, I'm planning a small Hr du, jag tnker ordna en liten dam-
ladies' luncheon at my house I unch hemma hos mi g p I rdag i nsta
on Saturday next week. vecka.
approximately, about sdr (colloquialJ

piece (not transl. in Engl.J stycke -t -n
simplicity enkelhet -en (/;
no thing fancy i all enkelhet
12. Would you like to come? There H a r d u I u s t a t t ko mm a? Vi b I i r
will be around six or eight of sdr sex, tta stycken. Det blir
us. Nothing fancy. i all enkelhet. "
terrible hemsk -t -a
terribly hemskt
I'd love to hemskt grna
Jane: 13. I'd love to. You know how I Hemskt grna, Asa. Du vet hur roligt
enjoy meeting Swedish people. ~ag tycker det r att trffa svenskar.
Are they old friends of yours? Ar det gamla vnner ti I I dig? "
Unit 12 363

SWEDISH 364
friend kamrat -en -er

schoolmate skolkamrat -en -er
to invite att bjuda, bjuder, bjd, bjudit, 4
colleague arbetskamrat -en -er
Asa: 14. Yes, two (of them) are even Ja, tv r till och med gamla skol-
old schoolmates. And then I kamrater. Och s har jag bjudit ett
have invited a couple of col- par arbetskamrater.
leagues.
defense frsvar -et -0

attache attache -n -er
15. The wife of the German defense Den tyska frsvarsattachens fru kommer
attache is coming too. Do you ocks. Talar du tyska?
speak German?
anyway, besides frresten

it doesn't matter det gr detsamma
18. Anyway it doesn't matter. She Det gr frresten detsamma. Hon talar
speaks Swedish quite well. ganska bra svenska.
Jane: 17. What time should I come? Hur dags ska jag komma?
to serve att servera,

sherry sherry -n '/1
late, delayed frsen/ad -at -ade
Asa: 18. Around 12:30. I'm going to Vid halv ett-tiden. Jag tnker servera
serve a glass of sherry first, ett glas sherry frst och s ter vI
and then we 'll eat at one klockan ett, om ingen r frsenad. *
o'clock, i f nobody 's late.
Unit 12

SWEDISH
to see each other att ses, ses, sgs, setts, 4

before then dessfrinnan
19. I'm looking forward to seeing Vlkommen p lrdag d, om vi inte ses
you SaturdaY3 if we don't see dessfrinnan.
each other before then.
to say hello (tO)3 to greet 3 att hlsa <till)j

to give regards (to)
Jane: 20 Thanks a lot. I'm looking Tack ska du ha. Det ska bl i trevl igt.
forward to it. Bye 3 bye 3 Asa. Hej d, Asa. Hlsa tl I I Johan.
Say hello to Johan.
Part II. An invitation to a dinner

Karin
Lind-
gren: Hello. May I speak to Mrs. Goddag. Kan jag f tala med Mrs. White.
White 3 please. This is Mrs. Det r fru Lindgren. *
Lindgren.
Voice: Just a moment 3 please. Ett gonb I i ck.

Mary
White: Hello. Mary White speaking. Ha I I . Det r Mary White.
yet nnu
husband 3 man man, mannen, mn
Karin: 24. Hello J MT's. White. This is Goddag, Mrs. White. Det hr r Karin
Karin Lindgren. We haven't Lindgren. VI har inte trffats nnu,
met yet 3 but OUT' husbands men vra mn knner varandra.
know each other.
Unit 12 365

SWEDISH 366
25. I'm calling to ask if you Jag ringer fr att frga om ni skulle
could come for dinner at kunna komma p middag ti I loss den
our house on September 18th. 18:de september.
calendaT' almanack/a -an -or

Mary: 26. Thank you. That sounds very Tack, det lter vldigt trevligt. Ett
nice. Just a minute and I'll gonbl ick s fr jag se efter j alma-
check the calendaT'. nackan.
as faT' as svitt
of course frsts
to cheok att kolla, l
27. Yes, that's fine. as faT' aB I Ja, det passar utmrkt, svitt jag
can see. But I must, of kan se. Men jag mste frsts kolla
cOUY'se. check with Bill. med B i I I.
while. moment stund -en -er

28. May I call you in a little Kan jag f ringa om en l i ten stund?
while? What time would it be? Hu r d~ sku I I e det va ra?
caT'd kort -et -0

Karin: 29. At 7:30. I'll send a card to Halv tta. Jag skickar ett kort fr
T'emind you, and a little map att pminna och en I iten karta s
BO you can find us heT'e in ni kan hitta oss hr ute i Tby.
Taby.
majaT' ma j o r - e n - e r
30. Major BeT'ggT'en and his wife Major Berggren och hans fru kommer
are also coming. They live ocks. De bor p Banergatan 14.
on BaneT'gatan, number 14.
Unit 12

SWEDISH
block kvarter -et -0

company sll skap -et -(i1
go (come) together att gra sllskap; gr, gjorde, gjort, 4
31. It's only one block from your Det r bara ett kvarter frn er, om ni
house. i f you would like to har lust att gra sllskap ut.
come out together.
to get in touch (here: to att hra av sig; 2a

call back)
as soon as s snart (som)
Mary: 32. Excellent. Then I'll eaU Utmrkt. D hr jag av mig igen,
baok again as soon as I have s snart jag har talat med Bi I I.
talked to Bill. Goodbye: and Adj och tack igen.
thanks again.
Karin: 33. I hore it's all right with him Jag hoppas att det passar honom
too. so that we will see both ocks, s att vi tfJr se er bda
of you on the 18th. Goodbye. den 18:de. Adj d och vl komna.
We're looking forward to see-
ing you.
Unit 12 367

SWEDISH 368
Part III. A formal dinner party

Although informal parties and get-togethers are becoming more and more common in servant-
less Sweden, you will undoubtedly have several opportunities to attend some formal dinner
parties. At such times many Swedes like to observe certain traditional "rituals." It
is. of course, not necessary for Americans stationed in Sweden to copy the Swedish tra-
ditions when they entertain. Swedes enjoy American customs when they visit American
homes. However. the host's welcome speech is a good idea to adopt. as well as the
thank you speech (when you are aguest).
You may be invited by aard (in which case you accept or regret by card. unless otherwise
indicated). or by a telephone call from the host or hostess. A reminder card then
usually follows.
At this point we will describe a typical formal dinner party, in Swedish with an accom-
panying word list. This will be reading/ listening practice only. It is not intended
for memorization.
Bordet r dukat t i l l fest med blommor och ljus. Placeringskort visar var gsterna ska
sitta. Det ligger ocks en plan ver bordsplaceringen i hallen. Vrden och vrdinnan
att duka, I ljus -et -0 vrd -en -ar

to set the table candl e. light hos t
duk/ad -at -ade placeringskort -et -0 vrdinn/a -an -or
set (past part.) place card hostess
fest -en -er plan -en -er
party plan. chart
blomm/a -an -or bordsplacering -en -ar

flower seating arrangement
Unit 12

SWEDISH
tar emot i vardagsrummet. Alla anlnder punkt! igt, mnga med en blombukett, en choklad-
ask eller ngon I iten present. Det gller srski It om de r gster i hemmet fr frsta
gngen. Under hgst en halvtimme dricker gsterna en cocktai I. Sedan kommer serverings-
hjlpen och talar om att middagen r serverad. Vrden gr frst i n ti II bordet med den
kv i nn I i ga hedersgsten. Varje mani ig gst fr sin bordsdam ti II bordet. Vrdinnan gr
in sist med den manliga hedersgsten, som sitter t i l l vnster om henne (till skillnad
mot seden i mnga lnder). Vrden hlsar gsterna vlkomna med det frsta glaset vin.
att ta emot; att glla, 2a kvinnlig - t - a t I I I s k i i I n a d mo t

tar, tog, tagit, 4 to apply, to be the fema1-e in eontrast to
to reeeive ease
hedersgst -en -er sed -en -er
att anlnda, 2a hem -met -0 most honored or high- eustom
to arrive home est ranking guest
att hlsa vlkommen
bukett -en -er cockta i I -en -s mani i9 -t -a (vlkomna);
bouquet eoek tai 1- male to we leome
choklad -en 0 serveringshjlp -en -ar att fra, 2a
ehocolate maid to eseort
ask -en -ar att tala om; bordsdam -en -er
box to announoe female table partner
present -en -er server/ad -at -ade ski II nad -en -er
gift serve d (past part.) differenee
Unit 12 :569

SWEDISH 370
(Ingen dricker vin dessfrinnan.) En manlig gst sklar under middagen med sin bordsdam
ti II hger, senare med damen ti Il vnster och damen mitt emot. Han sklar ocks med
sin hustru. Vrdinnan sklar med alla gsterna. Dremot sklar ingen med henne utom
vid tacktalet (eller om det r frre n tta personer vid bordet). Man kan frsts ocks
dricka utan att skla med ngon. Vid slutet av mltiden hller den manliga hedersgsten
ett I i tet tackta I Vrdinnan och hedersgsten lmnar bordet frst. Vrden och hans bords-
dam gr ut sist. vardagsrummet gr gsterna fram ti I I vrdinnan, tar i hand och tackar
fr maten. I Sverige sger gsterna adj ti I J vrdfolket innan de tar p sig ytterkl-
derna.
att skla, slut -et -0 vrdfol k -et -0

to toast end host and hostess
mitt emot mltid -en -er
(straight) aeross meal
dremot att g fram t i l l ;

on the other hand gr, gick, gtt, 4
to go (walk) up to
tackta I -et -0
thank you speeuh att ta i hand;
tar, tog, tagit, 4
f, frre, 0 to shake hands
few, fewer, Zeast
Unit 12

SWEDISH
Dagen efter bjudningen r det uppskattat om man ringer och "tackar fr igr," eller skriver
och tackar. Man kan ocks skicka blommor med ett tackkort dagen efter bjudningen Istllet
fr att ta med blommorna ti II middagen. Det artigaste och mest formella r att skicka
blommor ti I I vrdinnan p frmiddagen samma dag som bjudningen. Svenskarna sger dess-
utom I1tack fr senast" nsta gng de trffar vrden och vrdinnan.
bjudning -en -ar

party
att uppskatta,
to appreeiate
uppskatt/ad -at -ade

appreeiated (past part.)
tackkort -et -0
thank you note
artig -t -a
polite
formel I -t -a
formal
Unit 12 3?1

SWEDISH 372
Bill and Mary White arrive with

the Berggrens at Karin and Lars
Lindgren's house.
Karin &
Lars: 34. Hello. How nice that you Goddag. Vlkomna! S trevligt
could come together. att ni kunde gra sllskap.
Karin: 35. Thank you. What beautiful Tack. Vilka vackra blommor!
f towers !
(Lars indicates Klaus Muller)
Lars: 36. Do you know each other? Knner n I varandra?
Bi ll: 37. No~ I don't believe we have Nej, jag tror inte vi har trffats.
met.
press attache~
information pressattache -n -er
officer
Lars: 38. Mr. and Mrs. White~ Dr. Muller. Mr. och Mrs. White. Det hdr r
He is the press attache at the Dr. Muller. Han r pressattach
German Embass y. p tyska ambassaden.
to offer att bjuda p; bjuder, bjd, bjudit, 4

wormwood malrt -en 0
aquavit brnnvin -et 0
39. What may I offer you? A glass Vad fr jag bjuda p? Ett glas
of sherry, Scotch, or maybe sherry, Scotch, eller kanske ett
a glass Of aquavit spiced glas malrtsbrnnvin?
with wormwood?
Uni t 12

SWEDISH
Later'
served (past par't.) server/ad -at -ade

Maid: 40. Vinner is served. Det r serverat.
Karin: 41. Dinner is r'eady. Shall we go Varsgoda. Ska vi g t i l l bords? *

in?
At the tabLe (Lars r'aises his

gLass) .
heartily hjrtl igt

Laps: 42. Karin and I want to welcome Karin och jag ber att f hlsa er
you aLL, old friends and neW. alla hjrtligt vlkomna. bde gamla
och nya vnner. *
especially spec i e I I t
43. We are especialLy pLeased to Det glder oss speciellt att Whites
have the Whites here tonight. r hr i kvll. Ni har ju just
You just arrived from the U.S. kommit frn Amerika.
cheers skl
44. We hope that you will like it Vi hoppas att ni kommer att trivas
in Sweden and that we will see i Sverige och att vi kan f se er
you many times her'e at our mnga gnger hr hemma hos oss. --
house. -- Cheers! S k I !
(All the guests drink includ-

ing the guests of honor.)
Uni t 12 373

SWEDISH 374
Later
title titel -n, titlar

to put away att lgga bort; lgger, lade, lagt, 4
Karin: 45. Mr. White, now I think we Mr. White, nu tycker jag att vi
should call each other by lgger bort titlarna. Jag heter
our first names. My name Ka r i n. S k I, B I I I
is Karin. Cheers, Bill.
Bill: 46. Cheers, Karin. s k I, Ka r i n .
Karin: 47. Dr. Muller, may I toast you? Dr. MUller, fr jag skla med er?
Towards the end of the dinner,

during the dessert (Bill taps
his glass and gets up).
to discover att upptcka, 2b

tradition, custom tradition -en -er
Bill: 48. Ladies and Gentlemen. Mary Mina damer och herrar. Mary och
and I have already discovered jag har redan upptckt flera
many delightful Swedish tra- trevl iga svenska traditioner som
ditions which we will take v i kommer att ta med oss hem
home with us to the U. S. ti Il Ameri ka.
49. And now I'm going to try to Och nu ska jag sjlv frska flja
follow one of them myself for en av dem fr frsta gngen.
the first time.
unit 12

SWEDISH
honor dra -n 0
to turn att vnda, 2a
lovely, charming frtjusande -0 -0
50. As you see J I' m the one who Jag dr ju den som har ran att f
has the honor of giving the h I I a t a c kt a I e t . F r s t v i I I j a g
thank you speech. First I vnda mig ti I I vr frtjusande
want to turn to our lovely vrdinna.
hostess.
suy'e sker -t, skra

51. Dear Karin. I' m sure that I' m Kra Karin. Jag ar sker p att
speaking for all of us when jag talar fr oss al la ~ar jag
I say that this is one of the sger att detta r en av de godaste
best dinners that I have ever middagar jag ngonsin har tit.
had. It has also been one of Det har ocks varit en av de
the most delightful. trevligaste.
experience (in a positive upplevelse -n -r

sense)
52. For Mary and me it has also Fr Mary och mig r det ocks en
been a wonderful experience upplevelse att f trffa s mnga
to meet so many of your av era vnner. Lt oss alla skla
friends. Let us drink to the f r v r d i nna n S k I ! Jl
hos tess. Cheers.
Guests: 53. Cheers, cheers Karin. Skl, skl Karin.
Unit 12 375

SWEDISH 376
Upon Ieaving
Mary: 54. Good-night and thank you fo~ Godnatt och tack fr en mycket trev-
a ve~y nice evening. I i g kv I I .
Karin: 55. Don't mentian it. It was so Tack sjlv. Det var s roi igt att
nice mee ting you. I hope we' Il trffa er. Jag hoppas vi ses snart
see you again, soon. igen.
Unit 12

SWEDISH
UNIT 12
Notes on Hasic Sentences
5. Tack sjlv (t hanks yourself) - one of several responses to tack s mycket,

meaning uyou are welcome u or udon't mention it. u
Other Swedish expressions in response to tack s mycket are:

Ingen orsak don't mention it
det var s lite it was so little
det var IngentIng it Was nothing
det var s roi igt att ... it was so nice that
You have to try to judge for yourself which phrase is the most appropriat~
one in a given situation.
7. Jttetrevlig -t -a. Jtte- (giant) is a prefix used with adjeatives and adverbs
in colloquial speech to express the meaning of uvery , u or Uextremely. u It is
also used with nouns to give the same kind of meaning.
Examples: jttebra super
jttedi Ig extremely bad
ett jttefretag a giant corporation
The clasest English equivaZent is usuper, u but note that jtte- is used to
emphasize something negative as weZl as positive.
Examples: Trtan r jttegod.
The eake is super.
Det var en jttetrkig fl Im.

It was an extremely boring movie.
Unit; 12 377

SWEDISH 3'18
9. Han tycker det r s roi igt (he enjoys). There are many ways of expressing
"to enjoy" in Swedish.
Examples: Han tycker det r sknt att bada bastu.

Be enjoys a sauna.
Tyckte du om fi Imen
Did you enjoy the movie?
Trivs ni i Sverige?
Are you enjoying your stay in Sweden?
12. Stycken. Swedish often adds stycken when a numeral (higher than one)
stands alone~ without a noun.
13. Hemskt grna conveys the same meaning as the English expression "I'd love to."
Att lska (to love) is usually reserved for romance.
18. VId halv ett-tiden (around 12:3J). Idiomatic way of expressing approximate time.
Examples: vid femtiden

vid sjutiden
vid halv ttatiden
21. Mr. och Mrs. Swedes often use Mr. and Mrs. (instead of herr och fru) in front
of an English name.
41a. Varsgoda (here plur.) means "please~" when you offer a person something (to eat
or to go ahead of you through a door~ etc.)~ or "here you are~ n when you hand
something to someone.
Unit 12

SWEDISH
41b. TIll bords. This is an ord form which is still in use in certain e:cpressions,
meaning "to the table," or "at the table." There are other Bimilazo e:cpzoessionB:
t i I I havs at sea
t i l l sjss at sea
tl I I sngs in bed
ti I I fots on foot
t i II skogs to the woods
42. Hjrtl igt. Swedes often use ofrms of the word hJrtlig (heazotyJ to give certain
expressions a little more emphasis.
Examples: Hjrtl igt vlkommen Welcome
Hjrtl iga gratulationer Congratulations
Hjrtl igt tack Many thanks
52. Now we 'll give you a few more examples of the Swedish "thank you speech. "
As you'll see there are many forms, from the very formal to the most informal.
It can be flowery, eloquent, slightly silly, long or brief and to the point.
A personal nate or anecdote is always very nice. Hut most appreciated is the
fact that you know about this custom and that you follow it even if it only
means that you stand up, turn to your hostess and say: Tack fr en underbar
middag. Skl fr vrdinnan. You may want to use our examples 01' borrow portions
of them or, better yet, make up your own speeeh.
Herr X: (short and to the point, atmosphere very informalJ

Nu tror ni frsts att jag tnker Now you are probably thinking that
st hr och prata medan glassen I'm going to stand here talking white
sm I ter, men jag sger bara: Ma- the ice aream is melting. Hut I'll
ten var god, festen r jttekul. just say: The food was good, the party
Skl och tack. is great. Cheers and thank you.
Unit 12 379

SWEDISH 380
Herr Z: (knows the host and hostess well and has an anecdote to tell, which you
will supply yoursetf)
Kra vrdfolk. pA mina och de Dear hast and hostess. On behatf

andra gsternas vgnar vi II jag of mysetf and the other guests I
tacka er bAda fr en utskt god want to thank both of you for
middag och en mycket trevlig a superb dinner and marvelous com-
samvaro. Det r alltid lik:::J pany. It is always a treat to
roi igt att f Komma p fest ti II be invited to your house. Good
er. God mat, goda viner och food, good wine, and nice people.
trevliga mnniskor. Aprop vAr Talking about our hostess I'll
sta vrdinna, s mste jag ff have to tell you a tittle story.
bertta en I iten historia. Det This is how it happened
var s hr .
Den hr historien visar vl vilken This story surely shows what a
trevlig (intelligent, rolig, god- lovely (intelligent, funny, good-
hjrtad, kv i cktnktl ~erson "r hearted> sharp) person our hostess
vrdinna r. is.
Tack igen fr den charmanta middagen Thanks again for the excellent
och skl fr vrdinnan. dinner and a toast to our hostess.
Herr : (wants to express his thanks to the host and hostess as a team)
Ni har vl alla sett den dr vl- You have probably all seen that
knda rekl amen fr danskt l. Den famous ad for Danish beer. One
ena dansken sger ti I I den andra: Dane says to the other: "Tell
"Hr du, nr smakar det hr let me, when does this beer taste the
bst?" Och den andra dansken best?" And the other Dane anSWers:
svarar: "Alltid." Jag sger "Always." I ask the same about
detsamma om Lindgrens fester: Nr the Lindgrens' parties: When
r det trevligast att g pA kalas is the best time to go to a party
ti II Karin och Lars; r det p at Karin and Lars'; is it at
midsommaren, krftkalaset, jul- Midsummer, at the crayfish party,
festen eli er den I i Ila torsdags- Christmas party or the little Thurs-
middagen? Svaret bl ir frsts: day dinner. The answer is, of course:
Alltid. Jag r sker p att ni Always. I' m sure that you
Unit 12

SWEDISH
alla hller med mig om det. Karin aLL agree ~ith me. Karin and
och Lars, ni har lyckats igen. Lars Jyou did it again. Thanks
Tack fr en underbart god middag. for a marveLous dinner. A toast
Skl fr Karin och Lars. to Karin and Lars.
Herr : (doesn't want to repeat what he said last time and oan't think of
anything new so he jokes a little)
K r a Ka r i n. De t r f a k t i s k t I i t e Dear Karin. ActualLy this makes me

nervst det hr. Jag har knappast a little nervous. I've hardly
kunnat ta min goda efterrtt. Var been able to eat my delicious dessert.
ska det hr sluta? Fr varje gng Where is this going to end? Every
jag kommer hit blir maten bara go- time I come here the food gets bet-
dare, vrdinnan bara yngre och vack- ter J the hostess gets younger and
rare och vrden mer underhllande. more beautiful and the host more
Jag kan inte hitta ord nog fr att entertaining. I oan't find worda enough
beskriva en s charmant fest. Allt to describe such a wonderful party.
jag kan sga r skl fr vrdinnan All I oan say is cheers and many
och ett hjrtl igt tack. thanks.
Herr : (likes to make speeches and to pLay with his audienoe)
Kra vrdfolk, kra " me dgster."

Dear host and hostess J dear "co-guests."
Vet ni vem det r mera synd om n
Do you know who is more pitiful than
en tusenfoting som har ont i ft-
a centipede with aohing feet. Now
terna? Nu sger ni frsts att det you'Ll probabLy say that it's a
J
r en giraff Som har ont i halsen.

giraffe with a sore throat. But
Men det r alldeles fel. Det r
that's oompZetely wrong. The one
all ra mest synd om en man, som
who's the most pitiful is a man who
pltsl igt upptcker att han har J
aLL of a sudden J reaLizes that he has

tappat den I j I la papperslappen med lost his little piece of paper with
det noggrannt frberedda tacktalet.
his well prepared thank you speech.
Vad gr man i en sn situation?
What do you do in a situation like that?
Uni t 12 381

SWEDISH 382
Ja, har man haft det s trevl igt Well, i f you have had an evening
som jag har haft det ikvll, tit as marvelous as the one I've had,
s god mat och haft en s frtju- eaten food as good, and had a table
sande bordsdam som jag har haft, partner as charming as mine, namely
nmligen vrdinnan sjlv, ja d the hostess, well, then you 're
r man p ett snt strlande gott in such a good mood that such a
humr att en sdan lIten olycka little mishap doesn't matter at
inte spelar ngon roll alls. Kra all. Dear hostess, thanks for a
vcirdinna, tack fr en strlande splendid and delightful dinner.
god och trev I i g m i ddag. Lt oss Let's toast the hostess. Cheers!
skla fr vrdinnan. Skl! Tack! Thank you!
Unit 12

SWEDISH
UNIT 12
Points to ppactice
Point I: ppepositions of Place
Point II: Placement of the "roaming" Adverb
Point III: Idiomatic Expressions
Uni t 12
383

SWEDISH 384
Poin t I. Prepositions of Place
Swedish prepositions deserve special attention.

We have devoted a good deal of effort to the ex-
pressions of time and their prepositions (Unit 11)~
and we are now going to take a look at the prepo-
sitions used with expressions of plaoe. (Some
of these are~ of course~ also used in time ex-
pressions.) The most common prepositions of
plaoe are: ver, under, framfr, bakom, bredvid,
i, p
ver (over, above) and Under (under, below)

are used the same way in Swedish as their equivalents are used in English.
Examples: Lampan hnger ver bordet.
The lamp is hanging above the table.
Hon lade mattan under stolen.
She put the rug under the ohair.
Framfr (in front of), Bakom (behind), Bredvid (beside~ next to)
are- also used simi larly ---:rnthe two languages .
Examples: Bordet str framfr soffan.

The table is in front of the Bofa.
Hon stod bakom mig.

She stood behind me.
Lampan str bredvid stolen.

The lamp is next to the ohair.
Unit 12

SWEDISH
! usually eorresponds to "in," "inside."

Examples: Gran bor i Sverige.
Goran lives in Sweden.
Boken ligger i ldan.
The book is in the drawer.
Peter dricker kaffe i kket.
Peter is having coffee in the kitchen.
P is usually the equivalent of "on."
Examples: Boken I igger p bordet.

The book is on the table.
Erik bor p Kungsgatan.
Erik lives on Kungsgatan.
Vi har en stuga p en .
We have a aottage on an island.
Hos has no direct equivalent in English. It means "at somebody's house

(place)," ef. "chez" in Freneh. Hos is always used with people, never with
a place or a building. Note also that it is never used with a verb ex-
pressing motion. The following examples will illustrate this. Read the m
aloud several times. We will try the m out in a mixed practice at the end
of the seetian on prepositions of place.
Examples: Vi ter middag hos oss.
We/ll have dinner at our place.
Vi trffades hos Eva.
We met at Eva/s.
Unit 12 385

SWEDISH 386
Vi var (hemma) hos mig, nr det brjade regna.

We were at my house, when it started to rain.
VI bodde hos vra vnner, nr vi var i Sverige.

We stayed with our friends, when we were in Sweden.
Lars var hos tandlkaren igr.

Lars was at the dentist's yesterday.
VI var p middag hos Anderssons igr kvll.

We were at the Anderssons' for dinner last night.
Ti I I ~s usually used with destinations of verbs expressing motion.
examples: Lindgrens ska flytta ti II Stockholm.

The Lindgrens are moving to Stoakholm.
Johan cyklade ti II Uppsala i sndags.

Johan biayaled to Uppsala last Sunday.
Vi ska g t i l l Janssons ikvll.

We are going to the Janssons' tonight.
Ti II is sometimes equivalent to the English preposition "for. /I
Examples: Vad ska vi ha t i l l middag?

What are we having ~ dinner?
Vad anvnder man den hr ti II?

What do you use this [or?----
Note the differenae: Vi ska ta fisk ti I I middag.

We're having fish for dinner.
Sandbergs kommer ~ middag.

The Sandbergs are coming for dinner.
Unit 12

SWEDISH
Praetiee A. Let's praetiee the prepositions ver and under. CompZete

the statementB ZogieaZly.
Lampan hnger soffan.
ver
Det I igger en hund bordet.
under
De s to d trdet (the tree) nr det regnade.
under
Han hll tidningen huvudet nr det regnade.

ver
En mab i I (mobile) hngde barnets sng.
ve r
De hade en persisk matta bordet.

under
Vrdinnan stod kri sta II kronan (ehandaZier).

under
Unit 12
387

SWEDISH JBB
ppaatiae B. Now we'll ppaatiae the ppepositions framfr, bakom, bredvid.

Choose the most suitable ppeposition.
En pol isbl I stod huset, nr jag kom hem.
framfr
P ett fotograf i ska sm personer st de lnga (the taLL ones).
framfr
P ett fotograf i ska I nga personer st de sm.
bakom
Huset lg vid gatan. huset fanns en stor trdgrd (garden).
Bakom
Stll dig mig, s du kan se bttre.
t ramfr
Det sitter alltid en dam med en stor hatt mig p bio (the movies).
framfr
Han satte sig mig p soffan.
bredvid
Vi satt brasan (the fipe).
framfr
Unit 12

SWEDISH
Practice C. This is to practice the use of the prepositions and p.

Choose the right preposition.
Gran bor Sverige.
Blommorna str bordet.

p
Sam r Amerika.
Kungliga slottet ligger stockholm.
En staty (statue) str torget.

p
V ita Huset ligger PennsylvanIa Avenue Washington.

pj
Tavlan (the painti~g) hnger vggen.

p
Vi hyrde en vning ett hghus (high-rise).
Uni t 12
389

SWEDISH 390
Bordsplaceringen lg bordet hallen.
De har kpt en vi Ila Saltsjbaden.
Familjen Ljung bor Liding (island).
De bodde lnge f\frika.
De har en liten stuga Gotland (island).
Glasen str skpet (cupboard).
Boken lg ldan.
Jag lste om det tIdningen.
Meddelandet ligger skrivbordet.

p
Unit 12

SWEDISH
Th e p r e p o s i t i o n p (i n t h e s e n s e o f 1/ t o, 1/ 1/ i n, 1/ or 1/ at 1/) is U8 e d wi t h p ub l i c
buildings.
Examples: att g p bio (to go to the movies)
att g p teatern
att studera p unlversltet(et)
att arbeta p amerikanska ambassaden
att jobba (aolloq. to work) p kontor
att ta p restaurang
att I igga p sjukhus (to be in the hospital)
There are two exceptions to this rule: att g i skolan to go to sahool

att g T KyrKan to go to church
Note that some nouns take the definite article, and some no article at all.
Examples: p bio
p teatern
p operan (at the opera)
p konsert
p nattkl ubb
p museum
p restaurang
p kurs
p universitet(et)
p kontor
p ambassaden
p middag
p sjukhus(et)
p college
l kyrkan
i skolan
Unit 12 391

SWEDISH 392
Praatiae D. This is to praatiae the use of p and i in aombination with

aertain words. The aue word will give you a hin t aB to whiah preposition
to use. Try to use the right form of the noun.
CUE
Anna gr engelska. Anna is taking a aourse in ku rs

English.
p en kurs
Karin ska brja hst. universitet
p universitetet
Gr ni ofta - - - - - - -? teater
p teatern
Fami Ijen Blomkvist gr varje sndag. kyr ka

kyrkan
Ikvll ska vi g bio

p bio
Hur mnga av dina barn gr - - - - - _ ? sko I a

skolan
Erik gr ofta opera
p operan
Unit 12

SWEDISH
eVE
Idag ska Ullas klass g museum
p museum
Ska vi ta imorgon kvl l? restaurang
p restaurang
Anderssons Var igr kvll. konsert
p konsert
Vi arbetar t i \I k l oc ka n fem. kontor
p kontor{etl
Holmbergs ska bjuda Bloms i morgon. middag
p middag
Bill arbetar amerikanska ambas-

sad en
p amerikanska ambassaden
Unit 12 393

SWEDISH 394
Pra~ti~e E. In this mixed pra~ti~e you will have a chance to see i f you can
use all the prepositions of place the way the Swedes do. Use the prepositions
p, i, hos, till, mellan, bredvid, framfr, bakom, under, ver.
Ljusen (the candles) str bordet.
Gr hennes pojke college?
Eriks hustru ligger sjukhus.
G r d u kyrkan?
Lars satt Eva och Lena.
me I I an
Hon bodde mig hela veckan.
hos
Vi gick hem honom efter teatern.
t II I
Tavlan hnger soffan.

ver
Unit 12

SWEDISH
Eva satt soffan, sitt portrtt (portrait).
<p} under
Lena stod tavlan och tittade p den.
framfr
John r fortfarande ambassaden.

p
De gr museum varje lrdag.
Lindstrms har farit Amerika.
t III
Eva ringde och bjd oss middag.
Damen med den stora hatten satte sig mig, s jag sg ingenting.
framfr
varje stor man finns en kvinna.
Bakom
Unit 12
395

SWEDISH 396
Point II. P~acement of the ~roaming~ Adverb
You have already been introduced, in Unit 3, to the most genera~ ru~e concern-
ing the p~acement of the adverb -- af ter the verb. However, some Swedish ad-
verbs move around, depending on the type of clause they are in and the type
of verb they function with. They are ca~~ed vandrande adverb (roaming
adverbs). We wi~l concentrate on three of the most common of these "roaming
adverbs," inte, alltid, and aldrig.
Nain Clauses
a. Conjugated verb +~4v~F~
In main clauses the adverb comes immediate~y after the conjugated verb.
(Cf. unit 3, Points to Practice III.)
Examples: Jag rker inte.

I don't smoke.
Du fr aldrig rka.
You may never smoke.
b. Conjugated verb + subject + adverb
In main clauses where the subject and verb are reversed the adverb come s
immediately af ter the subject. (Cf. Unit 3, Points to Practice III.)
Examples: Har du Inte den hr boken?

Don't you have this book?
Hr fr du inte rka.
Here you may not smoke.
Uni t 12

SWEDISH
o. Conjugated verb + adverb + particle

In main alauses with verbs + partiale the adverb foZZows the first part
of the conjugated verb.
Examples: Jag tycker Inte om den hr boken.
I don't like this book.
Jag hl ler Inte med om det.
I don't agree with that.
d. Conjugated ve>:'b + subject + adverb + particle

In a question where the verb consists of a verb + particle the subject
and the conjugated verb are reversed. the adve>:'b follows the subject.
and the particZe is added after the adverb.
ExampZes: Tycker du Inte om den hr boken?
Don't you like this book?
Kommer du alltid Ihg att ringa hem?
Do you always remember to call home?
Unit 12
397

SWEDISH 398
Subordinate ctauses
In subordinate ctauses the "roaming" adverb comes belore the conjugated verb.
Examples: Hon tror, latt hon alltid har rtt).
She thinks that she is atways right.

Stina vet,latt Per inte kan kommal
Stina knows that Per can not come.

Lars sade, latt han Inte k r b i Ij.
Lars said that he doesn't drive.

Lars sade, latt han inte kan kra b i q.
Lars said that he doesn't know how to drive.
Lars sade, latt han i nte tycker om att kra b I 'I.
Lars said. that he doesn't like to drive.
lEttersom vi aldrig trttasl, ringer vi otta ti II varandra.
Since we never see each other we olten catt each other.
INr Evas man inte r hemm3, lagar hon lnte sA mycket mat.
When Eva's hus band is not at home she doesn't cook so much.
Uni t 12

SWEDISH
Note: You can distinguish a subordinate clause from a main alause by the aon-
junation that introduaes the clause.
These are the aonjunctions that introduae a main clause:
fr for, because
men but
och and
s so
uta n but (af ter a negative statementJ
These ape the conjunctions that introduae a subordinate alause:
att that
d when
d since
drfr att beaause
eftersom since
fast(n) although
fr att in order to
frrn before, until.
innan before
medan while
n r when
om if
sedan af ter
s att so tha t
t i I Is until
trots att in spite (of the faet thatJ
The rel.ative pronouns som, v 1 I ken (v i I ket, v 1 I ka) also introduce

subopdinate clauses.
Unit 12
399

SWEDISH 400
With the exception of inte, "roaming adverbs" usuaZZy pZace no specific Zimit
on the duration or kind of action expressed by the verb. Here is a partiaZ
Zist of other "roaming adverbs:"
ofta knappast (hardZy)
redan mj I i g en
s na rt s ke rt
sllan (seZdom) troligtvis
antag I i gen (probabZy) van I i gtv i s
b a ra verkl igen
grna tminstone (at least)
kanske
Practiae F. Now we'lZ practice the pZacement of "roaming adverbs" in a main

cZause. Vse the adverb given in the aue and try to pZace it correctZy i-n---
the sentence on the left. You have aZready done a simiZar exercise in Vnit 3,
so this shouZd be easy.
eVE
Pelle r hemma. inte
Pelle r inte hemma.
Anderssons r p landet i jul], aI It id

Anderssons r alltid p landet i JulI.
Gr du p teatern? aldrig
Gr du aldrig p teatern?
Lennart vi II kpa en ny bl \. inte
L e nn a r t v i I I j n t e k p a e n n y b i I
Unit 12

SWEDISH
eVE
Erik ringer ti I I sin mormor. aldrig
Erik ringer aldrig ti I I sin mormor.
Vi har tid att hlsa p vra vnner. a I It id
Vi har alltid tid att hlsa p vra vnner.
Gran ska kl om sig fre middagen. inte
Gran ska inte kl om sig fre middagen.
Tycker du om att kpa klder? a I It i d
Tycker du alltid om att kpa klder?

Min kusin har varit i Afrika. inte
Min kusin har inte varit i Afrika.
Agrens har bjudit sina vnner. antagligen

Agrens har antagligen bjudit sina vnner.
Har ni hlsat p era slktingar i Amerika? aldrig

Har ni aldrig hlsat p era slktingar I Amerika?
Talade du med honom fre resan? inte
Talade du Inte med honom fre resan?
Har du lst de hr bckerna? verkl igen

Har du verkl i gen I st de hr bckerna?
Uni t 12
401

SWEDISH 402
Practice G. Here are same "roaming adverbs" in a subordinate clause. Again,

use the adverb in the cue and place it in the subordinate clause of the sen-
tence on the left.
eUE
Vi vet, att ni r hemma p sndagarna. a I It Id
VI vet, att ni alltid r hemma p sndagarna.
Lars undrade, om han borde fara hem. inte
Lars undrade, om han Inte borde fara hem.
Nr Pelle kom, ringde jag ti II hans mamma. inte
Nr Pelle inte kom, ringde jag t i l l hans mamma.
E ftersom det r s sent, br v i r i nga hem. inte
Eftersom det i nte r s sent, br vi ri nga hem.
Vera visste,att Gran skulle komma. aldrig
Vera visste, att Gran aldrig skulle komma.
J1.ke visste, att Maja vi Ile komma. grna
J1.ke visste, att Maja grna vi Ile komma.
Carina skmdes ver att hon hade ringt. inte
Ca r i n a skmdes ver att hon inte hade ringt.
Ou kan hlsa honom f r n mi g, eftersom du trffar honom. skert
Ou ka n hlsa honom f r n mig, eftersom du skert trffar honom.
Uni t 12

SWEDISH
CUE
Jag sg en film, som jag hade sett tidigare. Inte
Jag sg en film, som jag Inte hade sett tidigare.
Johan, som brukar vara punktl 19, kom tio minuter fr sent. a I It i d
Johan,som a I I t i d b ru ka r vara punktlig, kom tio minuter fr sent.

Jag var s ker p att Peter hade v rt telefonnummer. Inte
J ag var sker p att Peter inte hade vrt telefonnummer.

Eva undrade, om N11 s kunde komma hem t i d i ga re. verk I i gen
Eva undrade, om N i I s verkl igen kunde komma hem tidigare.
Olof berttade, att ni hade velat fara tl II Kpenhamn. hell re

Olof berttade, att ni hellre hade velat fara till Kpenhamn.
Jag visste, att ni vi Ile stanna hemma. helst

Jag visste, att n l helst v i I I e stanna hemma.
Jag tycker, att du borde ringa och tacka fr senast. tminstone

J ag tycker, att du tminstone borde ringa och tacka f r senast.
Jag frstr, att du har hft tid att lsa tidningen knappast
J ag frstr, att du knappast har haft tid att lsa tidningen.
Unit 12
403

SWEDISH 404
Praotioe H. This is a mixed practioe. You will have to determine whether the
adverb given in the oue is a "roaming adverb" or not. Plaoe the adverbs given
in the oue in the sentenoe on the left. If the sentenee consists of two clauses
there will be an adverb for each one.
eUE
Jag tror, att Perssons ska resa ti II Uppsala. inte, Idag
Jag tror inte, att Perssons ska resa ti II Uppsala Idag.
Jag vill, att ni kommer. hellre, hit
Jag vill hellre, att ni kommer hit.
Gsta, som tycker om att resa, mste fara ti II USA. i nte, kanske
Gsta, som i nte tycker om att resa, mste kanske fara tl II USA.
Har du berttat fr J an, att du mste g p operan? i nte, d
Har du inte berttat fr J a n, att du mste g p operan d?
Jag har tyckt om att segla (to saH) . a I dr i g

Jag har aldrig tyckt om att s eg I a.
Jag har velat tala om fr dig, att vi ska flytta. inte, antagligen
Jag har inte velat tala om fr dig, att vi antagligen ska flytta.
Jag kan hra, fr han talar s hgt. knappast, inte
Jag kan knappast hra, fr han talar inte s hgt. (See Unit 8, Nate 18b.)
Eftersom du r frdig, kan vi g. redan, nu
Eftersom du redan r frdig, kan vi g nu.

unit 12

SWEDISH
eVE
Tror du, att han hller med sin vn? verkl igen, alltid
Tror du verkligen, att han alltid hller med sin vMn?
Min kusin, som du trffade, kan kra bil. igr, inte
Min kusin, som du trffade igr, kan Inte kra bil.
Nr Peter kommer, vi Il han trffa dig. imorgon, antag\ Igen
Nr Peter kommer imorgon, vi II han antagligen trffa dig.
Unit 12
405

SWEDISH 406
Point III. Praatiae r. As we mentioned in the introduation to this Unit we will now
praatice some of the idiomatia or useful expressions that have been underlined
in the text. This is a multiple ahoice exeraise. Only one of the three answers
is appropriate in the given situation. The aorreat answers will be listed at
the end of the praatiae.
1. Situation: You are asking a te lephone aaller to wait.
a. J us t en minut.
b. Ett gonb I i ck.
a. Hur har ni det?
2. Situation: You are inviting a friend to dinner.
a. Vad f r jag bjuda p?

b. V i r s glada att ni kunde komma.
a. Ha r du lust att komma p mIddag.
3. Situation: You accept the invitation.
a. Tack bra.
b. Tack hemskt grna.
c. Tack, det gr detsamma.
4. Situation: You are raising your glass wetaoming your guests at the
dinner tab le.
a. Jag ber att f hlsa er vlkomna.

b. Adj d och vlkomna.
a. Vi sklar fr vrdfolket.
5. Situation: You are leaving a party, thanking the host and hostess.
a. Tack fr igr.
b. Tack fr maten.
c. Tack fr en mycket trev I i 9 kv II.
Unit 12

SWEDISH
6. Situation: On parting you want to convey a greeting to your friend's

husband, Johan.
a. Hur har Johan det?

b. Hlsa t i l l Johan!
e. V i I I du gra s I I skap med Johan?
7. Situation: You meet your dinner host or hostess a few days after their
party and say:
a. Tack fr senast.
b. D hr jag av mig.
c. Det passar utmrkt.
8. Situation: You are the guest of honor sitting to the left of your hostess.
You might begin a toast in the foZZowing typiaaZ way:
a. Vi har verkligen funnit varandra.

b. Vi sklar fr vrdfolket.
e. Tack tr senast.
9. Situation: Af ter getting up from the dinner tabZe each guest comes up
to the hostess to say:
a. Tack fr sllskapet.
b. Tack fr en mycket trevl ig kvll.
e. Tack tr maten.
Correct an8wers to Praetiee I.
1. b 6. b
2. e 7. a
:5 b 8. b
4. a 9. e
5. e
Uni t 12
407

SWEDISH 408
VI TALAR SVENSKA
Now it's time for some role-playing. Imagine
yourself in various roles, such as friend on
the telephone extending an invitation, friend
accepting an invitation, guest of honor, host
or hos tess.
Uni t 12

SWEDISH
UNIT 13
Here we introduae a change from the dialog format of our text to a combination
descriptive text and dialog. We hope you will find it fun and useful. We
also want you to become more ear oriented and see how much you can understand
even when new vocabulary that you have never had is introduced. Try listening
to the tape before looki~ the text. See i f you can get the gist of what
is going on even with the unfamiliar words. Some of the new words may bear
so much resemblanae to English (or another language whiah you may know) that
you can guess at the meaning. Examples: generationer - generations; konduktr -
conductor. Others you may guess at from already knowing one part of a two-
part word. Examples: tidtabell - timetable; platsbi Ijett - reserved seat
ticket. Most probably you will also recognize words that you have learned
from sources other than this book during your weeks of studying Swedish.
Af ter having listened to the tape several times, read the text. All the new
vocabulary is underlined and translated at the end of the text.
You are not expected to memorize the text. however. just to be very familiar
with it.
Note alsa that in this new format asterisks referring to Nates on Basic Sen-
tenaes appeal' next ta the line numbers in which the items explained oacur.
Uni t 13
409

SWEDISH 410
UNIT 13
P vg t i l l landet
L Anne och George Brown r bjudna ti I I Lvgrens p landet ver veckoslutet.
2. Lvgrens bor p somrarna i en gammal stuga, som Svante Lvgren har rvt av
3. sina frldrar. Den har tillhrt slkten flera generationer. Stugan
4. I i gger p Ut i St o c k ho I ms s k r g r d De t r t I d i gt P I r d a g s mo r g o n e n
5. Anne: Hur dags gr tget?
6. George: Vid nio-tiden, tror jag. Titta tidtabellen, r du snll. Jag
7. h I I er p att packa.
8. Anne: Det str: Avgn~stld frn Centralen 8:23. Ankomsttid i Arsta
9. Havsbad klockan 10:05. Jag tror vi hinner med tunnelbanan, om vi
10. skyndar oss.
11. George: Du r inte klok. Hur ska vi f med alla vra tunga grejer p tunnel-
12. banan?
13. Jl
Anne: Ja, det har du rtt I. Det bl jr nog Inte s ltt. Varfr tar vi
14. inte en taxi?

Unit 13

SWEDISH
15. George: Ja, det r klart att vi gr.
16. Anne: Ha r vi t n kt P a I I t i n 9? G I m i n t e g u mm i s t v I a r n a
17. George: Dem fr vi lna av Lvgrens.
18. Anne: Du har v I kpt v i net som v i lovade att ta med oss?
19. George: Ja, det har jag. Tycker du att vi ska ta med ngon present t
20. barnen?
21. Anne: Nej. Pojken kte p lger hromdagen och fl ickan r inte hel ler
22. hemma.
23. George: Vi mste lsa ordentligt och lmna nyckeln hos grannarna.
24. Anne och George tar en taxi ti II Centralen, dr George kper bi Ijetter.
25. Vid biljettluckan:
26. George: Tv tur och retur t i II rsta Havsbad. Mste v i kpa p I atsb i I jetter?
27. >\ Mannen: Nej, det r inte ndvndigt p det tget. Men tget gr bara tl l I
28. Vsterhanninge, dr ni fr~~ ti II buss.
Uni t 1J 411

SWEDISH 412
29. Anne: Skynda dig George. Det blir svrt att fi'l plats annars. Tget
30. kommer skbrt att vara fullsatt. Alla vi II komma ut p landet
3l. >l ver helgen.
32. Nr Anne och George her ~ ~ ~ tget hr de konduktren ropa:
33. >l Tag plats! Var god stng drrarna!
34. De gr frbi en kupe dr det str "Rkare" p en skylt och fortstter ti II
35. en ~ dr det str" Icke rkare".
36. I Vsterhanninge gr konduktren genom vagnarna och ropar "Byte tl II Arsta
37. Havsbad".
38. >l
D vaknar Anne som har somnat. Alla passagerarna stiger av. Framfr sta-
39. >l
tionen vntar en SJ-buss med Arsta Havsbad p skylten. Anne och George stl ler
40. sig kn och brjar leta efter biljetterna som George hittar i rockfickan.
41. Det r fullt med folk p bussen. Den kr genom ett typiskt svenskt landskap
42. med skogar och sjar. Anne tycker att Sverige r vackert. Vid ndhllplatsen
43. tar alla sitt bagage och stiger av. Hr finns bara en kiosk, dr man kan
44. kpa varm korv, glass, tidningar och choklad. Frn Arsta Havsbad ska Browns
45. >I ta bt t i l l Ut.
Unit 13

SWEDISH
UNIT 13
Glossary
a I I t I ng everything
ankomst -en -er arrival
annars otherwise
avgng -en 0 departure
bagage -t 0 baggage, luggage
bjud/en -et -na invit ed (past part.)
(att) byta, 2b to change
byte -t -n change
Centralen (C) Central station
dr where (relative adverb)
fick/a -an -or pocket
(att) fort/stta, -stter, -satte, -satt, 4 to con tinue
full -t-a full
fu I I satt -0 -a filled, all seats taken
generation -en -er f!eneration
glass -en (Il 'l-ce cream
grann/e -en -ar neighbor
grej -en -er thing, gadget
gummi -t 0 rubber
(att) h I I a p (att gra ngot); to be busy (doing something), to be in the
hl ler, hll, hllit, 4 process of (doing something)
hromdagen the other day
icke not (formal; used mainly in public notices)
i n te h e I I e r not ... either
k i os k kiosk
klok -t -a wise
du r inte klok you are crazy
konduktr -en -er conductor
korv -en -ar sausage
varm korv hot doges)
kupe -n -er compartment
k -n -er line, queue
land -et 0 countroyside
landskap -et -0 countroyside, scenery, landscape
Unit 13 413

SWEDISH 414
(att) leta (efter ngot); to look (for something)

luck/a -an -or tJindotJ
(att) lna, I to borrow~ to lend
ls -et -rj lock
(att) lsa, 2b to lock
lger, lgret, -0 oamp
I tt -0 -a easy~ simple; light
nyckel -n, nycklar key
ordent I i g -t -a orderly~ careful~ thorough
(att) packa, I to paok
passagerare -n -0 passenger
plats -en -er seat
platsbiljett -en -er reserved seat ticket
rock -en -ar ooat~ robe
(att) ropa, I to oaU (out)
(att) ha rtt (i ngot); har,hade, haft to be right (about something)
rkare -n -0 smaker
sj -n -ar lake
skog -en -ar forest~ tJoads
skylt -en -ar sign
skrgrd -en -ar archipelago~ skerries
slkt -en -er extended family, relatives
(att) somna, I to fall asleep
(att) stiga, stiger, steg, stigit, 4 to step
(att) stiga av; 4 to get off
(att) stiga p; 4 to get on~ to board
(att) st, str, stod, sttt, 4 to say (in print or writing)
stvel -n, stvlar boat
t i dtabe l I -en -er time table
(att) tillhra, 2a to belong (to)
tung -t -a heavy
tur och retur roundtrip
vagn -en -ar (railroad) car
(att) vakna, to tJake up
var god please
varfr why
veckoslut -et -~ week-end
Unit 13

SWEDISH
ndh I I P l ats -en -er end of the line

(att> rva, 2a to inhel'it
Uni t 13
415

SWEDISH 416
UNIT 13
13. Ltt has two meanings: "easy" and "light" (not heavyJ.
Examples: Peter tycker det r ltt att lra sig svenska, men Ann tycker det r
svrt.
Peter thinks it's easy to learn Swedish, but Ann thinks it's difficult.
Lars kpte en mycket ltt vska, fr han tycker inte om att resa med
tungt bagage.
Lars bought a very light suitcase, because he doesn't like to travel
with heavy luggage.
27. Det tget. Here det functions as a demonstrative adjective, meaning "that train."
Note that the defini-te form of the noun is used.
31. ver helgen. Helg today has the meaning of any legal holiday or weekend.
Earlier helg meant only religious holidays.
33. Var god ... This idiomatic expression meaning "please" is used only in format
directives. We have brie fly mentioned the translation of "ptease" in Unit 1,
Note 29, and would like to add some useful clues with regard to expressing
"please" in Swedish. It is quite simple if we divide the "pleases" into
four categories:
1. A formal oommand. This is the imperative form used in offioial or quite

impersonal situations to tell someone in a polite way to do something.
Examples: Var god (och) vnta.
Please wait. (Of ten used on the telephoneJ
Unit 13

SWEDISH
Var god (och) drj.

Please hold. (Used on the telephone)
Var vnlig och fyll i den hr blanketten.

s n I I
Pleas e fill out this form.
2. An informal command. The gracious way to invite Bomeone to do Bomething.

(Cf. Unit 12, Note 41a)
Examples: Varsgod och stig in.

Please come in.
Varsgod och sitt.

Pleas e sit down.
Varsgod och ta en kaka t i II

Please take another cookie.
3. ~ request. When asking someone to give you Bomething or do 80mething

for uou, the polite way is to use a graciouB question form that implieB
the equivalent of "please."
Examples: Kan jag f May I have .. ,

Fr jag be om . May I have (ask for) .
Skulle jag kunna f Could I please have .
Sku I I e du kunna sga mi g Could you please tell me
Skulle ni vi Ija vara s vnl ig och .. Would you please be kind
enough to ....
4. An acceptance, ja tack, corresponds to the English "yes, please."

(ef. nej tack - no thank you.)
38. Att vakna is the intransitive verb "to wake up," whereas the transitive verb
"to wake up (someone)" is att vcka (Zbl.
Unit 13 417

SWEDISH 418
Examples: Lena tycker det r svrt att vakna tidigt p morgonen.

Lena thinks it's diffieult to wake up eaply in the mopning.
Vckarklockan vcker henne klockan sju.

The alarm clock wakes her up at seven.
Note the difference between att sova and att somna. Att sova means "to sleep"
and att somna "to fall asleep. /I
Example: Lena somnade genast och sov i tolv timmar.

Lena fell asleep right away and slept fop twelve houps.
39. SJ-buss. SJ is the abbreviation of Statens Jrnvgar, the government-owned

railroad system in Sweden. SJ opepates buses between some localities as an
extension of the railroad system.
45. Att ta bt. Swedish usually does not use the article befope general means of
tY'anspoY'tation.
Examples: att ka tg to go by train

att kra b I I to drive (a ear), to go by ear
att ta buss to take a bus, to go by bus
att ta taxi to take a taxi, to go by taxi
(Cf. Unit 3, Note Ba., Unit 5, Note 25.)
Uni t 13

SWEDISH
UNIT 13
Points to Praatiae
Point I: Irregular verbs
Point II: Tycka, tnka, tro
Point III: Dr - dit as relative adverbs
Unit 13 419

SWEDISH 420
Poin t I: The Fourth Conjugation (Irregular Verbs)
The fourth conjugation contains all the verbs that don't follow the patterns
of the other three conjugations. We call the verbs of the fourth conjugation
irregular because they don't all follow the same distinct pattern. However,
many of them are conjugated according to certain predictable patterns of
vowel changes.
Examples: finna, fann, funnit (find); springa, sprang, sprungit (run);
skriva, skrev, skrivit (wl'ite); bli(va), blev, blivit (become).
These verbs end in - i t in the supine. The present tense ending is -er,
except when the stem ends in a vowel or in -r. In those cases the same
rule applies as in the other conjugations: If the stem ends in a vowel
the present tense ending is just -r (b I i, b I i r); if the stem ends in -r
the stem serves also as present tense (fara, far).
The fourth conjugation verbs which don't follow the predictable vowel
patterns are very irl'egular. They may take on both a vowel change and
an ending to form the past tense and the supine.
Examples: gra, gjorde, gjort (do, make); I igga, lg, legat (lie, be looated);
se, sg, sett (see).
The present tense is formed the same way as for the verbs with the predict-
able vowel changes.
Examples: .!JJ.u1./a, I igg~; ~, se..!::.; gr/a, gr.
Exceptions: stjla (steal), present tense: stjl;

veta (know), present tense: vet.
Note also that some of the auxiliaries have irregular present tense forms.
Examples: kan, mste, ska, vill.
Unit 13

SWEDISH
The foLLowing is a comprehensive List of the fourth oonjugation verbs. (The past participLe
form wiLL be expLained in Unit 14):
Present Past Past
Infinitive Tense Tense Supine "JiCirti o i.JZ.1!!.. TransLation
be ber bad bett -bedd ask, pray
binda binder band bundit bunden bind, tie
bita biter bet bitit biten bite
bj uda bjuder bjd bjudit bjuden offer, invite
b I l (va) bI i r blev bI i \I it -bliven become
brinna brinner b ra nn b r' u n n i t -brunnen burn
brista brister b ra st brustit brusten burst
bryta bryter brt brutit bruten break
b ra br bar burit buren carry, wear
br bo rdu bo rt ought to
dra(ga) d ra r drog d ra g i t dragen
d r i c ka dricker drac!~ druckit d ruc ken drink
dr i va driver drev drivit driven drive (not vehicLe)
duga duger dg dugit do, serve, be suit-
d dr
abLe
dog dtt dd die
dlja dljer dolde dolt dold conceaL
Unit 13
421

SWEDISH 422
Present Past Past

Infinitive Tense Tense S~ine Participle Translatian
f a I Ia f a I I er fI I faIIit f a I Ie n fall
fara far fo r far i t -faren go, travel
finna f i n ne r fann funnit funnen find
finnas f i n ns fanns funnits be, exist

flyga flyger flg f I ug i t -flugen fly
flyta flyter f lt f I ut i t -fluten float
frysa fryser frs frusit frusen be ca ld, freeze
f f r f ic k ftt receive, get, may
frsv i nna frsvinner frsvann frsvunnit frsvunnen disappear
ge, giva ger ga v gett -given give
g I i da g I i der gled g I idi t glide
gldja glder gladde g I att make happy, please
gnida gnider gned 9ni d i t gniden rub
gripa griper grep gripit gripen seize, gra8p
grta grter grt grtit -grten cry, weep
g g r g ic k gtt -gngen go, walk
gra gr gjorde g j o rt gjord do, make
Unit 13

SWEDISH
Present Past Past

In[initive Tense Tense Supine Partiaiple Translation
ha(va) har hade haft -havd have
heta heter hette hetat be called
hinna hinner hann hunnit hunnen have time, attain
hugga hugger hgg huggit huggen cut, hew

h I Ia h I I er h I I h I I i t h I I en hold, keep
k I i va k I iver klev kI i v it -kliven step, climb
knyta knyter knt knutit knuten tie
komma kommer kom komm i t -kommen come
kry pa kryper krp krupit -krupen creep, cT'awl
kunna ka n kunde kunnat be ab le, may, know
le ler log lett smile
I i da I i d er I ed I idit su[[er
I i gga I i gge r lg legat -Iegad lie (lay, lain)
ljuga ljuger I j g ljugit -ljugen lie (lied, lied)
lyda lyder I d, lydde lytt -lydd obey; be worded
lta lter lt ltit -lten let, permit; sound
lgga lgger lade lagt lagd lay, put
Unit 13
423

SWEDISH 424
P1'esent Past Past

Infinitive Tense Tense Supine Pa1'ticipte T1'anstation
- --
mste mste must
niga n i g er neg niglt CU1'tsy
njuta njuter njt njutit -njuten enjoy
nysa ny se r ns nyst sneeze
pipa piper pep pipit squeak
rida rider red r idi t riden 1'ide (on h01'seback)
rinna rinner ra nn runnit 1'un, flow
riva river rev rivit riven sC1'atch, tea!'

ryta ryter rt rutit 1'0 a!'
se ser sg sett sedd see
sitta sitter satt suttit -sutten sit

sj unga sjunger sjng sjungit sjungen sing
sjunka sjunker sjnk sjunkit sjunken sink
ska ( I I ) s ku I I e shal. l., !ViU
skina skiner sken skinit shine
skjuta skjuter skt skjutit skjuten shoot
skrida skrider skred skridit -skriden glide, p1'oceed
s k r l ka skriker skrek skrikit -skriken sC1'eam, shout
Unit 13

SWEDISH
Pl'esent Past Past

Infinitive Tense Tense Supine Pal'ticipZe Tl'ansZation
skriva skriver skrev skrivit skriven wl'ite
skryta skryter skrt skrutit -skruten bl'ag~ boast
s k ra s k r s ka r s ku r i t skuren cut
s I i ppa si ipper slapp sluppit -sluppen be spal'ed fl'om

s I i ta si iter slet s Ii t it s I i ten teal'~ weal' out
sl slr slog slagit slagen beat~ stl'ike
slss slss slogs slagits fight
smyga smyger smg smugit -smugen sneak~ tip- toe
snyta snyter snt snutit snuten blow the nose
sova sover sov sovit sleep
spinna spinner s pa nn spunnit spunnen spin
spricka spricker sprack spruckit sprucken cl'ack~ bUl'at
sprida sprider spred spritt spridd spl'ead
springa springer sprang sprungit sprungen l'un
sticka sticker stack stuckit stucken stick~ put; ating
stiga stiger steg stigit -stigen step~ l'ise
stjla stjl stal s tu I i t stulen steal
Unit 13 425

SWEDISH 426
Present Past Past

Infinitive Tense Tense
- -- Supine Participl.e Translation
strida strider stred stridit -stridd fight
stryka stryker strk strukit struken cross out; iron
st st r stod sttt -stdd stand
stdja stder stdde sttt stdd support
suga suger sg sugit sugen suck
supa super sp supit -supen drink l.iquor ( ex-
cessively)
svida svider sved svidit smart, burn
sv i ka sviker svek svikit -sviken fail., disappoint
svlta svlter sva It svultit svulten starve
svra svr svor svurit svuren swear
sga sger sa(de) sagt sagd say
slja sljer s I d e slt sld sen
stta stter satte satt satt se t, put
ta(ga) ta r tog tagit tagen take
tiga t i g er teg tigit -tegen be silent
trs tordes torts dare
vara r va r va r i t be
Unit 13

SWEDISH
Pr>esent Past Past

Infinitive Tense Tense Supine fiiliticiple Tr>ans latian
veta vet visste vetat know
v i ka viker vek v i kit viken, vikt fold
vi Ij a vi II v i II e velat want to
vinna vinner va nn vunnit vunnen UJin
vrida vrider vred vridit vriden tur>n, twist
v I j a vljer valde valt vald ohoose
v nj a vnjer vande vant vand aooustom
ta ter t tit ten eat
Note 1: This list does not inolude any of the ir>regular verbs that are made up of a pr>efix
(of ten a preposition) and a verb, fOr> example: frst, ~skrlva, fortstta.
These compound verbs are always oonjugated aocor>ding to the pattern that the simple
verb folloUJs.
Examples: frst, frstr, frstod, frsttt (to under>stand)

beskrIva, beskriver,~krev, beskrivit (to descr>ibe)
fortstta, fortstter, fortsatte, fortsatt (to aontinue)
Some of the most oommon prefixes used with verb forms ar>e: an-, be-, fort-, fram-,
fr-, genom-, ned-, t 1 I 1-, ver-.
Nate 2: A dash befor>e the par>tioiple for>m in the verb list means that the partiaiple form
is used only with a pr>efix.
Examples: verb I i vlen -et -na (Zeft ove:r>J
besvlk/en -et -na (disappointed)
Ihopkrup/en -et -na (curled up)
Unit 13 427

SWEDISH 428
To make it a little easier we'll list together some of the most common fourth conjugation
verbs that follow the same vowel pattern:
Present Past Past

Infinitive Tense Tense 0:P. ine p;;y;ticiple Translation
(short i J ( short i J (short aj (s hort uj (short uj
binda binder ba nd bundit bunden bind, tie
brinna brinner brann brunnit -brunnen bU'l'n

d r i c ka dricker d rac k druckit drucken drink
f i nna finner f a nn funnit funnen find
finnas finns fanns funnits
frsvinna frsvinner frsvann frsvunnit frsvunnen disappeal'
hinna hinner hann hunnit hunnen have time, attain
r i nna rinner ra nn runnit
s i tta sitter satt suttit -sutten sit
s I i Ppa slipper slapp sluppit -sluppen be spared from
spricka spricker sprack spruckit sprucken crack, burat
springa springer sprang sprungit sprungen run
st i c ka sticker stac k stuckit stucken stick, put; sting
vinna vinner va nn vunnit vunnen win
Unit 13

SWEDISH
Present Past Past

Infinitive Tense Tense Supine Participle Translation
(long i) (long i) (long ej (l.ong i) (Long i J
bita biter bet bitit biten bite
bl i(va) bIi r blev bI i vit -bl iven be come
g I i da g l i der gled g I i dit glide
gnida gnider gned gnidit gniden rub
gripa griper grep gripit gripen seize, grasp
k I i va k I iver klev kI j vit -kliven step, climb

I i da I i der led I idit suffer
niga niger neg nigit curtsy
rida rider red ridit riden ride (on horsebaok)
riva river rev rivit riven scratch, tear
skina skiner sken skinit shine
s kr i ka skriker skrek skrikit -skriken scream, shout
skriva skriver skrev skrivit skriven write
s I i ta S I i ter slet s I It It s I I ten tear, wear out
stiga stiger steg stigit -stigen step, rise
svida svider sved svidit smart, burn
sv i ka sviker svek svikit sviken faH. disappoint
Unit 13
429

SWEDISH 430
PT'e8ent Pa8t Past

In[initive Tense Tense Supine PaT'ticiple TT'anslation
(long I) (long i) ( long e) ( long i ) (long i )
tiga tiger teg tigit -tegen be silent
v i ka v i ke r vek v i ki t viken, vikt fold
vrida vrider vred vridit vriden tUT'n, twist
PT'e8ent Past Past

Infinitive Tense Ten8e Supine PaT'ticiple TT'anslation
(u) (u) () (u) (u)
bjuda bjuder bj d bjudit bjuden offeT'~ invite

hugga hugger hgg huggit huggen cu t, hew
ljuga ljuger I j g ljugit -ljugen lie (lied, lied)
njuta njuter njt njutit -njuten enjoy

sjunga sjunger sjng sjungit sjungen sing
sjunka sjunker sjnk sjunkit sjunken sink
s kj uta skjuter skt skjutit skjuten shoot
suga suger sg sugit sugen suck
supa super sp su p i t -supen dT'ink liquoT' (ex-
ce8sively)
Unit 13

SWEDISH
Present Past Past

Infinitive Tense Tense Supine Partiaipl.e Transl.ation
(y) (y) ~ (u) (u)
bryta bryter brt brutit bruten break
flyga flyger flg flugit -flugen fLy

flyta flyter flt flutit -fluten fZoat
f ry sa fryser frs frusit frusen be co Ld. feeze
knyta knyter knt knutit knuten tie
krypa kryper krp krupit -krupen creep. crawL
skryta skryter skrt skrutit -skruten brag. boast
smyga smyger smg smugit -smugen sneak. tip-toe
snyta snyter snt snutit snuten bLow the nose
stryka stryker strk strukit struken Cro ss out; iron
Uni t 1J
431

SWEDISH 432
BeloLJ is a Hs t of the auxiliary verbs. (Nate that they have no past particip le form) :
PJ"e8ent Past
Infinitive Tense Tense Supin~ TJ"anslation
b I i (va) bI i r blev b I Iv It become
br bo rd e bort ought to
f fr fick ftt be aLLoLJed~ may
ha ha r hade haft have
kun na ka n kunde kunnat be able to~ can
lta lter lt I t i t let
mste mste must

ska ( I I ) s ku I I e shal L~ LJill
vara r va r varit be
v i Ij a vIII v i I Ie velat want to
Unit 13

SWEDISH
Practice A. This practice uses verbs from the fourth conjugation that have
occurred in this Unit. Put the cue verb in the present tense.
eUE
Stugan p Ut. att ligga
I i gger
George att packa. att hlla p

h I I er p
De resa ti II landet. ska
ska
Tget p stationen att st

st r
Vi en taxi ti II Centralen. att ta

tar
Tget tidigt p morgonen. att g
gr
De tget Stockholm. att stiga p
stiger p
Ann inte ta tunnelbanan. att hinna
hinner
Unit 13
433

SWEDISH 434
eVE
Lvgrens Anne och George ti II sin stuga. att bjuda
bj ud er
Det svrt att f plats p tget. att b l l
bI ir
Ppactice B. This time put the aue verbs in the past tense.
eVE
George vskan med sig? att ta
Tog
Hur dags tget? att g

gick
De till en.annan vagn. att fortsl'itta
fortsatte
Browns ta med sig vin tl I I sina vnner? ska

S ku I I e
Det inga barn hemma. att finnas

fanns
Unit 13

SWEDISH
eVE
Stina p middag. att bjuda
bj d
De Inte med tunnelbanan. att hinna
hann
George att packa. att hlla p
h I I p
De Arsta Havsbad. att stiga av
steg av
Anne George kpa biljetterna att l ta
lt
Stugan p en . att ligga
lg
B i I en p gatan. att st
stod
Unit 13
435

SWEDISH 436
Practice e. This time put the cue verb ~n the present perfeet form ( har + supinej.
eVE
Br'owns p en resa. att vara
ha r va r i t
Vad ni p sista tiden? att gra
ha r gj ort
Tget p stationen en timme. att st
ha r sttt
George att lra sig svenska. att fortstta
har fortsatt
Anne inte ngon chokl ad. att f

ha r ftt
Boken hr en vecka. att ligga
har legat
Bussen redan att g
ha r gtt
Familjen p Ut hela sommaren. att vara

har varit
Vnit 13

SWEDISH
eVE
Peter vskan. att ta hand om
har tagit hand om
Vi alla vra vnner. att bjuda
har bjudit
Attachen mnga lnder. att tjnstgra

har tjnstgjort
Varifrn de hr paketen att komma
---- ?
ha r komm i t
Vem _ att man i nte fr rka hilr? att sga
har sagt
Vilken sekreterare det hilr meddelandet? att skriva

har skrivit
Mannen i nt e p tv dagar. att ta
ha r tit
Unit 13
437

SWEDISH 438
Practice D. This is another practice on the fourth conjugation. Change the present
tense of the verbs in the story to past tense.
Anne och George far ut p landet ver helgen. Medan George hller p att packa
to r h I I
ser Anne efter i tidtabellen nr tget gr. Anne vi II ta tunnelbanan, men George
sg gick v i I Ie
sger att de inte kan hinna med tget, om de inte tar en taxi. George br vskorna
sade kLI nd e tog bar
och tar hand om biljetterna. Och s tar de med tget som gr frn Centralen.
tog for gick
Unit 1;;

SWEDISH
Practice E. Put the cue verbs in the present tense. Most of the verbs used in these
sentences have occurred in previous Units.
eUE
Brderna ti I I Stockholms skrgrd. att fara
fa r
Vad du om att hans eftertrdare Bob Smith? att sga, att bl i
sger bI ir
Hon inte tyska. att frst

frsir
Nr du frdig? att bl
bI i r
Ka r i n kyrkan varje sndag. att g

g r
De inte hur bra de det. att veta, att ha

vet ha r
Det hon a tt h I I a med om
h I I er med om
Vad Svante p somra r na? att gra

gr
Unit 13 439

SWEDISH 440
PT'aetiee P. Put the eue veT'b ~n the ras~~~.
eVE
Brodern allt perfekt. att gra
gjorde
Mannen inte vad hans hustru att frst, att sga
frstod sa (d e)
Journa I i sten att det trkigt. att h I I a med om, att vara
hll med om va r
Kaptenen hela resan. att beskriva
beskrev
Modern honom grna. att frlta (to fOT'give)

frlt
Pol isen inte var hotellet att veta, att ligga

visste lg
Fl ickan barnet p sngen. att lgga
lade
Sonen att spela tennis. att f red ra

fred rog
unit 13

SWEDISH
Point II: Tycka, tnka tro
Att tyc ka }
Att tnka can all be translated "to think."
Att tro
!Tyckalimplies opinion, a personal view.
Example: Jag tycker att det r ett bra frslag.

I think (it is my opinion) that it is a good suggestion.
ITnkalmeans to ponder, to contemplate, give thought to.
Example: Prata inte, jag frsker tnka.
Don't talk, r'm trying to think.
means "to believe."
ExampZe: Lars tror att Browns kommer imorgon.
Lars thinks (believes) that the Browns are coming tomorrow.
Unit 13
441

SWEDISH 442
Nate: Remembe~ that att tnka is also uBed as an auxilia~y to indicate futu~e
time.
Examples: Nr tnker n J resa?

When a~e you going to leave (planning to leave).
Hon tnker stanna hemma i kvll.

She is planning to stay home tonight.
P~actice G. Now we 'll give you a p~actice on tycka, tnka, tro. Inse~t the
p~ope~ wo~d in the sentence and check you~ answe~s as uBual. Use the p~esent
tense.
du att vr nya sekreterare r duktig?
Tycker
du att den nya sekreteraren b I i r bra?
Tror
Vad sitter du och p?
tnker
Jag p vad mamma brukade sga.
tnker
Jan att han fr jobbet (the job).
tror
du att filmen som vi sg var bra?
Unit 13

SWEDISH
Tycker du att fi Imen som vi sg var bra?

ni att han kommer idag?
Tror
Bo inte p att museet r stngt p mndagarna.
tnker
George att det r svrt att I~ra sig svenska?
Tyc ker
Unit 1 J 443

SWEDISH 444
Point III: Dr - dit as relative adverbs
In English the word "where" has two functions: a. it introduces a question

b. it is a relative adverb
a. Interrogative "where?" < var?
va rt?
Var r han?
Vart gick han?

(Where is he?)
(Where did he go?)
dr stan dr han bor (In the city where

b. Relative " w h e r e " - - - - - he lives)
------dit stan dit han for (In the city where
he went)
You are already familiar with the translation of the interrogative "where?"
as var? - vart? depending on whether the verb in the clause indicates rest
or motion. (Cf. Unit 8, Point III)
The relative "where" introduces a relative clause, referring to a noun in

the previous clause. (Example: The town where he lived had three churches.)
Whether you use dr or dit (corresponding to the English relative adverb
"where") depends on whether the verb in the relative clause indicates rest
or motion.
Unit 13

SWEDISH
Practice H. This is a practice on the relative adverbs dr - dit. Insert

the proper word in the sentence and check your answers as usual.
stugan, _ _ Lena bodde nr hon var I iten, lg Da I a rna.
dr
B i I en, Ullas vska lg,frsvann under natten.
dr
I ett I i tet rum, man kom genom en lng korridor, hngde en underbar tavla.
dit
Det va r ka I I t rummet, han satt och vntade.
dr
Vi krde ti II restaurangen, ni promenerade igr.
dit
Jag knner ti II (know) ett trevl igt hotell, man fr ha sin hund med sig.
dr
Lt 05S fara ti I I en plats, man kommer med buss.
dit
Uni t 13
445

SWEDISH 446
UNrT 14
P n
1. Dei var en strlande sommardag. Bten var full med .8.~~ mnniskor, bland dem
2. Anne och George. Hundratals btar seglade ut mot det pp~ havet. Efter en halv-
3. timme var de framme vid Ut, och George och Anne hoppade ~~. Pltsligt
4. '* ~ de syn p Svante Lvgren. De knde knappast igen honom. Den vant igtvis
jeans och en gammal skjorta.

5. '*
6. Svante: Hej och vlkomna. r ni trtta efter resan? r det i nte vackert
?. hr ute? Dr uppe I igger stugan. Flaggan r hissad ti I I er ra.
8. Nr de kom fram ti II stugan ppnades drren och Brita Lvgren kom ut, glatt
9. leende.
10. Brita: Hej. s roligt att ni kunde komma. Varsgoda och stig in. Nu skulle
11. det vl smaka bra med lunch efter resan?
12. Etter lunchen.
13. Svante: Orkar ni ta en promenad tVdrs ver n? Det hr r en av de strsta
14. arna. Flera fami Ijer bor hr hela ret om.

Unit 14

SWEDISH
15. George: Finns det mycket sn hr p vintern?
16. Svante: Nej, det r inte s fa.r=..!.iB!. Men isen kan vara besvrlig. Posten
l? fungerar i alla fall och mnniskorna hr u1-e r vana vid kalla vintrar.
18. Anne: Kan man bara g s hr skogen?
19. Brita: .Ja, vi har ju "allemansrtten" Sverige.
20. Anne: Vad r det fr ngot?
21. Br i ta: Det r en gammal tradition som innebr att alla har rtt att rra sl---9-
22. fritt i naturen. Att ~cka br och svamp r ti Iltet var som helst.
23. Man kan g ildnd p en , tlta och bada utan srskilt tillstnd.
24. Svante: Naturl igtvis br allemansrtten anvndas med ansvar. Det r klart
25. att man inte kan g in i ngons trdgrd och plocka blommor, eller
26. lgga ti I I vid en ~rivat brygga mitt framfr en v i I I a .
27. Fljande morgon vi I le George och Anne g och bada. Svante fre~ att de
28. skulle segla till en annan , dr det fanns en fin sandstrand.
29. Sagt och gjort. Det var en ovanl igt varm dag. ~~ sken, och alla njt.
Uni t 14 447

SWEDISH 448
30. Pltsl igt kom en lske~y~sflaska flytande p vnttnet och strax eftert en
3l. kartong. "Titta s folk br sig t," sa Svante, och hll ett kort fredrag
32 om miljvrd. Han slutade med att sga: "Hll Sverige rent!"
33. " Besket p n blev lyckat. Det var kallt i vattnet s ingen hade lust att
34. simma lngt ut. Men de lg lnge och solade sig p stranden och pratade och
35. skrattade. Sen seglade de tillbaka till Ut, trtta och glada.
Unit 14

SWEDISH
UNIT 14
Glossaroy
allemansrtt -n 0 right to access

ansvar -et -0 responsibility
besvrl ig -t -a troublesome, diffiault
besk -et -0 visit
bland among
brygg/a -an -or dock
br -et -0 berry
(att) bra sig t; br, bar, burit, 4 (to) behave
eftert afterwards
fall -et -0 case
i alla fall in any case
farllg-t-a dangerous
det r inte s farligt itts not too bad
flagg/a -an -or flag
flask/a -an -or bo tHe
(att) flyta, flyter, flt, flutit, 4 (to) float
flytande -0 -0 floating; fluently
(att) fungera, I (to) function, work
(att) f syn p; fr, fick, ftt, 4 (to) catch sight of, spot
fljande -0 -0 following
(att) fre/sl, -slr, -slog, -slagit, 4 (to) suggest
glad, glatt, glada glad, happy, merry
(att) hissa, I (to) hoist
(att) hoppa, I (to) jump, skip, hop
hundrata I s hundreds
(att) hlla, hller, hll, hllit, 4 (to) keep, hold
i I and ashore
(att) inne/bra, -br, -bar, -burit, 4 (to) imply, mean
is -en 0 ice
j eans -en (pluro,) blue jeans
ka rtong -en -er cardboard box
kldd, kltt, kldda dressed (past part,)
knappast hardly
(att) knna igen; 2a (to) roecognize
Unit 14
449

SWEDISH 450
(att) le, ler, log, lett, 4 (to) smile

leende -0 -0 smiling
leende -t -n smile
(att) lgga t i l l ; lgger, la(de), lagt, 4 (to) dock
lskedryck -en -er soda pop
mi Ij -n -er environment
mi Ijvrd -en 0 environmental protection
mitt framfr right in front of
mnnisk/a -an -or person
natur -en 0 nature
(att) njuta, njuter, njt, njutit, 4 (to) enjoy
(ati) p locka, I (to) pick
pltsl ig -t -a sudden
post -en 0 mail, mail se~vice
privat -0 -a private
p ryd I i g -t -a neat
rtt -en 0 right
(att) rra sig; 2a (to) move
sand -en 0 sand
(att) simma, (to) slJim
(att) skina, skiner, sken, skinit, 4 (to) shine
(att) skratta, (to) laugh
sn -n 0 snOlJ
sol -en -ar sun
(att) sola sig; I (to) sunbathe
strand -en, strnder beach
strax soon
(att) strla, I (to) shine
strlande -0 -0 gloT'ious
svamp -en -ar mushroom
syn -en -er sight, vision
(att) f syn p; fr, fick, ftt, 4 (to) catch sight of
ti II stnd -et -0 permit, permission
(att) tillta, tillter, tillt, t i l l t i t , 4 (to) permit, allolJ
t i I I t/en -et -na permitted (past part.)
tjnste/man -mannen, -mn salaried employee
trtT -0 -a tired
Unit 14

SWEDISH
tvrs ver straight aeross

(att) tlta, I (to) camp
van -t -a (vid) used to
v i I I I a -a n -o r house, vi lla
vrd -en 0 eare, maintenance
ret om the year round
rla -an {Il honor
till (ngons) ra in (someone's) honor
pplen -et -na open
Unit 14
451

SWEDISH 452
UNIT 14
Nates on Hasic Sentences
4. Den vanl igtvis s prydl ige ... This type of construC!tion, den (det, de) + an
adjectivaL phrase before a noun is very common in written Swedish. The adjeciival
phrase C!an sometimes be quite long and usually trans lates into a relative clause
in English.
Examples: Den vanligtvis s prydlige banktjnstemannen ..

The bank executive, who was u0ually so neatly dressed, ...
Den i Frankrike mycket valknda konstnren reser ti I I New York imorgon.

The artist, who is very weIL known in France, is Leaving for New York
tomorrow.
It is important that you learn to recognize this construction because it is

widely used in newspapers and magazines as weIL as in more formal texts. In
spoken Swedish a relative elause usually expresses the same meaning, and is
preferred.
Examples: Banktjnstemannen, som vanligtivs r s prydlig,
Konstnren, som r mycket vl knd Frankrike, reser t i l l New York

imorgon.
5. Prydl ige. In written Swedish the definite form of an adjective sometimes takes
an -e rather than an ~ ending when the adjeetive modifies a noun whieh refers
to a male person.
Examples: den gaml~ mannen the old man

den ldste sonen the oldest son
de vise mnnen the wise men
Again, this is a form that you may eome aeross in written Swedish, so you shouLd
be able to reeognize it. However, it is seldom used in spaken Swedish.
Unit 14

SWEDISH
19. Vad r det fr ngot? (What's that?J As you know from Unit 4, Nate 17, and
Unit 7,~~8, spaken Swedish of ten uses this construction in questions using
the question wopd vad.
Examples: Vad r det hr fr ngot?

What's this?
Vad finns det fr stags djur p Skansen?
What kind of animaLs are ther'e at Skansen?
Vad r det dr fr slags blomma?

What kind of fLower is that?
32. Det var kall t i vattnet. Swedish of ten uses det as a formal (grammaticalJ
subJect as in Det var kallt i vattnet,meaning-:-The water was cold. This usage
is espeeiaLLy prevalent with intransitive verbs, and is sometimes equivalent
to the English grammatieal subject "there. "
Examples:
Det sitter en man p trappan.= En man sitter p trappan.
There's a man sitting on the steps. = A man is sitting on the steps.
Det kom ett brev med p0~ten. Ett brev kom med posten.
There was a Letter (tha~ came) in the mail. = A letter came ~n the mail.
Det vxte ett stort traj vid huset. Ett stort trd vxte vid huset.
There was a big tree grJwing by the house. = A big tree was growing by the house.
Det krde en bil frbi mig. = En bil krde frbi mig.

Thepe was a cap that drave by me. = A ear drove by me.
unit 14 453

SWEDISH 454
UNIT 14
Points to Practice
Point I: Past Participles
Point II: Passive Voice

a. Compound Passive
b. -5 Passive
Point III: Present Participle
Unit 14

SWEDISH
Point l: Past Paptieiples
The Swedish past papticipLe is used and decLined as

an adjective. The fopm of the vepb used with har
and hade is caLLed "the supine" and shouLd not be
eonfused with the past papticipLe. The supine fopm
is nevep decLined and can not be used as an adjective.
Below is a table showing the difference between the

Swedish supine and the particip le fopms:
Conju-
gation Supine Fast Papticiple
As Fredicate Adjeetive As Modifying Adjective
1 (har, hade) tvttat skjortan r (bl ir) tvttad en tvttad skjorta

go I vet r (b I i r) t v t t a t - ett tvttat golv Indef.
k I derna r (b I i r) tvttade tvttade klder
den tvttade skjortan

det tvttade golvet Def.
de tvtta~kJderna
2a (har, hade) stng! drren r (b I i r) stngd en stngd drr

fnstret r (blir) stngt ett stngt fnster lndef
drrarna r (blir) stngda stng~ drrar
den stngda drren

det stngda fnstret Def.
de stngda drrarna
lJnit 14 455

SWEDISH 456
Conju-
gation Past Paptiaip1-e
AB Ppedicate Adjective As Modifying Adjeative
2b (har, hade) stekt korven r (b I i r) stekt en stekt korv
kttet r (b II r) stekt (ett) stekt ktt Indef
kttbullarna r (bil rT stekta stekta kttbu I I ar
den stekta korven

det stekta kttet Def.
de stektakttbu I I a rna
3 (har, hade) sytt klnningen r (blir) sydd en sydd klnning

skrpet r (bl ir) sytt - ett sytt skrp (belt) Indef.
klderna r (blir) sydda sydda klder
den sydda klnningen

det sydda skrpet Def.
de sydda klderna
4 (har, hade) skrivit boken r (blir) skriven en skriven bok

brevet r (b I i r) skrivet ett skrivet brev Indef.
bckerna r (blir) skriVna skrivna bcker
den skrivna boken

det skri vna bl-evet Def.
de skrivna-bckerna
(har, hade) slt bilen r (blir) sld en sld bli

huset r (blir> slt ett sTt hus Indef.
mblerna r (blir) slda slda mbler
den slda bilen

det slda huset Def.
de sldamblerna
Vnit 14

SWEDISH
The inflectional pattern of the Swedish past participles is very similar

to that of the adjective.
Indefinite forms
The basic en form varies according to the conju-

gation of the verb.
Examples: en tvttad skjorta (Conjug. 1)

en stn9~ drr (Conjug. 2a)
en stekt korv (Conjug. 2b)
en sydd-klnning (Conjug. :3)
en skriven bok (ConJug. 4)
The ett form of the past participle, like a regu-

lar adjective, gets the usual -t or -tt ending.
Examples: ett tvttat golv

ett stng~fnster
stekt ktt
ett sytt s k rp
ett skrivet brev
The plural form gets either an -e or an -a ending,

depending on the conjugation of~he verb-.-
Examples: tvttade skjortor

stngdadrrar
stekt"~lkttbuI I ar
syddaklder
skrivna bcker
It is only the past particip le of the first conjugation that gets the -e
ending in the plural and definite forms. The rest have the familiar -a
ending.
unit 14 457

SWEDISH 458
Definite forms
Like the adjectives, the definite forms J singular and plural, of the past
particip les are always the same as the plural indefinite forms.
The Swedish past participle can be used both as a modifying adjective
(en stngd drr) or as a predicate adjective (drren r stngd). As a
modifying adjective it is used both in the indefinite and definite forms.
Examples: en tvttad skjorta
den tvttade skjorta~
As a predicate adjective it is always used in its indefinite form.

Examples: Skjortan r tvttad.
Golvet r tvttat-.-
Klderna r tvttade.
Nate: Comparative and superlative forms of past participles are formed by

adding mer and me~ befare the participle.
Examples: August Strindberg r kanske den mest knda svenska frfattaren.
August Strindberg is perhaps the most famous Swedish author.
Strindberg r mer knd n Pr Lagerkvist.
Strindberg is better knawn than Par Lagerkvist.
Uni t 14

SWEDISH
Ppactice A. We witl have a shopt practice on the definite forms, singular

and plupat of the past participtes of the foup conjugations. ehange the past
particip te from the indefinite to the definite form.
eUE
en stngd drr
den stngda drren en bermd tavla
den bermda tavlan skrivna bcker
de skrivna bckerna en frdigsydd kostym

den frdigsydda kostymen ett mblerat rum
det mblerade rummet en bjuden gst
den bjudna gsten stekt potatis
den stekta potatisen betalade rkningar
de betalade rkningarna ett skrivet brev
det skrivna brevet en knd konstnr
den knda konstnren mblerade vningar
de mblerade vningarna
Unit 14
459

SWEDISH 460
ppactice B. In this ppactice we'll give you the infinitive fopm of the vepb
and you'll have to fopm the past papticiple in its indefinite fopms.
eVE
Fnstren r stnga
stngda
Kttet r ste ka
stekt
Kakorna r ba ka
ba kad e
Rummen r mblera
mblerade
Tackkorten r skriva
skrivna
Lena r inte bjuda
bjuden
Rkning var inte t i I I ta
t i I lten
Kttet r rka
rkt
Unit 14

SWEDISH
eVE
Huset r s I j a
slt
Ljusen r tnda
tnda
Hyran r betala
betalad (betald)
Det r att rka. frbjuda

frbjudet
n~~n~~~
t~~6j(}de"
Unit 14
4,"61

SWEDISH 462
Point II: Passive Voice
The passive voice (in Swedish and English) is a

verb construction used to express a transition
from one state to another on the part of the gram-
matical subject J or an action performed on the
grammatical subject by an agent.
Swedish has two ways of forming the passive voice:
a. The campa und passive form; and
b. The passive -s form
a. The compound passive fo~m corresponds to the way English forms passive
constructions (be + past participle). In Swedish the auxiliary att bl i
is used + the past particip leJ which has to agree with the grammatical subject.
Examples: Skjortan blir tvttad.

Golvet bl~vttat-.
KI.dernatiTi r tvttade.
Maten blir stlld p bordet.

Bordet blir stllt i rummet.
StolarnatiTir stllda i kket.
Bo k e n b I j r k p t .
Huset bTfl= kpt.
Bckerna bl ir kp~.
Klnningen blir sydd.

Skrpet b I i r s y t t . -
Klnningarna blir sydda.
Unit 14

SWEDISH
Boken blir skriven.

Tackkortet bl ir Skrivet.
Breven b I i r~1 vna. -
Note l: The auxiLiary in Swedish compound passive constructions is att bl i

-- not att vara. Att vara describes a state or condition, not an
action or a transition from one state to another.
ExampLes: Skjortan blev tvttad p ngra minuter.

The Bhirt was washed in a few minuteB.
(In coLLoquiaL EngLish: The shirt got washed ... )
Skjortan r tvttad.
The shirt--;s washed. (The shirt is cLean.)
Bilen blev stulen medan jag var borta.

The car was stoLen whiLe I was gone. (The ear got stoLen ... )
Bilen var stulen nr jag kom tillbaka.

The ear was stoLen (gone) when I got back.
Note 2: The preposition av corresponds to the EngLish preposition "by" ~n

a passive construction.
Practice C. Change the active sentences inta passive sentences. The correct
passive sentenee wiLL appear beLow each active sentence, so be sure to cover
up the answers before you try to come up with the correct sentenee yourseLf.
Note that when man is the subject in the active sentence there is no agent
(by ... ; av .. ) in the passive sentence.
Ulla bakade kakan.
Ka ka n b I e v b a ka d a v U I I a
Unit 14
463

SWEDISH 464
Kerstin sydde klnningen.
Klnningen blev sydd av Kerstin.
Lasse tvttar bilen.
Bil en bl i r tvttad av Lasse.
Johan slde huset.
Huset blev slt av Johan.
Mina vnner betalade rkningarna.
Rkningarna blev betalade av mina vnner.
Mannen krde bi len ti II stationen.
Bi len blev krd av mannen t l II stationen.
Fami Ijen Ek bjd oss p middag.
Vi blev bjudna av familjen Ek p mIddag.
Man flyttade mblerna t i l l ett annat rum.
Mblerna blev flyttade tl I I ett annat rum.
Man ordnade allt fre resan.
Allt blev ordnat fre resan.
Unit 14

SWEDISH
b. Another ~ay of making passive constructions in S~edish is to add an -s to

the active form of the verb. This -s form can be added to the infinitive, past
tense and the supine. In the present tense -s is added to the infinitive of the
first and third conjugation verbs and to the stem in the second and fourth con-
jugation verbs. Consequently the -s passive infinitive form and the -s passive
present tense form are identical in the firat and third conjugations.
Examples: att bakas ka ka n ba ka s

to be baked the cake is being baked
att sys klnningen sys

to be sewn the dress is being sewn
The follo~ing chart ~ill sho~ you the -s passive forms in all four conjugations.
Conjug. Infinitive Present tense Past tense Supine
1 att ba ka s ba kas bakades (ha r, hade) bakats
2a att stng~ stng~ stngdes (har, hade) stng~
2b att kp~~ kp~ kptes (ha r, hade) kp~
:5 att sy~ sy~ syddes ( ha r, hade) sytts
4 att skrivas skrivs skrevs (ha r, hade) skrivits
Note that an -e is inserted ~n the present tense in second and fourth conjuga-
tion verbs i f the stem ends in an -s.
Examples: Nyheterna lses varje timme.

The ne~s is read every hour.
Bren fryses meddetsamma.

The berrieS-are frozen right a~ay.
Unit 14
465

SWEDISH 466
Ppaatiae D. In this ppaatiae we'LL give you the aative infinitive fopm of
a vepb in the Cue aoLumn. Use the tense that is indiaated and put the vepb
into the sentenae on the Left.
CVE
Bordet av min moster. att kpa (past)
kptes
La rs t i I I ko nt o r e t var j e da g a v s i n f r u att kra (ppesent)
krs
Det att skjortan Inte var tvttad. att mrka (past)
mrktes
Det mer frr. att \ sa (pas t)
lstes
Sverige det mycket fr de gamla. att gra (ppesent)
grs
Mycket l bcker. att beskriva (ppesent pep!.)
har beskrivits
Det mycket om ekonomin (the eaonomy). att tala (ppesent)
talas
Unit 14

SWEDISH
eUE
Det att hon kom frn Tyskland. att hra (past)
hrdes
Rkningen redan att betala (past perf.)
hade betalats
F II men av alla eleverna. att se (past)

s gs
Sa r n ska men inte att se, att hra (inf.)

ses h ra s
Ha n vara den bsta i klassen. att anse (present)

anses
Fi I men va ra i nt res sa nt. att sga (present)

sgs
Praotioe E. This is another praotioe where you form a passive sentenoe out
of an active sentence~ hut this time you'll use the -s form of the verb.
Remember that when man is the subjeot in the aotive sentenoe there is no
agent (by .. /av ... J in the passive sentenoe. The correct passive sentenee
follows under the aotive sentence, so be sure to cover it up before you try
to give your answer.
Vrdinnan serverade middagen.
Middagen serverades av vrdinnan.
Unit 14 467

SWEDISH 468
Lkaren tog in Ulf p sjukhuset.
Ulf togs in p sjukhuset av lkaren.
Man har gjort allt fr att han ska bli bttre.
Allt har gjorts fr att han ska bl i bttre.
Man stngde drren lngsamt.
Drren stngdes lngsamt.
Man kan kpa tidningar i kiosker.
Tidningar kan kpas i kiosker.
Man kper biljetterna vid ingngen.
Biljetterna kps vid ingngen.
Brita anvnder skrivmaskinen.
Skrivmaskinen anvnds av Brita.
Chauffren (the d~ive~, chauffeur) hmtade ambassadren klockan tta.
Ambassadren hmtades av chauffren klocKan tta.
unit 14

SWEDISH
Point III: Present Participle
The English present particip le has three different functions:
1. It can be an adjective. (This book is very interesting. )
2. It indicates the progressive form of a verb. (Be is reading.)
3. It can be a noun (gerund). (Jogging is fun.)
1. In Swedish the present participle functions mainly as an adjective.
Examples: Ett blommande trd (a blossoming tree)

Ett I eend""8b"""rn (a smiling child)
The Swedish present participle is formed by adding the suffixes -ande or

-ende. The verbs that take an -a in the infinitive get the -ande suffix
and verbs that do not take an -a-in the infinitive (third and some fourth
conjugation verbs) get the -ende suffix.
The Swedish present particip le is never dealined.
Examples: en strlande dag tv strlande dagar

ett I een<rebarn tv I eend""8b"""rn
den strlande dagen de strlande dagarna

det leende-barnet de leende-barnen
2. It is important that you remember that the English progressive form can
not be translated into Swedish using the present participle of the verb.
As we pointed out in Unit 53 the English progressive forms aorrespond to the
present 3 past 3 present perfect 3 and past perfect tenses.
Unit 14 469

SWEDISH 470
Examples: Be is reading. Han lser.

Be was reading. Han lste.
Be has been reading. Han har lst.
Be had been reading. Han hade lst.
When English verbs like "go." "sit." "stand." etc. are followed by a present
particip le. two co-ordinated verbs are used in Swedish.
Examples: We stood there talking. Vi stod dr och pratade.

We went swimming. Vi gick och badade.
We sat there understanding nothing. Vi satt dr och frstod
ingenting.
J. The English gerund corresponds to a Swedish infinitive.
Examples: Jogging is good for you. Att jogga r nyttigt.

Do you like reading? Tycker du om att lsa?
I learn by listening. Jag lr mig genom att lyssna.
Some Swedish nouns are derived from the present participle. These nouns betong
either to the fourth or the fifth declension and are declined accordingly.
Ett-nouns that end in -ande or -ende bel"ong to the fourth declension.
Examples: ett meddelande, meddelandet, meddelanden, meddelandena (message)

ett leende, leendet, leenden, leendena (smiLe)
En-nouns that end in -ande (usually signifying people) belong to the fifth
declension.
Example: en ordfrande, ordfranden, ordfrande, ordfrandena (chairman)
En-nouns ending in -ende are treated like adjectives.
Example: en i nneboende, den inneboende, (f I era) i nneboende, de inneboende

(boarder)
lJnit 14

SWEDISH
UNIT 15
~o
~~r och Traditioner
Midsommar
1. p midsommarafton promenerade Browns
2. och deras svenska vrdfolk ner ti I I
3. en ~ vid havet, dr majstnge~
4. skulle st. Dr hade redan samlats
5. en I iten ~ mnniskor, unga och ~.//. -.

6. gamla, och frberedelserna hade
7. brjat. Brita freslog att Anne
8. >t skulle hjlpa till med att kl majstngen. Sjlv tnkte hon ta hand om kaffe-
9. serveringen. Ett par sommargst~ hl I p att stta upp bord och stolar och
10. Svante och George gick genast dit och hjlpte ti I I.
11. Efter ngra timmar var allt klart och den frdigkldda stngen c-est~ under
12. stort ~.
13. Klockan fyra brjade dansen omkri~9.. majstngen. Alla deltog, stora och sm,
14. en del i jeans och ~orts, andra l vackra fol kdrkter. Under ~ern~ serverades
Unit 15 471

SWEDISH 472
l S. ka f f e oc h I skedr yc ker . Me d a n d e ~~_~~ ~~JJl o ,- d n a d e n g r a d u k t i g a ~-
16. domar lekar fr de smil. Alla hade roligt. George och Anne riktigt knde att
17. de upplevde en gammal svensk tradition.
18. Senare p kvllen gick de fyra vnnerna ner ti II bryggan, dr dansen fortsatte
19. fr de vuxna. Eftert satt de p bryggan i den ljusa sommarnatten och beundrade
20. so I uPP9~.
Julen
21. Efter midsommaren i skrgrden skaf-
22. fade sig Browns en I iten bok om
23. svenska helger. De vi Ile veta hur
24. man firar jul Sverige. George
2S. brjade lsa:
26. "Julen brjar med Lucia-dagen den trettonde december. Enligt traditionen brukar
27. den ldsta dottern i fami Ijen vcka far och mor tidigt p morgonen med Lucia-
28. sng, kaffe och lussekatter. Hon r kldd i vitt och har en krans av lingonris
29. med levande ljus p huvudet. Hon r om~ av sina sm syskon som r trnor
30. och stjrngossar. Varje skola och arbetsplats har sin egen Lucia."
Unit 15

SWEDISH
31. * "Tror du att det kommer ngon Luc i a t i I loss december?" frgade Anne. "Vi
32. kiinner ju redan flera sta svenska flickor."
33. George fortsatte att lsa:
34. "Efter Lucia-dagen brjar svenskarna gra det julfint i huset. Man stiidar och
35. putsar, bakar och lagar julmat. Alla juldekorationer tas fram och dagen fre
36. julafton, el/er tidigare, kls julgranen."
37. "Det dr med storstdningen tycker jag mindre om," sade Anne.
38. "Julen har inte brjat n," sade George och lste vidare:
39. "Julafton, den tjugofjrde december, r den viktigaste dagen, srskilt fr barnen.
4 O. Efter julmiddagen, nr hela familjen r samlad och julgransljusen r tnda, kommer
41. jultomten med en sck p ryggen, full med julklappar. Han knackar p drren och
42. frgar om det finns ngra snlla barn i huset, och det finns det alltid, frsts.
43. p juldagsmorgonen, mycket tidigt, d det nnu r mrkt, gr mnga svenskar i
44. julottan, och sen trffas slkt och vnner och ter julmat och dricker glgg. Det
45. finns mnga traditionella julrtter, t.ex. (till exempel) sIllsallad, julskinka
46. med rdkl, lutfisk och risgrynsgrt. Under hela helgen dricker man kaffe och
47. ter pepparkakor och saffransbrd. Man dansar kring granen och firandet fort-
Vnit 15 473

SWEDISH 474
48. stter med nyret och trettondagen, den 6 januari, nda ti I I 'tjugondag Knut,'
49. d julen dansas ut. Det r nstan som i juivisan att 'julen varar n t l I I
50. pska' (julen vara nda t i II psken),
Fastan
51. "0 c h sen kommer fastan. Hr p det hr, Anne!"
52. "I samma visa str det ocks att 'dremellan kommer fastan.' D dekoreras huset
53. med frggranna pskris och man ter semlor med mandelmassa och vispgrdde.
54. Under den hr tiden mrker man att dagarna brjar bl i lngre. De frsta vr-
55. blommorna tittar fram ven om det fortfarande r ganska kallt ute."
.~
56. "s lustigt att svenskarna firar fastan fastn de Inte r katoliker," utbrast
57. Anne.
58. "Ja, men det lter Inte som om de ter mindre," sade George. "Nu ska vi se hur
59. de f i rar psken."
Unit 15

SWEDISH
Psken
60. "Lt mig lsa nu, snlla du," sade Anne. Hon tog boken Ifd3n George och brjade
61. lsa:
62. "Psken firas i Sverige~. (bland annat) med att man mlar och ter psk~.
63. Barnen brukar ocks f vackra ~gg, som r fyllda med godsaker. Pskbordet
64. r dekorerat med vrblommor, kycklingar och pskkringar. Pskkringarna r en
65. * kvarleva frn den tid d man trodde p hxor. Sm flickor utkldda t i l l psk-
66. kringar gr ibland omkring t i I I grannarna och nskar 'glad psk. I
67. Psken har I iksom julen tv helgdagar, pskdagen och annandag psk. Skolbarnen
68. har psklov och det har blivit populrt att resa norrut och ka skidor."
69. "Nu kommer vi ti II ngot nytt," sade Anne. "Hr hur svenskarna firar vren. 1I
Unit 15 475

SWEDISH 476
Valborgsmssoafton
70. "Vxl ingarna mellan de 01 ika rstiderna betyder mycket fr svenskarna. Vrens
7l. ankomst firas ocks med en speciel I hgtid. P valborgsmssoafton, den sista
72. april, samlas man runt stora eldar i alla stder och byar i Sverige. Man
73. sjunger snger och hller vlkomsttal till vren. Vid universiteten firas
74. vren srskilt intensivt med studentsng och vrbaler."
75. " Det lter vl roligt?" Anne lt entusiastisk. "Jag hoppas att vi kan mer
76. svenska nsta r och att vi blir bjudna p ngra trevliga vrbaler." Anne lste
77. vidare.
Frsta maj
78. "Den frsta maj r en helgdag i Sverige. D firas arbetarnas dag med demonstra-
79. tionstg. I Stockholm marscherar man ti II Grdet, dr enl igt traditionen ~-
80. litiker och fackfreningsledare hller tal."
8l. Anne sg att George hade somnat medan hon lste, s hon fortsatte inte beskrIv-
82. ningarna p ngra av de mindre viktiga helgerna, Kristi himmelfrdsdag och
83. pingsten.
unit 15

SWEDISH
UNIT 15
GLossary
afton -en, aftnar evening, eve
annandag -en -ar seaond day (of Christmas, Easter, PentecostJ
arbetare -n -0 worker
ba I -en -er ban (danae)
beskrivning -en -ar desal'iption
(att) betyda, 2a (to) mean
(att) beundra, I (to) admire
bland annat (bl.a.) among other things
bland andra (bl.a.) among others
dans -en -er danae, danaing
(att) dansa, I (to) dance
dekoration -en -er decoration
(att) dekorera, I (to) deaoT'ate
en de I some, a few
(att) del/taga, -tar, -tog, -tagit, 4 (to) partiaipate
demonstration -en -er demonstration
dremellan in between
eld -en -ar fire, bonfire
entusiastisk -t -a enthusiastia
exempe l, exemp I et, -0 exampLe
till exempel (L ex.) for example
fackfreninQ -en -ar labor union
fast/a -an :'or fast, Lent
(att) fira, I (to) aelebrate
folkdrkt -en -er nationaL aostume
(att) fylla, 2a (to) fill
frggrann -t -a aoLoT'fuL
(att) frbereda, 2a (to) prepare
frberedelse -n -r preparation
glgg -en 0 hot spiced wine served at Christmas
godsak -en -er sweets, "goo dies II
goss/e -en -ar young boy
gran -en -ar spT'uae
grupp -en -er gT'OUP
Unit 15
477

SWEDISH 478
gryn -et -f/J grain

grdd/e -en cream
grt -en 0 porridge, hot cereal
helgdag -en -ar holiday
(att) hj Ipa ti II med; 2b (to) help out with
hx/a -an -or witch
hgtid -en -er festive day
i f r n from
intensiv -t -a intens'ive
jubel, jublet 0 cheering
julgran -en -ar Christmas tree
julklapp -en -ar Christmas gift
julott/a -an -or early church service Christmas Day morning
jultomt/e -en -ar Santa Claus
kato I i k -en -er CathoUc
(att) kl, 3 (to) trim, decorate
(att) kl ut; 3 (to) dress up
krans -en -ar wreath
kring a'round
Kristi himmelfrdsdag Ascension Day
(att) kunna, kan, kunde, kunnat (to) know, have learned
kvarlev/a -an -or remnant
kyckl ing -en -ar chicken
k I -en 0 cabbage
(att) knna, 2a (to) feel
kring -en -ar old lady, witch (derogatory)
ledare -n -0 leader
I ek -en -ar game
(att) leka, 2b (to) play
levande -0 -0 live, real
I i ksom like
lov -et -f/J (school) vacation
lussekatt -en -er special saffron buns served at Lucia and
Christmas
lustig -t -a funny, peculiar
lutfisk -en f/J specially prepared fiBh Berved at ChristmaB
maj/stng, -stngen -stnger maypole
mandel -n, mandlar almond
Unit 15

SWEDISH
mandelmass/a -an (/; almond paste

(att) marschera, I (to) march
midsommarafton Midsummer's eve
(att) mla, I (to) paint
norrut north(ward), towards the north
(att) omge, omger, omgav, omgivit, 4 (to) surround
omgiv/en -et -na surrounded
omkring around
papp -en (/; cardboard
paus -en -er break, pause
peppar -n 0 pepper
pepparkak/a -an -or spicy cookies served at Christmas
pingst -en 0 Pentecost
politiker -n-0 poZitician
populr -t -a popular
(att) putsa, I (to) polish
pskris -et -0 branches brought into the house and decor-
ated with dyed feathers (for Lenten and
Easter decoration)
(att) resa, 2b (to) raise
ris -et -(/; greens, twigs; rice
runt around
rygg -en -ar back
rtt -en -er dish, faod
saffran -en (/; saffron
(att) samla, I (to) gather, collect (trans.)
(att) samlas, I (to) gather (intrans.)
semi/a -an -or pastry served during Lent
shorts -en (plur.) shorts
sill -en -ar herY'ing
sillsallad -en -er herring salad
skid/a -an -or ski
(att) ka skidor (to) ski
skink/a -an -or ham
soluppgng -en -ar sunrise
sommargst -en -er non-permanent resident in summer resort area
speciell -t -a special
stjrn/a -an -or star
Unit 15 479

SWEDISH 480
(att) stda, I (to) clean

stdning -en 0 cleaning
sck -en -ar sack, bag
(att) titta fram; (to) look out, stick up, appeal'
tjugondag Knut twentieth day afteY' Christmas
traditionell -t-a traditional
trettondagen Epiphany (thiY'teenth day)
tg -et -0 march, marching
trn/a -an -or attendant (foY' wedding and Lucia)
ungdomar -na (pluY'.) young people
(att) uppleva, 2a (to) experience
(att) ut/brista, -brister, -brast, -brustit, 4 (to)exclaim
valborgsmssoafton Walpurgis night (April 30)
(att) vara, I (to) last
vidare furtheY'
viktig -t -a important
(att) vila sig; (to) rest
(att) vispa, I (to) whip, beat (food)
vlspgrdd/e -en 0 whipped cY'eam
vux/en -et -na adult, grown-up
en vuxen, tv vuxna adult (noun)
(att) vxla, I (to) change
vx I i ng -en -ar change
gg -et -0 egg
nda till all the way to, right up to
ng -en -ar meadow, field
(att) nska, (to) wish
Unit 15

SWEDISH
UNIT 15
8. Att kl majst~ngen. The verb att kl (to dress) also has the meaning "to trim"
or "to decorate" when you talk about trimming the Christmas tree or decorating the
maypoZe -- att kl julgranen, att kl majstngen.
13. Stora och sm. Swedish adjectives can be used as nouns.
Examples: Jag tittade p~ klnningar och valde mellan en grn och en bl~.
I was looking at dresses and chose between a green (one) and a blue (one).
Nr vi far p~ semester r den stora bi len mer praktisk n den I i Ila.

When we go on vacation the big ear is more practical than the small one.
Lena hade tv~ vskor och Johan hjlpte henne att bra den tyngsta.
Lena had two suitcases and Johan helped her carry the heaviest (one).
15. De vuxna (the adults, grown-ups). Vux/en -et -na is an irregular past particip le
of att vxa (to grow), which can be conjugated either according to the second con-
jugation (vxa, vxer, vxte, vxt) or as an irregular verb, vxa, vxer, vxte,
vuxit. The irregular past particip le is of ten used as a noun.
Examples: En vuxen och tv barn.

One adult and two children.
De vuxna pratade medan barnen lekte.

The grown-ups talked while the children played.
31. Att det kommer ngon Lucia. See Unit 14, Nate #32.
Unit 15 481

SWEDISH 482
65. Den tid d . Den (det, de) can be used as a detepminative adjective op pponoun,
which means that it refers to a following phpase, usually a necessapy pelative
clause. When den (det, de) functions as a detepminative adjective the following
noun does not take the definite ending.
Examples: De biljetter som du inte har anvnt kan du lmna tillbaka.

The tickets that you have not used you may retupn.
Det hus som jag verkligen skulle vilja ha finns inte.

The house that I would peally like to have does not exist.
Sommaren r den rstid d alla i Sverige vill ha semester.

Summer is the time of year when everybody in Sweden wants a vacation.
As a detepminative pponoun den (det, de) is followed immediately by a relative

clause and corresponds in English to "the one who" ("he who," etc.), "that which"
("what"), and "those who."
Examples: Den som kommer fr sent fr ingen efterrtt.

The one who is late gets no dessert.
Det som han sade var sant.

That which (what) he sa id was true.
De som v i I I se p TV kan g In I det andra rummet.

Those who want to watch TV can go into the other room.
Unit 15

SWEDISH
UNIT 15
Points to Practice
Point I: Compound Nouns
Point II: Compound Verbs
Unit 15
483

SWEDISH 484
Point I: Compound Nouns
A compound noun is a noun made up

of two or more words. In Swedish
there is an abundance of compound
nouns~ which of ten correspond to
a whole noun phrase in English.
Examples:
English (usually written in two Swedish (written as one word)

words or more)
Christmas tree julgran

baby-sitter barnvakt
traveZer's checks resecheckar
day of the week veckodag
residential area bostadsomrde
The Swedish compound noun is an en word or an ett word depending on the last
noun in the compound.
Examples: en barnvakt
ett somma rst I I e
There are different ways of forming compound nouns in Swedish.
1. Two nouns may simply be joined.
Examples: barnvakt
julafton
matsal
Unit 15

SWEDISH
2. An extra letter may be added between the different words. This letter may
be:
a. -s Examples: bostadsomrde (bostad + omrde)

tidning~artikel (tidning + artikel) newspaper article
b. -e Examples: rttegng (rtt + gng) trial

olj~kris (olja + kris) oil crisis
c. -o Examples: veckodag (vecka + dag)

kyrk~grd (kyrka + grd) cemetery
d. -u Examples: gatuhrn (gata + hrn) street corner

varuhus (vara - merchandise - + hus) department store
3. Many words that end in an unstressed -a OY' -e lose that unstY'essed vowel
when pombined with another word.
Examples: (f I i eka + s ko I a )
f I i c ks ko I a girls' school
blombukett (blomma + bukett) bouquet of flowers
lampskr"m (lampa + skrm) lamp shade
There are many rulcs (with many exception~) for how compound nouns are formed.
We therefore suggest that you just try to learn each compound noun as it comes
along. It is more important that you learn to recogni2e and distinguish the
words that make up a compound noun so you can understand the meaning. Som e
compound nouns aY'~ made up of several words and are very long, for example,
Arbetsmarknads~~~lsen (AMS), Labor Market Board; Justitieombudsmannambetet
(JO), Office of the National Ombudsman. No wonder Swedes are fond of abbre-
viations!
Unit 15 485

SWEDISH 486
Point II: Compound Verbs
Verbs with partie les (prefix~ noun

adjeetive~ adverb) are called eom-
pound verbs. All compound verbs
are conjugated the same way as the
simple verb.
Examples: att missbruka, missbrukar, missbrukade, missbrukat to abuse

missbruk~missbrukat, missbrukade
att instlla, instller, instllde, instllt to caneel

instlld, instlll, instllda
att misst~~ka, misstnker, misstnkte, misstnkt to suspect

misstnkt~sstnkt, misstnkta
att anfrtro, anfrtror, anfrtrodde, anfrtrott to confide

anfrtrod~anfrtrott, anfrtrodda
att beskriva, beskriver, beskrev, beskrivit to describe

beskriven, beskrivet, beskrivna
a. Some compound verbs are inseparable (i.e. particle and verb always stay together
as one word). Verbs ~ith the follo~ing prefixes are inseparable:
an-, be-, er-, fr-, hr-, miss-, sam-, um-, und-, van-, ~_.
Examples: att anvnda to use
att betala to pay
att frklara to explain
att samarbeta to eooperate
Unit 15

SWEDISH
b. Some compoHnd verbs are separable, i.e. the particle is separated from
the verb except in the present pariiciple and past participle forms.
Examples: att knna igen (to recognize)
V i knner i gen honom.

Vi knde j gen honom.
V i ha r (hade) knt ; gen honom.
Han blev igenknd.
Ett igenknnande leende. (A smile of recognition)
att kasta bort (to throw away)
Mona kastar bort tidningen.

Mona kastade bort tidningen.
Mona har(hade) kastat bort tidningen.
Bortkastad tid. (Wasted time.)
att tycka om (to like)
Per tycker om Lena.

Per ~te o'!!.- Lena.
Per har (hade) tyckt om Lena.
Lena r omtyckt.
Practice A. This is a practice on separable compound verbs. Using the verb forms
indicated by the cues, complete the sentences on the left.
eVE
att knna igen
Min kusin vrt hus. past tense
knde igen
Unit 15 487

SWEDISH 488
eUE
att knna ~
Olof Palme blev I New York. past partiaiple

Igenknd
Jag din syster. present tense

knner igen
att hyra ut
Ib tn ker s I n v i I I a. infinitive
hyra ut
Varfr du din vning? present tense

hyr ut
Vningen var past partiaiple
uthyrd
att tycka om
Eva sin bror. pl'esent tense
tycker om
Asa var mycket klassen. past partioiple

omtyckt
Unit 15

SWEDISH
eVE eVE
att~~~
Jag att bo nra havet. present perfeet

--------
har tyckt om
att ~~
din mat! imperative

t upp
Hunden kalvkotletten. past tense

t upp
AI It r past particip le
upptet
att kasta bort

Erik brevet. past tense
kastade bort
Ulla tyckte det var _________ tid att se p TV. past participle
bortkastad
Johan visste inte att Al ice _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ t i d n i nge n past perfeet
hade kastat bort
Unit 15 489

SWEDISH 490
Placement o[ the Particle in Separable Compound Verbs
We mentioned earlier that the particle in a separable compound verb is

always attached to the verb in the present participle and the past parti-
ciple [orms. In other [orms the particle is separated [rom the verb and
[ollows the verb immediately.
Examples: Jag tycker om den hr boken.

Jag ~yckte om den hr boken.
Jag har (hade) tyckt om att vara l stockholm.
Jag kommer att~ka om att bo s nra arbetet.
However, when a separable compound verb occurs in a question or in a main

clause with revers ed word order, or together with a roaming adverb (ef.
Unit 12, Point II), the verb and the particle are separated by either the
subject or the roaming adverb, or both.
Examples: ~er du om den hr boken? (Question)
Eftersom vi inte trffas s ofta, ~ker v ~ att

ringa ti II varandra. (Revers ed word order in main cZause)
Jag tycker inte om att spela tennis.

(Roaming adverb in clause with simple tense)
Tycker du inte om att spela tennis?

(Question wit~aming adverb)
Note: when the tense of the separable compound verb is a compound tense
(i.e. present per[eet, past per[ect. or future) and the verb occurs with
a roaming adverb. the adverb has to follow the first verb (the conjugated
verb). The separated verb (verb + particle) [ollows.
Examples: Jag har aldrig tyckt om att spela tennis.

Jag hade allti~kt o~ honom.
Jag kommer alltid att tycka om honom.
Unit 15

SWEDISH
Praatiae B. This is a praatiae using separable aompound verbs in sentenaes ~ith adverbs
("roaming" and "non-poaming"). We ~ill use simple and aompound tenses. Vse the verb
att tycka om throughout. We ~ill indiaate in the aue aolumn ~hat tense and ~hat adverb
to use.
eVE
att tycka om
Karin honom. past tense + aldrig
tyckte aldrig om
Kar i n honom. present perf. + aldrig
har aldrig tyckt om
Varfr Karin honom? present tense + inte
tycker inte om
Karin sade att hon honom. past tense + Inte

inte tyckte om
Karin honom past tense + fr flera r
sedan
tyckte om fr flera r sedan
Kar i n honom present perf. + lnge
har tyckt om lnge
Ka r i n va r past pa'l'tiaipZe + alltid
alltid omtyckt.
Unit 15 491

SWEDISH 492
Some verbs can be both separable and inseparable. These two forms usually
indicate different meanings. The separable form is used to express some-
thing eonerete; the inseparable form expresses something abstract.
Examples: Anna brt aven tand.

Anna broke off a tooth.
Premirministern avbrt frhandl ingarna.

The Prime Minister broke off (interrupted) the negotiations.
Vi ~frbi Vita Huset.

We passed the White House.
Ordfranden fr~~ vissa detaljer.

The chairman passed over (skipped, neglected) certain details.
Lraren pekade p det felstavade ordet.

The teacher pointed to the misspelled word.
Gran ppekade att han hade haft rtt.

Goran pointed out (indicated) that he had been right.
Note: If there is no difference in meaning between the separable and in-

separable forms, the separable form is preferred in the spoken language.
The inseparable form is more common ly used in formal written language.
Examples: Per valde ot en bl kostym.

Per chose (picked out) a blue suit.
Presidenten utvalde utrikesministern att leda frhandlingarna.

The President chose the Secretary of State to lead the negotia-
tions.
Unit 15

SWEDISH
UNIT 16
The emphasis in this Unit is on reading, a skill which will be necessary

for your work. It is written in the style typical of Swedish newspaper and
magazine articles. It will be your springboard to newspaper reading in Swe-
dish and should serve as your introduction to further individual study. Each
short essay with its vocabulary list will be treated as a separate item. Notes
on Basic Sentences will be at the end of the entire Unit as usual. We suggest
that you read each article, trans late it and learn the new vocabulary before
listening to the tape.
There are no practices in Unit 16. Instead we suggest the following work
projects:
1. After studying one of the essays, find a supplementary newspaper article

on the same subject (assuming that you have access to Swedish newspapersJ,
read it, and prepare a short talk (one to three minutes) on the topio.
2. Initiate a olassroom discussion based on one of the essays and any addi-
tional reading on the same subjeot.
3. Seleet one essay and make a comparison between its con tent and a corre-
sponding aspeot of the United States; prepare a short briefing on this
comparison.
As you begin, let us point out a few charaoteristics of Swedish newspaper style:
a. A rioher vocabulary than we have introduced, and characteri~d by formal

words and expressions not used in spoken Swedish.
b. An abundance of compound nouns and verbs.
c. The use of supine verb forms without the auxiliaries har, hade.
d. Denna, den instead of den hr, den dr.
Unit 16 493

SWEDISH 494
e. Frequent use of the passive voice.
f. Frequent use of long, embedded sentences.
Uni t 16

SWEDISH
UNI'l' 16
GI imtar frn Sverige av idag
Geograt"i
1. Sverige r det strsia av de fem nor-

2. diska lnderna och det fjrde i Y!-
J. storlek i Europa. Landet r lngt
4. och smalt, nrmare bestmt 160 (svens-

5. kal mi I frn Treri ksrset i norr ti II
6. Smygehuk i sder. Trots att Sverige
7. I igger p samma breddgrad som Alaska
8. och Grnland har det ett mi Idare kl i-

9. mat tack vare Golfstrmmen i Atlanten.
10. * S sent som 15.000 r f.Kr. (fre Kristusl var hela Sverige fortfarande tckt
11. av i s . Isen efterlmnade 96.000 sjar, ett rikt varierande landskap och stora
12. skrgrdar utanfr de lnga kusterna. Enbart i Stockholms skrgrd finns det
13. cirka 26.000 ar.
14. * Sverige har 8,3 miljoner invnare. Folkttheten r dock mycket ojmn. Ungefr
Uni t 16
495

SWEDISH 496
15. 90 procent av befolkningen r bosatt i den sdra hlften av landet. Etniskt
16. * sett var Sverige lnge ett av Europas mest enhetl iga lnder. Den situationen
17. * har emellertid kraftigt frndrats under senare r. Under hgkonjunkturen
18. * p 1960-talet tog Sverige emot ett stort antal Invandrare. Idag utgr de
19. omkring tio procent av befolkningssiffran. Enligt statistiken r frldrarna
~
20. * till tredje barn som fds invandrare.
Glossary (Geografi)
antal -et -0 number, quantity

Atlanten the Atlantia (oaean)
(att) bestmma, 2a (to) deaide, determine
nrmare bestmt more preaisely
bosatt -0 -a
(att) vara bosatt -0 -a (to) live, reside
breddgrad -en -er latitude
dock however, nevertheless
(att) efterlmna, (to) leave behind
eme I I ert i d however, nevertheless
enbart solely, alone
enhetl ig -t -a uniform, homogenous
etnisk -t -a ethnia
folktthet -en 0 population density
(att) fdas, 2a (to) be born
(att) frndra, I (to) ahange (transitive)
(att) frndras, (to) ahange (intransitive)
geografi -n 0 geography
glimt-en-ar glimpse
Golfstrmmen the Gulf Stream
Unit 16

SWEDISH
hlft -en -er half

hgkonjunktur -en -er boom, prosperity
invandrare -n -0 immigrant
invnare -n -0 inhabitant
jmn -t -a even
konjunktur -en -er state of the market, economic situation
kraftig -t -a powerful, substantial
Kristus Christ
kust -en -er coast
mil-n-0 Swedish mile (10 kilometers, approx. six
miles)
mild, milt, milda mild
nordisk -t -a Nordie
nrmare bestmt more precisely
ojmn -t -a uneven
rik -t -a rich
siffr/a -an -or figure, number
situation -en -er situation
s ma I - t - a narY'ow, thin
statistik -en -er statistics
storlek -en -ar size
s ... som as ... as
tack vare thanks (be) to
trots in spite of
(att) tcka, 2b (to) cover
tt -t -a dense, tight
tthet -en -er density
utanfr outside
(att) utgra, -gr, -gjorde, -gjort, 4 (to) constitute
var -t 0 each, every
(att) variera, (to) vary, diveY'sify
y t/a -an -or surface
Unit 16 497

SWEDISH 498
Nrlngsl iv och ekonomi
21. Sverige har rika naturtillgngar. Skog, jrnmalm och vatten har i alla tider
22. varit grunden i den svenska ekonomin och r det fortfarande. Exporten r av
2J. stor betydelse. Den uppgr ti I I 25 procent av Sveriges BNP (bruttonational-
24. produkt). Numera exporteras betydligt fler frdiga produkter n tidigare.
25. Man exporterar bl.a. maskiner, flygplan, bilar, instrument, elektriska och
26. kemiska produkter och tekniskt kunnande. Sveriges strsta kunder r Norden
27. och EG-Inderna (EG - europagemenskapen) . Sverige har varken olja eller kol
28. och mste importera 75 procent av sitt brnsle. Vattenkraften svarar fr
29. 15 procent av energikonsumtionen. Sveriges krnkraftprogram omfattar 12
JO. * reaktorer, 8 frdiga och 4 under byggnad. Efter en folkomrstning betrffande
3l. krnkraften 1980 beslt regeringen, att programmet inte skall utbyggas vidare,
32. och att all krnkraft skall vara avvecklad r 2010.
33. Sveriges ekonomi brukar ibland kallas en blandekonomi. Industrin r huvud-
34. * sakligen privatgd. Av alla industrianstllda arbetar 90 procent den pri-
35. vata sektorn. Staten Ingriper r form av lagstiftning, krediter och stdt-
36. grder.
Unit 16

SWEDISH
3? . Mlsttningen i den ekonomiska politiken r full sysselsttning, regional
38. balans och handelsbalans. Staten deltar aktivt i arbetsmarknadspolitiken,
39. .. speciellt sedan lgkonjunktur och oljekriser skapat problem fr den svenska
40. industrin. Man hller nere arb.etslsheten med 01 ika metoder: genom statl iga
41. beredskapsarbeten, genom att omskola eller vidareutbi Ida anstl Ida eller genom
42. std t i II fretag med ekonomiska problem. Staten blandar sig dremot inte l
43. lnefrhandi ingarna p arbetsmarknaden mel lan arbetstagare och arbetsgivare.
44. En lag om de anstl Idas medbestmmandertt p arbetsplatsen (MBL - medbestm-
45. ma n d e I a g e n) -a n t o 9 s r I977
GLo88ary (Nringsl Iv och ekonomi)
aktiv -t -a active
(att) anstlla, 2a (to) emptoy
en anstlld, tv anstllda empLoyee
(att) an/ta, -tar, -tog, -tagit, 4 (to) adopt; a88ume
arbetsgivare -n -~ empLoyer
arbetslshet -en 0 unempLoyment
arbetsmarknad -en -er Labor market
arbetsplats -en -er plaoe of work
arbetstagare -n -0 employee
(att) avveckla, I (to) disoontinue, ~ind do~n
balans -en -er balance
beredskapsarbete -t -n relief work
(att) be/sluta, -sluter, -slt, (to) decide
-slutit, 4
Unit 16 499

SWEDISH 500
(att) bes tmma, 2a (to) deeide

betrffande -0 -0 eoneerning, with re gard to
betydelse -n -r meaning, signifieanee
betydligt significantly, considerably
(att) blanda, I (to) mix, blend
(att) blanda sig ij (to) interfere, intervene
blandekonomi -n -er mixed economy
brutto gross
bruttonationalprodukten (BNP) gross national product (GNP)
brnsle -t -n fuel
(att) bygga, 2a (to) build
(att) bygga ut j 2a (to) expand
byggnad -en -er building
under byggnad under eonstruation
ekonomisk -t -a eeonomic
elektrisk -t -a electric
energi -n 0 energy
europagemenskapen tEG) European Economie Community (EEC)
flygplan -et -0 airplane
folkomrstning -en -ar referendum
form -en -er form, shape
i form av in the form of
fretag -et -0 corporation
genom att by
grund -en -er foundation, basis
handel -n 0 trade
huvudsak -en -er main thing
huvudsak I igen mainly
industri -n -er industry
(att) in/gripa, -griper, -grep, (to) interfere J intervene
-gripit, 4
instrument -et -0 instrument
jrn -et 0 -z,ron
jrnmalm -en 0 iron ore
kemisk -t -a ehemieal
kol -et -0 eoal
konsumtion -en 0 consumption
Vnit 16

SWEDISH
kraft -en -er power, f01'ce

kredit -en -er oredit
kund -en -er customer
kunnande -t 0 know-how
krnkraft -en 0 nuclear power
lag -en -ar law
lagstiftning -en -ar legislation
lgkonjunktur -en -er dep1'ession, slump
ln -en -er wage~ sala1'Y
maskin -en -er machine, machine1'Y
medbestmmandertt -en -er w01'ke1's' pa1'ticipation right
metod -en -er method
ml -et -0 goal, pU1'pose
mlsttning -en -ar aim~ objective
naturt i I I gng -en -ar natural reSOU1'ce
Norden the N01'dic count1'ies
numera nowadays
nring -en -ar nourishment, sustenanoe
nringsl iv -et -0 trade and indust1'Y, economy
01 ika (plural form) various
(att) omfatta, I (to) include, comp1'ise
(att) omskola (att skola om); (to) 1'etrain
politik -en 0 politics~ polioy
privatg/d -t -da privately owned
problem -et -0 problem
produkt -en -er produot
program -met -0 program
reaktor -n reaktorer 1'eacto1'
regering -en -ar gove1'nment
regional -t -a 1'egional
sedan (conjunction) after, when
sektor -n, sektorer secto1'
(tt) skapa, I - (to) create
( a t t ) s ko 'a o m; (to) retrain
stat -en -er state, gove1'nment
statl ig -t -a (adj.) state~ gove1'nment
(att) stifta, (to) establish, found
std -et -0 SUPP01't
Vnit 16 501

SWEDISH 502
(att) svara, I (to) answer

(att) svara fr; I (to) account for
sysselsttning -en -ar work, empZoyment
teknisk -t -a technicaZ
(att) upp/g, -gr, -gick, -gtt, 4 (to) amount to, reach
latt) utbilda, l (to) educate, train
(att) utbygga (att bygga ut); 2a (to) expand
varken ... eller neither ... nor
vattenkraft -en 0 hydroeZectric power
tgrd -en -er measure, step
(att) ga, 2a (to) own
Vnit 16

SWEDISH
Statsskick och pol itlk
46. Sverige har ett parlamentariskt och representativt statsskick med ett enkammar-
47. system. Kungen har endast representati va p I i kter.
48. '" Allmnna val ger rum vart tredje r. ledaren fr majoritetspartiet blir
49. vanligtvis statsminister och bildar regering. Regeringens medlemmar kallas
50. statsrd och r chefer fr relativt sm departement, varifrn den E.0litiska
51. ledningen utg.!:.. De verkstllande funktionerna dremot utvas av stora centrala
52. mbetsverk.
5J. Typiskt fr svensk pol itik r att svenskarna rstar p ett pol itiskt parti,
54. i nte p en ens k i I d person. Valkampanjen r helt oberoende av ekonomisk hjlp
55. frn den privata sektorn. Partierna fr statliga bidrag j form aven bassumma
56. fr varje parti, ~ ett tillgg fr varje mandat partiet har i riksdagen.
57. Sverige har idag fem pol itiska partier representerade riksdagen:
58. Socialdemokratiska arbetarpartiet (S)} det socialistiska blocket

59. Vnsterpartiet kommunisterna (vpk)
Vnit 16 f>OJ

SWEDISH 504
60. Centern (c)
61. Moderata sam! ingspartlet (m) det borgerl iga blocket
62. Folkpartiet (fp)
Glossary (Statsskick och politik)
allmn -t -na general

bas -en -er base, basis, foundation
bidrag -et -0 subsidy; contribution
(att) bi Ida, I (to) form, establish
block -et -0 bloc
borgerl ig -t -a non-socialist; bourgeois, middle class
centern the center party
central -t -a central
chef -en -er chief, boss
departement -et -0 (government) department
endast only (adverb)
enski l/d -t -da individual, private, separate
folkpartiet the liberal party
funktion -en -er function
hjlp -en 0 help, assistance
(att) kalla, I (to) call
kammare -n, kamrar chamber
kampanj -en -er campaign
kommunist -en -er communist (noun)
kung -en -ar king
ledning -en -ar leadership, management
majoritet -en -er majority
mandat -et -0 (parliament) seat
medlem -men -mar member
moderat -Q.l -a moderate
IJnit 16

SWEDISH
moderata saml i ngsparti et conservative party

oberoende -0 -0 independent
parlamentarisk -t -a parLiamentary
parti -et -er (poLiticaL) party
plikt-en-er duty
plus pLus
po I i t i s k - t - a politicaL
relativt relatively
representant -en -er representative (noun)
representativ -t -a representative (adjective)
(att) representera, (to) represent
riksdag -en -ar Swedish parLiament
(att) rsta p; (to) vote for
samt i ng -en -ar coalition; collection, gathering
socialdemokratisk -t -a sociaL democratic
socialIstisk -t-a socialistic
statsminister -n, statsministrar prime minister
statsrd -et -0 (equivaLent to) member of the cabinet
statsskick -et -0 constitution
summ/a -an -or amount
system -et -0 system
ti Ilgg -et -0 additionaL amount, suppLement; surcharge
(att) ut/g (g ut); -gr, -gick, (to) originate. proceed. emanate
-gtt, 4
(att) utva, (to) carry out. exercise
val -et-0 eLection, choice
verkstllande -0 -0 executive (adjective)
vnsterpartiet left-wing party
(att) ga rum; 2a (to) take pLace
,nbetsverk -et -0 government agency or bureau
Uni t 18 505

SWEDISH 506
Neutra I i tet och frsvar
63. Kort fre frsta vrldskriget proklamerade Sverige sin neutralitet. Sverige
64. hade d inte deltagit i ngot krig sedan Napoleonkrigen 1814 och hllit sig
65. utanfr ~amtl iga all ianser med andra lnder. Denna " a ll iansfrihet i fred med
66. syfte t i l l neutralitet i krig" har sedan dess frblivit en grundprincip i
67. svensk utrikespolitik, omfattad av alla politiska partier.
68. Sveriges neutral itetspol itik har traditionellt varit frbunden med ett starkt
69. frsvar. Landet har allmn vrnpl ikt och hg beredskap. krigstid skulle
70. * armen kunna mobil isera 700.000 man och clvi Ifrsvaret 200.000. Ar 1980 gick
71. ungefr tio procent av BNP ti I I frsvaret.
72. * Strsta delen av den mi I (tra utrustningen ti liverkas i Sverige, men den alltmer
73. avancerade vapenteknologin brjar stlla nstan omjl iga krav p landets ekonomi.
74. Sveriges neutralitetspolitik betyder emellertid inte siktsneutralitet. Sverige
75. deltar mycket aktivt i internationella organisationer, Lex. FN, ven i frgor
76. som inte direkt berr svenska intressen. Nedrustning, koloniernas frigrelse,
77. * staternas sjlvbestmmandertt och mnskl19a rttigheter r ngra av de frgor
78. som speciellt intresserar Sverige.
Unit 16

SWEDISH
79. Svenska trupper har flera gnger deltagit FN:s fredsbevarande uppgifter,
80. t.ex. Kongo, Cypern och Sinai.
Glossa'l'Y (Neutra I i tet och frsvar)
all ians -en -er alliance

alltmer mO'l'e and mor>e
arme -m -er ar>my
avancer/ad -at -ade advanced
beredskap -en r/J pr>epar>edness
(att) berra, 2a (to) concer>n, touch (upon), affect
(att) bevara, I (to) pr>eser>ve, keep, pr>otect
civil-t-a civil, civilian
Cypern Cypr>us
fred -en -er peace, peace time
frigrelse -n r/J liber>ation
frihet -en -er f'l'eedom, libe'l'ty
frg/a -an -or question, issue, matter>
(att) fr/binda, -binder, -band, (to) associate
-bundit, 4
(att) fr/bli -blir, -blev, -blivit, 4 (to) 'l'ema"n
i nternat i one I I -t -a inter>national
intresse -t -n inter>est
(att) intressera, (to) inter>est
ko lon i - n - e r colony
Kongo the Conga
krav -et -0 demand
(att) stlla krav; 2a (to) make demands
krig -et -0 war>
mi I itr -t -a milita'l'Y
(att) mobil isera, (to) mobilize
mnskl ig -t -a human
nedrustning -en 0 disa'l'mament
Uni t 16 507

SWEDISH 508
neutra I i tet -en 0 neutrality

(att) omfatta, I (to) embrace, espouse; include, comprise
organisation -en -er organization, institution
princip -en -er principle
(att) proklamera, (to) proclaim
rttighet -en -er right
samt I i ga (plural) all (the ... )
sedan dess since then
sjlvbestmmandertt -en ~ right to self-determination
sta rk -t -a strong
syfte -t -n purpose, aim, objective
med syfte ti I I (att) with the purpose of ...
teknologi -n 0 technology
(att) ti Ilverka, (to) manufacture
trupp -en -er troop
uppg i f t -en -er tr.sk, assignment; information, statement
utrikespolitik -en 0 foreign policy
utrustning -en -ar equipment; arms
vapen, vapnet, vapen weapon
vrld -en -ar world
vrnpl i kt -en 0 military service
allmn vrnplIkt compulsory military service
sikt -en -er opinion, view
ven also
Unit 16

SWEDISH
Socialpol itik
81. Utomlands kallas Sverige ibland "Vlfrdssverige." Svenskarna sjlva talar
82. .. lite skmtsamt om "folkhemmet." Vad man n kallar det, r det uppenbart att
83. Sverige p al la stt frsker att ge trygghet t sina medborgare och strvar
84. mo t en soc i a I u t j mn i n g
85. Det svenska fol ket betalar hga skatter, speciellt kommunalskatt och mervrdes-
86. skatt p varor och tjnster ("moms"). Skatterna "terbetalas" t i l l skatte-
87. betalarna i form av ett enormt socialfrskringsprogram. Detta omfattar folk-
88. pension, sjukfrskring (ven tandvrd), frldrafrskring, arbetsskadefr-
89. skring och arbetslshetsfrskring m.m. (med mera). Socialpolitiken, svl
90. som skattepolitiken, bidrar t i l l en inkomstutjmning genom bostadsbidrag,
91. studiebidrag, o.s.v. (och s vidare). Ar 1978 gick 33,1% av BNP t i l l social-
92. programmet.
Glossary (Socialpolitik)
(att) bl/dra, -drar, -drog, -dragit, 4 (to) contY'ibute

bostadsbidrag -et -0 housing allowance
enorm -t -a enoY'mous
folkpension -en -er old age pension
Vnit 16 509

SWEDISH 510
frskring -en -ar insurance

frldrafrskring -en -ar parentaZ insurance
inkomst -en -er income
kommunal -t -a local, municipal
med mera (m.m.) etcetera
medborgare -n -0 citizen
mervrdesskatt -en -er value added tax
och s vidare (o.s.v.) etcetera, and so on
sjukfrskring -en -ar health insurance
skad/a -an -or injury, damage
skatt -en -er tax
skattebetalare -n -0 taxpayer
skmtsamt jokingly, in jest
socialpol itik -en 0 social policy
(att) strva mot; I (to) strive for
studiebidrag -et -0 study grant
sv I som as welZ as
stt -et -0 way, manner
p alla stt in every way (possible)
tandvrd -en 0 dental care
tjnst -en -er service, favor, job
trygghet -en 0 security
uppenbar -t -a obvious, evident
utjmning -en -ar equalization
utomlands abroad, overseas
vad ( ... ) n no matter what, whatever
v I frd -en 0 welfare
(att) terbetala, (to) pay back
Uni t 16

SWEDISH
Rel igion
93. Sverige har en luthersk statskyrka. Alla medborgare fds och registreras inom
94. kyrkan. Prsterna r statsanstllda. Svenskarna r kulturellt bundna t i l l
95. kyrkan men deltar sllan aktivt i det kyrkl iga livet.
96. Det finns naturligtvis andra kyrkliga samfund i Sverige, de s.k. (s kallade)
97. frikyrkorna (andra protestantiska kyrkor), de katolska kyrkorna och de
98. rel igisa frsami ingar som etablerats av invandrarna.
Glossary (Rel igion)
(att> etablera, (to) establish

frsami i ng -en -ar parish, congregation
inom within
katolsk -t -a Catholic (adjective)
kultur -en -er culture
kulturell - t - a cuLtural
kyrklig-t-a church (adjective)
liv-et-(/) life
luthersk -t -a Lutheran
protestant -en -er Protestant
protestantisk -t -a Protestant (adjective)
prst -en -er priest, cLergyman
(att) registrera, (to) register
rel igion -en -er religion
rel igis -t -a religious
Unit 16 511

SWEDISH 512
samfund -et -0 denomination

s kall/ad -at -ade (s.k.) so called
s I I an seldom
Unit 18

SWEDISH
Skolor och utbildning
99. I Sverige r det riksdagen och regeringen som utformar skol- och hgskole-
100. politiken. p 1950-talet antogs en omfattande skolreform, som inte bara med-
101. frde frndringar inom skolans struktur utan ocks demokratiserade ett tidi-
102. >I gare elitistiskt inriktat skolsystem. Sedan dess har det fljt en rad vidare
103. reformer.
104. Skolavgifter, skolbcker och sko\\uncher r gratis. ven universitetsavgifterna
105. >I r g r a t i s o c h s t u d e nt e r na ka n f r I i g a s t a t I i g a s t ud i e I n
CZossary (Skolor och utbi Idnlng)
avgift -en -er fee, tuition

(att) demokratisera, democratize, make more democratic
elit-en-er eLite
elitistisk -t-a elitist
frndring -en -ar change
hgskol/a -an -or university
inrikt/ad -at -ad e aimed at, bent on, directed towards
I n -et -0 loan
(att) medfra (fra med); 2a (to) involve, bring about, lead to
omfattande -0 -0 comprehensive, extensive
rad -en -er row, linej series
reform -en -er reform
struktur -en -er atructure, framework
student -en -er (university) student
lJnit 16 513

SWEDISH 514
studieln -et -0 student Z.oan

utb j I dn i ng -en 0 education, tpaining
<att> utforma, l (to) formulate, design, shape
rl ig -t -a yeaply
Vnit 16

SWEDISH
Massmedia
106. I en statistisk underskning som fretogs r 1979 visade det~ att svenskarna
107. var vrldens mest tidningslsande folk. Det finns 150 dagstidningar med en
108. sammanlagd ~ ~ p omkring 4,8 miljoner exemplar. Ett statligt presstd
109. till de mindre tidningarna p en ort gr det mjligt fr dem att klara kon-
110. .. kurrensen, vilket innebr en mer pluralistisk press. F tidningar r parti-
111. anknutna men flera representerar en viss pol itisk inriktning, de flesta en
112. borgerl ig sd\3n.
113. Sveriges Radio AB (pktiebolag) har monopol p radio och TV-sndingar. Detta
114. bolag gs gemensamt av fackfreningarna, industrin och pressen. Chefen och
115. halva styrelsen utses dock av regeringen. Alla TV- och radiogare mste betala
116. .. rl iga I icenser, med vi Ika programmen finansieras. Vi II svensken titta p
117. TV har han bara tv kanaler att vlja p, men i gengld slipper han reklam!
Glossary (Massmedia)
aktie -n -r share 3 stock

an knut/en -et -na (ti I I) tie d t0 linked up with
3
(att) an/knyta, -knyter, -knt, (to) connect. attach

-knutit, 4
Unit 16 515

SWEDISH 516
bolag -et -(/) company, corporation

exemplar -et -0 copy
(att) finansiera, I (to) finance
(att) fre/ta, -tar, -tog, -tagit, 4 (to) undertake, perform, carry out
gemensam -t -ma common, mutual
gemensamt jointly
gengld; i gengld in return
inriktning -en -ar direction, trend
kana I -en -er channel; canal
(att) klara, I (to) cope with, manage
konkurrens -en 0 competition
I icens -en -er License (fee)
massmedl/um -et -a mass medium
monopol -et -0 monopoly
ort -en -er (geographical) place
pluralistisk -t-a pluralistic
press -en (/) press, news
radio -n, radioapparater radio
reklam -en -er advertising
samman lag/d -t -da combined
statistisk -t -a statistical
styrelse -n -r management, board of directors
sdan -t -a on e, such
sndning -en -ar transmission, broadeast
underskning -en -ar examination, study, analysis
upplag/a -an -or edition
(att) ut/se, -ser, -sg, -sett, 4 (to) ehoose, appoint
(att) visa sig; (to) show, become evident, turn out
viss -t -a certain
(att) vlja p; vljer, valde, valt, 4 (to) choose from
gare -n -0 owner
ltit 1.6

SWEDISH
UNIT 16
10. 15.000. For numbers Swedish uses a period when English uses a comma, and a
comma when English uses a period.
Examples: Det finns ungefr 15.000 <femton tusen) samer i norra Sverige.
There are approximately 15,000 Lapps in northern Sweden.
Sverige har omkring 8,3 <tta komma tre} miljoner invnare.

Sweden has about 8.3 million people.
14a. 8,3 mi Ijoner. See Note 10.
14b. Dock. The translation of dock is IIhowever, II but like emellertid it is used
almost exclusively in lL1Y'itten language. The closest spoken Swedish equi-
valents to English IIhowever, but" are men, i alla fall, i vilket fall som helst.
Examples: Drren var lst s vi kunde frst inte komma in. Men George hittade
en nycke l t i! l kksdrren s v i kom i n p det v i set.
The door was locked so we couldn't get in at first. llowever (but),
George found a key to the back door so we got in that way.
Jag tycker inte att det r ndvndigt att du kommer. I vilket fall
som helst be~ver du inte vara dr frrn klockan tta.
I don't think it's necessary for you to come. However (anyway),
you don't have to be there until eight o'clock.
16. Den situationen. In written Swedish, the demonstrative adjectives den {det, de}
and denna {detta, dessa} are more commonly used than den dr <det dr, de dr} and
den hr <det hr, de hr}. The meaning of den (det, de) as a demonstrative adjeo-
tive is the same as den dr (det dr, de dr) -- "that." The meaning of denna
{detta, dessa} is the same as den hr (det hr, de hr) -- "this."
vnit 16 517

SWEDISH 518
Notice that when den (det, de) funations as a demonstrative adjective the definite
ending is added to the noun. (Cf. Unit 13, Note 27.)
17. Emellertid. See Note 14b.
18. 1960-talet. Adding -talet to a decade or a century corresponds to the English

"s" added to the same numbers.
Examples: P 1800-talet.
In (during) the eignteen hundreds (the 19th centuryJ.
P 50-talet.
In (during) the fifties.
Notice the use of the preposition .E! for "in" or "during." (Cf. Unit 11, Point II. J
20. Vart tredje barn. The word varje (every) may not be used before an ordinal
number. Instead var' (vart) is used.
Examples: Vi far p landet varje sommar.

We go to the countryevery summer.
Var tredje mnad betalar jag min frskring.

Every three months (every third month) I pay my insurance.
Notice that the English "every + cardinal number + noun in the plural has to
be expressed in Swedish with varet) + ordinal number + noun in the singular.
The expression "every two .,. (every other)" is varannan (vartannat).
Examples: Jag arbetar varannan vecka. Vi ker ti I l Sverige vartannat r.

I work every other week. We go to Sweden every other year.
Unit 16

SWEDISH
30a. Reaktorer. There is a ehange of stress in the plural form of multi-syllable

third deelension nouns ending in -or.
Examples: reaktor reaktorer reaetor

do ktor doktorer doetor
professor profess~rer professor
motor motorer motor, engine
30b. Frdiga. See Unit 15, Note 13.
34. I ndustr ianst lida. Anst I I d is a past particip le used as a noun and therefore
takes the same endings as an adjective:
Singular Plural
Indef. form en anstlld (tv> anstllda
Def. form den an st I I da de anst I I da
ef. Unit 15, Note 15.
39. Skapat problem. In a subordinate clause, written Swedish often leaves out the
auxiliaries har and hade in the present perfeet and past perfeet tenses, using
only the supine form of the main verb. This is a usage that you should become
familiar with since it may otherwise ereate difficulty in translations. Note,
however, that har and hade may not be left out in a main cZause.
45. Ar 1977. Written Swedish often uses the word r before numbers indieating a
year. In spoken Swedish years are usualZy expressed without the word r and
aZways without a preposition.
Examples: Ulf r fdd 1945.

Ulf was born in 1945.
(Ar> 1969 landade mnniskan p mnen.

In 1969 man landed on the moon.
Unit 16 519

SWEDISH 520
Lena kom till Amerika i januari 1981.

Lena came to Amepica in Januapy ~ 1981.
48. Vart tredje r. See Note 20.
70. 700.000 man. The plupal fopm of man is mn in most cases. However, the plupal
fopm man is found in the context of militapy manpower, or labor force.
Example: Besttningen bestr av 300 man.

The cpew consists of 300 men (and women).
72. A I I tmer. The wopd a I I t is some times used befope the compapative form of an
adjective op an advepb with the meaning "mope and mope. "
Examples: Bi larna bl ir allt mindre med ren.

The caps get smallep and smallep ovep the yeaps.
Den vetenskap I iga utveckl ingen gr allt fortare framt.

Scientific development advances mope and mope papidly.
Allt is sepapated fPom the compapative fopm of the adjective OP adverb except
fop in the combination with the advepb mer.
77 De f r g o r s o m .. S e e Un i t 1 5, No t e 65
82. Vad man n kallar det. Vad n has the meaning "whatevep, no mattep what," and
should not be confused with vad som helst (anything at all).
Vem n no mattep who, whoevep Vem som helst anyone (at all)
Vad n no mattep what, whatevep Vad som helst anything (at all)
Var n no mattep whepe, whepevep Var som helst anywhepe (at all)
ZJn.it 16

SWEDISH
Note that inte before vem (vad, var) som helst conveys the meaning "not just
anybody (anything, anywhereJ."
87. Detta. See Nate 16.
98a. De rel igisa frsami ingar som See Unit 15, Note 65.
98b. Som etablerats. See Note 39.
99. Hgskolepolitiken. It is important to note that hgskola means "university"

and not "high school," which is best translated as Swedish gymnasi/um -et -er.
102. Har det fljt. Se Unit 14, Note 32.
105. Studenterna. The Swedish word student usually refers to one studying at a
university. More general ly a person pursuing some kind of non-university study
is referred to as elev -en -er.
110. Vilket innebr. The relative pronoun vi Iket must be used when it refers to
a whole clause. The relative pronoun som can only refer to nouns, proper names,
and pronouns.
116a. Med vi Ika. In this relative claus e vi Ika has replaced som, because a preposition
precedes the relative pronoun and som can never be preaeded by a preposition.
Som must always introduce the relative olause. When a preposition preoedes the
relative pronoun, vi Iket <vi Ike T , vi Ika) must be used. However, in spoken
Swedish it is much more common to use som with the preposition at the end of
the clause.
Unit 16 521

SWEDISH 522
Examples: Gatan som jag bor p r mycket smal.

Gatan p vi Iken jag bor r mycket smal.
The stpeet which I live on is vepy naprow.
Dessa problem, som de har talat s mycket om, mste lsas.

Dessa problem, om vilka de har talat s mycket, mste lsas.
These problems, which they have spaken so much about, must be solved.
116b. Vi II svensken titta p TV (Om svensken viii titta p TV - If the Swede wants to
watch TV). In this conditional clause the conjunction om {if} has been left
out and the subject-vepb opdep is pevepsed. This is a sentence stpuotupe you
should try to beoome familiar with sinoe it is used to a gpeat extent in news-
paper wpiting and since it may present some difficulty in the translation unless
you are aWare of it.
Example: Ska TV-programmen frbttras mste I icenserna hjas.

If the TV ppogpams are to be improved the lioense fees must be paised.
lJnit 16

SWEDISH
WORD l-IST
Swedish
A
absolut absoZuteZy 8
accent -en -er stress~ stress marker 11
adjeKtiv -et -fl> adjective 11
adj good-bye 1
adress -en -er address 2
advokat -en -er tawyer J
affr -en -er store, shop 8
Afrika Afriaa 11
afton -en, aftnar evening~ eve 15
aftonklnning -en -ar evening gown 8
aktie -n -r share~ stock 16
aktiv -t -a aative 16
aldrig never 3
all, allt, alla aLl 5
aI I - t - a m j I 19 - t - a all possible, aLL kinds of 11
Word List 523

SWEDISH 524
Swedish English Uni t
alldeles completely 5
allemansrtt -en 0 right to access 14
all ians -en -er allianee 16
a Ilmn -t -na generat 16
a I I ra very (in front of the supert. 9

form of an adj.)
a I Is at all 1
a I It id always 3
a I I t i ng everything 13
a I I tme r more and more 16
almanack/a -an -or ealendar 12
ambassad -en -er embassy 1
ambassadr -en -er ambassador 7
Amerika America 3 the Uni ted States 2
amerikan -en -er American (man) 9
amerikanare -n -0 American (man) 11
amerikansk -t -a American (adj.) 3
amerikansk/a -an -or American (woman) 11
amerikanska ambassaden the American Embassy~ 1

Word List

SWEDISH
Swedish EngLish Unit
andra (the) other, others; second 4, 7

See annan
(att) anfrtro, 3 (to) confide, entl'ust 15
an knut/en -et -na (ti II) tied to, Linked up with 16
(att) an/knyta, -knyter, -knt, -knutit, (to) connect, attach

-knuT/en -et -naj 4
ankomST -en -er al'l'ivaL 13
(atT) anlnda, 2a (to) al'rive 12
annan, annat, andra other; eLse 2, 8
annandag -en -~r second day (of Ch~i8tma8 and 15

Easter)
annars otherwise
annons -en -er advertisement 5
(att) an/se, -ser, -sg, -sett, (to) think, be of the opinion, 9

-sedd, -sett, -sedda; 4 l'egal'd
(att) anstlla, 2a (to) empLoy
en anstlld, tv anstllda employee 16
ansvar -et -0 l'esponsibi U ty 14
(att) an/ta, -tar, -tog, -tagit, (to) adopt; assume 16

-tag/en -et -naj 4
Word List 525

SWEDISH 526
Swedish English Vnit
antagl igen pr'obably 12
antal -et -0 number, quantity 16
antingen .,. eller either ... Or' 4
(att) anvnda, 2a (to) use 8
ap r i I April 5
aprop (det) by the way 10
arabiska -n 0 Arabic (language) 11
(att) arbeta, (to) work 3
arbetare -n -0 worker 15
arbete -t -n wOr'k 10
arbetsgivare -n -0 employer 16
arbetskamrat -en -er colleague 12
arbetslshet -en 0 unemployment 16
arbetsmarknad -en -er labor market 16
arbetsmarknadsstyrelsen (AMS) Labor Mar'ket Board 15
arbetsplats -en -er place of work 16
arbetstagare -n -0 employee 16
arg -t -a angry Pron. Guide
Word List

SWEDISH
arme -n -er army 16
artig -t -a polite 12
artikel -n, artiklar article 15
arton eighteen 1
artonde eighteenth 7
ask -en -ar box 12
askfat -et -0 ashtray 7
Atlanten The Atlantic (ocean) 16
att to (inf. marker); that (conj.) l, 2
attache -n -er attache 12
augusti August 5
(att) avancera, (to) advance
avancer/ad -at -ade advanced 16
av of 2
(att) aV/bryta, -bryter, -brt, -brutit (to) interrupt, break off 15

-brut/en -et -na; 4
avdelning -en -ar department 8
avgift -en -er fee, tui tian 16
Word List 52?

SWEDISH 528
Swedish English Unit
avgng -en 0 departure (time) 13
(att) avveckla, (to) discontinue, wind down 16
Word List

SWEDISH
(att) bada, (to) bathe, take a bath, go 12

swimming
(att) bada bastu; (to) take a sauna 12
badrum -met -0 bath!'oom 5
bagage -t 0 baggage, luggage 13
(att) baka, (to) bake 5
bakom behind 12
bal -en -er ball (dance) 15
balans -en -er balance 16
bank -en -er bank 4
bar -en -er ba!' 10
bara jus t, only 1
barn -et -0 ahild 5
barnvakt -en -er baby-sitter 15
bas -en -er base, basis, foundation 16
bastu -n -r sauna 12
(att) bada bastu; (to) take a sauna 12
(att) be, ber, bad, bett, 4 (to) ask, request 9
Word List 529

SWEDISH 530
befolkning -en -ar population 13
begv/ad -at -ade gifte d 11

sprkbegv/ad -at -ade (to) have a gift for languages 11
(att) be/hlla, -hller, -hll, -hllit, (to) keep 11

-hll/en -et -na; 4
(att) behva, 2a (to) need 5
beige -t -a beige 8
bekvm -t -a comfortable 5
belgier -n -0 Belgian (man) :3
ben -et -0 bane; leg Pron. Guide
(att) bereda, 2a (to) pl'epare
beredskap -en -er preparedness~ readiness 16
beredskapsarbete -t -n relief work 16
berg -et -0 mountain Pron. Guide
beroende -0 -0 dependent
(att> bertta, (to) tell 3
berm/d -t -da famouB 4
(att) berra, 2a (to) concern, affect 16
(att) be/skriva, -skrIver, -skrev, -skrivit, (to) describe 5

-skriv/en -et -na; 4
Word List

SWEDISH
beskrivning -en -ar descT'iption 15
(att) be/sluta, -sluter, -slt, -slutit, (to) decide 16

-slut/en -et -na; 4
(att) be/st (av); -str, -stod, -sttt, (to) consist (of) 16

-sHdd, -sttt, -stdda; 4
(att) bestl la, 2a 2
(att) bestmma, 2a (to) deaide~ determine 16

nrmare bestmt mOT'e precisely 16
besvik/en -et -na disappointed 13
besvrl ig -t -a troublesome 14
besttning -en -ar crew 16
besk -et -0 visit 14
(att) betala, (to) pay 8
betrffande -0 -0 conaerning. with regard to 16
(att) betyda, 2a (to) mean 15
betydelse -n -r meaning~ significance 16
betyd I i gt significantly~ considerably 16

(att) beundra, (to) admire 15
(att) bevara, (to) pT'eserve~ keep~ proteat
bibliotek -et-0 library 4

Word List ~31

SWEDISH 532
(att) bi/dra, -drar, -drog, -dragit, (to) contr>ibute 16

-drag/en -et -na; 4
bidrag -et -0 subsidy; contr>ibution 16
bil-en-ar ear>, automobile; cab 2
(att) bilda, (to) [or>m; establish 16
bi Ijett -en -er ticket 10
biljon-en-er 1
billig - t - a inexpensive, cheap 11
(att) binda, binder, band, bundit, (to) bind, tie 13, 15

bund/en -et -na; 4
bio -n 0 movies 12
(att) bita, biter, bet, bitit, (to) bite 13

bit/en -et -na; 4
b i tt i ear>ly (in the morning) 7
(att) bjuda, bjuder, bjd, bjudit, (to) invite 12

bjud/en -et -na; 4 invited 13
(att) bjuda p; 4 (to) offer> 12
bjudning -en -ar party 12
bland among 14
bland andra (bl.a.) among othel's 15
Word List

SWEDISH
bland annat (bl.a.) among other things 15
(att) blanda, (to) mix, blend
(att) blanda sig i; (to) interfere~ intervene 16
blandekonomi -n -er mixed economy 16
blankett -en -er form 13
(att) bli, blir, blev, blivit, 4 (to) become, be 1
block-et-0 bloc 16
blombukett -en -er bouquet of flowers 12
bJomm/a -an -or j10w81" 12
(att) blomma, (to) blossom 14
bl, bltt, bla blue 4
(att) bo, 3 (to) live, reside 2
bok -en, bcker book 3
bokhy II /a -an -or bookcase 7
bolag -et -0 company, corporation 16
bomu I I -en 0 cotton 8
bonde -n, bnder farmer Pron. Guide
bord -et -0 table 5

t i II bords to the table, at the table 12
Word List 533

SWEDISH 534
bordsdam -en -er table partner (lady) 12
bordsplacering -en -ar seating arrangement 12
borgerl ig -t -a non-socialist; bourgeois, 16

middle class
(att) borsta, (to) brush 9
borst/e -en -ar brush
bort; borta away (motion); 8

away (stationary)
bosatt -0 -a; (att) vara bosatt (to) live, reside 16
bostad -en, bostder residence 15
bostadsbidrag -et -0 housing allowance 16
bostadsomrde -t -n residentiaI area 15
bra -0 -0 ; fine, good, well; 1

bttre, bst better, best 9
bras/a -an -or (open) fire 12
bred, brett, breda wide 4
breddgrad -en -er latitude 16
bredvid beside, next to 12
brev -et -0 letter Pron. Guide
Word List

SWEDISH
(att) brinna, brinner, brann, brunnit, 4 (to) burn (intr.) 13
(att) brista, brister, brast, brustit, (to) burst (intr.) 13

brust/en -et -naj 4
bror, brodern, brder brother 2
(att) bruka, (to) usually (do something)~ 3~ 7

be in the habit of
brun -t -a browrC" 8
bruna bnor baked beans 9
brunn -en -ar well Pron. Guide
brutto gross 16
bruttonationalprodukt -en -er (BNP) gross national produat (GNP) 16
(att) bry sig om; 3 (to) care about 10
brygg/a -an -or dock 14
(att) bryta, bryter, brt, brutIt, (to) break 13

brut/en -et -na; 4
brytning -en -ar accent 11
brdsk/a -an 0 rush, hurry 9
brnsle -t -n fuel 16
brd -et 0 bread 1

bukett -en -er bouquet 12
Word List 535

SWEDISH 536
bull/e -en -ar bun 9
buss -en -ar bus 1
by -n -ar vi llage 11
(att) bygga, 2a (to) build
(att) bygga ut; 2a (to) expand 16
byggnad -en -er building 9

under byggnad under construction 16
(att) byta, 2b (to) change 13
byte -t -n change 13
by tt/a -an -or jar Pron. Guide
byxor (plur.) pants 8
bda both 8
bde ... och both ... and 11
bt -en -ar boat 2
bnk -en -ar bench; row of seats 5~ 10
br -et -0 berT'Y 14
(att) bra, br, bar, burit, (to) carT'Y, wear 1 3~ 15

bur/en -et -naj 4
(att) bra sig t; 4 (to) behave 14
Word List

SWEDISH
Swedish EngZish Unit
bst best; See bra J

(att) tycka bst ami 2b (to) prefer 3
bttre better; See bra 9
bn/a -an -or bean 9

bruna bnor baked beans 9
br, borde, bort, 4 ought to 10, 13
(att) brja, (to) begin J
Word List 537

SWEDISH 538
SlJedish English Uni t
(att) campa, (to) camp PY'on. Guide
cancer -n (/) canceY' PY'on. Guide
cape -n -r cape PY'on. Guide
cell-en-er cell PY'on. Guide
Celsius centigY'ade 11
centern the centeY' paY'ty 16
central -t -a centY'al
Centralen (C) CentY'al station 13
centrum -et, centra centeY' (of tOlJn) 8
champagne -n (/) champagne PY'on. Guide
chans -en -er chance 9
charmant -(/) -a excellent 12
charmig -t -a chaY'ming J quaint 4
charter chaY'teY' 11
check -en -ar check 15
chef -en -er chief, boss 16
choklad -en (/) chocolate 12
WOY'd List

SWEDISH

chokladask -en -ar box of can dy 12
cigarr -en -er cigar J
cigarrett -en -er cigarette J
cirka circa, about 16
citron -en -er lemon Pron. Guide
civi I -t -a oivil, oiviZian 18
cockta i I -en -s cocktail 12
college -t -0 college 12
Cypern Cyprus 16
cykel -n, cyklar bicycle Pron. Guide

(att) cykla, (to) ride a bike, bicycle 12
Word List 539

SWEDISH 540
Swediah EngLish Unit
dag -en -ar day l, 2

om dagen a day ?
Dagens Nyheter Daily News (Sw. newspaper) 1
dagg -en 0 dew Pl'on. Guide
dags; hur dags at what time 12

det r dags it is time 15
dam -en -er lady 8
Danmark Denmark 11
dans -en -er dance, dancing 15
(att) dansa, (to) dance
dansk -en -ar Dane (man) 11
dansk -t -a Danish (adj.) 11
dansk/a -n 0 Danish (lang.) 11
dansk/a -an -or Dane (woman) 11
de they; the (modif. pLur. words) 2, ?
december December 5
dekoration -en -er decoration 15
(att) dekorera, (to) decorate 15
Word Lis t

SWEDISH
SuJedish English Unit
del -en -ar part 4

en del some, a feuJ 15
(att) del/ta, -tar, tog, -tagit, 4 (to) par-ticipate 15
delvis partially 5
dem them 2
(att) demokratisera, (to) democratize, make 16

democratic
demonstration -en -er demonstration 15
den it (ref. to en uJords); 2

the (modif. en uJords)
den dr, det dr; de dr that; those 4
den hr, det hr; de hr this; these 2
denna, detta, dessa this; these 9
densamma, detsamma, desamma the same 8
departement -et -0 (government) department 16
deras -~ -0 their, theirs 5
dessfrinnan befor-e then 12
dessutom besides 5
det it; the (modif. ett words) 1
detalj -en -er detail 15

Word Lis t 541

SWEDISH 542
dig you (sing. obj. form) 1
din, ditt, dina your, yours (sing.) 2
direkt -0 -a direct 2
diskmaskin -en -er dishwasher 5
(att) diskutera, (to) discuss, have a discussion 12
dit; dr there (motion); 8

the re (stationary)
djur -et -0 animal 14
dock however 16
doktor -n, dokt~rer doctor, physician 12, 16
domkyrk/a -an -or cathedral 4
dotter -n, dttrar daughter 2
(att) dra(ga), drar, drog, dragit, (to) draw, puH 13

drag/en -et -naj 4
dramatisk -t -a dY'amatic 10
(att) dricka, dricker, drack, druckit, (to) drink 1

druck/en -et -naj 4
dricks -en 0 tip 9
(att) driva, driver, drev, drivit, (to) drive (not a vehicLe) 13

driv/en -et -na; 4
Word List

SWEDISH
(att) drja, 2a (to) last~ lingep 13
du you (sing.) 1
(att) duga, duger, dg, duglt, 4 (to) do, sepve, be Buitable 13
(att) duka, (to) set the table 12
duk/ad -at -ade set (past papt.) 12
duktig -t -a good, effeotive, competent 7
dygn -et -0 24 houps 11
dyr -t -a expensive 5
d then, at that time; since; 2, 12

when
dl i9 -t -a, smre, smst bad; less good, least good 9
d l i 9 -t -a, vrre, vrst bad, wopse, wopst 9
dr whepe (pel.) 13
d r; dit thepe (stationapy) 1, 8

thepe (motion)
dremellan in between 15
dremot on the othep hand 12
drfr att because 8
(att) d, dr, dog, dtt, (to) die 13

dd, dtt, dda; 4
Word List 543

SWEDISH 544
(att) dlja, dljer, dolde, dolt, (to) aonaeat 13

dol/d -t -da; 4
drr -en -ar door 7
Word List

SWEDISH
efter af ter 10
(att) efterlmna, (to) teave behind 16
eftermiddag -en -ar afternoon 4

i eftermiddag this afternoon 4
i eftermiddags this afternoon (past) 11
efterrtt -en -er dessert 9
eftersom since B
eftertrdare -n -0 successor ?
eftert afterwards 14
egen, eget, egna own 11
egentl igen reat ly, actuaLty ;3
ekonomi -n 0 economy 14, 16
ekonomisk -t -a economic 16
eld -en -ar fire, bonfire 15
elektricitet - en QJ electricity 5
elektrisk -t -a etectric 16
elev -en -er student, pupit 9, 16
e I f te eZeventh 7
Word List 545

SWEDISH 546
el it -en -er elite 16
elitistisk -t-a elitist 16
or ;)
e I I er
eller hur don't you, isn't it, etc. 8
elva eleven 1
emedan because 8
emellertid however, neveT'theles8 16
en a, an, one 1
enbart solely, alone 16
enda only (adj.) :3
endast only (adv.) 16
energi -n 0 eneT'gy 16
energisk -t -a eneT'getic 9
engelsk -t -a English (adj.) 11
engelsk/a -an 0 English (lang.) 11
engelsk/a -an -or Englishwoman 11
engelsman -nen, engelsmn Englishman 11
England England 11
Word List

SWEDISH
enhetl ig - t -a uniform, homogenouB 16
enkel -t, enkla simple 9
enkelhet -en 0 simpliaity 12

i all enkelhet nothing fanay 12
en I i gt aaaording to 11
enorm - t -a enormous 16
enski l/d -t -da individual, private, separate 16
entusiastisk -t -a enthusiastia 15
er you (plur. obj. form) 2
er, ert, era your, yours (plur.) 5
(att) etablera, (to) es tab Hs h 16
etnisk -t -a ethnia 16
ett a, an, one 1
Europa Europe 11
Europagemenskapen (EG) the European Economic Community 16

(EEC)
exempe I, exemp I et, -0 examp le 15
t i II exempel (t.ex.) for example 15
exemplar -et -0 copy 16
expedit -en -er clerk, salesperson 8
Word List 547

SWEDISH 548
export -en -er export 11
(att) exportera, (to) export 11
flord List

SWEDISH
fackfrening -en -ar union 15
fall-et-0 case 14
i a I Ia f a I I in any case 14
i s fall in such a case~ i f so 15
(att) falla, faller, fll, fallit, (to) fall 13

fa I I len -et -na; 4
fami Ij -en -er family 3
fantastisk -t -a fantastic 9
far, fadern, fder father :3
(att) fara, far, for, farit, 4 (to) go, travel 3
farbror, -n, farbrder uncle (paternal) :3
farfar, farfadern, farfder grandfather (paternal) :3
f a r I i g -t -a dangerous 14
det r inte s farligt it's not too bad 14
fartyg -et -0 ship J
fastia -an -or fast, Lent 15
faster -n, fastrar aunt (paternal) J
fast(n) although 12
(att) fatta, (to) grasp, understand 11
Word Lis t 549

SWEDISH 550
Swedish lin i t
februari FebruaY'Y 5
felstav/ad -at -ade misspelled 15
fem five 1
f emt e fifth 7
femtio fifty 1
femton fifteen 1
femtonde fifteenth 7
fest -en -er party 12
tick/a -an -or pooket 13
file -n -er filet 9
f i I m -en - er film, movie 10
fin -t -a fine 4
(att) finansiera, (to) finance 16
finger, fingret, fingrar finger PY'on. Guide
Finland Finland 11
finlndare -n -0 Finn 11
(att) finna, finner, fann, funnit, (to) lind 12

tunn/en -et -aj 4
(att) finna varandraj 4 (to) hit it off (togethep) 12

Word List

SWEDISH
Swedish English U1. i t
(att) finnas, finns, fanns, funnits; 4 (to) be found, exist 1

det finns there is (are) 1
finsk -t -a Pinnish (adj.) 11
f i nsk/a -an 0 Pinnish (lang.) 11
f insk/a -an -or Pinn (waman) 11
(att) fira, (to) celebrate 15
fisk -en -ar fish 9
fjorton fouY'teen 1
fjortonde fourteenth ?
fjrde fouY'th ?
f lagg/a -an -or flag 14
f I ask/a -an -or bottle 14
fler(al, flest mOY'e, most; See mnga 9
flera several 3
f I i c k/ a - a n - o r girl 2
flyg -et -0 plane, flight 2
(att) flyga, flyger, flg, flugit, 4 (to) fly 8
flygplan -et -0 aiY'plane 16
(attl flyta, flyter, flt, flutit, 4 (to) float 13, 14

Word List 551

SWEDISH 552
Swedish Engli!!.Ji Unit
flytande -Ql -Ql floating, fluently 14
(att) flytta, (to) move 5
folk -et -Ql people 11
folkdrkt -en -er national eostume 15
folkomrstning -en -ar referendum 16
folkpartiet the liberal party 16
fol kpension -en -er old age pension 16
folktthet -en Ql population density 16
form -en -er form, shape 16

i form av in the form of 16
forme II -t -a formal 12
fort fast (adv.) 9
fortfarande still 3
(att) fort/stta, -stter, -satte, -satt, (to) continue 13

-satt, -satt, -satta; 4
fot -en, ftter foot Pron. Guide

till fots on foot 12
fotografi -et -er photo 3
fram; framme there (motion) 8

there (stationary) 8
Word List

SWEDISH
(att) g fram ti I I; 4 (to) go (waZk) up to 12
framfr in front of
framme; f ram there (stationary) 8

there (motion) 8
framt forward 16
Frankrike France 11
fransk -t -a F't'ench (adj.) 11
fransklo -an r!J French (lang.) 11
fransman -nen, fransmn F't'enc hman 11
fransysk/a -an -or Frenchwoman 11
fred -en -er peace, peace time 16
fredag F'l'iday 3
fri -tt -a free B
frigrelse -n -r liberation 16
frihet -en -er freedom, liberty 16
frisk -t -a fresh, healthy, weLL 9
fru -n -ar Mrs; wife 1

frukost -en -ar breakfast 1
Word List 553

SWEDISH 554
S!J)edish English [)nit
(att) frysa, fryser, frs, frusit, (to) be aoLd, freeze 13

frus/en -et -na; 4
frysbox -en -ar freezer 5
frg/a -an -or question, iS8ue, matter 9. 16
(att> frga, (to) ask 4
frn from 2
frmst foremost 12
frst och frmst first of alL 12
frk/en -en -nar Miss; (addres8 to !J)aitres8 1

or saZesgirZ)
full-t-a fu l-l 13
fu I I satt -0 -a fiLled. all seats taken 13
(att> fungera, (to) funation, !J)ork
funktion -en -er funation 16
(att> fylla, 2a (to) fi l-l 15
{att> fylla i i 2a (to) filL out
{att> fylla r; 2a (to) beaome oLder in years 2
fyra four 1
fyrtio fort y 1
f, frre 9
Word List

SWEDISH
<att) f, fr, fick, ftt, 4 (to) be allowed to, may; get, l, 10

receive; have to
<att) f ivg; 4 (to) get (someone) to leave 12
(att) f syn p; 4 (to) catch sight of, spot 14
ftlj -en -er armchair 5
frdig -t -a ready 8, 10
frdig/sydd, -sytt, -sydda ready-made 8
frg -en -er color 8
frggrann -t -a colorful 15
frj/a -an -or ferry 4
frsk -t -a fresh 9
<att) fdas, 2a (to) be bOl'n 16
fdd, ftt, fdda born 11
(att) flja, 2a (to) follow 2
<att) flja med; 2a (to) go (come) along, aacompany 2
fnster, fnstret, -Ql window 7
fr for (prep.); because, for S, 8, 12

(conj.J; too
fr att to, in order to 4
Word List 555

SWEDISH 556
fr .. , sedan aga J
(att) fra, 2a (to) escort 12
(att) frbereda, 2a (to) prepare 15
frberedelse -n -r preparation 15
frbi by, past 10
(att) frbi/g, -gr, -gick, -gtt, (to) pass over, skip, neglect 15
-gng/en -et -nai 4
(att) fr/binda, -binder, -band, -bundit, (to) associate 16

-bund/en -e1 -nai 4
(att) fr/bli, -blir, -blev, -blivit, 4 (to) remain 16
(att) frbttra, (to) improve 16
fre before (prep.) 10
(att) fre/dra, -drar, -drog, -dragit, (to) prefer 7

-drag/en -et -nai 4
fredrag -et -I/> lee ture 9
(att) frena, (to) unite
fren/ad -at -ade united 11
Frenta Nationerna (FN) the Uni ted Nations (U. N. ) 11
Frenta Staterna the United States 11
Word List

SWEDISH
(att) fre/sl, -slr, -slog, -slagit, (to) Buggest 14

-slag/en -et -na
frestllning -en -ar performance, show 10
(att) fre/ta, -tar, -tog, -tagit, (to) undertake, perform, carry 16

-tag/en -et -nai 4 out
fretag -et -0 corporation, bu~ine8s 12, 16
frhand I j ng -en -ar negotiation 15
(att) frklara, (to) explain 15
(att) frlova sig (med>; I (to) get engaged (to) 10
frlt pardon, excuse me 2
(att) fr/lta, -lter, -lt, -ltit, (to) forgive 13

-lt-en -et -nai 4
frmiddag -en -ar morning (10-12 a.m.) 11

I frmiddags this morning (pas t) 11
frort -en -er Buburb Pron. Guide
frr before. earlier Pron. Guide
frra last
frresten anyway. besides 12
frrgr; I frrgr the day before yesterday 10
frrn; l nte frrn not until 9
Word List 557

SWEDISH 558
frsami ing -en -ar parish, congregation 16
frsen/ad -at -ade late, delayed 12
frslag -et -0 suggestion, proposition 9
frst first 4
frst och frmst first of aH 12
(att) fr/st, -str, -stod, -sttt, (to) understand 1

-st/dd -tt -dda; 4
frsts of cours e 12
frsvar -et -0 defense 12
(att) frsvinna, frsvinner, frsvann, (to) disappear 13

frsvunnit, frsvunn/en -et -aj 4
frskring -en -ar insurance 16
frsk -et -0 attempt Pron. Guide
(att) frska, 2b (to) try 10
frtjusande -0 -Ql lovely, delightful 12
frtjust -0 -a delighted 15
fr Ider -n, fr I drar paren t J
frldrafrskring -en -ar paren ta l insurance 16
(att) frndra, (to) change (trans.) 16
Word List

SWEDISH
(att) frndras, (to) change (intl'.) 16
frndring -en -ar change 16
WO'l'd List 559

SWEDISH 560
gaffel -n, gafflar fOPk 9
gammal -t, gamla; ldre; ldst old; olde'1'; oldest 3. 9

(att) bli gammal; 4 (to) get old 3
ganska rather > quite 4
(att) garantera, (to) guarantee 9
garderob -en -er closet 5
gas -en -er gas (not gasolinej 5
gat/a -an -or stpeet 4
gatuhrn -et -0 stpeet copne'1' 15
(att) ge, ger, gav, gett, 4 (to) give 1

gemensam -t -ma common. mutual 16
gemensamt jointly 16
genast right away 9
generation -en -er gene'1'ation 13
geners -t -a genepouB Pron. Guide

gengld; gengld in return 16
genom through 4
genom att by 16
Word List

SWEDISH
Swedish EngLish U1.i t
geograf i -n 0 geography 16
(att) gifta sig (med); 2b (to) marry 10
(att) gilla, (to) like Pron. Guide
glad, glatt, glada glad, happy, merry 14
glas -et -0 glass 1
glass -en 0 ice cream 13
(att) glida, glider, gled, glidit, 4 (to) glide, slide 13
glimt -en -ar glimpse 16
(att) gldja, glder, gladde, glatt, 4 (to) make happy, please 13
(att) gldja sig t; 4 (to) look forward to, be happy 10

about
glgg -en 0 hot, spiced wine served at 15

Christmas
(att) glmma, 2a (to) forget 10
(att) gnata, (to) nag Pron. Guide

(att) gnida, gi:lider, gned, gnidit, (to) rub 13
gnid/en -et -na; 4
gnist/a -an -or spark Pron. Guide

(att) gnola, (to) hum Pron. Guide
(att) gngga, (to) neigh Pron. Guide
Word List 561

SWEDISH 562
Swedish Urti t
god, gott, goda; bttre; bst good; better>; best 1~ 9

godare; godast
var s god<a> her>e you ar>e 1
goddag hello 1
godhjrt/ad -at -ade good-hear>ted 12
godsak -en -er sweets~ "goodies" 15
Gol fstrmmen the Gulf Str>eam 16
golv -et -0 floor> 5
goss/e -en -ar young boy 15
grad -en -er degr>ee 11
gran -en -ar spr>uce 15
grann/e -en -ar neighbor> 13
gratis -!/J -0 fr>ee of char>ge 11
grej -en -er thing~ gadget 13
grek -en -er Gr>eek (man) 11
grekisk -t -a Gr>eek (adj.) 11
grekisk/a -an 0 Gnek (lang.) 11

grekisk/a -an -or Gr>eek (woman) 11
Grekland Gr>eece 11
Wor>d List

SWEDISH
(att) gripa, griper, grep, gripit, (to) seize, grasp 13

grip/en -et -na; 4
grund -en -er foundation, basis 16
grupp -en -er group 15
gryn -et -0 grain 15
gr, grtt, gra gray 4
(att) grta, grter, gr/H, grtit, 4 (to) al'Y~ weep 13
grdde -n 0 cream 15
grn -t -a green 8
Grnland Greenland 16
grnsak -en -er vegetable 9
grt -en 0 porridge, hot aereal 15
gubb/e -en -ar old man 7

lilla gubben sweetie, dear 7
gul -t -a yellow 8
gumm/a -an -or old lady 7

I i Ila gumman Bweetie, dear 7
gummi -t 0 rubber 13
gymnasi/um -et -er Swedish high school 16

gymnastik -en 0 gymnastics Pron. Guide
Word List 563

SWEDISH 564
Swedish Un1: t
(att) g, gr, gick, gtt, 4 (to) walk, go; leave; be 1, 9, 11

possible, work out
(att) g fram ti II; 4 (to) go (walk) up to 12
(att) g frbi; 4 (to) pass, walk past 15
en gende, tv gende pedestrian 3
gng -en --er time, occasion 2
grd -en -ar farm; yard 3, 15
gs -en, gss goose Pron. Guide
(att) glla, 2a (to) apply, be the case 12
grnaj hellrej helst gladly, with pleasure; ~athe~; 2, 9

preferably
gst -en -er guest 9
(att) gmma sigj 2a (to) hide (oneseZ!J 10
(att) gra, gr, gjorde, gjort, (to) do, make 2

gjord, gjort, gjordaj 4
det gr detsamma it doesn't matte~ 12
Word List

SWEDISH
Swedish EngUsh Unit
(att) ha, har, hade, haft, 4 (to) have 1
(att) ha lust att; 4 (to) feel like 2
hal -t-a sUppery Pron. Guide
hall-en-ar hall 5
ha J J hello fonly on the phonej J
halv - t -a half 9
hamn -en -ar :3
han he 2
hand -en, hnder hand 9

(att) ta hand om; 4 (to) take care of 9
(att) ta i hand; 4 (to) shake hands 12
hande I -n 0 16
(att) handla, (to) shop 8
handsk/e -en -ar glove 8
hans -(Il -0 his 5
hatt -en -ar hat 8
hav -et -0 sea, ocean 12

t i I I havs at Bea 12
Word List 565

SWEDISH 566
hedersgst -en -er most honoY'ed guest, highest 12

Y'anking guest, guest of honoY'
hej hi 1
hel -t -a whole 3
helg -en -er holiday, weekend 11
helgdag -en -ar hol'iday 15
heller; inte heller not .. , eitheY', noY' 13
hellre; helst Y'atheY'; pY'efeY'ably 9

See grna
hem -met -Vj home 12
hem; hemma home (motion) 5, 8

home (stationaray)
h em s k - t -a teY'Y'ible 12
hemskt grna (I'd) love to 12
hemvgen; p hemvgen on the way home 10
henne heY' (obj. form) 2
hennes -0 -0 he Y', heY's 5
herr MY'. 1
herrle -en -ar gentleman 1
Word List

SWEDISH
(att) heta, 2b (to) be named 2
hetta -n (Il heat 11
(att) hinna, hinner, hann, hunnit, (to) have time to 8

hunn/en -et -a; 4
hiss -en -ar elevator 4
(att) hissa, (to) hoist 14
histori/a -en -er story; history 12
hit; hr here (mo tion) 2, 8

here (stationary) B
(att) hitta, (to) find 4
hjlp -en 0 help, assistance 11
(att) hjlpa 2b (to) help 1
(att) hjlpa t i I I med; 2b (to) help out with 15
hjrtl ig -t -a heart y 12
Holland lIo l land 11

ho I I ndare -n -0 Dutchman 11
holltindsk -t -a Dutch (adj.) 11
hollndsk/a -an (Il Du tch (lang.) 11
ho II ndsk/a -an -or Dutch woman 11
Word List 567

SWEDISH 568
Swed-ish Lrz i t
hon she 2
lionom him 2
(a-r1) hoppa, (to) jump, hop, skip 14
(att) hoppas, (to) hope 2
hos at, with ?
hotell -et -0 hote l 1
hovmstare -n -0 headwaitel' 9
(att) hugga, hugger, hgg, huggit, (to) out, hew 13

hugg/en -et -na; 4
hund -en -ar dog 5
(ett) hundra one (a) hundl'ed 1
hundratals hundreds 14
hungrig - t -a hungry 4
hur how 1
eller hur don't you, isn't it, etc. 8
hur dags at what time 2
hus -et -0 house 5
hustru -n -r wife 2
huvud -et, huvuden head 10
Word List

SWEDISH
huvudingng -en -ar main entl'anae 10
huvudsak -en -er main thing 16
huvudsakl igen mainly 16
huvudstad -en, huvudstder aapital 11
hyr/a -an -or rent 5
(att) hyra, 2a (to) rent 5
hyresg~st -en -er tenant 5
hl -et-0 hale Pron. Guide

(att ) h I I a, h I I er, h I I, h I I i t, (to) hold, keep 14
hll/en - et -naj 4
(att) h I I a med om; 4 (to) agree 2
(att) h I I a p (att gra ngot) ; 4 (to) be busy (doing BomethingJ 13
(att ) h I I a ta I j 4 (to) give a speeah 9
hllplats -en -er (bus, subway) stop 1

hr -et '/> hair (aolleative) 10
hrfrisrsk/a -an -or beauty pal'lor, hairdresser 10
h~lft -en -er hal! 16

(att) hlsa, (to) greet 11
Word List 569

SWEDISH 570
Swedish Engfish Unit
(att) hlsa .p!; (to) visit 11
(att> hlsa p; (to) greet (somebody), to say 11

heLLo
(att) hlsa (till); (to) say hello to, gl'eet, 12

give l'egards to
(att) hmta, (to) get, pick up 2
(att) hnga, 2a (to) hang 7
hr; hit here (s ta tionary) l, 8

here (motion) 8
hrifrn from here 4
hromdagen the other day 13
hx/a -an -or witch 15
hg -t -a; hgre; hogst high; higher; highest 5, 9
hger right 1
t i I I hger om to the right of 1
hghus -et -0 highrise 12
hgkonjunktur -en -er boom, prospel'ity 16
hgskol/a -an -or university 16

hgtid -en -er festive day 15
(att) hja, 2a (to) raise, increase 16
Word List

SWEDISH
h r listen (imperative) 8
(att) hra, 2a (to) hear 8
(att) hra av sig; 2a (to) get in touch 12
hrn -et -0 corner 4
hst -en -ar fall, autumn 2

l hst this fall 2
hstas last fall 11
Word List 571

SWEDISH 572
in 1
frrgr the day before yesterday 10
morse this morning (past) 10
r this year 11
vermorgon the day after tomorrow 11
ibland sometimes 8
icke not (formal; used mainly

in public notices)
idag today 5
ifjol last year 11
i f j or last year 11
ifrn from 15
igen again 3
igr yesterday 5
ihopkrup/en -et -na curled up (only for animate 13

subjects)
i kv I I this evening, tonight 2
i Ian d ashore 14
Word List

SWEDISH
Swedish Engtish lni t
imorgon tomol'l'ow 3
import -en -er impol't. imp0l'tation
(att) importera, (to) imp0l't 11
In; inne in (motion) 5. 8

in. inside (stational'Y) 8
Indien India 11
industri -n -er industl'Y 16
ingen, inget, inga nOj no one~ nobody~ none 1~ 8
i ngenjr -en -er engineel" 3
ingenting nothing 8
(att) in/gripa, -griper, -grep, -gripit, 4 (to) interfel'e. intervene 16
(att) ing, ingr, ingick, ingtt, 4 (to) be inctuded 5
ingng -en -ar entl'ance 9
i nkomst -en -er income 16

innan befol'e (conj.) 10
inne; in in. inside (stational'Y) 8

in (motion) 5, 8
inneboende -n -Ql 14
(att) inne/bra, -br, -bar, -burit, 4 (to) impty. mean 14
Word List 573

SWEDISH 574
inom within 16
inrikt/ad -at -ade aimed at, directed towards 16
inriktning -en -ar direction, trend 16
instrument -et -0 instrument 16
(att) instlla, 2a (to) cancel 15
inte not 1
inte alls not at all 1
inte frrn not untiZ 9
inte heller not ... either, nor 13
intell igent -0 -a intelligent 9
intensiv -t -a intensive 15
internationell -t -a international 16
intressant -0 -a 'interesting 3
intresse -t -n interest 16
(att) intressera, (to) interest 16
invandrare -n -0 immigrant 11, 16
invnare -n -0 inhabitant 16
is -en 0 ice 14
Word List

SWEDISH
istllet fr instead of 10
isvatten, isvattnet Ql ice water 9
I ta I i en Italy 11
italienare -n-Ql Italian (man) 11
italiensk - t - a Italian (adj. ) 11
ital iensk/a -an 0 Italian (lang.) 11
ital iensk/a -an -or Italian (woman) 11
ivg; (att) f ivg; 4 (to) get (someone) to leave 12
Word List 575

SWEDISH 576
ja yes 1
jad yes, indeed 3
jag I 1
jaha yes 5
januari January 5
Japan Japan 11
japan -en -er Japanese (man) 11
japansk -t -a Japanese (adj. ) 11
japansk/a -an 0 Japanese (lang. ) 11
japansk/a -an -or Japanese (woman) 11
jas oh 2
javisst certainly, of COUl'BB, 2, :3

yes indeed
jeans -en (plur.) blue jeans 14
jo yes (in anBWel' to a negative 3

question)
jobb -et -0 job ((Jolloq. ) 13
(att) jobba, (to) work (colloq. ) 12
Word List

SWEDISH
(att) jogga, (to) jog 5
journa I i st -en -er journalist 3
ju as you know, of oourse 8
jubel, jublet 0 aheering 15
jugoslav -en -er Yugoslav 11
j u I -e'n - a r Christmas 11
i julas last Christmas 11
julgran -en -ar Christmas tree 15
j uI i July 5
julklapp -en -ar Christmas gift 15
julott/a -an -or early ahurah service on 15

Christmas Day morning
jultomt/e -en -ar Santa Claus 15
juni June 5
just just Pron. Guide

just nu just now 3
Justitieombudsmannambetet (JO) Office of the National Ombudsman 15

(att) jkta, (to) rush 10
jmn -t -a even 9, 16
flord List 5??

SWEDISH 578
jrn -et 0 -z-ron 16
jrnmalm -en 0 iron ore 16
jrnvg -en -ar railroad 13
jrnvgsstation -en -er train station 1
jtt/e -en -ar giant 12
jttetrevl ig -t -a supel', gl'eat 12
WOl'd List

SWEDISH
S/,Jedish English Vnit
kaffe -t 0 eoffee 1
kakla -an -or eake, eookie 5, 13
kalender -n, kalendrar calendar Pron. Guide
kall -t-a cold 8
(att) kalla, I (to) call 16

s kall/ad -at -ade (s.k.) so caZZed 16
kalv -en -ar veal, ealf 9
kam -men -ma r eomb

(att) kamma slgj (to) eomb (ona' 8 hair) 10
kammare -n, kamrar chamber 16
kampanj -en -er eampaign 16
kamrat -en -er friend 12
kanal -en -er channel; eanal 16
kanske maybe, perohaps 4
kart/a -an -or map 4
kartong -en -er ear'dboar'd box 14

(att) kasta, (to) throo/,J
(att) kasta bort j (to) thro/,J a/,Jay 15
Word List 579

SWEDISH 580
Swedish EngZish Vnit
kato I i k -en -er CathoZic 15
kato I sk -t -a CathoZic (adj.) 16
kedj!a -an -or chain Pl'on. Guide
kemisk -t -a chemicaZ 16
kemtvtt -en -ar dl'Y cZeaning, dry cZeaner's 10
ki lometer -n -0 kilometer (0.62 miles) 11
Kina China 11
ki nes -en -er Chinese (man) 11
kinesisk - t -a Chinese (adj.) 11
kinesisk/a -an 0 Chinese (lang.) 11
kinesisk/a -an -or Chinese (woman) 11
kiosk -en -er kiosk 13
kjo I -en -ar skirt Pl'on. Guide
klar - t - a cZeal', obvious; l'eady 3, 10

det r klart of COUl'se 3
(att) klara, (to) cope with, manage 16
klass -en -er class 9
kl imat -et -0 cZimate 11
<att) kl iva, kliver, klev, kl ivlt, 4 (to) step, cZimb 13

WOl'd List

SWEDISH
kl ackja -an -or clock, watch 2
klok -t -a wise 13
du r inte klok you are crazy 13
(att) kl, 3 (to) trim, decorate, dress 15
(att ) kl av sig; 3 (to) undress 10
(att ) kl om s i g; 3 (to) change (clothing) 10
(att) kl p s i g; 3 (to) dress (oneself) 10
(att ) kl s i g; 3 (to) dress (oneself) 8
(att ) kl ut sig; 3 (to) dress up 15
kldd, k I tt, kldda dressed 14
klder - na (plur. ) clothes, clothing, wear 8
klnning -en -ar dress 8
(att) knacka, (to) tap, knock 12
knapp -en -ar button Pron. Buide

knappast hardly 12, 11
kniv -en -ar knife 9
knut -en -ar knot Pron. Guide

(att) knyta, knyter, knt, knutit, (to) tie Pron. Guide
knut/en -et -na; 4
(att) knpp, 2b (to) button Pron. Guide

h'ord Lis t 581

SWEDISH 582
Swedish Eng Zis h Unit
(att) koka, (to) boiL
ko kt -0 - a boiled 9
ko I - e n (- e t) 0 coal 16
(att) kolla, (to) check 12
koloni -n -er colony 16
komma -t -n comma 16
(att) komma, kommer, kom, komm i t, 4 (to) come 2
(att) komma att j 4 will J (to) be going to 2
(att) komma ihg; 4 (to) remember 3
kommunal -t -a local J municipaL 16
kommunist -en -er communist 16
konduktr -en -er conductor 13
Kongo the Congo 16
konjunktur -en -er state of the market 16
konkurrens -en 0 competition 16
konsert -en -er concert 4
konst -en -er art; trick
konstnr -en -er artist 10
WO!'d List

SWEDISH
konsulat -et -0 consulate 9
konsumtion -en 0 consumption 16
kontor -et -0 office 7
kopp -en -ar cup 1
korrekt -0 -a proper, correct 12
korridor -en -er hall, corridor 7
kors -et -0 cross Pron. Guide
kort -et -0 card 12
kort, kort, korta short 4
korv -en -ar sausage 13

varm korv hot dogs 13
(att) kosta, (to) cost 1
kostym -en -er man's suit 8
kotlett -en -er cutlet, chop 9
kraft -en -er power, force 16

kraftig -t -a powerful, substantiaI 16
krans -en -ar wreath 15
krav -et -0 demand 16
(att) stlla krav p; 2a (to) make demands on 16
Word List 583

SWEDISH 584
kredit -en -er oredit 16
krig -et -0 war 16
kring around 15
kris -en -er orisis 15
kristall kron/a -an -or ohandelier 12
Kristi Himmelfrdsdag Asoension Day 15
Kristus Chris t 16
kron/a -an -or orown (Sw. ourrenoy) 1
krypa, kryper, krp, krupit, 4 (to) oreep, orawl 13
krft/a -an -or orayfish 12
kul -0-0 fun (adj.) 3
kultur -en -er culture 16
kulturell -t-a oultural 16
kund -en -er oustomer 16
kung -en -ar king 16
kungl ig - t -a royal 10
(att) kunna, kan, kunde, kunnat, 4 (to) be able to, oan; know 1, 15
(have learned)
kunnande -t 0 know-how 16
Word List

SWEDISH
SlJedi-sh Engli-sh lJnit
kupe -n -er compaT'tment 13
kurs -en -er COUT'se 11
kust -en -er coast 16
kval ite -n -er quality 8
kva r still, left, T'emaining 2
kvarlev/a -an -or T'emnant 15
kvart -en -er quaT'teT' of an houp (15 mins.) 2
kvarter -et -0 block 12
kvick - t -a quick
kvicktnkt -0 -a sharp 12
kvinn/a -an -or lJoman 11
kvinnlig - t - a female (adj.) 12
kv II -en -ar evening 2

i kv I I this evening, tonight 2
kyckl ing -en -ar chieken 15
kylskp -et -0 refrigerator 5
kypare -n -0 lJaiter 9
kyrk/a -an -or church 4
kyrkl ig -t -a church (adj.) 16

Word List 585

SWEDISH 588
kyrkogrd -en -ar cemetery 15
kyss -en -ar kiss 10
kl -en 0 cabbage 15
kllare -n -0 basement 5
(att) knna, 2a (to) know; feel- 2, 15
(att) knna igen; 2a (to) recognize 14
(att) knna sig; 2a (to) feel 10
(att) knna t i l l ; 2a (to) know (of), be familiar 13

with
kring -en -ar old lady, witch (derogatory) 15
krlek -en 0 love Pron. Guide
krnkraft -en 0 nuclear power 16
k -n -er line, queue 13
kk -et -0 kitchen 5
(att) kpa, 2b (to) buy 1
Kpenhamn Copenhagen 11
(att) kra, 2a (to) drive 8
ktt -et 0 meat 9
kttbul l/e -en -ar meatball 9

Word List

SWEDISH
lag -en -ar law 16
(att) laga, (to) mend~ repair~ fix
(att) laga mat; (to) oook 12
lagstiftning -en -ar legislation 16
lamp/a -an -or lamp 5
lampskrm -en -ar lamp shade 15
I and -et, I nder oountry~ oountry side 11~ 13
(att) landa, (to) land 16
landskap -et -0 provinoe~ soenery~ landsoape 13
lapp -en -ar Lappj pieoe of paperj patoh 11
lappby -n -ar Lapp village 11
lapska -n 0 Lapp (lang.) 11
lat -0 -a lazy Pron. Guide
(att) le, ler, log, lett, 4 (to) smile 13~ 15
ledig -t -a free~ available 2
(att) I eda, 2a (to) lead. conduct 15

ledare -n -0 leader 15
Word List 587

SWEDISH 588
ledning -en 0 Leadership, management 16
leende -t -n smiLe 14
leende -0 -0 smiLing 14
lek -en -ar game 15
(att) leka, 2b (to) pLay 15
leksak -en -er toy 5
(att) leta {efter ngot>; I (to) Look (for something) 13
(att) leva, 2a (to) Live 3
levande -0 -0 Live, reaL 15
I i cens -en -er License (fee J 16
(att) I ida, I ider, led, lidit, 4 (to) suffer 13
(att) I igga, ligger, lg, legat, 4 (to) Lie (l,ay, lainJ, be 3, 4

Located
(att) I igga mot; 4 (to) face 5
I i ksom Like 15
I i Ia -0 -0 purpLe 8
lilla (def. fOl'm sing.) Little, small; See liten 7
I l ngon -et -0 Lingonberry 9
linneskp -et-fl) Linen closet 5

Word List

SWEDISH
I ist/a -an -or list 9
Il te a little, 80me 1
I i te grann a little bit 1
I iten, I itet, sm; mIndre; mInst small, little; less, least 4, 9
I I v -et -0 life 11
(att) ljuga, ljuger, IJijg, ljugIt, 4 (to) lied (lied, lied) 13
ljus -t -a light, bright 5
ljus -et -0 light, candle 12
ljusbl - t t -a light blue 8
ljusgrn -t -a light green 8
lov -et -9) (school) vacation 15
(att) lova, (to) promise 10
luck/a -an -or window, opening 13
luft -en l1J air Pron. Guide

lugn -t -a calm Pron. Guide
(att) lugna, (to) calm Pron. Guide
lunch -en -er luch 1
lussekatt -en -er special saffron buns served at 15

Lucia and Christmas time
flord List 589

SWEDISH 590
Swedish Vnit
lust -en 0 in teY'es t 2

(att) ha lust att; 4 (to) like~ feel like 2
lustIg -t -a funny~ peculiar 15
lutfisk -en 0 specially prepaY'ed fish served 15

at Christmas
I uthersk -t -a Lutheran 16
lyck/ad -at -ade successful 11
(att) lyckas, (to) succeed 9
lycklig - t -a happy 9
lyckligtvis fOY'tunately 9
(att) lyda, lyder, ld (lydde), lytt, 4 (2a) (to) obey; be worded 13

(att) lyssna, (to) listen 14
ld/a -an -or drawer 12
I g -t -a; I gre; lgst low; lower; lowest 9
lgkonjunktur -en -er depression~ slump 16

ln -et -0 loan 16
(att) lna, (to) borY'ow~ lend 13
lng -t -a; lngre, lngst far~ long; tall; 4~ 9. 12
farther; farthest
lngsamt slowly 1
Word List

SWEDISH
ls -et -0 lock
(att) Iflsa, 2b (to) lock 13
(att) lta, lter, lt, ltit, 4 (to) sound; to Zet, make (some- 5, 10
one do something)
Ige r, lgret, -0 camp 13
(att) lgga, lgger, lade, lagt, (to) lay, put 7

lagd, lagt, lagda; 4
(att ) lgga f ram; 4 (to) display, put out 12
(att) lgga sig; 4 (to) lie down, go to bed 10
(att) lgga t i I I; 4 (to) dock 14

lggning -en -ar (hair) set 10
lkare -n -0 physician, doctor 3

(att ) lmna, (to) Zeave 9
(att ) lmna tillbaka; (to) return (trans.) 15

I ngd -en -er length 8
lnge; lngre; lngst long (time); longer, longest 2
lnge sedan long time since 3
lnge sedan sist long time since (we saw each :3

other) last time
Word List 591

SWEDISH 592
lngre; lngst farther; farthest; See lng. 9

lnge
I r, lrde, lrt, 4 is said to, is suppossd to 4
(att ) lra, 2a (to) teaah Pron. Guide
(att) lra s i g; 2a (to) learn 10
I ra re -n -0 teacher 11
lrarinn/a -an -or teaaher (/Joman) 3
(att) lsa, 2b (to) read 8
lskedryck -en -er soda pop, soft drink 14
ltt -0 -a easy, simple; light 13
lx/a -an -or homework 11
I n -en -er /Jage, salary 16
lnn -en -ar maple tree Pron. Guide
lrdag Saturday 3
(att) lsa, 2b (to) solve 16
WOl'd List

SWEDISH
maj May 5
major -en -er major 12
majoritet -en -er majority 16
maj/stng, -stngen, -stnger maypole 15
mammla -an -or mother, mama Pron. Guide
man one, you 1
man -nen, mn gentleman, man, husband 7, 12
mandat -et -0 parliament seat 16
mandel -n, mandlar almond 15
mandelmassa -n 0 almond paste 15
man I i g -t -a male (adj.) 12
marinbl -tt -a navy blue 8
(att) markera, (to) mark 15

mars March 5
(att) marschera, (to) march 15
maskin -en -er machine, machinery 16
massia -an -or lot, mass 11
Word List 593

SWEDISH 594
massmedi/um -et -a mass medium 16
mat -en 0 food 9
(att) mata, (to) feed P1'on. Guide
matsal -en -ar dining Y'oom 5
matsedel -n, matsedlar menu 1
matt -0 -a weak PY'on. Guide
mattia -an -or Y'ug, caY'pet 5
matvr -n -r bY'eakfast nook 5
med with, by, along 2
med mera (m.m.) etceteY'a 16
medan while 11
medbestmmandertt -en -er Y'ight of being consulted, Y'ight 16

of cont1'ol, co-decision 1'ight
medborgare -n -0 citizen 16
(att) meddela, (to) info1'm, announae
meddelande -t -n message 7
meddetsamma Y'ight away 14

(att) medfra, 2a (to) involve, b1'ing about, lead 16
to
WOY'd List

SWEDISH
medicin -en -er medioine 11
medlem -men -mar member 16
me II an between 3
men but 2
(att) mena, (to) mean, re/er to 11
mer(a)i mest more, e lse; most 8, 9, 10

See mycket
mer(a) n more than 8
mervrdesskatt -en -er value added tax 16
metod -en -er method 16

middag -en -ar dinner 1
midsommar -en, midsomrar Midsummer 11
i midsomras last Midsummer 11
midsommarafton Midsummer's eve 15
mig me 1
mi I -en -0 Swedish mi1-e (10 kms., app:rox. 16
6.2 English miles)
mild, milt, milda mild 16
m i I i t r - t -a mi litary 16
mi Ijard -en -er billion 1
Word List 595

SWEDISH 596
mi Ijon -en -er million 1
mi Ij -n -er environment 14
mi Ijvrd -en Ql environmental proteetion 14
min, mitt, mina my, mine 2
mindre; minst smaller, less; smallest, least; 9

See I i ten
(att) minnas, 2a (to) remember :3
mi nne -t -n memory 10
minoritet -en -er minority 11
minut -en -er minute 2
(att ) missa, I (to) miss, faU 5
(att ) missbruka, (to) abuse 15
(att) misstnka, 2b (to) suspeat 15

mitt emot (straight) aeross 12
mitt framfr right in front of 14
mjlk -en 0 milk 1
mob i I -en -er mobile 12
(att) mob i I i sera, (to) mobiZize 16
moderat -Ql -a moderate 16
Word List

SWEDISH
moderata sam I l ngspart I et the eonse~vative pa~ty 16
modern -t -a modern
(att) modernisera, (to) mode~ni3e 5
modernlser/ad -at -ade modernized 5
monopol -et -0 monopoly 16
mor, modern, mdrar mothe~ 3
morbror -n, morbrder uncle (maternal) :3
morfar, morfadern, morf~der g~andfather (mate~nalJ :3
morgon -en, mor(g)nar morning 1
mormor, mormodern, mormdrar g~andmother (maternal) :3
moster -n, mostrar aunt (maternal) :3
mot against~ toward(sJ 5
motor -n, mot~rer motor~ engine 16
mottagning -en -ar reception 7
multipl ikatlonstabell -en -er multiplieation tables 11
mun -n en -nar mouth Pron. Guide
museum, museet, museer museum 4
musik -en 0 music
Word List 597

SWEDISH 598
Swedish English Ur! i t
musiker -n -(Il musioian :5
mycket; mer(a)j mest much, very; more; most l, 8, 9
(att) m, 3 (to) feel 1
ml -et -(Il goal Pron. Guide
(att) mla, (to) paint 15
mlsttning -en -ar aim, objective 16
mltid -en -er meal 12
mnad -en -er month 2
mndag Monday :3
mn/e -en -ar moon 16
mnga; fler(a); flest many; more; most l, 9
mste, mste, 4 must, have (has) to :3
mtt -et -0 measure Pron. Guide

mnnisk/a -an -or person 14
mnskl19 -t -a human 16
(att) mrka, 2b (to) notice 11
mbel -n, mbler furniture 5
(att) mblera, (to) furnish 5
Word List

SWEDISH

mbler/ad -at -ade furnished 5
mj I i 9 -t -a possible 9
a I I -t -a mj I i g -t -a all pos8ibZe~ all kinds of 11
mj I igen possibly 9
mj I i gtv i s passibly 9
mrk -t -a dark 7
mrkbl -tt -a dark blue 8
(att> mta, 2b (to) meet 2
Word List 599

SWEDISH 600
Swedish Vnit
namn -et -0 name 2
nation -en -er nation 11

Frenta Nationerna (FN) Uaited Nations (U. N.) 11
national itet -en -er nationality 11
natt -en, ntter night 1
nattklubb -en -ar nightclub 12
natur -en 0 nature 14
naturl ig -t -a natural 9
naturl igtvis naturally 7
naturti Ilgng -en -ar natural resource 16
nedgng -en -ar way down~ stairs~ entrance 4
nedrustning -en 0 disarmament 16
nej no 1
nej, men . well~ I'll be ... 8
ner; nere down (motion); 8

down~ downstairs (stationary) 8
nervs -t -a nervous 11
neutra I i tet -en 0 neutraZity 16
Word List

SWEDISH
ni you (plur. + polite form 1

sing.)
<att) niga, niger, neg, nigit, 4 (to) aurtsy 13
nio nine 1
nionde ninth 7
nittio ninety 1
nitton nineteen 1
nittonde nineteenth 7
(att) njuta, njuter, njt, njutit, 4 (to) enjoy 1 J. 14
nog probably; enough 5. 14
no I I zero
Norden the Nordia aountries 16
nord i sk -t -a Nordia 16
Norge Norway 11
norr north 5
Norrland northern part of Sweden 11
norrman -nen, norrmn Norwegian (man) 11
norrut north(ward). towards the north 15

norsk -t -a Norwegian (adj.) 11
Word List 601

SWEDISH 802
norsk/a -an QI Nopwegian (lang.) 11
norsk/a -an -or Nopwegian (woman) 11
not/a -an -or check (in a pestaurant) 9
november November 5
nu now 1
nu fr tiden now, these days :3
numera nowadays 16
nummer, numret -(II size, number 8
ny. nytt, nya new 4
nyckel -n, nycklar key 13
nyhet -en -er news 1, 14
(att) nysa, nyser, ns, nysit, 4 (to) sneeze 13
nyss pecently Ppon. Guide
nyttig -t -a useful, good 14
ngon, ngot, ngra some, any; somebody, anybody 1, 8
ngonsin ever 3
ngonstans somewhere 10
ngonting something, anything 8
flord List

SWEDISH
nr when 2
nr som helst any time 11
nraj nrmarej nrmast near; eloser; elosest 3, 7
nrhet j i nrheten in the vieinity, nearby 1
nrIng -en -ar nourishment, sustenanee 16
nringsl iv -et -0 trade and industry, eeonomy 16
nrmarej nrmast eloser; elosest; See nra 3, 7
nrmare bestmt more preeisely 16
ns/a -an -or nose Pron. Guide
nsta next 9
nstan almost B
ndvndig -t -a neeessary 12
nje -t -n pleasure 11
nt -en -ter nut Pron. Guide

(att) nta, 2b (to) wear out
ntt -0 -a worn Pron. Guide
Word List 603

SWEDISH 604
o
oberoende -0 -0 independent 16
och and 1
och s vidare (o.s.v.) etcetera, and 80 on 16
ocks too, also 1
off icer -n -are officer (on"ly military) 3
ofta often 3
oj mn -t -a uneven 16
oktober October 5
01 i ka (plur. form) various 16
olj/a -an -or oit 15
oljekris -en -er oit crisis 15
om about, in, within (prep. ); 2, ;5

if (conj.)
ombord aboard 3
(att) omfatta, (to) include, comprise, espouse 16
omfattande -0 -0 comprehensive, extensive 16
(att) omge, omger, omgav, omgivit, (to) surround 15

omgiv/en -et -nai 4
WOl'd List

SWEDISH
omkring about, around, approximate2y 11, 15
omrde -t -n area 15
(att) omskola (skola om); (to) retrain 16
omjlig -t-a impossible 9
ond, ont, onda (adj.J evil Pron. Guide
onsdag Wednesday ;5
oper/a -an -or opera 12
ord -et -0 LJord 11
ordentlig -t -a orderZy, oarefu2, thorough 13
ordfrande -n -0 chairman ;5
(att) ordna, (to) arrange 12
organisation -en -er organization 18
(att) organisera, (to) organize 5
(att) orka, (to) have the strength (to) 10
orsak -en -er cause, reas on 1

ort -en -er (geographicaZ)plaoe 16
oss us 2
ost -en -ar cheese 1
Word List 605

SWEDISH 606
otrevlig - t -a unpleasant 9
ot ro I i g -t -a incY'edible 9
otrol igt incY'edibly 9
ovanlig -t -a unusual
ovanligt unusually 9
ovnlig - t -a unfY'iendly 9
Word List

SWEDISH
(att) packa, (to) pack 13
paket -et -Ql pack, package 7
papp -en Ql cardboard 15
papp/a -an -or father, papa, daddy Pron. Guide
papper, pappret, -0 (piece of) paper Pron. Guide
papperskorg -en -ar waste basket 7
par -et -0 coup le, pair 1
park -en -er park 4
parkett -en -er orchestra section 10
parlamentarisk -t -a parliamentary 16
parti -et -er (political) party 16
(att) passa, (to) suit, be convenient 2
passagerare -n -Ql passenger 13

patient -en -er patient 11
paus -en -er break, pause 15
<att) peka <p) (to) point (to, at) 15
pengar -na (plup.) money 4
Wopd List 607

SWEDISH 608
Swedish Engtish Vnit
peppar -n 0 pepper 9, 15
pepparkak/a -an -or spicy cookies served at Christ- 15

mas time
perfekt -0 -a perfect 11
persisk -t -a Persian 5
person -en -er person, people 5
pIngst -en 0 Pentecost 11 J 15

i pingstas last Pentecost 11
plp/a -an -or pipe 3
(att> pipa, piper, pep, pipit, 4 (to) squeak 13
pjS -en -er play 10
(att> placera, (to) place

placeringskort -et -0 plaoe oard 12
plan -en -er plan, chart 12
plats -en -er spaoe, room, place; seat 5, 13
platsbIljett -en -er reserved seat ticket 13
plikt -en -er duty 16

(att> plocka, (to) pick 14
pluralistisk -t -a pluralistic 16
Word List

SWEDISH
plus plus 16
pltsl ig -t -a sudden 14
poj k/e -en -ar boy 3
polack -en -er Pole 11
Polen Poland 11
pol i s -en -er poliaeman 4
politik -en 0 politics, policy 16
politiker -n-0 politician 15
pol itisk -t -a political 16
polsk -t -a Polish (adj.) 11
polsk/a -an 0 Polish (lang.) 11
polsk/a -an -or Pole (woman) 11
populr -t -a popular 15
portier -n, portieer hotel clerk (at reception desk) 4
portrtt -et -0 portrait 12
post -en 0 mail, mail service 14
potatis -en -ar potato 9
potatismos -et 0 mas hed potatoes 9
Word List 609

SWEDISH 610
praktisk -t -a practical 15
(att) prata, (to) ahat 9, 15
premlrminlst/er -ern -rar prime minis tel' 15
present -en -er gift 12
(att) presentera, (to) introduce, present 2
president -en -er president 11
press -en ~ press, news 16
pressattache -n -er press attache 12
princip -en -er pY'inciple 16
privat -0 -a pY'ivate 14
privatg/d -t -da pY'ivately owned 16
problem -et -0 pY'oblem 8, 16

procent - en -0 peY'cent 9
produkt -en -er product 16

prof~ssor -n, profess~rer professol' 16
program -met -0 program 16
(att) proklamera, (to) proclaim 16
promenad -en -er walk 4
WOl'd List

SWEDISH
(att) promenera, (to) walk 4
protestant -en -er Pro te s tan t 16
protestantIsk -t -a Protestant (adj.) 16
(att) prova, (to) try on 8
prydllg-t-a neat 14
prst -en -er priest~ clergyman 16
punktlig -t -a punctual 10
(att) putsa, (to) polish 15
p on~ at~ in 1~ 11
(att) pminna, 2a (to) remind 10
(att) ppeka, (to) indicate~ point out 15
psk -en 0 Easter 11 ~ 15

1 pskas last Easter 11
pskris -et -QJ branches brought into the 15

house and decorated with
dyed feathers (for Lenten
and Easter decoration)
pls -en -ar fur~ fU1'coat 8
plsaffr -en -er fUl'rie1' 8
Word List 611

SWEDISH 612
Swedish English Uti t
rad -en -er row, 'line; series 16
radio -n, radioapparater radio 16
rak -t -a straight (adj. ) 1
(att) raka sig; (to) shave 10
ra kt straight (adv. ) 1
rakt fram straight ahead 1
rea (real isation -en -er) sale 8
re~ktor -n, reakt~rer reactor 16
receptionist -en -er receptionist 7
redan already :5
reform -en -er reform 16
regel -n, regler rule 11
regering -en -ar government 16
(att) registrera, (to) register 16

regional -t -a regional 16
regn -et QJ rain 10
(att) regna, (to) rain 10
flord List

SWEDISH
rek Iam -en -er advertising 12, 16
(att) rekommendera, (to) recommend 9
relativt re lative ly 16
ret igion -en -er re ligion 16
rel ig is -t -a religious 16
ren -t -a pUl'e, cLean 8
representant -en -er representative (noun) 16

representativ -t -a representative (adj.) 16
(att) representera, (to) repl'esent 16

res/a -an -or trip, journey, tour 10, 11
(att) resa, 2b (to) travel; raise 2, 15
resecheck -en -ar traveLers' check 15
residens -et -er residence 7
rest -en -er rest, remainder 11

restaurang -en -er restaurant 1
(att) rida, rider, red, rIdIt, (to) ride (on horseback) 13
rid/en -et -na; 4
rik -t -a rich 15
Word List 613

SWEDISH 614
Swedish Engl.ish Unit
riksdag -en -ar Swedish parliament 16
(- i kt i g - t -a cOY'Y'ect, Y'eal
riktigt rea lly 9
ring -en -ar Y'ing Pron. Guide
(att) ringa, 2a (to) call (on the telephone) 3
(att) rinna, rinner, rann, runnit, 4 (to) Y'un, flow 13
ris -et 0 greens, twigs; rice 15
(att) riva, river, rev, rivit, (to) scratch, teaY' 13

riv/en -et -na; 4
(att) ro, 3 (to) Y'ow PY'on. Guide

rock -en -ar coat, Y'obe 13
roi ig -t -a amusing, fun, nice, pleasant 3
(att) ropa, (to) call (out) 13
rosa -0 -0 pink, Y'ose-coloY'ed 8
ru II trapp/a -an -or escalator 8
rum -met -0 room 1

rund, runt, runda Y'ound 4
runt aY'ound 15
rygg -en -ar back 15
Word List

SWEDISH
rym I i g -t -a spacious 5
rysk -t -a Russian (adj.) 11
ry s kl a -an -0 Russian (lang.) 11
ryskla -an -or Russian (woman) 11
ryss -en -ar Russian (man) 11
Ryssland Russia
(att) ryta, ryter, rt, rutit (rytit), 4 (to) roar 13
rd; (att) ha rd med; 4 (to) afford 8
rdd 0 -a afraid 12
(att) rkna, (to) count
rkning -en -ar bi ZZ 11

rtt -en 0 right 12, 14
(att) ha rtt (j ngot>; 4 (to) be right (about something) 12, 13
rtt -en -er dish, food 15

rttegng -en -ar trial 1.5
rttighet -en -er right 16

rd, rtt, rda red 4
(att) rka, 2b (to) smoke 3

rkare -n -0 smaker 13
Word List 615

SWEDISH 616
(att) rra sig; 2a (to) move 14
rst -en -er vote, voiae
(att) rsta {p>; (to) vote (fop) 16
Word List

SWEDISH
s
saffran -en 0 saffran 15
sak -en -er thing 5
sallad-en-er salad~ lettuce 9
salt -et (I) salt 9
(att) sama rbeta, (to) cooperate 15
same -n -r Lapp
samfund -et -(I) denomination 16
(att) samla, (to) gather~ collect (trans.) 15
(att) samlas, (to) gather (intrans.) 15

sam I i ng -en -ar coalition; collection; gathering 16
samma same 9
samma som same as 8
samman lag/d -t -da aombined 16

sammantrde -t -n meeting 7
samtal -et -0 conversation 11
samt I i ga (p Zur. ) aH (the ... ) 16
samvaro -n 0 company 12
sand -en 0 sand 14
Word List 617

SWEDISH 618
sann, sant, sanna true :3

inte sant isn't that 80 :3
sanning -en -ar truth
schampo -t -n shampoo 10
sch 15m -en -er schism Pron. Guide
Schweiz Swit2erland 11
schweizare -n -0 Swiss (man) 11
schweizisk -t -a Swiss (adj.) 11
schwelzisk/a -an -or Swiss (woman) 11
(att) se, ser, sg, sett, (to) see, look 1, :3

sedd, sett, sedda; 4
(att) se efter; 4 (to) check 10
(att) se p; 4 (to) look at
(att) se till att; 4 (to) make Bure, see to it that 12

(att) se ut; (to) look like, appear, seem 2
sed -en -er cus tom 12
sedan then, later, afterwards (adv.); 4, 16

af ter, when (conj.)
sedan dess since then 16
(att) segla, (to) sail 12
Word List

SWEDISH
sekreterare -n -~ secretary
sektor -n, sektorer sector 16
sekund -en -er second 11
semester -n, semestrar vacation, leave 11
seml/a -an -or pas try served during Lent 15
sen -t -a late 10
senast latest 12
tack fr senast thanks for an enjoyable time 12
september September 5
(att) servera, (to) serve 12

server/ad -at -ade served 12
serveringshjlp -en -ar maid 12
serveringsrum -met -0 pan try 5
servett -en -er napkin 9
servitris -en -er waitress 1

(att) ses, ses, sgs, setts, 4 (to) see each other 12
sevrdhet -en -er sight, point of interest 4
sex six 1
sextio sixty 1
Word List 619

SWEDISH 620
sexton sixteen l
sextonde sixteenth 7
sherry - n Q\ sherry 12
(att) shoppa, (to) shop 8
s h o r t s - e n (p l ur>. ) shorts 15
Sibirien Siberia 11
sid/a -an -or side 4
sIffr/a -an -or figure, number 16
sig oneself, themselves, etc. 10

(refl. pr>on.)
sill -en -ar herring 15
sillsallad -en -er herring salad 15
(att) simma, (to) swim 14
sin, sItt, sina his, her>, their> 5
sist last time 3

lnge sedan sist long time since we saw each 3
other last time
p sista tiden lately 10
(att) sitta, sitter, satt, suttit, 4 (to) sit, fit 7, 8
situation -en -er situation 16
Wor>d List

SWEDISH
Swedish English mit
sj u seven 1
sj u k - t -a siok, Hl Pl'on. Guide
sjukfrskring -en -ar health in8uranoe 16
sjukhus -et -0 hospital 12

(att) ligga p sjukhus; 4 (to) be in the hospitaZ, 12
be hospitalized
sjuksktersk/a -an -or nUl'se :3
sjunde seventh 7
(att) sjunga, sjunger, sJong, sjungit, (to) sing 12

sjung/en -et -na; 4
(att> sjunka, sjunker, sjnk, sjunkit, (to) sink 13

sjunk/en -et -na; 4
sjuttio seventy 1
sjutton seventeen 1
sjuttonde seventeenth 7
sjlv self 1
sjlvbestmmandertt -en 0 l'ight to selfdete~mination 16
sjtte sixth 7
sj -n -ar lake 12, 13
till sjss at sea 12
sjman -nen, sjmn sailor 3
Word List 621

SWEDISH 622
sjtung/a -an -or sole 12
sjtungsf i I EJ -n -er filet of sole 12
ska(II), skulle shall, will; should, woutd 2
skad/a -an -or injury, damage 16

(att) skaffa, (to) get, obtain 2
Skandinavien Scandinavia 11
(att) skapa, (to) create 16
skatt -en -er tax 16
skattebetalare -n -0 taxpayer 16
sked -en -ar spoon 9
(att) skicka, (to) send 11

skid/a -an -or ski 14
(att) ka skidor; 2b (to) ski 14
ski II nad -en -er difference 12
ti II ski Ilnad mot untike, in contl'ast to 12
(att) skina, skiner, sken, skinit, 4 (to) shine 13, 14
skink/a -an -or ham 15
skjort/a -an -or shirt 8
(att) skjuta, skjuter, skt, skjutit, (to) shoot 13
skjut/en -et -na; 4
WOl'd List

SWEDISH
s ko - n - r shoe 8
skoavdelning -en -ar shoe department 8
skog -en -ar [orest, woods 12, 13

t i I I skogs to the woods 12
skolla -an -or school 2
(att) skola omi (to) retrain 16
skolkamrat -en -er schoolmate 12

(att) skratta, (to) laugh 14
(att ) skrida, skrider, skred, skridit, 4 (to) glide, proceed 13

( att) skrika, skriker, s k re k, skrikit, 4 (to) scream, shout 13
(att ) skriva, skriver, skrev, skrivit, 4 (to) w1'ite 3, 13
skrivbord -et -0 desk 7
skrivmaskin -en -er typewriter 7
(att) skryta, skryter, skrt, skrutit, 4 (to) brag, boast 13

skraddare -n -0 tailor 8
(att) skydda, (to) protect Pron. Guide
skylt -en -ar sign 13
(att) skynda sig; (to) hurry 10
skl cheers, here's to you 9

Word List 623

SWEDISH 624

(att) skla, (to) toast 12
skp -et -0 aabinet, aupboard 12
(att) skmmas, 2a (to) be ashamed, embappassed 12
skmtsamt jokingly, in jest 16
skr -t -a pink 8
(att) skra, skr, skar, skurit, (to) out

skur/en -et -naj 4
skrgrd -en -ar arohipelago, skerpies 13
skrm -en -ar (lamp) shade; screen 15

skrp -et -0 belt 14
skn -t -a aomfortable, nice, enjoyable 10
slag -et -(Il kind, sort, type 9

vad fr slags what kind of 9
(att) slippa, slipper, slapp, sluppit, 4 (to) not have to (do some- 10
thing)
slips-en-ar tie 8
(att) si ita, si iter, slet, slitit, (to) teap, weap out 13

si it/en -et -oaj 4
slott -et -0 palace 4

slut -et -0 end 12
Word List

SWEDISH
(att) sluta, (to) finish, stop 2
slutlig -t -a final 9
slutligen finaZZy 9
(att) sl, slr, slog, slagit, (to) beat, Btpike, hit 13

slag/en -et -na; 4
(att) slss, slss, slogs, slagits, 4 (to) fight 13
slkt -en -er extended family, pelatives 13
(att) smaka, (to) taste 9
smal -t -a narrow, thin 16
smokIng -en -ar tuxedo 10
(att) smyga, smyger, smg, smugit, 4 (to) sneak, tip-toe 13
sm (plur. fopm); mindre; minst smaH, little; smaHePj 4, 9

smaZlest; See liten
sm r - et 0 butter 1
smrgs -en -ar sandwich (open faced) 1
smrgsbord -et -0 smorgasbord 9
snaps -en -ar drink of aquavit 9
snart soon 2
s snart som as Boan as 12
WOl'd List 625

SWEDISH 626
snygg -t -a good-Iooking 8
(att) snyta, snyter, snt, snutit, (to) blow the n08e 13

snut/en -et -na; 4
snll-t-a kind 1
var sn I I och please 1
sn -n 0 snow 14
socialdemokratisk -t -a social democratic 16
socialistisk -t-a socialistic 16
socialpolitik -en 0 social policy 16
soff/a -an -or soja 5
sol -en -ar sun 14
(att) sola sig; (to) sunbathe 14

sol ig -t -a sunny 5
soluppgng -en -ar sunrise 15

som who~ that~ which (re!. pron.J; 2~ 8
as; like
samma som same as 8
sommar -en, somrar summer 8

i somras last summer 11
sommargst -en -er non-permanent resident in 15
summer resort area
Word List

SWEDISH
Su>edish English Unit

sommarsti le -t -na summeJ' plaoe 15
(att) somna, (to) fall asleep 13
son - n, sner son 3
(att) sova, sover, sov, sovit, 4 (to) sleep 13
Sovjetunionen the Soviet Union 11
sovrum -met -0 bedJ'oom 5
Spanien Spain 11
spanjor -en -er Spaniard (man) 11
spanjorsk/a -an -or SpaniaJ'd (woman) 11
spansk -t -a Spanish (adj.) 11

spansk/a -an QJ Spanish rtang.) 11
speciell -t -a speoial 15
(att) spinna, spinner, spann, spunnit, (to) spin 13
spunn/en -et -a; 4
sport -en -er sporta Pron. Guide

(att) spricka, spricker, sprack, spruckit, (to) oJ'aak, burst 13
spruck/en -et -na; 4
(att) sprida, sprider, spred, spritt, (to) apJ'ead 13
spridd, spritt, spridda; 4
(att) springa, springer, sprang, sprungit, 4 (to) run 8, 13
Word List 627

SWEDISH 628
Swedish
- ---
EngZish Unit
spr k -et -0 language 11
sprkbegv/ad -at -ade (to) have a gift for languages 11
stad -en, stder city, town 2
(att) stanna, (to) stay, remain 2
stark -t -a strong 16
stat -en -er state, government 16
station -en -er station 1
statistik -en -er statis tics 16
statistisk -t -a statistical 16
statl ig -t -a state, government (adj.) 16
statsminister -n, s~atsmlnlstrar pr'ime minister' 16

statsrd -et -0 (equivalent to) member' of the 16
cabinet
statsskick -et -0 constitution 16
staty -n -er statue 12
(att) stava, (to) spell 15
(att) stava fel; (to) misspell 15
(att) steka, 2b (to) fry
stekt -(/; -a fried 9
WOr'd List

SWEDISH
(att) sticka, sticker, stack, stuckit, (to) stick~ put; sting 13

stuck/en -et -na; 4
(att) stifta, (to) establish~ found 16
(att) stiga, stiger, steg, stigit, 4 (to) step 13
(att ) stiga av; 4 (to) get off 13

(att) stiga i n; (to) enter~ come in 13
(att ) stiga p; 4 (to) get on~ board 13
st l I l g -t -a good-looking~ handBome 3
(att) stjla, stjl, stal, stulit, (to) steal 13
stul/en -et -na; 4
st jrn/a -an -or stal' 15

sto I -en -ar chail' 5
stor -t -a; strre; st6rst big~ gl'own-up; biggel'; 2~ 9
biggest
storlek -en -ar size 16

strand -en, strnder beach 14
strax Boon 14
(att) strida, strider, stred, stridit, 4 (to) fight 13
struktur -en -er Btructure~ framewol'k 16

strump/a -an -or Bock~ stocking 8
Word List 629

SWEDISH 630

(att) stryka, stryker, strk, strukit, (to) iron 8
struk/en -et -na; 4
strykfri -tt -a non-iron, peromanent proess 8
(att) strla, (to) shine 14
strlande -0 -0 glorious 14
(att) strva mot; (to) strive for 16
strmming -en -ar smalt herroing from the Baltic 10
student -en -er (univerosity) student 16
<att) studera, (to) study 11

studiebidrag -et -0 study grant 16
studieln -et -0 student loan 16
stug/a -an -or cottage 12
stund -en -er while, moment 12
stycke -t -n piece 12
styrelse -n -r management, boarod of directors 16
<att) st, str, stod, sttt, 4 (to) stand; say (in print or l, 7, 13
writing)
hur str det till; 4 how are you 1
vad kan jag st ti II tjnst med; 4 what can I do for you 7
Worod List

SWEDISH
Swedish English un.it
(att) st ut (med ngonting); 4 (to) tolerate, put up (with 11

something)
(att> stda, (to) clean 15
stdning -en 0 cleaning 15
(att) stlla, 2a (to) place, put (uprightJ 7
(att) stnga, 2a (to) close 10
std -et -0 support 16
(att) stdja, stder, stdde, sttt, (to) support 13

stdd, sttt, stdda; 4
(att> stra, 2a (to) disturb Pron. Guide
strre; strst bigger; bigg~st; See stor 9
stvel -n, stvlar boat 13
(att) suga, suger, sg, sugit, (to) suck 13

sug/en -et -na; 4
summ/a -an -or amount, sum 16

<att) supa, super, sp, supit, 4 (to) drink liquor (excess- 13
ively)
svalg -et -0 throat, pharynx Pron. Guide

svamp -en -ar mushroom 14
(att) svara, (to) answer 16
Word List 631

SWEDISH 632
Swedish Unit
(att) svara fr; (to) aeeount for 16
svart, svart, svarta blaek 4
svensk -en -ar swede (man) 11
svensk -t -a Swedish (adj.)
svensk/a -an 0 Swedish (lang.) 1
svensk/a -an -or Swede (woman) 11
Sver-ige Sweden 2
(att) svida, svider, sved, svidit, 4 (to) smart, burn 13
(att) svika, sviker, svek, svikit, 4 (to) fail, disappoint 13
svr -t -a difficu lt 11
(att) svlta, svlter, svalt, svultit, (to) stal've 13

svult/en -et -na; 4
(att) svra, svr, svor, svurit, (to) sweal' 13

svur/en -et -na; 4
(att) sy, 3 (to) sew 8

frdig/sydd -sytt -sydda l'eady-made 8
syfte -t -n pUl'pose, aim, objective 16

med syfte ti I I (att) with the pUl'pose of 16
sylt -en -er jam, pl'esel'ves 9
symaskin -en -er sewing machine 8
Word List

SWEDISH
sympatisk -t -a likeable 9
syn -en -er sight, vision 14

(att) f syn p; 4 (to) catch a glimpse of, spot 14
synd -en -er sin; shame, pitY 2

det r synd it's a shame 2
sys kon -et -0 sibling, brothers and 3

sisters
sysselsttning -en -ar work, employment 16
system -et -0 system 16
syster -n, systrar sister 3
s so, very; how; 1, 2, 5

so (conj.)
s att so that 12
s h r like this 9
s hr rs at this time of year 7
s kall/ad -at -ade (s.k.l so called 16

s ... som as ... as 16
sdan -t -a Buch (a) , one, Buch 2, 16
sdr approximately, about (co 7,1,oq. ) 12

sng -en -er song Pron. Guide
Word List 633

SWEDISH 634
Swedish English lhit
svitt as far as 12
svl som as well as 16
sck -en -ar saak~ bag 15
(att) sga, sger, sade, sagt, (to) say 1

sagd, sagt, sagdai 4
sker -t, skra supe 12
skert oertainly, Burely 2
<att) slja, sljer, slde, slt, (to) sezz. 11

sld, slt, slda; 4
s I I an seldom 12 J 16
s I I skap -et -Ql aompany 3

(att) gra sliskapi 4 (to) go (aome) together 12
smre i smst less good; least good; 9

See d I I g
snding -en -ar tpan8mission~ broadaast 16
sng -en -ar bed 5

t i I I sngs in bed 12
srski l/d -t -da speaial
srski It espeaially 5
stt -et -9) way, mannep 16

p a I I a stt in every way (po88ible) 16
Word List

SWEDISH
(att) stta, stter, satte, satt, (to) set, put 7, 1 J

satt, satt, satta; 4
(att) stta sig; 4 (to) sit down 10
sder south 5
sderut south(wapd), towapds the south
sndag Sunday J
st, stt, sta ppetty, cute, sweet 8
Wopd Lis t 635

SWEDISH 636
Swedish Engtish Unit
(att ) ta, tar, tog, tagit, (to ) take 2

taglen - et -na; 4
(att) ta av s i g; 4 (to) take off. undress 10
(att ) ta emot; 4 (to) receive 12
(att) ta hand om; 4 (to) take care of 9
(att) ta i hand; 4 (to) shake hands 12
(att ) ta med; 4 (to) bring 5
(a tt) ta p sig; 4 (to) put on (clothing) 10
(att) ta reda p) 4 (to) check. find out 10
tablett -en -er tabZet 11

tack thank you 1
tack vare thanks (be) to 16

(att ) tacka, (to) thank 12
tackkort -et -~ thank you note 12

tacktal - et -0 thank you speech 12
ta k -et -0 roof. ceiZing Pron. Guid~
tal -et -0 speech 9
Word List

SWEDISH
Swedi sh English lJn i t
(att) tala, (to) speak, talk 1
(att) tala om; (to) announce, tell 12
(att) tala om (ngot); (to) talk about (something)
ta I I -en -a r pine tree Pron. Guide
tallrik -en -ar plate 9
tand -en, tnder tooth 9
tandlkare -n -0 dentist 3
tandvrd -en 0 dental care 16
tavl/a -an -or picture, painting 12
taxi -n -0 taxi 2
te - et 0 tea 1
teater -n, teatrar theater 10
teknisk -t -a technical 16
teknologi -n 0 technology 16
telefon -en -er telephone 1
telefon/nummer -numret -0 telephone number 12
tennis -en 0 tennis 15
teve -n, teveapparater (TV) television (set) 5, 10
Word List 637

SWEDISH 638
Swedish Unit
tid -en -er time 2

nu fr tiden now J these days 2
p sista tiden lately 10
tidig -t -a early 7
tidning -en -ar newspaper :3
tidnings/artikel -artIkeln -artiklar newspaper artieZe 15
tidtabell -en -er timetabZe 13
(att) tiga, tiger, teg, tigit, 4 (to) be quiet 13
(att) tigga, 2a (to) beg Pron. Guide
t i II to (prep.) 1
en (ett) ti II ano ther 11
ti I I och med (t.o.m.) even J not onZy that but 11
tillbaka back 2
ti II flle -t -n opportunity 9
(att) tillhra, 2a (to) beZong 13
t I I I rck I i gt enough 8
t i II s until J till 12
t l I I sammans together 3
t i I I stnd -et -(/; permit J permission 14
(att) tillverka, (to) manufacture 16
Word List

SWEDISH
(att) ti Ilta, tillter, tillt, tilltit, (to) pepmit, allow 14

tillt/en -et -nai 4
tillgg -et-0 additional amount, supplement; 16

supchapge
(att) til/lgga, -lgger, -lade, -lagt, (to) add

ti Ilag/d - t -da; 4
timm/e -en -ar houp 5
tio ten 1
tionde tenth ?
tisdag Tuesday 3
(att) titta, (to) look 4
(att ) titta fram; (to) look out, stick up, appeap 15
(att ) titta p; (to) look at 4
(att ) tjata, (to) nag ppon. Guide
tjock -t -a thick, fat Pron. Guide

tjugo twenty 1
tjugondag Knut twentieth day aftep Chpistmas 15
tjugonde twentieth ?
tjuv -en -ar thief Ppon. Guide
Wopd List 639

SWEDISH 640
Swedish Engtish Vnit
tjnst -en -er sepvice, favop; job 7, 16

vad kan jag st tl II tjnst med; 4 what can I do fop you 7
tjnste/man -mannen -mn satapied emptoyee 14
(att) tjnst/gra, -gr, -gjorde, -gjort, 4 (to) sepve, be on duty .3
toalett -en -er pestpoom 1
to I f te twetfth 7
tolv twetve 1
tom -t -ma empty Ppon. Guide

torg -et -0 squape 8
(att) torka, (to) dpy
torkskp -et -0 dpying cabinet 5
torktumlare -n -0 dpyep 5
torn -et -0 tOl.Jep 9
torsdag Thupsday 3
tradition -en -er tpadition, custom 12

traditionell -t -a tpaditionat 15
trapp/a -an -or staip, f tight of staips 5
tre thpee 1
tredje thipd 7
Wopd Lis t

SWEDISH
trettio thil'ty 1
tretton thil'teen 1
trettondagen Epiphany (thil'teenth day) 15
trettonde thil'teenth ?
trevl ig -t -a nice, pleasant 2
(att ) trivas, 2a (to) be happy, be comfortabte 2
(att) tro, 3 (to) think, believe 3
tro I i g -t -a pl'obable, cl'edible 9
troligen pl'obably 9
troligtvis pl'obably 9
trots in Brite of 16
trots att ~n spite of (the fact that) 12
trupp - en -er tl'OOP 16
trygg -t -a secul'e Pl'on. Guide

trygghet - en Ql securoity 16
trd -en -ar thl'ead Pl'on. Guide

trkig -t -a annoying, bOl'ing. Bad 10
trd - et -Ql troee 12
WOl'd List 641

SWEDISH 642
trdgrd -en -ar garden 12
(att) trffa, (to) see, meet J
(att) trffas, (to) meet (eaeh other) J
trtt, trtt, trtta tired 14
tung -t -a; tyngre; tyngst heavy; heavier; heaviest 9
tunn, tunt, tunna thin Pron. Guide
tunnelban/a -an -or subway 1
tunnelbanestation -en -er subway station 1
tur och retur round tri p 13
(ett) tusen one (a) thousand 1
tusentals thousands 11
tv two 1
tvrs ver straight aeross 14

tvtt -en -ar wash. Zaundry 10
(att) tvtta sig; (to) wash (oneseZf) 10
tvttmaskin -en -er washing maehine 5
tvttning -en -ar shampoo 10

tvttstug/a -an -or Zaundry room 5
Word Lis t

SWEDISH
(att) tycka, 2b (to) think, have an opinion 4
(att) tycka bst omi 2b (to) prefer 3
(att) tycka ~; 2b (to) like 2
tyd I i g -t -a obvious 9
tydlIgen obviously, appa'1'entZy 11
tyg -et - er fabric Pron. Guide
typisk -t -a typical 9
tysk -en -ar German (man) 11
tysk -t -a German (adj.) 11
tysk/a -an (i1 German (lang.) 11
tysk/a -an -or German (woman) 11
Tyskland Germany 11
(st-, Vst-) Tyskland (East. West) Germany 11
tyvrr unfortunately 2
tg -et -0 train; march. marching 4. 15

trt/a -an -or cake. torte 12
(att) tcka, 2b (to) cover 16
(att) tlta, (to) camp 14
Word List 843

SWEDISH 644
Swedish Engtish l.h i t
(att) tnda, 2a (to) turn on, tight 7
(att) tnka, 2b (to) think, plan :3
(att) tnka sig; 2b (to) have in mind, imagine 8
trn/a -an -or attendant (for weddings and 15

Lucia)
tt -t -a tight, dense 16
tthet -n -er density 16
(att) tvla, (to) compete Pron. Guide
Word List

SWEDISH
u
uggl/a -an -or owl P1'on. Guide
ugn -en -ar ove n P1'on. Guide
under undep, below, during 7, 11
underbar - t -a wonderful 10
(att) under/hlla, -hller, -hll, -hllit, (to) entertain, maintain

underh II/en -et -na; 4
underhllande -0 -0 ente1'taining 12
underklder (plur.) undel'Weal' 8
underskning -en -ar exam~nation, study, analysis 16
(to) wondel' 11
ung -t -a; yngre; yngst young; younger; youngest 9
ungdomar -na (pluY'.) young people 15
ungefr about, approximately

Ull i vers i tet -et -0 unive1'sity 4
upp; uppe up (motion) 5, 8

up, upstail's (stationary) 8
uppenbar - t -d obvious, evident 16
uppgift -en -er task, assignment; information, 16

statement
Word List 645

SWEDISH 646
Swedish EngLish Uni t
(att) upp/g, -gr, -gick, -gtt. 4 (to) amount to, ~eaoh 16
upplag/a -an -or edition 16
(att) uppleva, 2a (to) expe~ience 15
(att) uppskatta, (to) app~eciate 12
uppskatt/ad -at -ade arp~eciated 12
upptag/en -et -na bus y B
(att) upptcka, 2b (to) discove~ 12
ursdkta excuse (me) 1
usch ugh 7
ut; ute out (motion); 5, 8

out, outside (stationa~y) B
utan but (conj.); without (prep.) 12
utanfr outside 16
(att) utb i I da, (to) educate, train 16
utbi Idning -en 0 education 16
(att) ut/brista, -brister, -brast, -brustit, 4 (to) exclaim 15
(att) utbygga (bygga ut); 2a (to) expand 16

ute; ut out, outside (stationa~y); 8
out (motion) 5, B
Word List

SWEDISH
(att) utforma, (to) formulate, design, shape 16
(att) ut/g (g ut), -gr, -gick, -gtt; 4 (to) originate, prooeed, emanate 16
utgng -en -ar exit 9
(att) ut/gra, -gr, -gjorde, -gjort, 4 (to) constitute 16
utjmning -en -ar equalization 16
utlandet ab road 11
utlnning -en -ar foreigner 11
utmrkt -0 -a exoellent 4
utomlands abroad, overseas 16
utrikesdepartementet (UD) the Foreign Offioe 7
utrikesminist/er -ern -rar secretary of state, for~ign 16

minister
utrikespolitik -en Ql foreign polioy 16
utrustning -en -ar equipment, arms 16
(att) ut/se, -ser, -sg, -sett, (to) choose, appoint 16

ut/sedd -sett -sedda; 4
utsikt -en -er view 4
utskt -0 -a superb, excellent 12
utveckl ing -en -ar development 16
Word List 647

SWEDISH 648
Swedish English Lhit
(att) ut/vlja (vlja ut) -vljer, -valde, (to) ehooseJ select 15

-valt; ut/vald, -valt -valda; 4
(att) utva, I (to) carry out J exercise 16
Word List

SWEDISH
vacker -t, vac kra beautiful 4, 9
vad what 1
vad fr what kind of 4, 9
vad fr slags what kind of 9
vad som helst anything 11
vad n no mattep what, whatever 16
vagn -en -ar (paiLpoad) cap 13
(att) vakna, (to) wake up 13
vakt -en -er guapd 15
vaktmstare -n -0 waitep 9
val -et-0 election, choice 16
valborgsmssoafton Walpupgis night 15
van -t -a (vid) used to 14
(att) vandra, (to) wander 12
vandrande -0 -0 wandering, roaming 12
van I i g -t -a usual 9
vanl igen usuaZly 9
Word List 849

SWEDISH 650
vanligtvis usually 9
vapen, vapnet, vapen weapon 16
va r - t 13 eaah, every 16
va r god please 13
var snll please 1
var s god(a> here you are 1
var n no matter where, wherever 16
var; vart where (stationary); 1, a

where to (motion)
varet> som helst anywhere 11
varia -an -or pieae of merchandise 15
(att) vara, r, var. varit, 4 (to) be 1

(att) vara, (to) last 15
varandra (varann) each other, one another 11

varannaln -t every other 16
vardag -en -ar weekday
vardagskldsel -n 0 informal dress '?
vardagsrum -met -0 livingroom 5
varfr why 13
Word List

SWEDISH
varg -en -ar wolf Pron. Guide
(att) variera, (to) vary. diversify 16
varje every 5
varken e II er neither .. nor 16
varm -t -a warm 8
varmrtt -en -er main aourse 9
varsgod(a) here you are. please 1. 13

vart; var where to (motion); 1. 8
where (stationary)
varuhus -et -0 department store 8
vatten, vattnet 0 water 1

vattenkraft -en 0 hydroelectric power 16
veckla -an -or week :3
veckodag -en -ar day of the week 15

veckoslut -et -0 weekend 13
vem who 2
vem som helst anyone 11

vem n no matter who. whoever 16
verkl ig -t -a real 9
Word List 651

SWEDISH 652
verkligen really 9
verkst I I ande -I/; -I/; executive 16
(att) veta, vet, visste, vetat, 4 (to) know (have the knowledge 4
about)
vetenskap -en -er science 16
vetenskaplig -t -a scientific 16
vi we 2
vid by 7
vidare further 15
viktig -t -a important 15
(att) vi la, (to) rest Pron. Guide

(att) vi la sig; (to) rest (oneselfJ 15
(att) vilja, vill, ville, velat, 4 (to) want 1
v i I ken, v i I ket, v i I ka what (a); which (interrog.J. J. 5

what
v i I I la -an -or house. villa 14
vin -et -er wine 1

viniistia -an -or wine list 9
(att) vinna, vinner, vann, vunnit, (to) win Pron. Guide

vunn/en -et -aj 4
Word List

SWEDISH
vinter -n, vintrar winter 3

I vintras last wintero 11
vis -t -a wise 14
vls/a -an -or song 12
(att> visa, I (to) show 8
(att> visa sig; (to) show (up), become evident, 16

tUT'n out
vision -en -er vision Pron. Guide
(att> vispa, (to) whip, heat (food) 15
vispgrdde -n 0 whipping CT'eam 15
viss -t -a certain 16
visst surely 9
vit, vitt, vita white 4
vux/en -et -na adult, grown-up (adj.) 15
en vuxen, tv vuxna adult (noun) 15
vykort -et -0 postcard 1
(att> vga, I (to) dare, have the couroage to 10
vning -en -ar apaT'tment 5
vr -t -a OUT' 2
Word L.ist 653

SWEDISH 654
Swedish EngZ-ish Unit
vr -en -ar spring 8

i vras last spring 11
vrd -en eJ care 14
vt -t -a wet Pron. Guide
(att) vcka, 2b (to) wake up (trans.) 13
vckarklock/a -an -or alarm clock 13
vder, vd ret eJ weather 2
vg -en -ar road 9
vgg -en -ar wall 7
vgnar; p . vt:lgnar on behalf of . 12

vl probably 8
vldigt very, awfuZ ly 3
vlfrd -en eJ welfare 16

(att) vlja, vljer, valde, valt, (to) choose 13, 15
vald, valt, valda; 4
(att) vlja p; 4 (to) choose from 16

(att) vlja ut; 4 (to) ehoose, seZect 15
vlkom/men -met -na welcome 2
vl kn/d -t -da well-known, famous 12
Word List

SWEDISH
Swedish English Un.it
vn -nen -ner friend 2
(att) vnda, 2a (to) turn 12
vnlig -t -a kind, nice, friendZy 2
vnster Zett 1
ti II vnster to the lett 1
vnsterpartiet lett-wing party 16
(att) vnta, (to) wait, expect 2
vrd -en -ar host 12
vrdfolk -et -0 host and hostess 12
vrdinn/a -an -or hostess 12

vrld -en -ar world 16
vrnplikt -en 0 military service 16

allmn vrnplikt compulsory military service 16
vrre; vrst worse; worst; See d I i9 9
vs k/a -an -or suitcase, bag, purse 2
vsterut west(ward), towards the west

vster west 5
Vst-Tyskland West Germany 11

(att) vxa, 2b (to) grow 14
Word List 655

SWEDISH 656
(att) vxla, (to) altepnate~ ohange (money) 4
vx I j ng -en -ar ahange 15
Wo!'d List

SWEDISH
y t/a -an -or surface 16
ytterklder -na (plur.) outer wear (overcoats~ etc.) 9
Word List 657

SWEDISH 658
(att) ka, 2b (to) go, traveZ 8
lder -n, ldrar age Pron. Guide
ng/a -an -or steam Pron. Guide
(att) ngra sig; (to) re gre t. change one's mind 10
r -et -0 year 2
i r this year 11
s hr rs at this time of the year ?
ret om the year round 14
rlig -t -a yearly 16
rstid -en -er season 11

sikt -en -er opinion 16
t for 2
(att) terbetala, (to) ray back 16

tgrd -en -er measure, step 16
tminstone at least 12
tta eight 1
ttio eighty 1
ttonde eighth 7
Word List

SWEDISH
Swedish English lhit
(att) ga, 2a (to) own 16
(att) ga rum; 2a (to) take plaae 16
gare -n -0 ownel" 16
gg -et -0 egg 15
ldre; ldst oldel"; oldest; See gammal 9
lg -en -ar moose Pron. Guide

(att) lska, (to) love 12
lskling -en -ar dal"ling 8
lsklingsfrg -en -er favol"ite colol" 8
mbetsverk -et -0 govel"nment agency (bu~eau) 16
n still, yet; than 3, 8
mer n more than 8
nda t I l l all the way to, right up to 15
ndhllplats -en -er end of the line 13
(att) ndra, (to) altel", change 8
nd yet, nevel"theless 11
ng -en -ar meadow, field 15
nnu yet, still 12
WOl"d List 659

SWEDISH 660
r See (att) vara
rla -an 0 honor' 12, 14

ti I l (ngons) ~ra in (someone'B) honor 14
rm -en -ar sleeve 8
rr -et -\Il scal' Pr'on. Guide

(att) rva, 2a (to) inheY'it 13
(att) ta, ter, t, tit, 4 (to) eat 1
(att) ta upp; 4 (to) finish (eating) 12
ven also 16
ven om even if 11
Word List

SWEDISH
-n -ar island 12
ga -t, gon eye P1'on. Guide
gonbl ick -et -0 moment 5
I -et I/J beeT' 1
(att) nska, (to) wish 15

pp/en -et -na oren 14
(att) ppna, (to) oren 8
ra -t, ron eaT' P1'on. Guide

re -t -n (-(Il) o1'e (Sw. cu1'1'ency) 1
ster east 5
sterut east(wa1'd), towa1'ds the east
st-Tyskland Eas t Ge1'many 11
ver of, aveT', via 4
verbl lv/en -et -na left aveT' 13
vermorgon; i vermorgon the day afteT' tomo1'1'ow 11
W01'd List 661

SWEDISH 662
Grammar Index
(Numbers refer to pages)
Adjectival phrases, 452
Adjeotives, 124
indefinite form, 124
definite form, 189
predicate adjective, 126, 132
comparison of the adjective, 265, 275, 520
irregular adjectives~ 124~ 194~ 267
liten~ 193
egen, 337
e-form of adjective~ 452
adjectives before nouns (three different patterns), 287
demonstrative adjectives. 416~ 517; see also "demonstratives"
determinative adjective, 482
indefinite adjectives~ 219
ngon (ngot, ngra)~ 219
ingen (inget, inga), 219
ngon (ngot, ngra) instead of indefinite article~ 224
varje, var(t)~ 518
interrogative adjectives, 216
vad .. fr, 122, 184, 262
vilken (vilket, vilka), 184, 216
possessive adjectives~ 64~ 148, 151
adjectives as nouns~ 481
adjectival phrases~ 452
Adjectives as nouns, 481
Adjectives before nouns, 287
Adverbs~ 279
oomparison of adverbs, 283
placement of adverbs, 112, 114~ 304, 396
adverbs indicating location and motion, 65, 233
Grammar Index

SWEDISH
Adverbs (cont.)
time adverbials, 341
place adverbials, 384
roaming adverbs, 396, 400
relative adverbs dr-dit, 444
d-sedan, 322
Adverbs indicating location and motion, 65, 233
Annan-Ti 1/, 337
Article omitted with indefinite noun form, 93, 146
Article omitted, 93, 146, 262, 265, 291, 336, 418
Articles, 42, 69, 186

indefinite, 42
definite singular, 69
dropping of last vowel before definite article, 74
definite plural, 186
article omitted, 93, 146, 262, 265, 291, 336, 418
Att - That, 110
AuxiZiapy Vepbs, 53, 311, 432

present tense form, 47
vill, 40, 53
ska, 53, 66
kan jag f, 40, 55
(att) tnka as an auxiliary, 94, 442
Because - fr, 213
Capitalization, 94, 96, 146
Cardinal numbers, 38
Collective nouns, 262

G rammar Index 663

SWEDISH 664
Colors, 212
Commands, see Imperative

Comparison of a dj e c t i ves, 265, 275
Comparison of adverbs, 283
Camparison of past particip le, 458
Compound nouns, 484

Compound passive, 462
Compound verbs, 304, 335 3 427 3 486
Conditional, 522
Conjugation of verbs, 157.. 241 .. 250 .. 420
Conjunctions, 399
that - att, 110
fr - because, 213
innan, 324
dock, emellertid, 517
Days of the week, 96
Declensions of nouns, 99-102
Definite article instead of possessive 3 262
Definite form of adjectives, 189
Definite form of nouns preceded by adjeatives, 189, 288

Definite form of nouns, 69, 74, 416
Grammar> Index

SWEDISH
Definite plural artiale, 186
Def~nite plural noun forms, 186
Definite singular article, 69
Deletion of preposition, 40
Demonstrative adjectives, 416
Demonstrative pronouns, see uDemonstratives"
Demonstratives, 128, 51?
Den (det, del, 131
Densamma (detsamma, desammal, 213
Deponent verbs, 40, 45, 66, 128
Det (without equivalent in English), 453

det r det, 93, 196
det finns, 40, 45, 128, 213
det hnger, etc., 213
Determinative adjectives, 482
Determinative pronouns, 482
Dock, emellertid, 51?
Dropping of last vowel before definite artioZe, ?4
Du-N i (informal and formal pronouns), 39
D-Sedan, 322
Dr-Dit, 444
Grammar Index 665

SWEDISH 666
E-fopm of adjectives~ 452
Egen, 337
Emellertid, dock~ 517
En and ett nouns~ 42
Fifth noun deelension~ 102
Fipst conjugation~ 157
Fipst noun deelension~ 99
Fopmal and infopmal pponoun8~ 39
Formation of questions, 47
Fourth conjugation, 420
Fourth noun deelension, 102
Futupe tense, 53, 66
Fr - because, 213
Fre, 324
Fre-Innan, 324
Impepative, 318
Indefinite adjectives, 219
Indefinite apticles, 42
Indefinite fopm of adjectives. 124
Grammap Index

SWEDISH
Indefinite form of nouns~ 42~ 288
Indefinite plural noun forms~ 98
Indefinite pronouns ngon (ngot, ngra), Ingen (Inget, Inga), 219
Infinitives~ 313
Informal and formal pronouns~ 39
-ing forms~ 46~ 158~ 261
Ingen (inget, jnga)~ 219
Innan, 324
Interrogative adjectives, 216
Interrogative pronouns, 135~ 216
Irregular adjectives, 124, 194, 267
Irregular nouns, 104
Irregular verbs, 93, 420
Ju, 214
Kan jag f, 40, 56
(att) Kunna, 336
(to) Leave (translation), 261
Ligga-Lgga; Sitta-Stta, 200
Liten, 193
Grammar Index 667

SWEDISH 668
Lgga- L i gga; Stta-S i tta, 200
Man, 122, 339
Months of the year, 146
Nations, Nationalities, and Languages, 355
Nog, 212
Nouns
en and ett nouns, 42
deelensions, 99-102
first, 99
seeond, 100
third, 101
fourth, 102
fifth, 102
indefinite form, 42, 288
indefinite plural forms, 98
artiele omitted, 93, 146
definite form, 69, 74, 416
definite plural forms, 186
definite form of no uns preaeded by adjeativeB~ 189, 288
possessive form, 93, 148
irregular nouns, 104
aolleetive nouns, 262
aompound nouns, 484
Numbers
eardinal numbers, 38
ordinal numbers, 203
stycken added to numerals, 378
Ngon (ngot, ngral, 219
Ngon instead of the indefinite artiale, 224
Grammar Index

SWEDISH
0- , 261
Objeative pronouns, 76
Om, 304
Ordinal numbers, 203
Partiaiples, 158, 275, 455, 458, 469
Partiale in separable compound verbs, 490
Particles, 490
om, 304
Passive voice, 462, 465
Past particip le, 158, 275, 455
Past tense uses, 95, 145
Personal pronouns, 76
Place adverbials, 384
Place prepositions, 384
Placement of adverbs, 112, 114, 304, 396
Pleas e (translation), 40, 416
Possessive adjectives, 64, 148, 151
Possessive form of nouns, 93, 148
Possessive pronouns, 151
Proedicate adjectives, 126, 132
Groammaro Index 669

SWEDISH 6'10
Prefixes, 486
0-, 261
Prepositions
time, 64, 342
plaae, 384
p, 96, 337, 391
fre, 324
deletion of preposition, 40
till bords, eta., 379
Present particip le, 469

Present tense of auxiliary verbs, 53, 311, 432
Present tense of verbs, 46, 158
Present tense uses, 40, 46, 65, 335
Pronouns
personal pronouns, 76
subjeative pronouns, '16
du-ni {informal and fopmalJ, 39
den (det, de), 131
objeative pronouns, 76
man, 122, 339
possessive pl'onouns, 151
I'eflexive possessives (sin, sitt, sina), 152
definite artiale instead of possessive, 262
relative pronoun som, 109
vilken (vilket, vilka), 521
reflexive pronouns, 306
demonstrative pronouns, see "demonstratives"
determinative pronouns, 482
indefinite pronouns ngon (ngot, ngra), ingen (inget, inga), 219
Vem som helst, vem n, eta., 520
interrogative pronouns, 135, 216
Grammar Index

SWEDISH
Pronouns (cont.)
interrogative vad ... tr, 122, 184, 453
vad followed by adjective, JOJ
densamma (detsamma, desamma), 213
Punctuation, 517
P, 96, 3J7, 391
Question word order
Question words, 135, 216, 239
Questions
forming questions, 47
question words, 135, 216, 239
Reciprocal verb forms, 96
Reflexive possessives (sin, sitt, sina), 152
Reflexive pronouns, J06
Reflexive verbs, 213, J06
Relative adverbs dr-dit, 444
Relative pronoun som, 109
Relative pronoun vilken (vilket, vilka), 521
Reversed word order, 166
Roaming adverbs, 396, 400
S-forms with reciprocal meaning, 96
Second conjugation, 241

Grammar Index 671

SWEDISH 672
Second noun decLension, 100
Sedan-D, 322
Sin (sitt, sina), 152
Sitta-Sttaj Ligga-Lgga, 200
Ska, 53
Som, 109
Spe L l.ing
capitalization, 94, 96, 146
punctuation, 517
Straight word order, 47
Stycken added to numeraLs, 3'78

Subjeative pronouns, '76
Supine, 158
TeLLing time, 80
Tha t - a tt , 11 O
Third conjugation, 250
TI d-Gng, 94
Till bords, eta., 3'79

Till-Annan, 337
Grammar Inde:x:

SWEDISH
Time
----telling time, 80
"time" (translation tid-gng), 94
Time adverbials, 341
Time prepositions, 64, 342
Tro, Tycka, Tnka, 441
(att) Tnka as an auxiliary, 94, 442
Vad .. fr, 122, 184, 453
Vad followed by adjective, 303
Varsgod, 40, 378, 417
Vem som helst, vem n~ etc., 520
Verbs
conjugations
first, 157
second, 241
third, 250
fourth, 420
infinitive, 313
present tense, 46, 158
future tense, 53, 66
supine, 158
imperative, 318
use of present tense, 40, 46, 65, 335
use of past tense, 95, 145
use of future tense, 66
translatian of English -ing forms, 46, 158, 261
irregular verbs, 93, 420
-s forms with reaiproaal meaning, 96
deponent (finns, hoppas, trivas), 40, 45, 66, 128
Grammar Index 673

SWEDISH 674
Verbs (cont.)
----r;eflexive, 213, 306
compound verbs (verb + particle), 304, 335, 427, 486
participles
past participle, 158, 275, 455
comparision of past particip le, 458
present participle, 469
passive voice, 462
compound passive, 462
5- form, 465
(to) leave (translation) , 261
tycka, tnka, tro, 441
Vilken (vilket, vilka), 184, 216, 521
Vill, 40, 53
Vl, 212
Vlkommen, vlkomna, 64,146
Where (translation), 444
Word Order
straight, 47
questions, 47
reversed, 65, 122, 166
placement of particle in separable compound verbs, 490
placement of adverbs, 112, 114, 304, 396
Grammar Index

SWEDISH
Bi b I iography
Belte, A.-M., and G. Englund, S. Higelin, N.-G. Hlldarnan, Baslc Swedish Grammar,
A.W. Lromedel, Stockholm, 1975;
Engbrant, E., and G. Hlntz, M. Wohlert, Svenska fr Nybrjare, Del I, Del II,
Svenska Institutet, 1976;
Frank M., Modern English - A Practical Referen.ce Guide, Prentlce-Hall, Inc. 1972;
Hartmann, R.R.K., and F.C. Stork, Dictionary of Language and LIngulstics, John Wiley
& Sons, New York-Toronto, 1972;
HIldeman, N.-G., and A.-M. Bejte, Learn Swedish, Almqvist & Wiksell, Stockholm, 1959;
Holm, B., and E. Nylund Lindgren, DeskriptIv Svensk Grammatik, Sprkfrlaget Skriptor,
1977 ;
Kjelll n, O., Svensk Prosodi Praktiken, Studiefrlaget, 1978;
Svenska Institutet, Fact Sheets on Sweden;
Svenska Turistfreningen, Sverigefakta 80, Svenska Turistfreningens Frlag;
Wadensj, G., Sverigekunskap, LIber Hermods, 1979.
BibUography 675

SWEDISH
, I,
'@",
...... ~-
...
'l \


FSI - Swedish Basic Course - Student Text

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

FSI - Swedish Basic Course - Student Text

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Swedish

Hosted for free on livelingua.com

Hosted for free on livelingua.com

Hosted for free on livelingua.com

Grammatical explanation should be thought of only as a tool when learning a foreign

How to Vse the Tapes

Hosted for free on livelingua.com

Good luck in your Swedish enterprisel

Hosted for free on livelingua.com

Till Lr<;lren vii

Hosted for free on livelingua.com

Hosted for free on livelingua.com

To the Teaehel' vii

Explanation of Cpammatical Terms xiv

A Guide to Endings and Symbols xxiv

A Guide to Swedish Pronunciation l

Unit 1 - Cetting Around 30

Unit 2 - Meeting People 56

Unit 3 - Family and Ocaupation 84

Hosted for free on livelingua.com

~it 4 - Seeing the Sights 116

Uni t 5 - A Place to Live 138

Uni t 6 - True and False 171

Uni t 7 - A t the Office 179

Unit 8 - Shopping for clothes 205

Hosted for free on livelingua.com

unit 9 - Eating in a Restaurant 254

unit 10 - Getting Ready for an Evening Out 297

Unit 11 - Nations, Languages, and NationaZities 327

unit 12 - Social Gatherings 361

Hosted for free on livelingua.com

Vnit 13 - r Vg ti II Landet 410

Vnit 15 (introduction) 470

Vnit 16 (introduotion) 493

Hosted for free on livelingua.com

WOY'd Lis t 523

GrammaY' Index 662

Table of Content8 xiii

Hosted for free on livelingua.com

A Brief Explanation of English Grammatical Terms Vsed in this Book

Accent as in "accent 1 and 2,: is equivalent to stress or Zoudness.

Active V07:ce See"Voice. "

Adjective a word used to describe or qualify a noun.

Example~: A good cup of coffee.

Adverb a word used to qunlifY:

A:roticle a wOr'd used with a noun to modify or limit ita meaning.

Indefinite article - a dog, an apple

Examples: He will come tomor'row.

Hosted for free on livelingua.com

Clau8e a group of words containing at least a verb

Example: The baby cried.

A main clause is able to stand alone and constitutes a full

Comparative See "Adjective."

compound made up of two or more elements.

Hosted for free on livelingua.com

Conditional clause a cLause expl'essing a condition, usually introduced by "if,"

Conjugation a group of verbs which follow the same inflectional pattern.

Conjunc tio n. an uninflected word used to Zink together words or sentence

DecLension a group of nouns with the same plural ending.

Definite articZe See "Article."

Determinative adjective or a pronominal word referring to a following phrase.

Hosted for free on livelingua.com

Examples: Swimming is my favorite sport.

Imperative a sentence or a verb form which commands. requires or forbids